M800 - M80 - E80 - C80 Series Specifications Manual (Function) Ib1501505engc PDF

Introduction
This manual describes the specifications of MITSUBISHI CNC.

Supported models are as follows:
Supported models Abbreviations in this manual

M800W Series
M800 Series, M800, M8
M800S Series
M80W Series
M80 Series, M80, M8
M80 Series
E80 Series E80, M800/M80 Series, M8
C80 Series C80
To safely use this CNC unit, thoroughly study the "Precautions for Safety" on the next page before use.
Be sure to keep this manual always at hand.
At the beginning of each item, a table indicating it's specification according to the model.
M : Machining center system
L : Lathe system
○ : Standard
△ : Optional
□ : Selection
In this manual, the following abbreviations might be used.

MTB: Machine tool builder
CAUTION
The items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all the applicable functions are included. Some of them,
however, may not be available for your NC system.
Refer to the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before use.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on each NC system (or version), and some functions
may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before starting to use.
Do not connect NC system to the Internet-connected network.
To maintain the safety of the NC system against unauthorized access from external devices via the
network, take appropriate measures.
General precautions
(1) When the contents of this manual is updated, the version (A, B, ...) on the cover will be incremented.
Also refer to the manuals on "Manual List" as necessary.

Manual List
Manuals related to M800/M80/E80/C80 Series are listed as follows.

These manuals are written on the assumption that all optional functions are added to the targeted model.
Some functions or screens may not be available depending on the machine or specifications set by MTB. (Confirm the
specifications before use.)
The manuals issued by MTB take precedence over these manuals.
Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents

M800/M80/E80 Series  Operation guide for NC
IB-1501274
Instruction Manual  Explanation for screen operation, etc.
C80 Series  Operation guide for NC
IB-1501453
Instruction Manual  Explanation for screen operation, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  G code programming for lathe system
Programming Manual IB-1501275
(Lathe System) (1/2)  Basic functions, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  G code programming for lathe system

(Lathe System) (2/2)  Functions for multi-part system, high-accuracy function, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  G code programming for machining center system

(Machining Center System) (1/2)  Basic functions, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  G code programming for machining center system

(Machining Center System) (2/2)  Functions for multi-part system, high-accuracy function, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  Alarms

IB-1501279
Alarm/Parameter Manual  Parameters
Manuals for MTBs (NC)
Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  Model selection
IB-1501505
Specifications Manual (Function)  Outline of various functions
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  Model selection
IB-1501506
Specifications Manual (Hardware)  Specifications of hardware unit
M800W/M80W Series  Detailed specifications of hardware unit
IB-1501268
Connection and Setup Manual  Installation, connection, wiring, setup (startup/adjustment)
M800S/M80/E80 Series  Detailed specifications of hardware unit
IB-1501269
C80 Series  Detailed specifications of hardware unit
IB-1501452
 Electrical design
M800/M80/E80 Series  I/O relation (assignment, setting, connection), field network
IB-1501270
PLC Development Manual  Development environment (PLC on-board, peripheral
development environment), etc.
 Electrical design
M800/M80/E80 Series
IB-1501271  Sequence programming
PLC Programming Manual
 PLC support functions, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  Electrical design
IB-1501272
PLC Interface Manual  Interface signals between NC and PLC
M800/M80/E80 Series  Cleaning and replacement for each unit
IB-1501273
Maintenance Manual  Other items related to maintenance
C80 Series  Cleaning and replacement for each unit
IB-1501454
Maintenance Manual  Other items related to maintenance
Manuals for MTBs (drive section)
Manual IB No. Contents

MDS-E/EH Series
IB-1501226  Specifications for power supply regeneration type
Specifications Manual
MDS-E/EH Series
IB-1501229  Instruction for power supply regeneration type
Instruction Manual
MDS-EJ/EJH Series
IB-1501232  Specifications for regenerative resistor type
Specifications Manual
MDS-EJ/EJH Series
IB-1501235  Instruction for regenerative resistor type
Instruction Manual
MDS-EM/EMH Series  Specifications for multi-hybrid, power supply regeneration
IB-1501238
Specifications Manual type
MDS-EM/EMH Series
IB-1501241  Instruction for multi-hybrid, power supply regeneration type
Instruction Manual
DATA BOOK IB-1501252  Specifications of servo drive unit, spindle drive unit, motor, etc.
Manuals for MTBs (Others)
Manual No. Purpose and Contents

GOT2000 Series User’s Manual  Outline of hardware such as part names, external dimensions,
SH-081194
(Hardware) installation, wiring, maintenance, etc. of GOTs
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual  Outline of utilities such as screen display setting, operation
SH-081195
(Utility) method, etc. of GOTs
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual
SH-081196  Outline of each monitor function of GOTs
(Monitor)
GOT2000 Series Connection
 Outline of connection types and connection method between
Manual (Mitsubishi Electric SH-081197
GOT and Mitsubishi Electric connection devices
Products)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen  Outline of screen design method using screen creation
SH-081220
Design Manual software GT Designer3
■ For M800/M80/E80 Series

GOT2000/GOT1000 Series CC-Link  Explanation for handling CC-Link communication unit (for
IB-0800351
Communication Unit User's Manual GOT2000 series/GOT1000 series)
GX Developer Version 8 Operating  Explanation for system configuration, installation, etc. of PLC
SH-080372E
Manual (Startup) development tool GX Developer
GX Developer Version 8 Operating  Explanation for operations using PLC development tool GX
SH-080373E
Manual Developer
GX Converter Version 1 Operating  Explanation for operations using data conversion tool GX
IB-0800004E
Manual Converter
MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/  Explanation for system configuration, installation, wiring, etc.
SH-080394E
Local Module User’s Manual of master/local modules for CC-Link system
GOT2000 Series Connection
Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric SH-081198ENG
Products 1)  Explanation for connection types and connection method
GOT2000 Series Connection between GOT and other company's devices
Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric SH-081199ENG
Products 2)
GOT2000 Series Connection  Explanation for connection types and connection method
Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/ SH-081200ENG between GOT and microcomputers, MODBUS/fieldbus
Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) products, peripherals
 Explanation for system configuration, screen configuration
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1
SH-081201ENG and operation method of monitoring software GT
Operating Manual
SoftGOT2000
■ For C80 Series

MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration  Outline of system configuration, specifications, installation,
SH-081262
Manual wiring, maintenance, etc.
MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User’s  Outline of specifications, procedures before operation,
SH-081263
Manual (Startup) troubleshooting, etc. for CPU module
MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User’s  Outline of memory, functions, devices, parameters, etc. for
SH-081264
Manual (Application) CPU module
QCPU User’s Manual (Hardware  Outline of specifications, necessary knowledge to configure
Design, Maintenance and SH-080483 the system and maintenance-related descriptions for Q series
Inspection) CPU module, etc.
GX Works3 Operating Manual SH-081215  Outline of functions, programming, etc.
Reference Manual for MTBs

M800/M80 Series Smart safety
BNP-C3072-022
observation Specification manual
 Explanation for smart safety observation function
C80 Series Smart safety observation
BNP-C3077-022
Specification manual
M800/M80 Series CC-Link (Master/
BNP-C3072-089  Explanation for CC-Link
Local) Specification manual
M800/M80 Series PROFIBUS-DP
BNP-C3072-118  Explanation for PROFIBUS-DP communication function
M800/M80 Series Interactive cycle
BNP-C3072-121-
insertion (Customization)  Explanation for interactive cycle insertion
0003
M800/M80 Series EtherNet/IP
BNP-C3072-263  Explanation for EtherNet/IP
Specifications manual
Precautions for Safety
Always read this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming,
maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand all the conditions described in this manual before using the
unit. We rank the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION" for the manuals issued by Mitsubishi,
including this manual.
DANGER
When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is
mistaken.
WARNING
When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.
CAUTION
When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical damage could occur if handling is mistaken.
Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case,
important information that must always be observed is described.
The following signs indicate prohibition and compulsory.
This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).
For example, indicates "Keep fire away".
This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).
For example, indicates "it must be grounded".
The meaning of each pictorial sign is as follows.
CAUTION rotated Danger Electric shock

CAUTION CAUTION HOT Danger explosive
object risk
Disassembly is
Prohibited KEEP FIRE AWAY General instruction Earth ground
prohibited
DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.
WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.
CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
The items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all the applicable functions are included. Some of them,
however, may not be available for your NC system.
Refer to the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before use.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions
may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.
Do not connect NC system to the Internet-connected network.
To maintain the safety of the NC system against unauthorized access from external devices via the
network, take appropriate measures.
2. Items related to start up and maintenance
Follow the power specifications (input voltage range, frequency range, momentary power failure time
range) described in this manual.
Follow the environment conditions (ambient temperature, humidity, vibration, atmosphere) described in
this manual.
Follow the remote type machine contact input/output interface described in this manual. (Connect a diode
in parallel with the inductive load or connect a protective resistor in serial with the capacitive load, etc.)
If the parameter is used to set the temperature rise detection function to invalid, overheating may occur,
thereby disabling control and possibly resulting in the axes running out of control, which in turn may result
in machine damage and/or bodily injury or destruction of the unit. It is for this reason that the detection
function is normally left "valid" for operation.The parameter for the temperature rise detection function will
be validated forcibly when the NC unit is turned ON.
Treatment of waste
The following two laws will apply when disposing of this product. Considerations must be made to each law.
The following laws are in effect in Japan. Thus, when using this product overseas, the local laws will have a
priority. If necessary, indicate or notify these laws to the final user of the product.
(1) Requirements for "Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources"

(a) Recycle as much of this product as possible when finished with use.
(b) When recycling, often parts are sorted into steel scraps and electric parts, etc., and sold to scrap
contractors. Mitsubishi recommends sorting the product and selling the members to appropriate
contractors.
(2) Requirements for "Law for Treatment of Waste and Cleaning"

(a) Mitsubishi recommends recycling and selling the product when no longer needed according to item
(1) above. The user should make an effort to reduce waste in this manner.
(b) When disposing a product that cannot be resold, it shall be treated as a waste product.
(c) The treatment of industrial waste must be commissioned to a licensed industrial waste treatment
contractor, and appropriate measures, including a manifest control, must be taken.
(d) Batteries correspond to "primary batteries", and must be disposed of according to local disposal
laws.
Disposal
(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-
users and Annex II.
Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and
components which can be recycled and/or reused.
This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the
battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as
follows:
Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.
Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/
recycling centre.
Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Trademarks
MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSEC iQ-R, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT,
CC-Link IE, CC-Link IE/field, EcoMonitorLight and SLMP are either trademarks or registered trademarks of
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft®, Windows®, SQL Server® and Access® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
SD logo and SDHC logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel® and Pentium® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
MODBUS® is either a trademark or a registered trademark of Schneider Electric USA, Inc. or the affiliated
companies in Japan and/or other countries.
EtherNet/IP is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association,Inc.
PROFIBUS-DP and PROFINET are either trademarks of Profibus International.
Oracle® is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation, the subsidiaries, or the affiliated companies in the United
States and /or other countries.
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.
本製品の取扱いについて
( 日本語 /Japanese)
本製品は工業用 ( クラス A) 電磁環境適合機器です。販売者あるいは使用者はこの点に注意し、住商業環境以外で
の使用をお願いいたします。
Handling of our product
(English)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the
user may be required to take adequate measures.
본 제품의 취급에 대해서
( 한국어 /Korean)
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에
서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 .
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using MITSUBISHI CNC.
1. Warranty Period and Coverage

Should any fault or defect (hereafter called "failure") for which we are liable occur in this product during the warranty period,
we shall provide repair services at no cost through the distributor from which the product was purchased or through a
Mitsubishi Electric service provider. Note, however that this shall not apply if the customer was informed prior to purchase of
the product that the product is not covered under warranty. Also note that we are not responsible for any on-site readjustment
and/or trial run that may be required after a defective unit is replaced.
[Warranty Term]
The term of warranty for this product shall be twenty-four (24) months from the date of delivery of product to the end user,
provided the product purchased from us in Japan is installed in Japan (but in no event longer than thirty (30) months,
Including the distribution time after shipment from Mitsubishi Electric or its distributor).
Note that, for the case where the product purchased from us in or outside Japan is exported and installed in any country
other than where it was purchased; please refer to "2. Service in overseas countries" as will be explained.
[Limitations]
(1) The customer is requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by him/herself, as a general rule. It can also be carried
out by us or our service provider upon the customer’s request and the actual cost will be charged.
(2) This warranty applies only when the conditions, method, environment, etc., of use are in compliance with the terms and
conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual, user’s manual, and the caution label affixed to the
product, etc.
(3) Even during the term of warranty, repair costs shall be charged to the customer in the following cases:
(a) a failure caused by improper storage or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., or a failure caused by the
customer’s hardware or software problem
(b) a failure caused by any alteration, etc., to the product made by the customer without Mitsubishi Electric’s approval
(c) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if the customer’s equipment in which this product is incorporated is
equipped with a safety device required by applicable laws or has any function or structure considered to be
indispensable in the light of common sense in the industry
(d) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly
maintained and replaced
(e) any replacement of consumable parts (including a battery, relay and fuse)
(f) a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal
fluctuation of voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning, and natural disasters
(g) a failure which is unforeseeable under technologies available at the time of shipment of this product from our company
(h) any other failures which we are not responsible for or which the customer acknowledges we are not responsible for
2. Service in Overseas Countries

If the customer installs the product purchased from us in his/her machine or equipment, and export it to any country other
than where he/she bought it, the customer may sign a paid warranty contract with our local FA center.
This falls under the case where the product purchased from us in or outside Japan is exported and installed in any country
other than where it was purchased.
For details please contact the distributor from which the customer purchased the product.
3. Exclusion of Loss in Opportunity and Secondary Loss from Warranty Liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation
for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
4. Changes in Product Specifications

Specifications shown in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without notice.
5. Product Application
(1) For the use of this product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or
malfunction occurs in the product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to the product
when any failure or malfunction occurs.
(2) Mitsubishi CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial purposes.
Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above, especially those which are substantially
influential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or properties.
CONTENTS
MITSUBISHI CNC M800W/M800S/M80W Series Specifications List [L system]
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
1 Control Axes 1
1.1 Control Axes 2
1.1.1 Number of Basic Control Axes (NC Axes) ○ 2 ○ 2 ○ 2 ○ 2 ○ 2 2
1.1.2 Max. Number of Axes ○16 ○16 ○16 ○16
12 2
(NC Axes + Spindles + PLC Axes) △32 △32 △32 △32
1.1.2.1 Max. Number of NC Axes ○16 ○16 ○16 ○16
10 2
(In Total for All the Part Systems) △32 △32 △32 △32
4+G/B
1.1.2.2 Max. Number of Spindles 8 8 8 8 2
(*2)
1.1.2.3 Max. Number of PLC Axes 8 8 8 8 6 2
1.1.4 Max. Number of PLC Indexing Axes 8 8 8 8 4 3
1.1.5 Number of Simultaneous Contouring
8 4 8 4 4 3
Control Axes
○8 ○8 ○8 ○8
1.1.6 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System 8 3
△12 △12 △12 △12
1.1.7 Axis Name Extension ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3
1.2 Control Part System 4
1.2.1 Standard Number of Part Systems 1 1 1 1 1 4
○4 ○4 ○4 ○4
1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems (Main + Sub) ○4 4
△8 △8 △8 △8
○4 ○4 ○4 ○4
1.2.2.1 Max. Number of Main Part Systems ○2 4
△8 △8 △8 △8
○4 ○4 ○4 ○4
1.2.2.2 Max. Number of Sub Part Systems ○2 4
△8 △8 △8 △8
1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes 5
1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
1.3.2 Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
1.3.3 MDI Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
1.3.4 High-Speed Program Server Mode 6
1.3.4.1 Control Unit-side High-speed
△ △ ― ― ○ 6
Program Server Mode
1.3.4.2 Display Unit-side High-speed
△ / ― △ / ― △ △ ○ / ― 6
Program Server Mode
1.3.5 Front-side SD Card Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7
1.3.6 Front-side USB Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7
2 Input Command 9
2.1 Data Increment 10
2.1.1 Least Command Increment 10
Least command increment 1µm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10
Least command increment 0.1µm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10
Least command increment 0.01µm(10nm) △ △ △ △ ― 10
2.1.2 Least Control Increment 12
Least control increment　0.01μm(10nm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12
2.1.3 Indexing Increment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12
2.2 Unit System 13
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13

2.2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold ― ― ― ― ― 13
2.3 Program Format 14
2.3.1 Program Format 14
2.3.1.1 Format 1 for Lathe
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
(G Code List 2, 3)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
(G Code List 4, 5)
2.3.1.3 Special Format for Lathe
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
(G Code List 6, 7)
2.3.1.4 Format 1 for Machining Center ― ― ― ― ― 14
2.3.1.5 Format 2 for Machining Center
― ― ― ― ― 14
(M2 Format)
2.3.1.6 MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
2.3.2 Program Format Switch △ △ △ △ ― 15
2.4 Command Value 17
2.4.1 Decimal Point Input I, II ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 17
2.4.2 Absolute/Incremental Command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 18
2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 19
2.4.4 Diameter/Radius Designation Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 20
3 Positioning/Interpolation 21
3.1 Positioning 22
3.1.1 Positioning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 22
3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning ― ― ― ― ― 23
3.2 Linear/Circular Interpolation 24
3.2.1 Linear Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 24
3.2.2 Circular Interpolation
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25
(Center/Radius Designation)
3.2.3 Helical Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 27
3.2.4 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 29
3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation △ △ △ △ ○ 31
3.2.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation △ △ △ △ ○ 32
3.2.7 Milling Interpolation △ △ △ △ ○ 33
3.2.8 Hypothetical Axis Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 34
3.3 Curve Interpolation 35
3.3.1 Involute Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 35
3.3.2 Exponential Interpolation △ △ △ △ ― 36
3.3.3 Spline Interpolation (G05.1Q2/G61.2) ― ― ― ― ― 37
3.3.4 NURBS Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 38
3.3.5 3-Dimensional Circular Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 39
3.3.6 Spline Interpolation2 (G61.4) ― ― ― ― ― 40
4 Feed 43
4.1 Feedrate 44
4.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 44
4.1.2 Cutting Feedrate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 45
4.1.3 Manual Feedrate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 46
4.1.4 Rotary Axis Command Speed Tenfold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 46
4.2 Feedrate Input Methods 47
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
4.2.1 Feed per Minute (Asynchronous Feed) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 47

4.2.2 Feed per Revolution (Synchronous Feed) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 49
4.2.3 Inverse Time Feed ― ― ― ― ― 51
4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 52
4.2.5 Manual Speed Command △ △ △ △ ○ 53
4.2.7 G00 Feedrate Designation (,F Command) △ △ △ △ ○ 53
4.3 Override 55
4.3.1 Rapid Traverse Override ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 55
4.3.2 Cutting Feed Override ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 55
4.3.3 2nd Cutting Feed Override ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 55
4.3.4 Override Cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 56
4.4 Acceleration/Deceleration 57
4.4.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 57
after Interpolation
4.4.2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 59
Acceleration/Deceleration
― ― ― ― ― 63
Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration
4.5 Thread Cutting 64
4.5.1 Thread Cutting
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 64
(Lead/Thread Number Designation)
4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 67
4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping 68
4.5.3.1 Synchronous Tapping Cycle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 68
4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle △ △ △ △ ○ 70
4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle △ △ △ △ ○ 72
4.5.3.4 Synchronous Tapping
― ― ― ― ― 74
with Multiple Spindles
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 74
with Analog I/F Spindle
4.5.4 Chamfering ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 74
4.5.6 Circular Thread Cutting △ △ △ △ ○ 75
4.5.8 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 76
4.5.10 Thread Recutting △ △ △ △ ○ 77
4.5.11 Thread Cutting Override △ △ △ △ ○ 78
4.5.12 Variable Feed Thread Cutting △ △ △ △ ○ 78
4.5.13 Thread Cutting Time Constant Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 79
4.6 Manual Feed 80
4.6.1 Manual Rapid Traverse ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 80
4.6.2 Jog Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 80
4.6.3 Incremental Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 81
4.6.4 Handle Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 81
4.6.5 Manual Feedrate B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 82
4.6.6 Manual Feedrate B Surface Speed Control ― ― ― ― ― 83
4.6.8 Manual Speed Clamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 84
4.7 Dwell 85
4.7.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 85
4.7.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 86
5 Program Memory/Editing 87
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
5.1 Memory Capacity 88

5.1.1 Memory Capacity
88
(Number of Programs Stored)
230kB[600m] (400 programs) ― ― ― ― ― 88
500kB[1280m] (1000 programs) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 88
1000kB[2560m] (1000 programs) △ △ △ △ ― 88
2000kB[5120m] (1000 programs) △ △ △ △ ― 88
5.2 Editing 89
5.2.1 Program Editing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 89
5.2.2 Background Editing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 90
5.2.3 Buffer Correction ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 91
5.2.5 Multi-part System Simultaneous
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 92
Program Editing
5.2.6 Special Program Editing Display for
△ △ △ △ ○ 92
Synchronization between Part Systems
5.2.7 Finish Shape View Programming △ △ △ △ ○ 93
6 Operation and Display 95
6.1 Structure of Operation/Display Panel 96
6.1.1 Color Display (8.4-type LCD TFT) ― ― ― ― ― 96
6.1.2 Color Touchscreen Display
― ― □ □ ― 96
(10.4-type LCD TFT)
― ― □ □ ― 96
(15-type LCD TFT)
6.1.4 Separated-type Color Display
― ― ― ― □ 96
(8.4-type LCD TFT)
6.1.5 Separated-type Color Touchscreen
□ □ ― ― □ 96
Display (10.4-type LCD TFT)
□ □ ― ― □ 96
Display (15-type LCD TFT)
□ □ ― ― □ 96
Display (15-type LCD TFT/Windows8)
□ □ ― ― □ 97
Display □ □ ― ― □ 97
(19-type Horizontal LCD TFT/Windows8)
6.1.11 GOT (GOT2000 Series GT27/GT25
― ― ― ― ― 97
12.1/10.4/8.4/5.7)
6.2 Operation Methods and Functions 98
6.2.1 Operation Input ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 98
　　6.2.2 Absolute Value/Incremental Value
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 98
　　　　　Setting
6.2.3 Multiple Display Connection ― ― ― ― ― 99
6.2.4 Common Display to Multiple NCs ― ― ― ― ― 99
6.2.5 Displayed Part System Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 99
6.2.6 Menu List ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.7 Display Switch by Operation Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.8 External Signal Display Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.9 Screen Saver ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.10 Parameter Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.11 Alarm Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 101
6.2.12 Machining Program Input Mistake Check
△ △ △ △ ― 101
Warning
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
6.2.14 Screenshot Capture ― / ○ ― / ○ ○ ○ ― / ○ 101

6.2.15 User Selectable Menu Configuration ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 101
6.2.16 PC-NC Network Automatic Connection ○ / ― ○ / ― ― ― ○ / ― 102
6.2.17 Device Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 102
6.2.18 SRAM Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 102
6.2.19 MTB Selectable Menu Configuration ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 102
6.2.20 Remote Desktop Connection ― / ○ ― / ○ △ △ ― / ○ 103
6.2.21 VNC Server △ △ △ △ ○ 104
6.3 Display Methods and Contents 105
6.3.1 Status Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105
6.3.2 Clock Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105
6.3.3 Monitor Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 106
6.3.4 Setup Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 107
6.3.5 Edit Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 107
6.3.6 Diagnosis Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 107
6.3.7 Maintenance Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 108
6.3.8 Home Application ○ / ― ○ / ― ― ― ○ / ― 108
6.3.9 Home Screen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 109
6.3.10 Additional Languages 110
6.3.10.1 Japanese □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.2 English ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 110
6.3.10.3 German □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.4 Italian □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.5 French □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.6 Spanish □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.7 Chinese 110
6.3.10.7.1 Chinese (Traditional Chinese
□ □ □ □ □ 110
　　　　　　　　　Characters)
6.3.10.7.2 Chinese
□ □ □ □ □ 110
(Simplified Chinese Characters)
6.3.10.8 Korean □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.9 Portuguese □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.10 Hungarian □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.11 Dutch □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.12 Swedish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.13 Turkish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.14 Polish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.15 Russian □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.16 Czech □ □ □ □ □ 111
7 Input/Output Functions and Devices 113
7.1 Input/Output Data 114
7.1.1 Machining Program Input/Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 114
7.1.2 Tool Offset Data Input/Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 114
7.1.3 Common Variable Input/Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 114
7.1.4 Parameter Input/Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 114
7.1.5 History Data Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 114
7.1.7 System Configuration Data Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 114
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
7.2 Input/Output I/F 115

7.2.1 RS-232C I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 115
7.2.2 SD Card I/F 115
7.2.2.1 Control Unit-side SD Card I/F
○ ○ ― ― ○ 115
[Up to 32GB]
7.2.2.2 Front-side SD Card I/F [Up to 32GB] ○/― ○/― ○ ○ ○/― 115
7.2.3 Ethernet I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 115
7.2.4 Display Unit-side Data Server I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 116
7.2.5 Front-side USB Memory I/F [Up to 32GB] ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 116
7.2.6 USB I/F (GOT Front-side USB I/F) ― ― ― ― ― 116
7.2.7 SD I/F (GOT Back-side SD Card I/F) ― ― ― ― ― 116
7.3 Computer Link 117
7.3.1 Computer Link B △ △ △ △ ○ 117
7.4 Others 118
7.4.1 Handy Terminal Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 118
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 119
8.1 Spindle Functions (S) 120
8.1.1 Spindle Control Functions 120
8.1.1.1 Spindle Digital I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
8.1.1.2 Spindle Analog I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
8.1.1.3 Coil Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
8.1.1.4 Automatic Coil Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
8.1.1.5 Encoder Input I/F □ □ ○ ○ □ 122
8.1.1.6 Spindle-mode Servo Motor Control △ △ △ △ ○ 123
8.1.1.7 Spindle-mode Rotary Axis Control ― ― ― ― ― 124
8.1.1.8 Turret Gear Change Control △ △ △ △ ○ 125
8.1.2 S Code Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 126
8.1.3 Constant Surface Speed Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 127
8.1.4 Spindle Override ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 129
8.1.5 Multiple-spindle Control 129
8.1.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 130
8.1.5.2 Multiple-spindle Control II ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 131
8.1.6 Spindle Orientation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 132
8.1.7 Spindle Position Control
133
(Spindle/C Axis Control)
8.1.7.1 Spindle Position Control
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 133
8.1.7.2 C Axis Control
△ △ △ △ ○ 134
during Spindle Synchronization
8.1.8 Spindle Synchronization 135
8.1.8.1 Spindle Synchronization I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 135
8.1.8.2 Spindle Synchronization II ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 136
　　　8.1.8.3 Guide Bushing Spindle
△ △ △ △ ○ 136
Synchronization
8.1.9 Tool Spindle Synchronization I (Polygon) 137
8.1.9.1 Tool Spindle Synchronization IA
△ △ △ △ ○ 137
(Spindle-Spindle, Polygon)
8.1.9.2 Tool Spindle Synchronization IB
△ △ △ △ ○ 138
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
8.1.9.3 Tool Spindle Synchronization IC
△ △ △ △ ○ 139
(Spindle-NC Axis, Polygon)
8.1.10 Tool Spindle Synchronization II
△ △ △ △ ○ 140
(Hobbing)
8.1.11 Spindle Speed Clamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 141
8.1.13 Spindle Oscillation △ △ △ △ ― 141
8.1.14 Spindle Superimposition Control △ △ △ △ ○ 142
8.1.15 Multiple Spindle Synchronization
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 144
Set Control
8.1.16 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection △ △ △ △ ○ 146
8.2 Tool Functions (T) 147
8.2.1 Tool Functions (T Command) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 147
8.3 Miscellaneous Functions (M) 148
8.3.1 Miscellaneous Functions ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 148
8.3.2 Multiple M Codes in 1 Block ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 148
8.3.3 M Code Independent Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 149
8.3.4 Miscellaneous Function Finish ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 150
8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Traveling ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 151
8.3.6 Miscellaneous Function Command
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 152
High-speed Output
8.4 2nd Miscellaneous Functions (B) 154
8.4.1 2nd Miscellaneous Functions ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 154
8.4.2 2nd Miscellaneous Function Name
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 154
Extension
9 Tool Compensation 155
9.1 Tool Length/Tool Position 156
9.1.1 Tool Length Offset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 156
9.1.2 Tool Position Offset ― ― ― ― ― 159
9.1.3 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 159
9.1.4 Tool Position Compensation (G43.7) ― ― ― ― ― 160
9.2 Tool Radius 161
9.2.1 Tool Radius Compensation ― ― ― ― ― 161
9.2.2 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation △(*3) △(*3) ― ― ― 163
9.2.3 Tool Nose Radius Compensation
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 164
(G40/41/42)
9.2.4 Automatic Decision of Nose Radius
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 165
Compensation Direction (G46/40)
9.2.5 Tool Radius Compensation Diameter
― ― ― ― ― 165
Designation
9.3 Tool Offset Amount 166
9.3.1 Number of Tool Offset Sets 166
99 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
128 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 166
200 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
256 sets ― ― ― ― ○ 166
400 sets △ △ △ △ ― 166
999 sets △ △ △ △ ― 166
9.3.2 Offset Memory 167
9.3.2.1 Tool Shape/Wear Offset Amount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 167
9.3.2.2 Compensation Type Selection
― ― ― ― ― 170
by Parameter
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
9.3.3 Number of Tool Offset Sets Allocation
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 171
to Part Systems
10 Coordinate System 173
10.1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 174
10.1.1 Machine Coordinate System ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 175
10.1.2 Coordinate System Setting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 176
10.1.3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 178
10.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection 179
10.1.4.1 Workpiece Coordinate System
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179
Selection (6 Sets)
10.1.4.2 Extended Workpiece Coordinate
System Selection (48 Sets) △ △ △ △ ○ 181
G54.1P1 to P48
System Selection (96 Sets) ― ― ― ― ― 181
G54.1P1 to P96
G54.1P1 to P300
10.1.5 External Workpiece Coordinate Offset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 182
10.1.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 183
(G92.1)
10.1.7 Local Coordinate System ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 184
10.1.8 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 185
10.1.9 Plane Selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 186
10.1.10 Origin Set/Origin Cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 187
10.1.11 Counter Set ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 188
10.1.13 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 189
10.2 Return 190
10.2.1 Manual Reference Position Return ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 190
10.2.2 Automatic 1st Reference Position
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 191
Return
10.2.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 193
Return
10.2.4 Reference Position Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 194
10.2.5 Absolute Position Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195
10.2.6 Tool Exchange Position Return ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 196
11 Operation Support Functions 197
11.1 Program Control 198
11.1.1 Optional Block Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 198
11.1.2 Optional Block Skip Addition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 198
11.1.3 Single Block ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 199
11.2 Program Test 200
11.2.1 Dry Run ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.2 Machine Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.3 Miscellaneous Function Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.4 Graphic Check 201
11.2.4.1 Graphic Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 201
11.2.4.2 3D Solid Program Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 201
11.2.4.3 Graphic Check Rotary Axis Drawing △ △ △ △ ○ 202
11.2.5 Graphic Trace 203
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 203

11.2.5.2 Graphic Trace Rotary Axis Drawing △ △ △ △ ○ 204
11.2.6 Machining Time Computation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 204
11.2.7 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run
△ △ △ △ ○ 205
(Program Check Operation)
11.2.8 High-speed Simple Program Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206
11.3 Program Search/Start/Stop 207
11.3.1 Program Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 207
11.3.2 Sequence Number Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 207
11.3.3 Verification Stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 207
11.3.4 Program Restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 209
11.3.5 Automatic Operation Start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 210
11.3.6 NC Reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 210
11.3.7 Feed Hold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.3.8 Search & Start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.3.10 Auto-restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.4 Interrupt Operation 212
11.4.1 Manual Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 212
11.4.2 Automatic Operation Handle
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 212
Interruption
11.4.3 Manual Absolute Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 213
11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 214
11.4.5 Tapping Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 215
11.4.6 Manual Numerical Value Command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 216
11.4.7 Arbitrary Reverse Run ― ― ― ― ― 217
11.4.8 MDI Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
Automatic Modes
11.4.10 Simultaneous Operation of JOG and
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
Handle Modes
11.4.11 Reference Position Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 219
11.4.12 Tool Retract and Return △ △ △ △ ○ 220
11.4.13 Skip Retract ― ― ― ― ― 221
11.4.14 PLC Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 221
12 Program Support Functions 223
12.1 Machining Method Support Functions 224
12.1.1 Program 224
12.1.1.1 Subprogram Control [Layers] ○10 ○10 ○10 ○10 ○10 224
12.1.1.2 Figure Rotation ― ― ― ― ― 226
12.1.1.3 Scaling ― ― ― ― ― 228
12.1.1.4 Axis Name Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 229
12.1.2 Macro Program 230
12.1.2.1 User Macro [Layers] ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 230
12.1.2.2 Machine Tool Builder Macro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 233
12.1.2.3 Macro Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 235
12.1.2.4 Variable Command 236
200 sets ― ― ― ― ― 236
600 sets ― ― ― ― ― 236
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
700 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 236

8000 sets △ △ △ △ ○ 236
(600+100×number of part systems) sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 236
(7900+100×number of part systems) sets △ △ △ △ ○ 236
12.1.3 Fixed Cycle 238
12.1.3.1 Fixed Cycle for Drilling ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 239
12.1.3.2 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 244
12.1.3.3 Special Fixed Cycle ― ― ― ― ― 245
12.1.3.4 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 248
12.1.3.5 Compound Type Fixed Cycle
△ △ △ △ ○ 253
for Turning Machining
△ △ △ △ ○ 262
for Turning Machining (Type II)
12.1.3.7 Small-diameter Deep-hole Drilling
△ △ △ △ ― 263
Cycle
12.1.4 Mirror Image 263
12.1.4.1 Mirror Image by Parameter Setting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 263
12.1.4.2 Mirror Image by External Input ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 263
12.1.4.3 Mirror Image by G Code ― ― ― ― ― 264
12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 265
12.1.4.5 T Code Mirror Image
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 265
for Facing Tool Posts
12.1.5 Coordinate System Operation 266
12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program △ △ △ △ ○ 266
12.1.5.2 Coordinate Rotation by Parameter ― ― ― ― ― 268
12.1.5.3 3-dimensional Coordinate
― ― ― ― ― 269
Conversion
12.1.6 Dimension Input 270
12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering/Corner R △ △ △ △ ○ 270
12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command △ △ △ △ ○ 277
12.1.6.3 Geometric Command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 278
12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command ― ― ― ― ― 281
12.1.7 Axis Control 282
12.1.7.1 Chopping 282
12.1.7.1.1 Chopping △ △ △ △ ○ 282
12.1.7.2 Normal Line Control ― ― ― ― ― 283
12.1.7.3 Circular Cutting ― ― ― ― ― 284
12.1.8 Multi-part System Control 285
12.1.8.1 Timing Synchronization
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 285
between Part Systems
12.1.8.2 Start Point Designation Timing
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 286
Synchronization
12.1.8.3 Mixed Control 289
12.1.8.3.1 Mixed Control
△ △ △ △ ○ 289
(Cross Axis Control)
12.1.8.3.2 Arbitrary Axis Exchange
△ △ △ △ ○ 290
Control
12.1.8.4 Control Axis Superimposition 291
12.1.8.4.1 Control Axis Superimposition △ △ △ △ ○ 291
12.1.8.4.2 Arbitrary Axis Superimposition
△ △ △ △ ― 293
Control
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
12.1.8.5 Control Axis Synchronization
△ △ △ △ ○ 293
12.1.8.6 Balance Cut ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 295
12.1.8.7 Common Memory for Part Systems ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 297
12.1.8.8 Multi-part System Simultaneous
297
Thread Cutting
12.1.8.8.1 Two-part System Simultaneous
△ △ △ △ ○ 298
Thread Cutting
12.1.8.8.2 Multi-part System Simultaneous
△ △ △ △ ― 300
Thread Cutting
12.1.8.9 Multi-part System Program
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 301
Management
12.1.8.10 Synchronization between Part
302
Systems
12.1.8.10.1 Single Block between Part
△ △ △ △ ○ 302
Systems
12.1.8.10.2 Dwell/Miscellaneous Function
△ △ △ △ ○ 303
Time Override
12.1.8.10.3 Synchronization
△ △ △ △ ○ 304
between Part Systems OFF
12.1.8.11 Sub Part System Control I △ △ △ △ ○ 305
12.1.8.12 Sub Part System Control II △ △ △ △ ○ 307
12.1.9 Data Input/Output by Program 309
12.1.9.1 Parameter Input by Program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 309
12.1.9.2 Compensation Data Input by Program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 310
12.1.9.3 Tool/Material Shape Input
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 314
by Program
12.1.9.5 API Section and Sub-section Nos.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 316
Input/Output by Program
12.1.9.6 R-Navi Data Input by Program ― ― ― ― ― 316
12.1.10 Machining Modal 317
12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 317
12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 317
12.1.11 High-speed Parts Machining 318
12.1.11.1 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap △ △ △ △ ○ 318
12.2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions 320
12.2.1 Automatic Corner Override ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 320
12.2.2 Deceleration Check 321
12.2.2.1 Exact Stop Check Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
12.2.2.3 Error Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
12.2.2.4 Programmable In-position Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 324
12.2.2.5 Automatic Error Detection △ △ △ △ ― 324
12.3 High-speed and High-accuracy
325
　　　 Functions [kBPM: k Block per Minute]
12.3.1 High-speed Machining Mode 325
12.3.1.1 High-speed Machining Mode I
△33.7 △33.7 △33.7 △33.7 ○33.7 325
(G05P1) Maximum [kBPM]
12.3.1.2 High-speed Machining Mode II
△168 △168 △168 △168 ○67.5 326
12.3.2 High-accuracy Control 327
12.3.2.1 High-accuracy Control (G61.1/G08) △ △ △ △ ○ 327
△ △ △ △ ― 331
High-accuracy Control
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
12.3.2.3 SSS Control △ △ △ △ ○ 332

12.3.2.4 Tolerance Control △ △ △ △ ○ 333
12.3.2.5 Variable-acceleration
Pre-interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 334
12.3.2.6 High-accuracy
Acceleration/Deceleration ― ― ― ― ― 334
Time Constant Extension
12.3.2.7 Axis-based Acceleration Tolerance
△ △ △ △ ― 335
Control
12.3.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control 336
12.3.3.1 High-speed High-accuracy Control I
△67.5 △67.5 △67.5 △67.5 ○33.7 336
(G05.1Q1) Maximum [kBPM]
12.3.3.2 High-speed High-accuracy Control
△168 △168 △168 △168 ○67.5 337
II (G05P10000) Maximum [kBPM]
― ― ― ― ― 340
III (G05P20000) Maximum [kBPM]
12.3.3.4 Smooth Fairing ― ― ― ― ― 342
12.3.4 Machining Condition Selection I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 343
12.3.5 Direct Command Mode △ △ △ △ ― 343
12.4 Programming Support Functions 344
12.4.1 Playback △ △ △ △ ― 344
12.4.3 Interactive Cycle Insertion △ △ △ △ ○ 345
12.4.4 Simple Programming (NAVI MILL/LATHE) △ △ △ △ ○ 348
12.4.5 G code Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 348
12.4.7 DXF Data Input △ △ △ △ ○ 349
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation 351
13.1 Static Accuracy Compensation 352
13.1.1 Backlash Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 352
13.1.2 Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation
○32 ○32 ○32 ○32 ○16 353
[sets]
13.1.3 Memory-type Relative Position Error
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 354
Compensation
13.1.4 External Machine Coordinate System
△ △ △ △ ○ 355
Compensation
13.1.5 Circular Error Radius Compensation △ △ △ △ ○ 355
13.1.6 Ball Screw Thermal Expansion
△ △ △ △ ○ 356
Compensation
13.1.7 Rotation Center Error Compensation ― ― ― ― ― 357
13.1.8 Position-dependent Gradually
△ △ △ △ ○ 358
Increasing-type Backlash Compensation
13.1.9 Two-way Pitch Error Compensation △ △ △ △ ○ 359
13.1.11 Spatial Error Compensation ― ― ― ― ― 359
13.2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation 360
13.2.1 Smooth High-gain (SHG) Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 360
13.2.2 Dual Feedback ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 361
13.2.3 Lost Motion Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 361
13.2.4 OMR II (Backlash with Filter) △ △ △ △ ○ 362
13.2.6 OMR-FF △ △ △ △ ○ 363
13.2.7 Distance-coded Reference Position
△ △ △ △ ○ 364
Detection
14 Automation Support Functions 365
14.1 Measurement 366
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
14.1.1 Skip 366

14.1.1.1 Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 366
14.1.1.2 Multiple-step Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 368
14.1.1.4 PLC Skip △ △ △ △ ○ 369
14.1.1.5 Speed Change Skip △ △ △ △ ― 369
14.1.1.6 Torque Limitation Skip △ △ △ △ ○ 370
14.1.2 Automatic Tool Length Measurement ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 371
14.1.3 Manual Tool Length Measurement 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 374
14.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 378
14.1.6 Workpiece Position Measurement ― ― ― ― ― 379
14.1.7 Rotation Measurement ― ― ― ― ― 381
14.1.8 Rotation Center Error Measurement ― ― ― ― ― 382
14.1.9 Workpiece Installation Error
― ― ― ― ― 383
Measurement
14.2 Tool Life Management 384
14.2.1 Tool Life Management 384
14.2.1.1 Tool Life Management I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 384
14.2.1.2 Tool Life Management II ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 384
14.2.1.3 Tool Life Management III ― ― ― ― ― 384
14.2.2 Number of Tool Life Management Sets 385
99 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
128 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 385
200 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
256 sets ― ― ― ― ○ 385
400 sets △ △ △ △ ― 385
999 sets △ △ △ △ ― 385
14.2.3 Tool Life Management Set Allocation to
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 387
Part Systems
14.3 Others 389
14.3.1 Programmable Current Limitation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 389
14.3.2 Auto Power OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 389
14.3.4 Load Monitoring I △ △ △ △ ― 390
14.3.5 Power ON/OFF Sequence ○ / ― ○ / ― ― ― ○ / ― 390
14.3.6 PLC Axis Current Limit ― ― ― ― ― 390
15 Safety and Maintenance 391
15.1 Safety Switches 392
15.1.1 Emergency Stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 392
15.1.2 Data Protection Key ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 392
15.2 Display for Ensuring Safety 393
15.2.1 NC Warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 393
15.2.2 NC Alarm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 393
15.2.3 Operation Stop Cause ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 394
15.2.4 Emergency Stop Cause ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 394
15.2.5 Thermal Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 394
15.2.6 Battery Alarm/Warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 395
15.3 Protection 396
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
15.3.1 Stroke End (Over Travel) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 396

15.3.2 Stored Stroke Limit 396
15.3.2.1 Stored Stroke Limit I/II ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 397
15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB △ △ △ △ ○ 399
15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB △ △ △ △ ○ 399
15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC △ △ △ △ ○ 400
15.3.3 Stroke Check before Travel △ △ △ △ ○ 401
15.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 403
15.3.5 Interlock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 404
15.3.6 External Deceleration ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 404
15.3.7 Interference Check III △ △ △ △ ― 405
15.3.8 3D Machine Interference Check ― ― ― ― ― 407
15.3.9 Door Interlock 408
15.3.9.1 Door Interlock I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 408
15.3.9.2 Door Interlock II ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 410
15.3.10 Parameter Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 412
15.3.11 Program Protection (Edit Lock B, C) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 412
15.3.12 Program Display Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 412
15.3.13 Data Protection by User's Level △ △ △ △ ○ 412
15.3.15 Vertical Axis Pull-up ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 413
15.3.16 Machine Group-based Alarm Stop △ △ △ △ ○ 413
15.3.17 Interference Check Between Part
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 415
Systems
15.3.18 Spindle Protection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 416
15.4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 417
15.4.1 Operation History ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 417
15.4.2 Data Sampling ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 418
15.4.3 NC Data Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 418
15.4.4 Servo Tuning Support 419
15.4.4.1 NC Analyzer2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 419
15.4.5 Automatic Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 421
15.4.8 Application Error Detection ○ / ― ○ / ― ― ― ○ / ― 421
15.4.9 Email Notification to Operator △ △ △ △ ○ 422
15.4.10 NC Configurator2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 423
15.4.11 Diagnosis Data Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 423
15.4.12 Backup/Restore ― ― ― ― ― 423
15.5 Functional Safety 424
15.5.1 Safety Observation △ △ △ △ ○ 424
15.5.2 Smart Safety Observation 425
15.5.2.1 Safety-related I/O Observation △ △ △ △ ○ 425
15.5.2.2 Emergency Stop Observation △ △ △ △ ○ 425
15.5.2.3 Drive Safety Function 426
15.5.2.3.1 SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) △ △ △ △ ○ 426
15.5.2.3.2 SLP (Safely-Limited Position) △ △ △ △ ○ 426
15.5.2.3.3 SOS (Safe Operating Stop) △ △ △ △ ○ 426
15.5.2.3.4 SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) △ △ △ △ ○ 426
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
15.5.2.3.5 SBC/SBT(Safe Brake Control
△ △ △ △ ○ 427
/Safe Brake Test)
15.5.2.3.6 SCA (Safe Cam) △ △ △ △ ○ 427
15.5.2.3.7 SS1/SS2 (Safe Stop) △ △ △ △ ○ 427
15.5.2.3.8 STO (Safe Torque Off) △ △ △ △ ○ 427
16 Drive System 429
16.1 Servo/Spindle 430
Feed axis -
MDS-E-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJ-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJH-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EM-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EMH-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
Spindle -
MDS-E-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJ-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EM-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
Power supply -
MDS-E-CV □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-CV □ □ □ □ □ -
17 Machine Support Functions 431
17.1 PLC 432
17.1.1 Built-in PLC Processing Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 432
17.1.2 PLC Functions 432
17.1.2.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 432
17.1.2.1.1 Index Modification ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 435

17.1.2.1.2 Multi-program
○120 ○120 ○120 ○120 ○60 435
[Number of Programs]
17.1.2.1.3 Multi-project
436
[Number of Projects Stored]
Number of PLC projects: 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 436
Number of PLC projects: 3 △ △ △ △ ○ 436
Number of PLC projects: 6 △ △ △ △ ― 436
17.1.2.1.4 Function Block (FB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 436
17.1.2.1.5 Label Programming ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 436
17.1.2.2 PLC Exclusive Instruction ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 437

17.1.3 PLC Support Functions 438
17.1.3.1 Alarm Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 438
17.1.3.2 Operator Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 438
17.1.3.3 Memory Switch (PLC Switch) 439
17.1.3.3.1 Memory Switch (PLC Switch)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 439
32 Points
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
△ △ △ △ ― 439
64 Points
△ △ △ △ ― 439
96 points
17.1.3.4 Load Meter Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 440
17.1.3.5 User PLC Version Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 440
17.1.3.6 Ladder Program Writing during RUN ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 440
17.1.3.7 PLC Program Protection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 440

17.1.4 Built-in PLC Capacity 441
17.1.4.1 Standard PLC Capacity
○128000 ○128000 ○128000 ○128000 ○64000 441
[Number of Steps]
17.1.4.2 Large PLC Capacity: 256000 Steps △ △ △ △ ― 441
17.1.5 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 441
17.1.6 Ladder Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 442
17.1.7 PLC Development 443
17.1.7.1 On-board Development ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 443
17.1.7.2 MELSEC Development Tool
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 443
(GX Developer)
17.1.7.3 MELSEC Development Tool (GX Works3) ― ― ― ― ― 443
17.1.8 PLC Parameter 444
17.1.8.1 PLC Constant (150 Points) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 444
17.1.8.2 PLC Constant Extension
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 444
(Up to 755 Points)
17.1.9 GOT Connection 445
17.1.9.1 Ethernet Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 445
17.1.9.2 CC-Link Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 445
17.1.9.3 CC-Link IE Field Connection ― ― ― ― ― 445

17.1.10 Pallet Program Registration ― ― ― ― ― 446
17.2 Machine Construction 447
17.2.1 Servo OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 447
17.2.2 Axis Detachment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 448
17.2.3 Synchronous Control △ △ △ △ ○ 449
17.2.4 Inclined Axis Control △ △ △ △ ○ 453
17.2.5 Position Switch ○24 ○24 ○24 ○24 ○24 454
17.2.7 Index Table Indexing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 455
17.2.8 Tool Length Compensation
△(*3) △(*3) △(*3) △(*3) ― 457
along the Tool Axis
17.2.9 Tool Handle Feed & Interruption ― ― ― ― ― 458
17.2.10 Tool Center Coordinate Display ― ― ― ― ― 458
17.2.11 Tool Center Point Control ― ― ― ― ― 459
17.2.12 Inclined Surface Machining Command △ △ △ △ ○ 461
17.2.13 Simple Inclined Surface Machining
△ △ △ △ ○ 463
Command
17.2.14 3-dimensional Tool Radius
Compensation (Tool's △(*3) △(*3) △(*3) △(*3) ― 465
Vertical-direction Compensation)
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
△(*3) ― △(*3) ― ― 466
Compensation
17.2.16 3-dimensional Manual Feed △ △ △ △ ○ 467
17.2.17 R-Navi ― ― ― ― ― 468
17.2.20 Real-time Tuning 470
17.2.20.1 Real-time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) △ △ △ △ ○ 470
17.2.20.2 Real-time Tuning 2
△ △ △ △ ○ 471
(Rapid Traverse Time Constant)
17.2.21 Constant Torque Control △ △ △ △ ○ 472
17.2.22 External Encoder Position Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 473
17.2.23 Multiple-axis Synchronization Control ― ― ― ― ― 474
17.3 PLC Operation 475
17.3.1 Arbitrary Feed in Manual Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 475
17.3.2 Circular Feed in Manual Mode △ △ △ △ ― 476
17.3.3 PLC Axis Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 478
17.3.5 PLC Axis Indexing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 479
17.3.6 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover △ △ △ △ ○ 481
17.4 PLC Interface 482
17.4.1 CNC Control Signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 482
17.4.2 CNC Status Signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 483
17.4.3 PLC Window ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 485
17.4.4 External Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 486
17.4.5 Direct Screen Selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 486
17.4.6 Buzzer Sound Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 487
17.5 Machine Contact I/O 488
17.5.1 Operation Panel I/O 488
17.5.1.1 DI:64/DO:64 □ / ― □ / ― ― ― □ / ― 488
17.5.1.2 DI:64/DO:64 + SDI:8 □ / ― □ / ― ― ― □ / ― 488
17.5.1.3 DI:96/DO:64 ― / □ ― / □ □ □ ― / □ 488
17.5.1.5 DI:64/DO:48/AO:1 ― / □ ― / □ □ □ ― / □ 488
17.5.2 Remote I/O 489
17.5.2.1 DI:32/DO:32 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.2 DI:64/DO:48 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.3 DI:64/DO:48 + AO:1 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.5 DI:16/DO:8 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.6 DI:32/DO:32 + SDI:8/SDO:4 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.7 SDI:8/SDO:4 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.6 External PLC Link 490
17.6.1 CC-Link (Master/Local) □ □ □ □ □ 490
17.6.2 PROFIBUS-DP (Master) □ □ □ □ □ 496
17.6.3 CC-Link IE Field (Master/Local) □ □ □ □ □ 497
17.6.5 EtherNet/IP □ □ □ □ □ 499
17.7 Installing S/W for Machine Tools 500
17.7.1 Customization (NC Designer2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 500
17.7.1.1 Customization Data Storage
□ □ 6 6 □ 502
Capacity [MB]
Lathe system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
17.7.1.2 Customization Working Memory Size
6 6 6 6 3 502
[MB]
17.7.2 User-defined Key ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 502
17.7.3 EZSocket I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 502
17.7.4 APLC Release △ △ △ △ ○ 503
17.7.5 Custom API Library ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 504
17.7.6 MES Interface Library △ △ △ △ ○ 504
17.7.7 SLMP Server ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 505
17.7.8 Mitsubishi CNC Communication Software
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 506
FCSB1224W000
17.7.10 GOT2000 Screen Design Tool GT Works3 ― ― ― ― ― 506
17.8 Others 507
17.8.1 System Lock △ △ △ △ ○ 507
17.8.2 CNC Remote Operation Tool 507
17.8.2.1 NC Monitor2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.2.2 NC Explorer ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.3 Automatic Operation Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.4 Power Consumption Computation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 508
17.8.5 EcoMonitorLight Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 508
17.8.6 GOT Window ― ― ― ― ― 509
17.8.7 Log Viewer ― ― ― ― ― 510
(*2)G/B: Guide Bush

(*3)This function is available
during program format switch
CONTENTS
MITSUBISHI CNC M800W/M800S/M80W Series Specifications List [M system]
Machining center system
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
1 Control Axes 1
1.1 Control Axes 2
1.1.2 Max. Number of Axes ○16 ○16 ○16 ○16
11 2
(NC Axes + Spindles + PLC Axes) △32 △32 △32 △32
1.1.2.1 Max. Number of NC Axes
○16 ○16 ○16 ○16 8 2
(In Total for All the Part Systems)
1.1.2.2 Max. Number of Spindles 4 4 4 4 2 2
8 4 8 4 4 3
Control Axes
○8 ○8 ○8 ○8
1.1.6 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System 8 3
△12 △12 △12 △12
1.1.7 Axis Name Extension ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3
1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems (Main + Sub) ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 4
1.2.2.1 Max. Number of Main Part Systems ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 4
1.2.2.2 Max. Number of Sub Part Systems ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ― 4

1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes 5
1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
1.3.2 Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
1.3.3 MDI Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
△ △ ― ― ○ 6
Program Server Mode
△ / ― △ / ― △ △ ○ / ― 6
Program Server Mode
1.3.5 Front-side SD Card Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7
1.3.6 Front-side USB Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7
2 Input Command 9
2.2 Unit System 13
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W

2.2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13
― ― ― ― ― 14
(G Code List 2, 3)
― ― ― ― ― 14
(G Code List 4, 5)
― ― ― ― ― 14
(G Code List 6, 7)
2.3.1.4 Format 1 for Machining Center ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
(M2 Format)
2.3.1.6 MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format ― ― ― ― ― 14
2.3.2 Program Format Switch ― ― ― ― ― 15
2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation ― ― ― ― ― 19
2.4.4 Diameter/Radius Designation Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 20
3.1 Positioning 22
3.1.1 Positioning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 22
3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning △ △ △ △ ○ 23
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25
3.2.4 Spiral/Conical Interpolation △ △ △ △ ○ 29
3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation △ △ △ △ ○ 31
3.2.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation △ △ △ △ ― 32
3.2.7 Milling Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 33
3.2.8 Hypothetical Axis Interpolation △ △ △ △ ― 34
3.3.1 Involute Interpolation △ △ △ △ ○ 35
3.3.2 Exponential Interpolation △ △ △ △ ― 36
3.3.3 Spline Interpolation (G05.1Q2/G61.2) △ △ △ △ ○ 37
3.3.4 NURBS Interpolation △ △ △ △ ― 38
3.3.5 3-Dimensional Circular Interpolation △ △ △ △ ― 39
3.3.6 Spline Interpolation2 (G61.4) △ △ △ △ ○ 40
4 Feed 43
4.1 Feedrate 44
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W

4.2.2 Feed per Revolution (Synchronous Feed) △ △ △ △ ○ 49
4.2.3 Inverse Time Feed △ △ △ △ ○ 51
4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 52
4.2.5 Manual Speed Command △ △ △ △ ○ 53
4.2.7 G00 Feedrate Designation (,F Command) △ △ △ △ ○ 53
4.3 Override 55
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 57
after Interpolation
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 59
△ △ △ △ ○ 63
△ △ △ △ ○ 64
4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting ― ― ― ― ― 67
4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle △ △ △ △ ○ 70
4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle △ △ △ △ ○ 72
― ― ― ― ― 74
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 74
4.5.4 Chamfering ― ― ― ― ― 74
4.5.6 Circular Thread Cutting ― ― ― ― ― 75
4.5.8 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 76
4.5.10 Thread Recutting ― ― ― ― ― 77
4.5.11 Thread Cutting Override ― ― ― ― ― 78
4.5.12 Variable Feed Thread Cutting ― ― ― ― ― 78
4.5.13 Thread Cutting Time Constant Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 79
4.6 Manual Feed 80
4.6.2 Jog Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 80
4.6.4 Handle Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 81
4.6.6 Manual Feedrate B Surface Speed Control △ △ △ △ ― 83
4.7 Dwell 85
4.7.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation) ― ― ― ― ― 86
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W

88
230kB[600m] (400 programs) ― ― ― ― ― 88
500kB[1280m] (1000 programs) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 88
1000kB[2560m] (1000 programs) △ △ △ △ ― 88
2000kB[5120m] (1000 programs) △ △ △ △ ― 88
5.2 Editing 89
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 92
Program Editing
△ △ △ △ ○ 92
5.2.7 Finish Shape View Programming △ △ △ △ ○ 93
6.1.1 Color Display (8.4-type LCD TFT) ― ― ― ― ― 96
― ― □ □ ― 96
(10.4-type LCD TFT)
― ― □ □ ― 96
(15-type LCD TFT)
― ― ― ― □ 96
(8.4-type LCD TFT)
□ □ ― ― □ 96
□ □ ― ― □ 96
□ □ ― ― □ 96
□ □ ― ― □ 97
Display □ □ ― ― □ 97
― ― ― ― ― 97
12.1/10.4/8.4/5.7)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 98
6.2.3 Multiple Display Connection ― ― ― ― ― 99
6.2.4 Common Display to Multiple NCs ― ― ― ― ― 99
6.2.5 Displayed Part System Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 99
6.2.6 Menu List ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.8 External Signal Display Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.9 Screen Saver ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.11 Alarm Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 101
△ △ △ △ ― 101
Warning
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
6.2.14 Screenshot Capture ― / ○ ― / ○ ○ ○ ― / ○ 101

6.2.16 PC-NC Network Automatic Connection ○ / ― ○ / ― ― ― ○ / ― 102
6.2.17 Device Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 102
6.2.18 SRAM Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 102
6.2.20 Remote Desktop Connection ― / ○ ― / ○ △ △ ― / ○ 103
6.2.21 VNC Server △ △ △ △ ○ 104
6.3.1 Status Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105
6.3.2 Clock Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105
6.3.8 Home Application ○ / ― ○ / ― ― ― ○ / ― 108
6.3.9 Home Screen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 109
6.3.10.1 Japanese □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.2 English ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 110
6.3.10.3 German □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.4 Italian □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.5 French □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.6 Spanish □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.7 Chinese 110
□ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.7.2 Chinese
□ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.8 Korean □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.9 Portuguese □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.10 Hungarian □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.11 Dutch □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.12 Swedish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.13 Turkish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.14 Polish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.15 Russian □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.16 Czech □ □ □ □ □ 111
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W

7.2.1 RS-232C I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 115
7.2.2 SD Card I/F 115
○ ○ ― ― ○ 115
[Up to 32GB]
7.2.2.2 Front-side SD Card I/F [Up to 32GB] ○/― ○/― ○ ○ ○/― 115
7.2.3 Ethernet I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 115
7.2.4 Display Unit-side Data Server I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 116
7.2.5 Front-side USB Memory I/F [Up to 32GB] ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 116
7.2.6 USB I/F (GOT Front-side USB I/F) ― ― ― ― ― 116
7.2.7 SD I/F (GOT Back-side SD Card I/F) ― ― ― ― ― 116
7.3.1 Computer Link B △ △ △ △ ○ 117
7.4 Others 118
7.4.1 Handy Terminal Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 118
8.1.1.2 Spindle Analog I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
8.1.1.3 Coil Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
8.1.1.5 Encoder Input I/F □ □ ○ ○ □ 122
8.1.1.6 Spindle-mode Servo Motor Control △ △ △ △ ○ 123
8.1.1.7 Spindle-mode Rotary Axis Control △ △ △ △ ○ 124
8.1.1.8 Turret Gear Change Control ― ― ― ― ― 125
8.1.2 S Code Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 126
8.1.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control I ― ― ― ― ― 130
133
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 133
△ △ △ △ ― 134
― ― ― ― ― 136
Synchronization
― ― ― ― ― 137
― ― ― ― ― 138
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
― ― ― ― ― 139
― ― ― ― ― 140
(Hobbing)
8.1.13 Spindle Oscillation △ △ △ △ ― 141
8.1.14 Spindle Superimposition Control ― ― ― ― ― 142
― ― ― ― ― 144
Set Control
8.1.16 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection △ △ △ △ ○ 146
8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Traveling ― ― ― ― ― 151
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 152
High-speed Output
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 154
Extension
9.1.2 Tool Position Offset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 159
9.1.3 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes ― ― ― ― ― 159
9.1.4 Tool Position Compensation (G43.7) △ △ △ △ ― 160
9.2 Tool Radius 161
9.2.1 Tool Radius Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 161
9.2.2 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation △ △ △ △ ― 163
△ △ △ △ ― 164
(G40/41/42)
― ― ― ― ― 165
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 165
Designation
99 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
128 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
200 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 166
256 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
400 sets △ △ △ △ ○ 166
999 sets △ △ △ △ ― 166
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 170
by Parameter
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 171
to Part Systems
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179
Selection (6 Sets)
System Selection (48 Sets) △ △ △ △ ○ 181
G54.1P1 to P48
System Selection (96 Sets) △ △ △ △ ― 181
G54.1P1 to P96
System Selection (300 Sets) △ △ △ △ ― 181
G54.1P1 to P300
△ △ △ △ ― 183
(G92.1)
10.1.9 Plane Selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 186
10.1.11 Counter Set ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 188
10.1.13 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift ― ― ― ― ― 189
10.2 Return 190
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 191
Return
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 193
Return
11.1.2 Optional Block Skip Addition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 198
11.1.3 Single Block ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 199
11.2.1 Dry Run ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.2 Machine Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.4.1 Graphic Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 201
11.2.4.2 3D Solid Program Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 201
11.2.4.3 Graphic Check Rotary Axis Drawing ― ― ― ― ― 202
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 203

11.2.5.2 Graphic Trace Rotary Axis Drawing ― ― ― ― ― 204
11.2.6 Machining Time Computation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 204
△ △ △ △ ○ 205
11.3.1 Program Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 207
11.3.3 Verification Stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 207
11.3.4 Program Restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 209
11.3.6 NC Reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 210
11.3.7 Feed Hold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.3.8 Search & Start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.3.10 Auto-restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 212
Interruption
11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 214
11.4.5 Tapping Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 215
11.4.7 Arbitrary Reverse Run ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
Automatic Modes
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
Handle Modes
11.4.12 Tool Retract and Return △ △ △ △ ○ 220
11.4.13 Skip Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 221
12.1.1 Program 224
12.1.1.2 Figure Rotation △ △ △ △ ― 226
12.1.1.3 Scaling △ △ △ △ ○ 228
12.1.1.4 Axis Name Switch ― ― ― ― ― 229
200 sets ― ― ― ― ― 236
600 sets ― ― ― ― ― 236
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
700 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 236

8000 sets △ △ △ △ ○ 236
(600+100×number of part systems) sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 236
(7900+100×number of part systems) sets △ △ △ △ ○ 236
12.1.3.2 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II) ― ― ― ― ― 244
12.1.3.3 Special Fixed Cycle △ △ △ △ ○ 245
― ― ― ― ― 253
― ― ― ― ― 262
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 263
Cycle
12.1.4.3 Mirror Image by G Code ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 264
12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ― ― ― ― ― 265
― ― ― ― ― 265
12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program △ △ △ △ ○ 266
12.1.5.2 Coordinate Rotation by Parameter △ △ △ △ ― 268
△ △ △ △ ○ 269
Conversion
12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering/Corner R △ △ △ △ ○ 270
12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command △ △ △ △ ○ 277
12.1.6.3 Geometric Command △ △ △ △ ○ 278
12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command △ △ △ △ ○ 281
12.1.7.1 Chopping 282
12.1.7.1.1 Chopping △ △ △ △ ○ 282
12.1.7.2 Normal Line Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 283
12.1.7.3 Circular Cutting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 284
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 285
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 286
Synchronization
― ― ― ― ― 289
△ △ △ △ ― 290
Control
12.1.8.4.1 Control Axis Superimposition ― ― ― ― ― 291
― ― ― ― ― 293
Control
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
― ― ― ― ― 293
12.1.8.6 Balance Cut ― ― ― ― ― 295
12.1.8.7 Common Memory for Part Systems ― ― ― ― ― 297
297
Thread Cutting
― ― ― ― ― 298
Thread Cutting
― ― ― ― ― 300
Thread Cutting
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 301
Management
302
Systems
― ― ― ― ― 302
Systems
― ― ― ― ― 303
Time Override
― ― ― ― ― 304
12.1.8.11 Sub Part System Control I △ △ △ △ ― 305
12.1.8.12 Sub Part System Control II ― ― ― ― ― 307
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 314
by Program
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 316
12.1.9.6 R-Navi Data Input by Program △ △ △ △ ○ 316
12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 317
12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 317
12.1.11.1 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap △ △ △ △ ○ 318
12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
12.2.2.3 Error Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
12.2.2.5 Automatic Error Detection ― ― ― ― ― 324
325
△33.7 △33.7 △33.7 △33.7 ○33.7 325
△168 △168 △168 △168 ○67.5 326
12.3.2.1 High-accuracy Control (G61.1/G08) △ △ △ △ ○ 327
△ △ △ △ ○ 331
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
12.3.2.3 SSS Control △ △ △ △ ○ 332

12.3.2.4 Tolerance Control △ △ △ △ ○ 333
Pre-interpolation △ △ △ △ ― 334
Acceleration/Deceleration △ △ △ △ ― 334
△ △ △ △ ― 335
Control
△67.5 △67.5 △67.5 △67.5 ○33.7 336
△168 △168 △168 △168 ○67.5 337
△270 △270 △270 △270 ○135 340
12.3.3.4 Smooth Fairing △ △ △ △ ○ 342
12.3.4 Machining Condition Selection I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 343
12.3.5 Direct Command Mode ― ― ― ― ― 343
12.4.1 Playback ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 344
12.4.3 Interactive Cycle Insertion △ △ △ △ ○ 345
12.4.4 Simple Programming (NAVI MILL/LATHE) △ △ △ △ ○ 348
12.4.5 G code Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 348
12.4.7 DXF Data Input ― ― ― ― ― 349
○32 ○32 ○32 ○32 ○16 353
[sets]
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 354
Compensation
△ △ △ △ ○ 355
Compensation
13.1.5 Circular Error Radius Compensation △ △ △ △ ○ 355
△ △ △ △ ○ 356
Compensation
13.1.7 Rotation Center Error Compensation △ △ △ △ ― 357
△ △ △ △ ○ 358
13.1.9 Two-way Pitch Error Compensation △ △ △ △ ○ 359
13.1.11 Spatial Error Compensation △ △ △ △ ― 359
13.2.2 Dual Feedback ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 361
13.2.4 OMR II (Backlash with Filter) △ △ △ △ ○ 362
13.2.6 OMR-FF △ △ △ △ ○ 363
△ △ △ △ ○ 364
Detection
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
14.1.1 Skip 366

14.1.1.1 Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 366
14.1.1.4 PLC Skip △ △ △ △ ○ 369
14.1.1.5 Speed Change Skip △ △ △ △ ― 369
14.1.1.6 Torque Limitation Skip △ △ △ △ ― 370
14.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement ― ― ― ― ― 378
14.1.6 Workpiece Position Measurement ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 379
14.1.7 Rotation Measurement ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 381
14.1.8 Rotation Center Error Measurement △ △ △ △ ― 382
△ ― △ ― ― 383
Measurement
14.2.1.3 Tool Life Management III ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 384
99 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
128 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
200 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 385
256 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
400 sets △ △ △ △ ― 385
999 sets △ △ △ △ ― 385
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 387
Part Systems
14.3 Others 389
14.3.2 Auto Power OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 389
14.3.4 Load Monitoring I △ △ △ △ ― 390
14.3.5 Power ON/OFF Sequence ○ / ― ○ / ― ― ― ○ / ― 390
14.3.6 PLC Axis Current Limit ― ― ― ― ― 390
15.1.1 Emergency Stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 392
15.2.1 NC Warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 393
15.2.2 NC Alarm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 393
15.3 Protection 396
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W

15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB △ △ △ △ ○ 399
15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB △ △ △ △ ○ 399
15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC △ △ △ △ ○ 400
15.3.3 Stroke Check before Travel △ △ △ △ ○ 401
15.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Check ― ― ― ― ― 403
15.3.5 Interlock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 404
15.3.7 Interference Check III △ △ △ △ ― 405
15.3.8 3D Machine Interference Check △ △ ― ― ― 407
15.3.9.1 Door Interlock I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 408
15.3.10 Parameter Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 412
15.3.13 Data Protection by User's Level △ △ △ △ ○ 412
15.3.16 Machine Group-based Alarm Stop △ △ △ △ ○ 413
― ― ― ― ― 415
Systems
15.3.18 Spindle Protection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 416
15.4.2 Data Sampling ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 418
15.4.3 NC Data Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 418
15.4.4.1 NC Analyzer2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 419
15.4.5 Automatic Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 421
15.4.8 Application Error Detection ○ / ― ○ / ― ― ― ○ / ― 421
15.4.9 Email Notification to Operator △ △ △ △ ○ 422
15.4.10 NC Configurator2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 423
15.4.12 Backup/Restore ― ― ― ― ― 423
15.5.1 Safety Observation △ △ △ △ ○ 424
15.5.2.1 Safety-related I/O Observation △ △ △ △ ○ 425
15.5.2.2 Emergency Stop Observation △ △ △ △ ○ 425
15.5.2.3.1 SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) △ △ △ △ ○ 426
15.5.2.3.2 SLP (Safely-Limited Position) △ △ △ △ ○ 426
15.5.2.3.3 SOS (Safe Operating Stop) △ △ △ △ ○ 426
15.5.2.3.4 SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) △ △ △ △ ○ 426
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
△ △ △ △ ○ 427
/Safe Brake Test)
15.5.2.3.6 SCA (Safe Cam) △ △ △ △ ○ 427
15.5.2.3.7 SS1/SS2 (Safe Stop) △ △ △ △ ○ 427
15.5.2.3.8 STO (Safe Torque Off) △ △ △ △ ○ 427
16 Drive System 429
Feed axis -
MDS-E-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJ-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJH-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EM-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
Spindle -
MDS-E-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJ-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EM-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
Power supply -
MDS-E-CV □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-CV □ □ □ □ □ -
17.1 PLC 432
17.1.1 Built-in PLC Processing Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 432
17.1.2.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 432
17.1.2.1.1 Index Modification ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 435

17.1.2.1.2 Multi-program
○120 ○120 ○120 ○120 ○60 435
[Number of Programs]
436
Number of PLC projects: 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 436
Number of PLC projects: 3 △ △ △ △ ○ 436
Number of PLC projects: 6 △ △ △ △ ― 436
17.1.2.1.4 Function Block (FB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 436
17.1.2.1.5 Label Programming ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 436
17.1.2.2 PLC Exclusive Instruction ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 437

17.1.3.1 Alarm Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 438
17.1.3.2 Operator Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 438
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 439
32 Points
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
△ △ △ △ ― 439
64 Points
△ △ △ △ ― 439
96 points
17.1.3.6 Ladder Program Writing during RUN ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 440
17.1.3.7 PLC Program Protection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 440

17.1.4.1 Standard PLC Capacity
○128000 ○128000 ○128000 ○128000 ○64000 441
[Number of Steps]
17.1.5 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 441
17.1.6 Ladder Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 442
17.1.7.1 On-board Development ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 443
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 443
(GX Developer)
17.1.7.3 MELSEC Development Tool (GX Works3) ― ― ― ― ― 443
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 444
(Up to 755 Points)
17.1.9.2 CC-Link Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 445
17.1.9.3 CC-Link IE Field Connection ― ― ― ― ― 445

17.1.10 Pallet Program Registration △ △ △ △ ― 446
17.2.1 Servo OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 447
17.2.2 Axis Detachment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 448
17.2.3 Synchronous Control △ △ △ △ ○ 449
17.2.4 Inclined Axis Control △ △ △ △ ○ 453
17.2.5 Position Switch ○24 ○24 ○24 ○24 ○24 454
△ △ △ △ ― 457
along the Tool Axis
17.2.9 Tool Handle Feed & Interruption △ △ △ △ ― 458
17.2.10 Tool Center Coordinate Display △ △ △ △ ― 458
17.2.11 Tool Center Point Control △ △(*7) △ △(*7) ○(*7) 459
17.2.12 Inclined Surface Machining Command △ △ △ △ ○ 461
― ― ― ― ― 463
Command
Compensation (Tool's △ △ △ △ ― 465
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
△ ― △ ― ― 466
Compensation
17.2.16 3-dimensional Manual Feed △ △ △ △ ○ 467
17.2.17 R-Navi △ △ △ △ ○ 468
17.2.20.1 Real-time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) △ △ △ △ ○ 470
△ △ △ △ ○ 471
17.2.21 Constant Torque Control ― ― ― ― ― 472
17.2.22 External Encoder Position Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 473
17.3.2 Circular Feed in Manual Mode △ △ △ △ ― 476
17.3.3 PLC Axis Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 478
17.3.6 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover △ △ △ △ ○ 481
17.4.3 PLC Window ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 485
17.4.4 External Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 486
17.4.6 Buzzer Sound Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 487
17.5.1.1 DI:64/DO:64 □ / ― □ / ― ― ― □ / ― 488
17.5.1.2 DI:64/DO:64 + SDI:8 □ / ― □ / ― ― ― □ / ― 488
17.5.1.3 DI:96/DO:64 ― / □ ― / □ □ □ ― / □ 488
17.5.1.5 DI:64/DO:48/AO:1 ― / □ ― / □ □ □ ― / □ 488
17.5.2 Remote I/O 489
17.5.2.1 DI:32/DO:32 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.2 DI:64/DO:48 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.3 DI:64/DO:48 + AO:1 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.5 DI:16/DO:8 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.6 DI:32/DO:32 + SDI:8/SDO:4 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.5.2.7 SDI:8/SDO:4 □ □ □ □ □ 489
17.6.1 CC-Link (Master/Local) □ □ □ □ □ 490
17.6.2 PROFIBUS-DP (Master) □ □ □ □ □ 496
17.6.3 CC-Link IE Field (Master/Local) □ □ □ □ □ 497
17.6.5 EtherNet/IP □ □ □ □ □ 499
17.7.1 Customization (NC Designer2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 500
□ □ 6 6 □ 502
Capacity [MB]
Class Page
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W
6 6 6 6 3 502
[MB]
17.7.2 User-defined Key ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 502
17.7.3 EZSocket I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 502
17.7.4 APLC Release △ △ △ △ ○ 503
17.7.5 Custom API Library ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 504
17.7.6 MES Interface Library △ △ △ △ ○ 504
17.7.7 SLMP Server ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 505
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 506
FCSB1224W000
17.7.10 GOT2000 Screen Design Tool GT Works3 ― ― ― ― ― 506
17.8 Others 507
17.8.1 System Lock △ △ △ △ ○ 507
17.8.2.1 NC Monitor2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.2.2 NC Explorer ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.5 EcoMonitorLight Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 508
17.8.6 GOT Window ― ― ― ― ― 509
17.8.7 Log Viewer ― ― ― ― ― 510
(*7)Restrained to 4-axis
simultaneous contouring
CONTENTS
MITSUBISHI CNC M80/E80/C80 Series Specifications List [L system]
Lathe system
Class M80 M80 E80 E80 Page
C80
TypeA TypeB TypeA TypeB
1 Control Axes 1
1.1 Control Axes 2
1.1.2 Max. Number of Axes
12 9 8 5 16 2
(NC Axes + Spindles + PLC Axes)
10 7 5 4 16 2
4+G/B
1.1.2.2 Max. Number of Spindles 3 3 2 4 2
(*2)
4 4 4 4 4 3
Control Axes
1.1.6 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System 8 5 5 4 8 3
1.1.7 Axis Name Extension ○ ○ ― ― ― 3
1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems (Main + Sub) ○4 ○2 ○1 ○1 △3 4
1.2.2.1 Max. Number of Main Part Systems ○2 ○2 ○1 ○1 △3 4
1.2.2.2 Max. Number of Sub Part Systems ○2 ○1 ― ― △2 4

1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes ― 5
1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 5
1.3.2 Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
1.3.3 MDI Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
― ― ― ― ― 6
Program Server Mode
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 6
Program Server Mode
1.3.5 Front-side SD Card Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 7
1.3.6 Front-side USB Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 7
2 Input Command 9
Least command increment 0.01µm(10nm) ― ― ― ― ― 10
2.2 Unit System 13
Lathe system
C80
2.2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold ― ― ― ― ― 13
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
(G Code List 2, 3)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
(G Code List 4, 5)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
(G Code List 6, 7)
2.3.1.4 Format 1 for Machining Center ― ― ― ― ― 14
― ― ― ― ― 14
(M2 Format)
2.3.1.6 MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 19
2.4.4 Diameter/Radius Designation Switch ○ ― ― ― ― 20
3.1 Positioning 22
3.1.1 Positioning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 22
3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning ― ― ― ― ― 23
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25
3.2.4 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 29
3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 31
3.2.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 32
3.2.7 Milling Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 33
3.3.1 Involute Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 35
3.3.2 Exponential Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 36
3.3.3 Spline Interpolation (G05.1Q2/G61.2) ― ― ― ― ― 37
3.3.6 Spline Interpolation2 (G61.4) ― ― ― ― ― 40
4 Feed 43
4.1 Feedrate 44
Lathe system
C80
4.2.2 Feed per Revolution (Synchronous Feed) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 49
4.2.3 Inverse Time Feed ― ― ― ― ― 51
4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 52
4.2.5 Manual Speed Command ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 53
4.2.7 G00 Feedrate Designation (,F Command) ○ ― ― ― △ 53
4.3 Override 55
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 57
after Interpolation
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 59
― ― ― ― ― 63
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 64
4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 67
4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle ○ ○ ― ― △ 70
4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle ○ ○ ― ― △ 72
― ― ― ― △ 74
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 74
4.5.4 Chamfering ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 74
4.5.6 Circular Thread Cutting ○ ― ― ― ― 75
4.5.8 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD) ○ ○ ― ― ○ 76
4.5.10 Thread Recutting ○ ― ― ― △ 77
4.5.11 Thread Cutting Override ○ ― ― ― △ 78
4.5.12 Variable Feed Thread Cutting ○ ― ― ― △ 78
4.5.13 Thread Cutting Time Constant Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 79
4.6 Manual Feed 80
4.6.2 Jog Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 80
4.6.4 Handle Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 81
4.7 Dwell 85
4.7.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation) ○ ○ ― ― ○ 86
Lathe system
C80
88
230kB[600m] (400 programs) ― ― ○ ○ ― 88
500kB[1280m] (1000 programs) ○ ○ ― ― ○ 88
1000kB[2560m] (1000 programs) ― ― ― ― ― 88
2000kB[5120m] (1000 programs) ― ― ― ― ― 88
5.2 Editing 89
○ ○ ― ― ○ 92
Program Editing
○ ○ ― ― △ 92
5.2.7 Finish Shape View Programming ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 93
6.1.1 Color Display (8.4-type LCD TFT) □ □ ○ ○ ― 96
□ □ ― ― ― 96
(10.4-type LCD TFT)
□ □ ― ― ― 96
(15-type LCD TFT)
― ― ― ― ― 96
(8.4-type LCD TFT)
― ― ― ― ― 96
― ― ― ― ― 96
― ― ― ― ― 96
― ― ― ― ― 97
Display ― ― ― ― ― 97
― ― ― ― ○ 97
12.1/10.4/8.4/5.7)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 98
6.2.3 Multiple Display Connection ― ― ― ― ○(GOT) 99
6.2.4 Common Display to Multiple NCs ― ― ― ― ○(GOT) 99
6.2.5 Displayed Part System Switch ○ ○ ― ― ○ 99
6.2.6 Menu List ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.8 External Signal Display Switch ○ ― ― ― ○ 100
6.2.9 Screen Saver ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 100
6.2.11 Alarm Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 101
― ― ― ― ― 101
Warning
Lathe system
C80
6.2.14 Screenshot Capture ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 101
6.2.16 PC-NC Network Automatic Connection ― ― ― ― ― 102
6.2.17 Device Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 102
6.2.18 SRAM Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 102
6.2.20 Remote Desktop Connection ○ ○ ― ― ― 103
6.2.21 VNC Server ○ ○ ― ― ― 104
6.3.1 Status Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105
6.3.2 Clock Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105
6.3.8 Home Application ― ― ― ― ― 108
6.3.9 Home Screen ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 109
6.3.10.1 Japanese □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.2 English ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 110
6.3.10.3 German □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.4 Italian □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.5 French □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.6 Spanish □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.7 Chinese 110
□ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.7.2 Chinese
□ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.8 Korean □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.9 Portuguese □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.10 Hungarian □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.11 Dutch □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.12 Swedish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.13 Turkish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.14 Polish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.15 Russian □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.16 Czech □ □ □ □ □ 111
Lathe system
C80
7.2.1 RS-232C I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 115
7.2.2 SD Card I/F 115
― ― ― ― ― 115
[Up to 32GB]
7.2.2.2 Front-side SD Card I/F [Up to 32GB] ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 115
7.2.3 Ethernet I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 115
7.2.4 Display Unit-side Data Server I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 116
7.2.5 Front-side USB Memory I/F [Up to 32GB] ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 116
7.2.6 USB I/F (GOT Front-side USB I/F) ― ― ― ― ○ 116
7.2.7 SD I/F (GOT Back-side SD Card I/F) ― ― ― ― ○ 116
7.3.1 Computer Link B ○ ○ ― ― ― 117
7.4 Others 118
7.4.1 Handy Terminal Connection ○ ○ ― ― ― 118
△
8.1.1.2 Spindle Analog I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
(MELSEC)
8.1.1.3 Coil Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
8.1.1.5 Encoder Input I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 122
8.1.1.6 Spindle-mode Servo Motor Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 123
8.1.1.7 Spindle-mode Rotary Axis Control ― ― ― ― ― 124
8.1.1.8 Turret Gear Change Control ○ ○ ○ ― ― 125
8.1.2 S Code Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 126
8.1.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 130
133
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 133
○ ○ ― ― △ 134
○ ― ― ― ― 136
Synchronization
○ ○ ○ ○ △ 137
○ ○ ○ ○ △ 138
Lathe system
C80
○ ― ― ― △ 139
○ ― ― ― △ 140
(Hobbing)
8.1.13 Spindle Oscillation ― ― ― ― ― 141
8.1.14 Spindle Superimposition Control ○ ― ― ― △ 142
○ ○ ― ― ― 144
Set Control
8.1.16 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection ○ ○ ― ― ― 146
8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Traveling ○ ― ― ― ○ 151
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 152
High-speed Output
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 154
Extension
9.1.2 Tool Position Offset ― ― ― ― ― 159
9.1.3 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 159
9.2 Tool Radius 161
9.2.1 Tool Radius Compensation ― ― ― ― ― 161
9.2.2 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ― ― ― ― ― 163
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 164
(G40/41/42)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 165
― ― ― ― ― 165
Designation
99 sets ― ○ ○ ○ ― 166
128 sets ― ― ― ― ○ 166
200 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
256 sets ○ ― ― ― △ 166
400 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
999 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
― ― ― ― ― 170
by Parameter
Lathe system
C80
○ ○ ― ― ― 171
to Part Systems
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179
Selection (6 Sets)
System Selection (48 Sets) ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 181
G54.1P1 to P48
G54.1P1 to P96
G54.1P1 to P300
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 183
(G92.1)
10.1.9 Plane Selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 186
10.1.11 Counter Set ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 188
10.1.13 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 189
10.2 Return 190
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 191
Return
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 193
Return
11.1.2 Optional Block Skip Addition ○ ○ ― ― ○ 198
11.1.3 Single Block ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 199
11.2.1 Dry Run ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.2 Machine Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.4.1 Graphic Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 201
11.2.4.2 3D Solid Program Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 201
11.2.4.3 Graphic Check Rotary Axis Drawing ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 202
Lathe system
C80
11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 203
11.2.5.2 Graphic Trace Rotary Axis Drawing ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 204
11.2.6 Machining Time Computation ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 204
○ ○ ○ ○ △ 205
11.3.1 Program Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 207
11.3.3 Verification Stop ○ ○ ― ― ○ 207
11.3.4 Program Restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 209
11.3.6 NC Reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 210
11.3.7 Feed Hold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.3.8 Search & Start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.3.10 Auto-restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 212
Interruption
11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract ○ ○ ― ― ○ 214
11.4.5 Tapping Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 215
11.4.7 Arbitrary Reverse Run ― ― ― ― ― 217
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
Automatic Modes
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
Handle Modes
11.4.12 Tool Retract and Return ○ ○ ― ― ― 220
11.4.13 Skip Retract ― ― ― ― ― 221
12.1.1 Program 224
12.1.1.2 Figure Rotation ― ― ― ― ― 226
12.1.1.3 Scaling ― ― ― ― ― 228
12.1.1.4 Axis Name Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 229
200 sets ― ― ― ○ ― 236
600 sets ― ○ ○ ― ― 236
Lathe system
C80
700 sets ○ ― ― ― ○ 236
8000 sets ○ ― ― ― ― 236
(600+100×number of part systems) sets ○ ― ― ― ○ 236
(7900+100×number of part systems) sets ○ ― ― ― ― 236
12.1.3.2 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 244
12.1.3.3 Special Fixed Cycle ― ― ― ― ― 245
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 253
○ ○ ○ ○ △ 262
― ― ― ― ― 263
Cycle
12.1.4.3 Mirror Image by G Code ― ― ― ― ― 264
12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ○ ○ ― ― ○ 265
○ ○ ― ― ○ 265
12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program ○ ― ― ― △ 266
― ― ― ― ― 269
Conversion
12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering/Corner R ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 270
12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 277
12.1.6.3 Geometric Command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 278
12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command ― ― ― ― ― 281
12.1.7.1 Chopping 282
12.1.7.1.1 Chopping ○ ○ ― ― ― 282
12.1.7.2 Normal Line Control ― ― ― ― ― 283
12.1.7.3 Circular Cutting ― ― ― ― ― 284
○ ○ ― ― ○ 285
○ ○ ― ― ○ 286
Synchronization
○ ― ― ― △ 289
○ ― ― ― △ 290
Control
12.1.8.4.1 Control Axis Superimposition ○ ― ― ― ― 291
― ― ― ― ― 293
Control
Lathe system
C80
○ ○ ― ― △ 293
12.1.8.6 Balance Cut ○ ― ― ― ○ 295
12.1.8.7 Common Memory for Part Systems ○ ― ― ― ○ 297
297
Thread Cutting
○ ― ― ― ○ 298
Thread Cutting
― ― ― ― ― 300
Thread Cutting
○ ○ ― ― ○ 301
Management
302
Systems
○ ○ ― ― △ 302
Systems
○ ○ ― ― △ 303
Time Override
○ ○ ― ― △ 304
12.1.8.11 Sub Part System Control I ○ ○ ― ― △ 305
12.1.8.12 Sub Part System Control II ○ ― ― ― △ 307
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 314
by Program
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 316
12.1.9.6 R-Navi Data Input by Program ― ― ― ― ― 316
12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 317
12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 317
12.1.11.1 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap ○ ○ ― ― △ 318
12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
12.2.2.3 Error Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
325
○33.7 ― ― ― △ 325
○67.5 ― ― ― △ 326
12.3.2.1 High-accuracy Control (G61.1/G08) ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 327
― ― ― ― ― 331
Lathe system
C80
12.3.2.3 SSS Control ○ ○ ― (*4) ― (*4) ― 332
12.3.2.4 Tolerance Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 333
― ― ― ― ― 335
Control
○33.7 ― ― ― △ 336
○67.5 ― ― ― △ 337
― ― ― ― ― 340
12.3.3.4 Smooth Fairing ― ― ― ― ― 342
12.3.4 Machining Condition Selection I ○ ― ― ― ○ 343
12.4.1 Playback ― ― ― ― ― 344
12.4.3 Interactive Cycle Insertion ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 345
12.4.4 Simple Programming (NAVI MILL/LATHE) ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 348
12.4.5 G code Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 348
12.4.7 DXF Data Input ○ ― ― ― ― 349
○16 ○16 ○16 ○16 ○10 353
[sets]
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 354
Compensation
○ ○ ○ ○ △ 355
Compensation
13.1.5 Circular Error Radius Compensation ○ ○ ― ― △ 355
○ ○ ― ― △ 356
Compensation
○ ○ ― ― △ 358
13.1.9 Two-way Pitch Error Compensation ○ ○ ― ― △ 359
13.2.2 Dual Feedback ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 361
13.2.4 OMR II (Backlash with Filter) ○ ○ ― ― △ 362
13.2.6 OMR-FF ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 363
○ ○ ― ― ― 364
Detection
Lathe system
C80
14.1.1 Skip 366
14.1.1.1 Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 366
14.1.1.4 PLC Skip ○ ○ ― ― △ 369
14.1.1.5 Speed Change Skip ― ― ― ― ― 369
14.1.1.6 Torque Limitation Skip ○ ― ― ― △ 370
14.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 378
14.1.6 Workpiece Position Measurement ― ― ― ― ― 379
14.1.7 Rotation Measurement ― ― ― ― ― 381
― ― ― ― ― 383
Measurement
14.2.1.3 Tool Life Management III ― ― ― ― ― 384
99 sets ― ○ ○ ○ ― 385
128 sets ― ― ― ― ○ 385
200 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
256 sets ○ ― ― ― △ 385
400 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
999 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
○ ○ ― ― ○ 387
Part Systems
14.3 Others 389
14.3.2 Auto Power OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 389
14.3.4 Load Monitoring I ― ― ― ― ― 390
14.3.5 Power ON/OFF Sequence ― ― ― ― ― 390
14.3.6 PLC Axis Current Limit ― ― ― ― ○ 390
15.1.1 Emergency Stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 392
15.2.1 NC Warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 393
15.2.2 NC Alarm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 393
15.3 Protection 396
Lathe system
C80
15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB ○ ○ ― ― △ 399
15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB ○ ○ ― ― △ 399
15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC ○ ○ ― ― △ 400
15.3.3 Stroke Check before Travel ○ ○ ― ― ― 401
15.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 403
15.3.5 Interlock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 404
15.3.7 Interference Check III ― ― ― ― ― 405
15.3.9.1 Door Interlock I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 408
15.3.10 Parameter Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 412
15.3.13 Data Protection by User's Level ○ ○ ― ― △ 412
15.3.16 Machine Group-based Alarm Stop ○ ○ ― ― △ 413
○ ― ― ― ― 415
Systems
15.3.18 Spindle Protection ○ ○ ― ― ― 416
15.4.2 Data Sampling ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 418
15.4.3 NC Data Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 418
15.4.4.1 NC Analyzer2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 419
15.4.5 Automatic Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 421
15.4.8 Application Error Detection ― ― ― ― ― 421
15.4.9 Email Notification to Operator ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 422
15.4.10 NC Configurator2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 423
15.4.12 Backup/Restore ― ― ― ― ○ 423
15.5.1 Safety Observation ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 424
15.5.2.1 Safety-related I/O Observation □ □ ― ― △ 425
15.5.2.2 Emergency Stop Observation □ □ ― ― △ 425
15.5.2.3.1 SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) □ □ ― ― △ 426
15.5.2.3.2 SLP (Safely-Limited Position) □ □ ― ― △ 426
15.5.2.3.3 SOS (Safe Operating Stop) □ □ ― ― △ 426
15.5.2.3.4 SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) □ □ ― ― △ 426
Lathe system
C80
□ □ ― ― △ 427
/Safe Brake Test)
15.5.2.3.6 SCA (Safe Cam) □ □ ― ― △ 427
15.5.2.3.7 SS1/SS2 (Safe Stop) □ □ ― ― △ 427
15.5.2.3.8 STO (Safe Torque Off) □ □ ― ― △ 427
16 Drive System 429
Feed axis -
MDS-E-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJ-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJH-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EM-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
Spindle -
MDS-E-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJ-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EM-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
Power supply -
MDS-E-CV □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-CV □ □ □ □ □ -
17.1 PLC 432
17.1.1 Built-in PLC Processing Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 432
△
17.1.2.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function ○ ○ ○ ○ 432
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.2.1.1 Index Modification ○ ○ ○ ○ 435
(MELSEC)
17.1.2.1.2 Multi-program △
○60 ○60 ○60 ○60 435
[Number of Programs] (MELSEC)
436
Number of PLC projects: 1 ― ○ ○ ○ ― 436
Number of PLC projects: 3 ○ ― ― ― ― 436
Number of PLC projects: 6 ― ― ― ― ― 436
△
17.1.2.1.4 Function Block (FB) ○ ○ ○ ○ 436
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.2.1.5 Label Programming ○ ○ ○ ○ 436
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.2.2 PLC Exclusive Instruction ○ ○ ― ― 437
(MELSEC)
17.1.3.1 Alarm Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 438
17.1.3.2 Operator Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(*5) 438
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 439
32 Points
Lathe system
C80
― ― ― ― ― 439
64 Points
― ― ― ― ― 439
96 points
△
17.1.3.6 Ladder Program Writing during RUN ○ ○ ○ ○ 440
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.3.7 PLC Program Protection ○ ○ ○ ○ 440
(MELSEC)
17.1.4.1 Standard PLC Capacity △
○64000 ○32000 ○20000 ○20000 441
[Number of Steps] (MELSEC)
17.1.4.2 Large PLC Capacity: 256000 Steps ― ― ― ― ― 441
△
17.1.5 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ 441
(MELSEC)
17.1.6 Ladder Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 442
17.1.7.1 On-board Development ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 443
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 443
(GX Developer)
17.1.7.3 MELSEC Development Tool (GX Works3) ― ― ― ― ○ 443
― ― ― ― ― 444
(Up to 755 Points)
△
17.1.9.2 CC-Link Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ 445
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.9.3 CC-Link IE Field Connection ― ― ― ― 445
(MELSEC)
17.2.1 Servo OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 447
17.2.2 Axis Detachment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 448
17.2.3 Synchronous Control ○ ○ ― ― △ 449
17.2.4 Inclined Axis Control ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 453
17.2.5 Position Switch ○24 ○24 ○24 ○24 ○(*6) 454
― ― ― ― ― 457
along the Tool Axis
17.2.11 Tool Center Point Control ― ― ― ― ― 459
17.2.12 Inclined Surface Machining Command ○ ― ― ― ― 461
○ ○ ○ ― ― 463
Command
Compensation (Tool's ― ― ― ― ― 465
Lathe system
C80
― ― ― ― ― 466
Compensation
17.2.16 3-dimensional Manual Feed ○ ― ― ― ― 467
17.2.17 R-Navi ― ― ― ― ― 468
17.2.20.1 Real-time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) ○ ― ― ― ― 470
○ ― ― ― ― 471
17.2.21 Constant Torque Control ○ ― ― ― ― 472
17.2.22 External Encoder Position Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 473
17.3.2 Circular Feed in Manual Mode ― ― ― ― ― 476
17.3.3 PLC Axis Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 478
17.3.6 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover ○ ○ ― ― △ 481
17.4.3 PLC Window ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 485
17.4.4 External Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 486
17.4.6 Buzzer Sound Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 487
17.5.1.1 DI:64/DO:64 ― ― □ □ ― 488
17.5.1.2 DI:64/DO:64 + SDI:8 ― ― □ □ ― 488
17.5.1.3 DI:96/DO:64 □ □ □ □ ― 488
17.5.1.5 DI:64/DO:48/AO:1 □ □ □ □ ― 488
17.5.2 Remote I/O 489
17.5.2.1 DI:32/DO:32 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.2 DI:64/DO:48 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.3 DI:64/DO:48 + AO:1 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.5 DI:16/DO:8 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.6 DI:32/DO:32 + SDI:8/SDO:4 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.7 SDI:8/SDO:4 □ □ □ □ ― 489
△
17.6.1 CC-Link (Master/Local) □ □ □ □ 490
(MELSEC)
17.6.2 PROFIBUS-DP (Master) □ □ □ □ ― 496
△
17.6.3 CC-Link IE Field (Master/Local) □ □ □ □ 497
(MELSEC)
17.6.5 EtherNet/IP □ □ □ □ ― 499
17.7.1 Customization (NC Designer2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 500
6 6 1 1 ― 502
Capacity [MB]
Lathe system
C80
3 3 1 1 ― 502
[MB]
17.7.2 User-defined Key ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 502
17.7.3 EZSocket I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 502
17.7.4 APLC Release ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 503
17.7.5 Custom API Library ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 504
17.7.6 MES Interface Library ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 504
17.7.7 SLMP Server ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 505
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 506
FCSB1224W000
17.7.10 GOT2000 Screen Design Tool GT Works3 ― ― ― ― ○ 506
17.8 Others 507
17.8.1 System Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 507
17.8.2.1 NC Monitor2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.2.2 NC Explorer ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.5 EcoMonitorLight Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 508
17.8.6 GOT Window ― ― ― ― ○ 509
17.8.7 Log Viewer ― ― ― ― ○ 510
(*2)G/B: Guide Bush

(*4)eSSS supported.
(*5)Only the macro alarm message
can be displayed.
(*6)24 points for each part system and
32 points for the whole PLC axes.
CONTENTS
MITSUBISHI CNC M80/E80/C80 Series Specifications List [M system]
C80
1 Control Axes 1
1.1 Control Axes 2
1.1.2 Max. Number of Axes
11 9 6 4 16 2
(NC Axes + Spindles + PLC Axes)
8 6 5(*1) 3 16 2
1.1.2.2 Max. Number of Spindles 2 2 1 1 7 2
4 4 4 3 4 3
Control Axes
1.1.6 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System 8 5 5(*1) 3 8 3
1.1.7 Axis Name Extension ○ ○ ― ― ― 3
1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems (Main + Sub) ○2 ○1 ○1 ○1 △7 4
1.2.2.1 Max. Number of Main Part Systems ○2 ○1 ○1 ○1 △7 4
1.2.2.2 Max. Number of Sub Part Systems ― ― ― ― ― 4

1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes ― 5
1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 5
1.3.2 Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
1.3.3 MDI Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5
― ― ― ― ― 6
Program Server Mode
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 6
Program Server Mode
1.3.5 Front-side SD Card Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 7
1.3.6 Front-side USB Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 7
2 Input Command 9
Least command increment 0.1µm ○ ○ ○ ― ○ 10
2.2 Unit System 13
C80
2.2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13
― ― ― ― ― 14
(G Code List 2, 3)
― ― ― ― ― 14
(G Code List 4, 5)
― ― ― ― ― 14
(G Code List 6, 7)
2.3.1.4 Format 1 for Machining Center ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
○ ○ ― ― ○ 14
(M2 Format)
2.3.1.6 MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format ― ― ― ― ― 14
2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation ― ― ― ― ― 19
2.4.4 Diameter/Radius Designation Switch ― ― ― ― ― 20
3.1 Positioning 22
3.1.1 Positioning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 22
3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 23
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25
3.2.4 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ○ ― ― ― △ 29
3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation ○ ○ ― ― △ 31
3.2.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ― ― ― ― △ 32
3.2.7 Milling Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 33
3.3.1 Involute Interpolation ○ ― ― ― ― 35
3.3.2 Exponential Interpolation ― ― ― ― ― 36
3.3.3 Spline Interpolation (G05.1Q2/G61.2) ○ ― ― ― △ 37
3.3.6 Spline Interpolation2 (G61.4) ○ ― ― ― △ 40
4 Feed 43
4.1 Feedrate 44
C80
4.2.2 Feed per Revolution (Synchronous Feed) ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 49
4.2.3 Inverse Time Feed ○ ― ― ― △ 51
4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 52
4.2.5 Manual Speed Command ○ ○ ○ ― △ 53
4.2.7 G00 Feedrate Designation (,F Command) ○ ― ― ― △ 53
4.3 Override 55
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 57
after Interpolation
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 59
○ ○ ― ― △ 63
○ ○ ○ ○ △ 64
4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting ― ― ― ― ― 67
4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle ○ ○ ― ― △ 70
4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle ○ ○ ― ― △ 72
― ― ― ― △ 74
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 74
4.5.4 Chamfering ― ― ― ― ― 74
4.5.6 Circular Thread Cutting ― ― ― ― ― 75
4.5.8 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD) ○ ○ ― ― ○ 76
4.5.10 Thread Recutting ― ― ― ― ― 77
4.5.11 Thread Cutting Override ― ― ― ― ― 78
4.5.12 Variable Feed Thread Cutting ― ― ― ― ― 78
4.5.13 Thread Cutting Time Constant Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 79
4.6 Manual Feed 80
4.6.2 Jog Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 80
4.6.4 Handle Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 81
4.7 Dwell 85
4.7.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation) ― ― ― ― ― 86
C80
88
230kB[600m] (400 programs) ― ― ― ― ― 88
500kB[1280m] (1000 programs) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 88
1000kB[2560m] (1000 programs) ― ― ― ― ― 88
2000kB[5120m] (1000 programs) ― ― ― ― ― 88
5.2 Editing 89
― ― ― ― ― 92
Program Editing
○ ― ― ― ― 92
5.2.7 Finish Shape View Programming ○ ○ ― ― ― 93
6.1.1 Color Display (8.4-type LCD TFT) □ □ ○ ○ ― 96
□ □ ― ― ― 96
(10.4-type LCD TFT)
□ □ ― ― ― 96
(15-type LCD TFT)
― ― ― ― ― 96
(8.4-type LCD TFT)
― ― ― ― ― 96
― ― ― ― ― 96
― ― ― ― ― 96
― ― ― ― ― 97
Display ― ― ― ― ― 97
― ― ― ― ○ 97
12.1/10.4/8.4/5.7)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 98
6.2.3 Multiple Display Connection ― ― ― ― ○(GOT) 99
6.2.4 Common Display to Multiple NCs ― ― ― ― ○(GOT) 99
6.2.5 Displayed Part System Switch ○ ― ― ― ○ 99
6.2.6 Menu List ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100
6.2.8 External Signal Display Switch ○ ― ― ― ○ 100
6.2.9 Screen Saver ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 100
6.2.11 Alarm Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 101
― ― ― ― ― 101
Warning
C80
6.2.14 Screenshot Capture ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 101
6.2.16 PC-NC Network Automatic Connection ― ― ― ― ― 102
6.2.17 Device Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 102
6.2.18 SRAM Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 102
6.2.20 Remote Desktop Connection ○ ○ ― ― ― 103
6.2.21 VNC Server ○ ○ ― ― ― 104
6.3.1 Status Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105
6.3.2 Clock Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105
6.3.8 Home Application ― ― ― ― ― 108
6.3.9 Home Screen ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 109
6.3.10.1 Japanese □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.2 English ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 110
6.3.10.3 German □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.4 Italian □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.5 French □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.6 Spanish □ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.7 Chinese 110
□ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.7.2 Chinese
□ □ □ □ □ 110
6.3.10.8 Korean □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.9 Portuguese □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.10 Hungarian □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.11 Dutch □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.12 Swedish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.13 Turkish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.14 Polish □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.15 Russian □ □ □ □ □ 111
6.3.10.16 Czech □ □ □ □ □ 111
C80
7.2.1 RS-232C I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 115
7.2.2 SD Card I/F 115
― ― ― ― ― 115
[Up to 32GB]
7.2.2.2 Front-side SD Card I/F [Up to 32GB] ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 115
7.2.3 Ethernet I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 115
7.2.4 Display Unit-side Data Server I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 116
7.2.5 Front-side USB Memory I/F [Up to 32GB] ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 116
7.2.6 USB I/F (GOT Front-side USB I/F) ― ― ― ― ○ 116
7.2.7 SD I/F (GOT Back-side SD Card I/F) ― ― ― ― ○ 116
7.3.1 Computer Link B ○ ○ ― ― ― 117
7.4 Others 118
7.4.1 Handy Terminal Connection ○ ○ ― ― ― 118
△
8.1.1.2 Spindle Analog I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
(MELSEC)
8.1.1.3 Coil Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121
8.1.1.5 Encoder Input I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 122
8.1.1.6 Spindle-mode Servo Motor Control ○ ○ ― ― ― 123
8.1.1.7 Spindle-mode Rotary Axis Control ○ ― ― ― ― 124
8.1.1.8 Turret Gear Change Control ― ― ― ― ― 125
8.1.2 S Code Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 126
8.1.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control I ― ― ― ― ― 130
8.1.5.2 Multiple-spindle Control II ○ ○ ― ― ○ 131
133
○ ○ ○ ― ○ 133
― ― ― ― △ 134
8.1.8.1 Spindle Synchronization I ○ ○ ― ― ○ 135
8.1.8.2 Spindle Synchronization II ○ ○ ― ― ○ 136
― ― ― ― ― 136
Synchronization
― ― ― ― ― 137
― ― ― ― ― 138
C80
― ― ― ― ― 139
― ― ― ― ― 140
(Hobbing)
8.1.13 Spindle Oscillation ― ― ― ― ― 141
8.1.14 Spindle Superimposition Control ― ― ― ― ― 142
― ― ― ― ― 144
Set Control
8.1.16 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection ○ ○ ― ― ― 146
8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Traveling ― ― ― ― ― 151
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 152
High-speed Output
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 154
Extension
9.1.2 Tool Position Offset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 159
9.1.3 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes ― ― ― ― ― 159
9.2 Tool Radius 161
9.2.1 Tool Radius Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 161
9.2.2 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ― ― ― ― ― 163
― ― ― ― ― 164
(G40/41/42)
― ― ― ― ― 165
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 165
Designation
99 sets ― ― ― ○ ― 166
128 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
200 sets ― ― ○ ― ○ 166
256 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
400 sets ○ ○ ― ― △ 166
999 sets ― ― ― ― ― 166
○ ○ ― ― ― 170
by Parameter
C80
― ― ― ― ― 171
to Part Systems
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179
Selection (6 Sets)
System Selection (48 Sets) ○ ○ ○ ― △ 181
G54.1P1 to P48
G54.1P1 to P96
G54.1P1 to P300
― ― ― ― ― 183
(G92.1)
10.1.9 Plane Selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 186
10.1.11 Counter Set ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 188
10.1.13 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift ― ― ― ― ― 189
10.2 Return 190
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 191
Return
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 193
Return
11.1.2 Optional Block Skip Addition ○ ○ ― ― ○ 198
11.1.3 Single Block ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 199
11.2.1 Dry Run ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.2 Machine Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200
11.2.4.1 Graphic Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 201
11.2.4.2 3D Solid Program Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 201
11.2.4.3 Graphic Check Rotary Axis Drawing ― ― ― ― ― 202
C80
11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 203
11.2.5.2 Graphic Trace Rotary Axis Drawing ― ― ― ― ― 204
11.2.6 Machining Time Computation ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 204
○ ○ ― ― △ 205
11.3.1 Program Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 207
11.3.3 Verification Stop ○ ○ ― ― ○ 207
11.3.4 Program Restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 209
11.3.6 NC Reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 210
11.3.7 Feed Hold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.3.8 Search & Start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
11.3.10 Auto-restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 212
Interruption
11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract ○ ― ― ― ― 214
11.4.5 Tapping Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 215
11.4.7 Arbitrary Reverse Run ○ ― ― ― ― 217
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
Automatic Modes
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 218
Handle Modes
11.4.12 Tool Retract and Return ○ ○ ― ― ― 220
11.4.13 Skip Retract ○ ○ ― ― ○ 221
12.1.1 Program 224
12.1.1.2 Figure Rotation ― ― ― ― ― 226
12.1.1.3 Scaling ○ ○ ○ ― △ 228
12.1.1.4 Axis Name Switch ― ― ― ― ― 229
200 sets ― ― ― ○ ― 236
600 sets ― ― ○ ― ― 236
C80
700 sets ○ ○ ― ― ○ 236
8000 sets ○ ― ― ― ― 236
(600+100×number of part systems) sets ○ ― ― ― ○ 236
(7900+100×number of part systems) sets ○ ― ― ― ― 236
12.1.3.2 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II) ― ― ― ― ― 244
12.1.3.3 Special Fixed Cycle ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 245
12.1.3.4 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining ○ ― ― ― ― 248
― ― ― ― ― 253
― ― ― ― ― 262
○ ○ ― ― ― 263
Cycle
12.1.4.3 Mirror Image by G Code ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 264
12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ― ― ― ― ― 265
― ― ― ― ― 265
12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 266
○ ― ― ― △ 269
Conversion
12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering/Corner R ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 270
12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command ○ ○ ○ ― △ 277
12.1.6.3 Geometric Command ○ ○ ○ ― ― 278
12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command ○ ○ ― ― △ 281
12.1.7.1 Chopping 282
12.1.7.1.1 Chopping ○ ○ ― ― ― 282
12.1.7.2 Normal Line Control ○ ― ― ― ○ 283
12.1.7.3 Circular Cutting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 284
○ ― ― ― ○ 285
○ ― ― ― ○ 286
Synchronization
― ― ― ― ― 289
― ― ― ― ― 290
Control
12.1.8.4.1 Control Axis Superimposition ― ― ― ― ― 291
― ― ― ― ― 293
Control
C80
― ― ― ― ― 293
12.1.8.6 Balance Cut ― ― ― ― ― 295
12.1.8.7 Common Memory for Part Systems ― ― ― ― ― 297
297
Thread Cutting
― ― ― ― ― 298
Thread Cutting
― ― ― ― ― 300
Thread Cutting
○ ― ― ― ○ 301
Management
302
Systems
― ― ― ― ― 302
Systems
― ― ― ― ― 303
Time Override
― ― ― ― ― 304
12.1.8.11 Sub Part System Control I ― ― ― ― ― 305
12.1.8.12 Sub Part System Control II ― ― ― ― ― 307
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 314
by Program
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 316
12.1.9.6 R-Navi Data Input by Program ○ ― ― ― ― 316
12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 317
12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 317
12.1.11.1 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap ○ ○ ― ― △ 318
12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
12.2.2.3 Error Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 323
325
○33.7 ○16.8 ― ― △ 325
○67.5 ○67.5 ― ― △ 326
12.3.2.1 High-accuracy Control (G61.1/G08) ○ ○ ○ ― △ 327
○ ― ― ― △ 331
C80
12.3.2.3 SSS Control ○ ○ ― (*4) ― △ 332
12.3.2.4 Tolerance Control ○ ○ ○ ― △ 333
― ― ― ― ― 335
Control
○33.7 ○33.7 ― ― △ 336
○67.5 ○67.5 ― ― △ 337
○135 ― ― ― △ 340
12.3.3.4 Smooth Fairing ○ ― ― ― △ 342
12.3.4 Machining Condition Selection I ○ ○ ― ― ○ 343
12.4.1 Playback ○ ○ ○ ― ○ 344
12.4.3 Interactive Cycle Insertion ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 345
12.4.4 Simple Programming (NAVI MILL/LATHE) ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 348
12.4.5 G code Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 348
12.4.7 DXF Data Input ― ― ― ― ― 349
○16 ○16 ○16 ○16 ○10 353
[sets]
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 354
Compensation
○ ○ ○ ○ △ 355
Compensation
13.1.5 Circular Error Radius Compensation ○ ○ ― ― △ 355
○ ○ ― ― △ 356
Compensation
○ ○ ○ ○ △ 358
13.1.9 Two-way Pitch Error Compensation ○ ○ ― ― △ 359
13.2.2 Dual Feedback ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 361
13.2.4 OMR II (Backlash with Filter) ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 362
13.2.6 OMR-FF ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 363
○ ○ ― ― ― 364
Detection
C80
14.1.1 Skip 366
14.1.1.1 Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 366
14.1.1.4 PLC Skip ○ ○ ― ― △ 369
14.1.1.5 Speed Change Skip ― ― ― ― ― 369
14.1.1.6 Torque Limitation Skip ― ― ― ― ― 370
14.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement ― ― ― ― ― 378
14.1.6 Workpiece Position Measurement ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 379
14.1.7 Rotation Measurement ○ ○ ― ― ○ 381
― ― ― ― ― 383
Measurement
14.2.1.3 Tool Life Management III ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 384
99 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
128 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
200 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 385
256 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
400 sets ― ― ― ― △ 385
999 sets ― ― ― ― ― 385
― ― ― ― ― 387
Part Systems
14.3 Others 389
14.3.2 Auto Power OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 389
14.3.4 Load Monitoring I ― ― ― ― ― 390
14.3.5 Power ON/OFF Sequence ― ― ― ― ― 390
14.3.6 PLC Axis Current Limit ― ― ― ― ○ 390
15.1.1 Emergency Stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 392
15.2.1 NC Warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 393
15.2.2 NC Alarm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 393
15.3 Protection 396
C80
15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB ○ ○ ― ― △ 399
15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB ○ ○ ― ― △ 399
15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC ○ ○ ― ― △ 400
15.3.3 Stroke Check before Travel ○ ○ ― ― △ 401
15.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Check ― ― ― ― ― 403
15.3.5 Interlock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 404
15.3.7 Interference Check III ― ― ― ― ― 405
15.3.9.1 Door Interlock I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 408
15.3.10 Parameter Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 412
15.3.13 Data Protection by User's Level ○ ○ ― ― △ 412
15.3.16 Machine Group-based Alarm Stop ○ ○ ― ― △ 413
― ― ― ― ― 415
Systems
15.3.18 Spindle Protection ○ ○ ― ― ― 416
15.4.2 Data Sampling ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 418
15.4.3 NC Data Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 418
15.4.4.1 NC Analyzer2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 419
15.4.5 Automatic Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 421
15.4.8 Application Error Detection ― ― ― ― ― 421
15.4.9 Email Notification to Operator ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 422
15.4.10 NC Configurator2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 423
15.4.12 Backup/Restore ― ― ― ― ○ 423
15.5.1 Safety Observation ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 424
15.5.2.1 Safety-related I/O Observation □ □ ― ― △ 425
15.5.2.2 Emergency Stop Observation □ □ ― ― △ 425
15.5.2.3.1 SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) □ □ ― ― △ 426
15.5.2.3.2 SLP (Safely-Limited Position) □ □ ― ― △ 426
15.5.2.3.3 SOS (Safe Operating Stop) □ □ ― ― △ 426
15.5.2.3.4 SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) □ □ ― ― △ 426
C80
□ □ ― ― △ 427
/Safe Brake Test)
15.5.2.3.6 SCA (Safe Cam) □ □ ― ― △ 427
15.5.2.3.7 SS1/SS2 (Safe Stop) □ □ ― ― △ 427
15.5.2.3.8 STO (Safe Torque Off) □ □ ― ― △ 427
16 Drive System 429
Feed axis -
MDS-E-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJ-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJH-Vx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EM-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
Spindle -
MDS-E-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EJ-SPx □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EM-SPVx □ □ □ □ □ -
Power supply -
MDS-E-CV □ □ □ □ □ -
MDS-EH-CV □ □ □ □ □ -
17.1 PLC 432
17.1.1 Built-in PLC Processing Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 432
△
17.1.2.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function ○ ○ ○ ○ 432
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.2.1.1 Index Modification ○ ○ ○ ○ 435
(MELSEC)
17.1.2.1.2 Multi-program △
○60 ○60 ○60 ○60 435
[Number of Programs] (MELSEC)
436
Number of PLC projects: 1 ― ○ ○ ○ ― 436
Number of PLC projects: 3 ○ ― ― ― ― 436
Number of PLC projects: 6 ― ― ― ― ― 436
△
17.1.2.1.4 Function Block (FB) ○ ○ ○ ○ 436
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.2.1.5 Label Programming ○ ○ ○ ○ 436
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.2.2 PLC Exclusive Instruction ○ ○ ― ― 437
(MELSEC)
17.1.3.1 Alarm Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 438
17.1.3.2 Operator Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(*5) 438
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 439
32 Points
C80
― ― ― ― ― 439
64 Points
― ― ― ― ― 439
96 points
△
17.1.3.6 Ladder Program Writing during RUN ○ ○ ○ ○ 440
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.3.7 PLC Program Protection ○ ○ ○ ○ 440
(MELSEC)
17.1.4.1 Standard PLC Capacity △
○64000 ○32000 ○20000 ○20000 441
[Number of Steps] (MELSEC)
△
17.1.5 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ 441
(MELSEC)
17.1.6 Ladder Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 442
17.1.7.1 On-board Development ○ ○ ○ ○ ○(GOT) 443
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 443
(GX Developer)
17.1.7.3 MELSEC Development Tool (GX Works3) ― ― ― ― ○ 443
― ― ― ― ― 444
(Up to 755 Points)
△
17.1.9.2 CC-Link Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ 445
(MELSEC)
△
17.1.9.3 CC-Link IE Field Connection ― ― ― ― 445
(MELSEC)
17.2.1 Servo OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 447
17.2.2 Axis Detachment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 448
17.2.3 Synchronous Control ○ ○ ― ― △ 449
17.2.4 Inclined Axis Control ○ ○ ― ― ― 453
17.2.5 Position Switch ○24 ○24 ○24 ○24 ○(*6) 454
― ― ― ― ― 457
along the Tool Axis
17.2.11 Tool Center Point Control ○(*7) ― ― ― ― 459
17.2.12 Inclined Surface Machining Command ○ ― ― ― △ 461
― ― ― ― ― 463
Command
Compensation (Tool's ― ― ― ― ― 465
C80
― ― ― ― ― 466
Compensation
17.2.16 3-dimensional Manual Feed ○ ― ― ― △ 467
17.2.17 R-Navi ○ ― ― ― ― 468
17.2.20.1 Real-time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) ○ ― ― ― ― 470
○ ― ― ― ― 471
17.2.21 Constant Torque Control ― ― ― ― ― 472
17.2.22 External Encoder Position Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 473
17.2.23 Multiple-axis Synchronization Control ― ― ○ ― ― 474
17.3.2 Circular Feed in Manual Mode ― ― ― ― ― 476
17.3.3 PLC Axis Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 478
17.3.6 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover ○ ○ ― ― △ 481
17.4.3 PLC Window ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 485
17.4.4 External Search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 486
17.4.6 Buzzer Sound Control ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 487
17.5.1.1 DI:64/DO:64 ― ― □ □ ― 488
17.5.1.2 DI:64/DO:64 + SDI:8 ― ― □ □ ― 488
17.5.1.3 DI:96/DO:64 □ □ □ □ ― 488
17.5.1.5 DI:64/DO:48/AO:1 □ □ □ □ ― 488
17.5.2 Remote I/O 489
17.5.2.1 DI:32/DO:32 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.2 DI:64/DO:48 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.3 DI:64/DO:48 + AO:1 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.5 DI:16/DO:8 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.6 DI:32/DO:32 + SDI:8/SDO:4 □ □ □ □ ― 489
17.5.2.7 SDI:8/SDO:4 □ □ □ □ ― 489
△
17.6.1 CC-Link (Master/Local) □ □ □ □ 490
(MELSEC)
17.6.2 PROFIBUS-DP (Master) □ □ □ □ ― 496
△
17.6.3 CC-Link IE Field (Master/Local) □ □ □ □ 497
(MELSEC)
17.6.5 EtherNet/IP □ □ □ □ ― 499
17.7.1 Customization (NC Designer2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 500
6 6 1 1 ― 502
Capacity [MB]
C80
3 3 1 1 ― 502
[MB]
17.7.2 User-defined Key ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 502
17.7.3 EZSocket I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 502
17.7.4 APLC Release ○ ○ ○ ○ △ 503
17.7.5 Custom API Library ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 504
17.7.6 MES Interface Library ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 504
17.7.7 SLMP Server ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 505
○ ○ ○ ○ ― 506
FCSB1224W000
17.7.10 GOT2000 Screen Design Tool GT Works3 ― ― ― ― ○ 506
17.8 Others 507
17.8.1 System Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 507
17.8.2.1 NC Monitor2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.2.2 NC Explorer ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 507
17.8.5 EcoMonitorLight Connection ○ ○ ○ ○ ― 508
17.8.6 GOT Window ― ― ― ― ○ 509
17.8.7 Log Viewer ― ― ― ― ○ 510
(*1)Up to one rotary axis.

(*4)eSSS supported.
(*5)Only the macro alarm message
can be displayed.
(*6)24 points for each part system and
32 points for the whole PLC axes.
(*7)Restrained to 4-axis
simultaneous contouring
1
Control Axes
1 IB-1501505-C
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Specifications Manual (Function)
1 Control Axes
1.1 Control Axes
The NC axis, spindle, PLC axis and auxiliary axis are generically called the control axis.
The NC axis is an axis that can be manually operated, or automatically operated with the machining program. X, Y, Z, U,
V, W, A, B and C axis can be used.
The PLC axis is an axis that can be controlled from the PLC ladder.
1.1.1 Number of Basic Control Axes (NC Axes)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○3 ○3 ○3 ○3 ○3 ○3 ○3 ○3 ○3 ○3
L ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2
1.1.2 Max. Number of Axes (NC Axes + Spindles + PLC Axes)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16
M 11 11 9 6 4 16
△ 32 △ 32 △ 32 △ 32
○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16
L 12 12 9 8 5 16
△ 32 △ 32 △ 32 △ 32
A number of axes that are within the maximum number of axes, and that does not exceed the maximum number given
for the NC axis, spindle and PLC axis can be used.
Connection specifications of NC axis, PLC axis and spindle:

NC axes, PLC axes and spindles (except for analog spindles) are connected to the high-speed optical servo
communication (OPTH).
Refer to the Connection and Setup Manual for details.
1.1.2.1 Max. Number of NC Axes (In Total for All the Part Systems)
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 8 8 6 5 (*1) 3 16
○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16
L 10 10 7 5 4 16
△ 32 △ 32 △ 32 △ 32
(*1) Up to one rotary axis.
1.1.2.2 Max. Number of Spindles

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 7
L 8 8 8 8 4+G/B (*1) 4+G/B (*1) 3 3 2 4
(*1) G/B : Guide Bush
Includes analog spindles.
1.1.2.3 Max. Number of PLC Axes

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 8 8 8 8 6 6 6 2 0 8
L 8 8 8 8 6 6 6 3 3 8
IB-1501505-C 2
1 Control Axes
1.1.4 Max. Number of PLC Indexing Axes

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 8 8 8 8 4 4 4 1 0 8
L 8 8 8 8 4 4 4 1 0 8
PLC axis indexing function: This function is used to move the PLC axis to the positioning destination or an arbitrary
coordinate position.
1.1.5 Number of Simultaneous Contouring Control Axes

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 8 4 8 4 4 4 4 4 3 4
L 8 4 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Simultaneous control of all axes is possible as a principle in the same part system.
However, for actual use, the machine tool builder specification will apply.
1.1.6 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
○8 ○8 ○8 ○8
M 8 8 5 5 (*1) 3 8
△ 12 △ 12 △ 12 △ 12
○8 ○8 ○8 ○8
L 8 8 5 5 4 8
△ 12 △ 12 △ 12 △ 12
(*1) Up to one rotary axis.
Listed are the maximum number of axes which can be controlled in a part system. Follow the specifications by each
machine tool builder for actual use.
1.1.7 Axis Name Extension

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
The axis name (command axis name) to perform the absolute/incremental value command to NC control axis can be
expanded to two letters. Because the command axis name while this function is invalid is set with one letter from A, B, C,
U, V, W, X, Y or Z, when the increment command axis name is used (two letters of the alphabet are used per one axis),
the number of axes is limited. The incremental axis name can be used to all axes by this function. The name extension
axis cannot be designated to the parameter which sets the command axis name such as axes configuring plane I, J or K.
Thus, apply this function to miscellaneous axis which is not used for machining (cutting).
3 IB-1501505-C
1 Control Axes
1.2 Control Part System
1.2.1 Standard Number of Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems (Main + Sub)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○1 ○1 ○1 △7
○4 ○4 ○4 ○4
L ○4 ○4 ○2 ○1 ○1 △3
△8 △8 △8 △8
For actual use, the machine tool builder specification will apply.
1.2.2.1 Max. Number of Main Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○1 ○1 ○1 △7
○4 ○4 ○4 ○4
L ○2 ○2 ○2 ○1 ○1 △3
△8 △8 △8 △8
1.2.2.2 Max. Number of Sub Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ― ― ― ― ― ―
○4 ○4 ○4 ○4
L ○2 ○2 ○1 ― ― △2
△8 △8 △8 △8
IB-1501505-C 4
1 Control Axes
1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes
1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
In this mode, operation is performed using the machining program data from the RS-232C interface built in the CNC unit.
A paper tape reader must be provided if machining programs on paper tape are to be run.
1.3.2 Memory Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The machining programs stored in the memory of the CNC unit are run.
1.3.3 MDI Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The MDI data stored in the memory of the CNC unit is executed. Once executed, the MDI data is set to the "setting
incomplete" status, and the data will not be executed unless the "setting completed" status is established by screen
operations.
5 IB-1501505-C
1 Control Axes
1.3.4 High-Speed Program Server Mode
1.3.4.1 Control Unit-side High-speed Program Server Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ ― ― ○ ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ ― ― ○ ― ― ― ― ―
The machining program stored in SD card can be operated by installing a SD card in the control unit SD card interface.
From this, mass capacity and multi-process machining can be done.
Machining programs can be copied to SD card with the front SD card or Ethernet on the input/output screen.
When a machining program stored in SD card is searched while "DS" (Data server) is selected for device during
operation search, the machining program in SD card can be operated as a main program. (The operation mode is
"memory mode".)
Also, when "M198 Pp;" is commanded in the main program, the machining program in SD card can be called and
operated as a sub program.
Macros such as WHILE, IF and GOTO can be used. Also, calling the sub program and macro program stored in memory
or SD card is possible.
1.3.4.2 Display Unit-side High-speed Program Server Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ /― △ /― △ △ ○ /― ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L △ /― △ /― △ △ ○ /― ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
* Specifications of separated-type display are classified with "Windows-based" and "Windows-less"
The machining program stored in the built-in disk of the display unit can be operated.
The built-in disk of the display unit is mounted in the personal computer for M800W/M80W.
For M800S/M80/E80, the SD card inserted into SD card I/F on the back of the display unit is equivalent to the built-in disk
of the display unit.
When a machining program stored in the built-in disk of the display unit is searched while "HD" (M800W/M80W) or "DS"
(M800S/M80/E80) is selected for device during operation search, the machining program in the built-in disk of the
display unit can be operated as a main program. (The operation mode is "memory mode".)
Also, when "M98 Pp ,Dd;" ("d" for designating a unit) is commanded in the main program, the machining program in the
built-in disk of the display unit can be called and operated as a sub program.
or the built-in disk of the display unit is possible.
IB-1501505-C 6
1 Control Axes
1.3.5 Front-side SD Card Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
The machining program stored in a SD card can be operated. This SD card is installed to the front-side SD card I/F.
When a machining program stored in SD card is searched while "Memory Card" is selected for device during operation
search, the machining program in SD card can be operated as a main program. (The operation mode is "memory
mode".)
Also, when "M98 Pp, Dd;" ("d" for designating a unit) is commanded in the main program, the machining program in SD
card can be called and operated as a sub program.
or SD card is possible.
1.3.6 Front-side USB Memory Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
The control is able to run a machining program stored in a USB memory when it is inserted into the front USB port of the
display unit.
USB memory may be pulled off due to the machine vibration depending on the environment. Use this function at your
own risk.
USB memory mode enables you to handle the same programs as for memory mode. In addition you can handle the
greater number of large-capacity programs.
When a machining program stored in the USB memory is searched while USB is selected for device during operation
search, the machining program in the USB memory can be operated as a main program. (The operation mode is
"memory mode".)
Also, when "M98 Pp ,Dd;" ("d" for designating a unit) is commanded in the main program, the machining program in the
USB memory can be called and operated as a sub program.
Display unit
Front USB port of the display unit
7 IB-1501505-C
1 Control Axes
IB-1501505-C 8
2
Input Command
9 IB-1501505-C
2 Input Command
2.1 Data Increment
2.1.1 Least Command Increment
[M system]
Least command increment M80 M80 E80 E80

M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
(input setting increment) TypeA TypeB TypeA TypeB
1μm (1μm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0.1μm (0.1μm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ○
0.01μm (10nm) △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
0.001μm (1nm) △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
[L system]
Least command increment M80 M80 E80 E80

M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
(input setting increment) TypeA TypeB TypeA TypeB
1μm (1μm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0.1μm (0.1μm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0.01μm (10nm) △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
0.001μm (1nm) △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
The data increment handled in the controller includes the input setting increment, PLC increment and machine error
compensation increment. Each type is set with parameters.
(1) Input setting increment
The input setting increment applies to the data entered from or displayed in the Monitor or other screens, the
travel distance per pulse of manual pulse generator, machining programs, and maintenance data. (Excluding
PLC increment and machine error compensation increment mentioned below.) This increment is applied per
part system (1st to the maximum part system within the specification, PLC axis).
Input setting Metric unit system Inch unit system

increment Linear axis Rotary axis Linear axis Rotary axis
(parameter) (Unit = mm) (Unit = °) (Unit = inch) (Unit = °)
1μm (B) 0.001 0.001 0.0001 0.001
0.1μm (C) 0.0001 0.0001 0.00001 0.0001
10nm (D) 0.00001 0.00001 0.000001 0.00001
1nm (E) 0.000001 0.000001 0.0000001 0.000001
(Note) The inch and metric systems cannot be used together.
IB-1501505-C 10
2 Input Command
(2) PLC increment

PLC increment is used for setting and display of PLC interface. Input-output to ladder is handled with this
increment. (excluding machine error compensation increment) This increment is applied per part system.
(Example)
When writing to 90 degree for A axis and 180 degree for C axis on the A-C axis configuration with using a
rotary axis angle designation (*).
- When PLC increment is 1μm(B).
Angle 1/1000° System unit

<A axis> 90 × 1000 = 90000 ┤├─[ DMOV K90000 R2628]─
<C axis> 180 × 1000 = 180000 ┤├─[ DMOV K180000 R2630]─
- When PLC increment is 1nm(E).
Angle 1/1000000° System unit

<A axis> 90 × 1000000 = 90000000 ┤├─[ DMOV K90000000 R2628]─
<C axis> 180 × 1000000 = 180000000 ┤├─[ DMOV K180000000 R2630]─
(*) Rotary axis angle designation

R2628-2629: part system1, 1st rotary axis of the mechanical axis angle 0 to ±720000(1°/1000) (When
PLC increment is 1μm(B))
R2630-2631: part system1, 2nd rotary axis of the mechanical axis angle 0 to ±720000(1°/1000) (When
PLC increment is 1μm(B))
(3) Machine error compensation increment

Machine error compensation increment is used for setting and display of machine error compensation
amount. This increment is applied per part system.
This increment is applied for following parameters and PLC interface.
(a) Backlash compensation (parameter)
This function compensates for the error (backlash) produced when the direction is reversed.
(b) Pitch error compensation (parameter)
This function compensates for the errors in pitch intervals of ball screws.
(c) Machine rotation center error compensation (parameter)
This function compensates for the errors difference between the center of the actual rotary axis and the
center of programmed rotary axis.
(d) External machine coordinate system compensation (PLC interface)
This function shifts the coordinate system by PLC.
(e) Ball screw thermal displacement compensation (PLC interface)
This function compensates for axis feed error caused by the ball screw thermal expansion, etc.
11 IB-1501505-C
2 Input Command
2.1.2 Least Control Increment
[M system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

Least control increment M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
0.01μm (10nm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0.001μm (1nm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[L system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

Least control increment M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
0.01μm (10nm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0.001μm (1nm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The least control increment determines the CNC's internal operation accuracy.
2.1.3 Indexing Increment

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function limits the command value for the rotary axis.
This can be used for indexing the rotary table, etc. It is possible to cause a program error with a program command other
than an indexing increment (parameter setting value).
(Example)When the indexing increment setting value is 2 degrees, only command with the 2-degree increment are
possible.
G90 G01 C102.000 ; …Moves to the 102 degree angle.
G90 G01 C101.000 ; … Program error
G90 G01 C102 ; … Moves to the 102 degree angle. (Decimal point type II)
IB-1501505-C 12
2 Input Command
2.2 Unit System
2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The unit systems of the data handled in the controller include the metric unit system and inch unit system. The unit (inch/
mm) for the setting and display, as well as for the handle/incremental feed can be switched with either the parameters or
machining program (G20/G21 command).
An additional specification is required when the unit is switched with the machining program command.
Unit system Length data Meaning

Metric unit system 1.0 1.0mm
Inch unit system 1.0 1.0inch
(Note) For the angle data, 1.0 means 1 degree (°) regardless of the unit system.
Data
Screen data (Compensation amount, user
Parameter Machine parameter /
Machining program parameter, counter, etc.) /
PLC interface machine position, etc.
Feedrate of handle, etc.
G20 Inch unit system
0 Metric unit system
G21 Metric unit system
A Not affected
G20 Inch unit system
1 Inch unit system
G21 Metric unit system
0 Metric unit system
B Not affected Not affected
1 Inch unit system
(Note 1) The parameter changeover is valid after the power is turned ON again.
(Note 2) The unit system for the PLC axis can be switched with a parameter different from the one used with the NC
axis.
The PLC axis unit system cannot be switched with the machining program (G20/G21 command).
(Note 3) When the power is turned ON or resetting is performed, the command increment depends on the parameter
setting.
2.2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The program's command increment can be multiplied by an arbitrary scale with the parameter designation.
This function is valid when a decimal point is not used for the command increment.
For example, this function allows a CNC unit, for which the command increment is set to 1μm, to run a machining
program, which has been created with a 10μm input command increment, as same as before.
The scale is set with the parameters.
(Note 1) This function cannot be used for the dwell function G04_X_(P_);.
(Note 2) This function cannot be used for the compensation amount of the tool offset input.
(Note 3) This function can be used when decimal point type I is valid, but cannot be used when decimal point type II is
valid.
(Note 4) This function cannot be used for a tool shape setting command (in G10L100 format).
13 IB-1501505-C
2 Input Command
2.3 Program Format
2.3.1 Program Format
This is G code (program) format.

The G-code of lathe system is selected by parameter.
This manual explains the G function with G-code list 3 as standard.
2.3.1.1 Format 1 for Lathe (G Code List 2, 3)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2.3.1.2 Format 2 for Lathe (G Code List 4, 5)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2.3.1.3 Special Format for Lathe (G Code List 6, 7)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
2.3.1.5 Format 2 for Machining Center (M2 Format)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
2.3.1.6 MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The formats of the turning fixed cycles (G77 to G79), compound type fixed cycle for turning machining (G71 to G76) and
drilling fixed cycles (G80 to G89) can be switched to the MITSUBISHI CNC special formats.
(Note) There is a specification (zigzag thread cutting ) for specific machine tool builder.
IB-1501505-C 14
2 Input Command
2.3.2 Program Format Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
Program format switch is a function designed to switch the program format (G code list) using G codes or PLC signal.
While the switch is active, the control runs a program based on the switched G code list. When you run a lathe-based
multi-tasking machine, and if you change to the G code list of Machining center system, you can use a free-curved
surface machining program made with CAM without modifying the program.
[Switchover using G codes (G code method)]
Command format
Program format switch ON

When G188 is given, the control switches the L-system program format to M-system (G code list 1 (Command type
II)). The control runs the next and subsequent program blocks based on the M-system G code list.
G188 ; Change to M-system G code list (G code list 1 (Command type II))
Program format switch cancel

When G189 is given, the control switches the M-system program format back to L-system (a system selected by
command type parameter). The control runs the next and subsequent program blocks based on the L-system G
code list.
G189 ; Change back to L-system G code list (G code list determined by command type parameter)
Program example
[For G code list 2]
O1 L-system
: (G code list 2 (Command type III)
G188; Enable "Program format switch"
G90 G00 X20. Z200.; M-system
G91 G01 X30. Z180. F100; (G code list 1 (Command type II))
:
G189; Disable "Program format switch"
: L-system
(G code list 2 (Command type III)
15 IB-1501505-C
2 Input Command
[Switchover using PLC signal (PLC I/F method)]
PFCHR ON; Change to M-system G code list (G code list 1 (Command type II))
PFCHR OFF; Change back to L-system G code list (G code list determined by command type parameter)
(Note) A switchover using the PLC I/F method is unavailable during automatic operation.
Program format switch

request (PFCHR)
Program format being
switched (PFCHS)
In automatic operation Run a program based on the M-system G code list

(OP)
G code method and PLC I/F method are distinguished in the following points:
This switches by G188/G189 commands in cycle operation.

G code method
(e.g. to switch the format dynamically for some machining processes)
This switches by PLC signal not in cycle operation.
PLC I/F method
(e.g. to enable the switched state at the time of power up)
IB-1501505-C 16
2 Input Command
2.4 Command Value
2.4.1 Decimal Point Input I, II

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
There are two types of the decimal point input commands and they can be selected by parameter.
(1) Decimal point input type I

When axis coordinates and other data are issued in machining program commands, the assignment of the program
data can be simplified by using a decimal point. The minimum digit of a command not using a decimal point is the
same as the least command increment.
The decimal point can be applied not only to axis coordinate position but also to speed commands and dwell
commands.
The decimal point position serves as the millimeter unit in the metric mode, as the inch unit in the inch mode and as
the second unit in a time designation of dwell command.
(2) Decimal point input type II
As opposed to type I, the minimum digit of a command without a decimal point serves as the millimeter unit in the
metric mode, as the inch unit in the inch mode and as the second unit in the time designation.
The "." (point) must be added when commands below the decimal point are required.
Unit interpretation (for metric system)

Type I Type II
G00 X100. Y-200.5 X100mm, Y-200.5mm <-
G1 X100 F20. X100μm, F20mm/min X100mm, F20mm/min
G1 Y200 F100 (*1) Y200μm, F100mm/min Y200mm, F100mm/min
G4 X1.5 Dwell 1.5s <-
G4 X2 Dwell 2ms Dwell 2s
(*1) The F unit is mm/min for either type (inch system : inch/min).
17 IB-1501505-C
2 Input Command
2.4.2 Absolute/Incremental Command

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) M system
When axis coordinate data is issued in a machining program command, either the incremental command method
(G91) that commands a relative distance from the current position or the absolute command method (G90) that
moves to a designated position in a predetermined coordinate system can be selected.
The absolute and incremental commands can be both used in one block, and are switched with G90 or G91.
However, the arc radius designation (R) and arc center designation (I, J, K) always use incremental designations.
The absolute and incremental commands are switched with G190 and G191 depending on G code list.
G90, G190 ... Absolute command (absolute command)
G91, G191 ... Incremental command (incremental command)
These G codes can be commanded multiple times in one block.
(2) L system
When axis coordinate data is issued in a machining program command, either the incremental command method
that commands a relative distance from the current position or the absolute command method that moves to a
designated position in a predetermined coordinate system can be selected.
When issuing an incremental command, register the axis address to be commanded as the incremental axis name
in the parameter. However, the arc radius designation (R) and arc center designation (I, J, K) always use
incremental designations.
Absolute command (absolute command) ... X, Z
Incremental command (incremental command) ... U, W
(Note) Absolute command and incremental command can be switched by the parameter. In addition to the command
method using the axis addresses as indicated above, a command method using G code (G90/G91 or G190/
G191) may be selected.
IB-1501505-C 18
2 Input Command
2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
For axis command value, the radius designation or diameter designation can be changed over with parameters.
When the diameter designation is selected, the scale of the length of the selected axis is doubled.
(Only the half (1/2) of the commanded amount moves.)
This function is used when programming the workpiece dimensions on a lathe as diameters.
Changing over from the diameter designation to the radius designation or vice versa can be set separately for each axis.
When the tool is to be moved from point P1 to point P2
P1
r2
SP
P2 r1
Z
SP Spindle
Radius and diameter commands

X command U command Remarks
Radius Diameter Radius Diameter Even when a diameter command has been selected, only
the U command can be made a radius command by
X = r1 X = 2r1 U = r2 U = 2r2
parameter.
19 IB-1501505-C
2 Input Command
2.4.4 Diameter/Radius Designation Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
The method of commanding a travel distance (command with a diameter dimension/command with a radius dimension
(as-is distance)) in a program is defined individually for each axis using the parameter. Diameter/Radius designation
switch function; however, enables you to switch the diameter/radius designation of each axis using a G code at your
desired timing. When you use the function to switch diameter/radius designation, it helps you create a program more
flexibly, from turning to milling, according to each machining situation.
X X
Radius
designation
Z Z
Diameter
designation
Diameter/Radius designation for

X axis is switched with G code
Command format
Diameter/Radius designation switch

Diameter/Radius designation switch enables you to select any desired NC axis, excluding rotary axes, and switch
the diameter/radius designation of the axis.
G10.9 Axis address 1__　Axis address 2__ ... Axis address n__ ;
Axis address n : Axis address for which diameter/radius designation is switched
Select radius or diameter designation with a value that follows the axis address.
0: Radius designation
1: Diameter designation
If you select no axis address, the diameter/radius designation statuses of all the axes of the part system are
returned to the initial power-on state.
IB-1501505-C 20
3
Positioning/Interpolation
21 IB-1501505-C
3 Positioning/Interpolation
3.1 Positioning
3.1.1 Positioning
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function carries out high-speed positioning following the movement command given in a program.
G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;(Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W simultaneously)
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 :Position data
The above command positions the tool with rapid traverse rate. The tool path takes the shortest distance to the end point
in the form of a straight line.
For details on the rapid traverse feed rate of the NC, refer to the section entitled "Rapid Traverse Rate".
Since the actual rapid traverse feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications of the machine concerned.
(1) The rapid traverse feed rate can be set for each axis with parameters.
(2) The number of axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the specifications (number of
simultaneously controlled axes). The axes can be used in any combination within this range.
(3) The feed rate is controlled within the range that it does not exceed the rapid traverse rate of each axis and so that
the shortest time is taken. (Linear type)
Parameter setting enables movement at the rapid traverse rates of the respective axes independently for each axis.
In this case, the tool path does not take the form of a straight line to the end point. (Non-Linear type)
(4) The tool is always accelerated at the start of the program command block and decelerated at the end of the block.
IB-1501505-C 22
3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The G60 command always moves the tool to the final position in a direction determined with parameters.
The tool can be positioned without backlash.
The parameter setting enables G60 to switch between G code group 0 (unmodal) and G code group 01 (modal).
G60 X__ Y__ Z__ ;(Also possible for additional axes A/B/C/U/V/W simultaneously)
X/Y/Z :Position data
With the above command, the tool is first moved to a position distanced from the end point by an amount equivalent to
the creep distance (parameter setting) with rapid traverse and then moved to its final position.
For details on the rapid traverse feed rate of the NC, refer to the section entitled "Rapid Traverse Rate".
Since the actual rapid traverse feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications of the machine concerned.
Positioning to the final point is shown below (when this positioning is in the "+" direction.)
+ -
(Note 1) The processing of the above pattern will be followed even for the machine lock and Z-axis command cancel.
(Note 2) On the creep distance, the tool is moved with rapid traverse.
(Note 3) G60 is valid even for positioning in drilling in the fixed cycle.
(Note 4) When the mirror image function is on, the tool will be moved in the reverse direction by mirror image as far as
the interim position, but operation over the creep distance with the final advance will not be affected by the
mirror image.
23 IB-1501505-C
3.2 Linear/Circular Interpolation
3.2.1 Linear Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Linear interpolation is a function that moves a tool linearly by the movement command value supplied in the program at
the cutting feed rate designated by the F code.
G01 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W simultaneously)
Xx1,Yy1,z1 :Position data
Ff1 :Feed rate data
Linear interpolation is executed by the above command at the f1 feed rate. The tool path takes the shortest distance to
the end point in the form of a straight line.
For details on the f1 command values for NC, refer to the section entitled "Cutting Feedrate".
Since the actual cutting feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications of the machine concerned.
(1) The number of axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the specifications (number of
simultaneously controlled axes). The axes can be used in any combination within this range.
(2) The feed rate is controlled so that it does not exceed the cutting feed rate clamp of each axis.
(3) When a rotary axis has been commanded in the same block, it is treated as a linear axis in degree(°) units (1° =
1mm), and linear interpolation is performed.
IB-1501505-C 24
3.2.2 Circular Interpolation (Center/Radius Designation)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Circular interpolation with I, J, K commands

This function moves a tool along a circular arc on the plane selected by the plane selection G code with movement
command supplied in the program.
G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W)
G02,G03 : Arc rotation direction
Xx1,Yy1 : End point coordinate
Ii1,Jj1 : Arc center
Ff1 : Feed rate
The above commands move the tool along the circular arc at the f1 feed rate. The tool moves along a circular path,
whose center is the position from the start point designated by distance "i1" in the X-axis direction and distance "j1"
in the Y-axis direction, toward the end point.
The direction of the arc rotation is specified by G02 or
G03.
G02: Clockwise (CW)
G03: Counterclockwise (CCW)
The plane is selected by G17, G18 or G19.
Y X
G17: XY plane G17 G18
G18: ZX plane
G02 G02
G19: YZ plane
(Example) See below for examples of circular
commands. G03 G03
X Z
Y
Z
Center G19
F G02
G03
I,J End
point Y
Start
point
X
(a) The axes that can be commanded simultaneously are the two axes for the selected plane.
(b) The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle.
(c) Circular interpolation can be commanded within a range extending from 0° to 360° .
(d) The max. value of the radius can be set up to six digits above the decimal point.
(Note 1) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. If a command is issued with two
addresses which do not match the plane, an alarm will occur.
(Note 2) The axes configuring a plane can be designated by parameters. Refer to the section entitled "Plane
Selection".
25 IB-1501505-C
(2) R-specified circular interpolation

Besides the designation of the arc center coordinates using the above-mentioned I, J and K commands, arc
commands can also be issued by designating the arc radius directly.
G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W )
Rr1 : Arc radius
Ff1 : Feed rate
G02 or G03 is used to designate the direction of the arc rotation.
The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.
The arc center is on the bisector which orthogonally intersects the segment connecting the start and end points, and
the point of intersection with the circle, whose radius has been designated with the start point serving as the center,
is the center coordinate of the arc command.
When the sign of the value of R in the command program is positive, the command will be for an arc of 180 or less;
when it is negative, it will be for an arc exceeding 180 .
(Note 1) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. If a command is issued with two
addresses which do not match the plane, an alarm will occur.
IB-1501505-C 26
3.2.3 Helical Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
With this function, any two of three axes intersecting orthogonally are made to perform circular interpolation while the
third axis performs linear interpolation in synchronization with the arc rotation. This simultaneous 3-axis control can move
helically to machine and be exercised to machine large-diameter screws or 3-dimensional cams.
(E)
X
(E) j
i
(S)
(S) Y
3 dimension path ZX plane path (projection path)
(S) start point (E) end point
The commanded program path
XY plane projection path of the commanded program
Command format
[M system]
G17 G02/G03 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ P__ F__ ; Helical interpolation command (Specify arc center)
G17 G02/G03 X__ Y__ Z__ R__ F__ ; Helical interpolation command (Specify arc radius "R")
G17/G18/G19 : Arc plane (G17: XY plane, G18: ZX plane, G19: YZ plane)
G02/G03 : Arc rotation direction (G02: clockwise, G3: anti-clockwise)
X,Y : End point coordinate values for arc
Z : End point coordinate values of linear axis
I,J : Arc center coordinate values
R : Arc radius
P : Number of pitches
F : Feed rate
The arc center coordinate values and arc radius are commanded by the input increment. Pay attention to the case
of the helical interpolation command of the axis which has a different input command increment.
To prevent confusion, command with a decimal point.
Absolute or incremental values can be assigned for the arc end point coordinates and the end point coordinates of
the linear axis, but incremental values must be assigned for the arc center coordinates.
When executing the pitch command with ",P" address, "P33 format error" occurs.
27 IB-1501505-C
[L system]
G17 G02/G03 X/U__ Y/V__ Z/W__ I__ J__ P/,P__ F__ ;

G17 G02/G03 X/U__ Y/V__ Z/W__ R__ F__ ;
G17/G18/G19 : Arc plane (G17: XY plane, G18: ZX plane, G19: YZ plane)
G02/G03 : Arc rotation direction (G02: clockwise, G3: anti-clockwise)
X/U, Y/V : End point coordinate values for arc
Z/W : End point coordinate values of linear axis
I,J : Arc center coordinate values
R : Arc radius
P/,P : Number of pitches
F : Feed rate
(Note 1) Indicates as I axis: X, J axis: Y, and K axis: Z.
(Note 2) When commanding "P" and ",P" for the number of pitches together, the command value ",P" is prioritized.
(1) The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.

(2) G02 or G03 is used to designate the direction of the arc rotation.
(3) Absolute or incremental values can be assigned for the arc end point coordinates and the end point
coordinates of the linear axis, but incremental values must be assigned for the arc center coordinates.
(4) The linear interpolation axis is the other axis which is not included in the plane selection.
(5) Command the speed in the component direction that represents all the axes combined for the feed rate.
Pitch L is obtained by the formula below.
Z
L =
(2 P + )/2
ye ys
= e- s = tan - 1 - tan - 1 (0 < 2 )
xe xs
Where xs, ys are the start point coordinates (0 ≦ θ<2π)

xe, ye are the end point coordinates
The combination of the axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the specifications. The
axes can be used in any combination under the specifications.
The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle.
(Note 1) Helical shapes are machined by assigning linear commands for one axis which is not a circular
interpolation axis using an orthogonal coordinate system. It is also possible to assign these commands to
two or more axes which are not circular interpolation axes.
When a simultaneous 4-axis command is used with the V axis as the axis parallel to the Y axis, helical
interpolation will be carried out for a cylinder which is inclined as illustrated below. In other words, linear
interpolation of the Z and V axes is carried out in synchronization with the circular interpolation on the XY
plane.
Z
V End point
Y
Start point
X
IB-1501505-C 28
3.2.4 Spiral/Conical Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function interpolates arcs where the start point and end point are not on the circumference of the same circle into
spiral shapes.
There are two types of command formats which can be changed with the parameters.
(1) For command format type 1
(a) Spiral interpolation
G17 G02.1(G03.1) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1 ;

G17 : Arc plane
G02.1,G03.1 : Arc rotation direction
Pp1 : Number of pitches
Ff1 : Feed rate
The circular interpolation operation is performed at the feed rate f1 by the commands listed above. The tool
draws a spiral arc path whose center is at the position from the start point which is designated by distance i1
for the X-axis direction and distance j1 for the Y-axis direction as the tool moves toward the end point.
The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.
G17……………XY plane
G18……………ZX plane
G19……………YZ plane
The direction of the arc rotation is designated by G02.1 or G03.1.
G02.1……………Clockwise (CW)
G03.1……………Counterclockwise (CCW)
The number of pitches (number of rotations) is designated by p1.
By assigning zero to p1, the pitch designation can be omitted in this case, the interpolation is obtained as a
spiral rotation of less than one full turn. Assigning 1 to p1 yields a spiral rotation of more than one full turn but
less than two full turns.
(Note 1) This function cannot be used in combination with a tool radius compensation command (G41, G42).
(Note 2) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. Arc control is performed on a plane by
the G17, G18 or G19 command even when two addresses which are not on the selected plane are
designated.
(b) Conical interpolation
When an axis other than the ones for Y

XY plane
the spiral interpolation plane has been
designated at the same time, the other
axis will also be interpolated in X
W
synchronization with the spiral
interpolation.
G17 G91 G02.1 X100. Z150. I150．
P3 F500; Z Z XZ plane
In the example given above, truncated
cone interpolation is performed.
X X
W
29 IB-1501505-C
(2) For command format type 2

(a) Spiral interpolation
G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Qq1/Ll1 Ff1 ;

G17 : Arc plane
Qq1 : Incremental/decremental amount of radius per spiral rotation
Ll1 : Number of pitches
Ff1 : Feed rate
- Relation between Q and L
L = ｜ (arc end point radius - arc start point radius) ｜ / ｜ Q ｜
- Q takes precedence if both Q and L have been designated at the same time.
(b) Conical interpolation
G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 /Qq /Ll1 Ff1 ;
G17 : Arc plane
Zz1 : End point coordinate in height direction
Kk1 : Amount by which height is incremented or decremented per spiral rotation
Qq1 : Amount by which radius is incremented or decremented per spiral rotation
Ll1 : Number of pitches
Ff1 : Feed rate
- Relation between L and (I, J) K
L = ｜ Height ｜ / ｜ Amount by which height is incremented or decremented (I,J,K) ｜
- Q takes precedence over K which in turn takes precedence over L if Q, K and L have been designated at
the same time.
- The tolerable error range (absolute position) for when the commanded end point position is deviated from
the end point position obtained from the number of pitches and increment/decrement amount is set with
the parameters.
IB-1501505-C 30
3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
This function transfers the shape that is on the cylinder's side surface (shape yielded by the cylindrical coordinate
system) onto a plane, and when the transferred shape is designated in the program in the form of plane coordinates, the
shape is converted into a movement along the linear and rotary axes of the original cylinder coordinates, and the
contours are controlled by means of the CNC unit during machining.
Since the programming can be performed for the shapes produced by transferring the side surfaces of the cylinders, this
function is useful when it comes to machining cylindrical cams and other such parts.
The command is programmed with the rotary axis and its orthogonal axis, which are different between the lathe and the
machining center systems, to machine grooves and other shapes on the side of the cylinder.
Y
X
X Hypothetical
axis C Z
r
Z
C r
Machining
center
Lathe
Command format
Cylindrical interpolation mode start
G07.1 Name of rotary axis Cylinder radius;

or G107 Name of rotary axis Cylinder radius;
Name of rotary axis : Axis name set to the rotary axis
Cylinder radius : Radius value ≠ 0: Cylindrical interpolation mode start
Command a value other than "0".
Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel
G07.1 Name of rotary axis 0 ;

or G107 Name of rotary axis 0;
31 IB-1501505-C
3.2.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
This function converts the commands programmed by the orthogonal coordinate axes into linear axis movements (tool
movements) and rotary axis movements (workpiece rotation) to control the contours. It is useful for cutting linear cutouts
on the outside diameter of the workpiece, grinding cam shafts, etc.
This function can be used only with the G code list 6 or 7.
Polar coordinate interpolation

plane (G17 plane)
Hypothetical axis
(1) Polar coordinate interpolation mode

(G12.1)
The polar coordinate interpolation mode is established by designating the G12.1 command.
Polar coordinate interpolation plane consists of a linear axis and a hypothetical axis, which are at right angles
to each other.
Polar coordinate interpolation is performed on this plane.
(a) Linear interpolation and circular interpolation can be designated in the polar coordinate interpolation
mode.
(b) Either absolute command or incremental command can be issued.
(c) Tool radius compensation can be applied to the program commands. Polar coordinate interpolation is
performed for the path after tool radius compensation.
(d) For the feed rate, designate a tangential rate on the polar coordinate interpolation plane (orthogonal
coordinate system) using the F command.
The F rate is in either mm/min or inch/mm units.
(2) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode

(G13.1)
The polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode is established by designating the G13.1 command.
IB-1501505-C 32
3.2.7 Milling Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
When a lathe with linear axes (X, Z axes) and rotary axis (C axis) serving as the control axes is to perform milling at a
workpiece end face or in the longitudinal direction of the workpiece, this function uses the hypothetical axis Y which is at
right angles to both the X and Z axes to enables the milling shape to be programmed as the X, Y and Z orthogonal
coordinate system commands.
With this function, the workpiece can be treated as a cylinder with radius X, and commands can be designated on the
plane formed by transferring the cylinder side surface instead.
With milling interpolation, the commands programmed by the orthogonal coordinate system are converted into linear axis
and rotary axis movements (workpiece rotation) to control the contours.
Z
C
Y
(Hypothetical axis)
G12.1 ; Milling mode ON

G13.1 ; Milling mode OFF (Turning mode)
G16(Y-Z cylindrical plane) G17(X-Y plane) G19(Y-Z plane)
X X
X
Z Z
Z
Y Y
Y
Plane on which radius X cylinder is X-Y plane in XYZ orthogonal coordinate

Y-Z plane in XYZ orthogonal coordinate system.
developed. system.
Select this to machine a plane of a cylinder cut in
Select this to machine the cylindrical plane Select this to machine the workpiece end
the longitudinal direction.
of a workpiece. face.
33 IB-1501505-C
3.2.8 Hypothetical Axis Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Take one of the axes of the helical interpolation or spiral interpolation, including a linear axis, as a hypothetical axis (axis
with no actual movement) and perform pulse distribution. With this procedure, an interpolation equivalent to the helical
interpolation or spiral interpolation looked from the side (hypothetical axis), or SIN or COS interpolation, will be possible.
The setting of this hypothetical axis is commanded with G07.
G07 Y0 ; (X axis command cancel ON)

G07 Y1 ; (X axis command cancel OFF)
:Hypothetical axis interpolation command
G07 :Designate the axis for which hypothetical axis interpolation is performed
Y Designation of the axis for which axis command cancellation is performed applies for all the NC axes.
(0: Cancel (normal), 1: Handle as hypothetical axis)
(1) Interpolation functions that are used for hypothetical interpolation are helical interpolation and spiral interpolation.
(2) During G07α0; to G07α1;, α axis will be the hypothetical axis. Thus, when α axis is commanded independently
during this time, dwell mode will be held until finishing the pulse distribution to the hypothetical axis.
(Note) In order to perform hypothetical axis interpolation, helical interpolation must be added.
IB-1501505-C 34
3.3 Curve Interpolation
3.3.1 Involute Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Involute interpolation moves a tool along an involute curve. This can be used for scroll machining of involute gears or
compressors. The interpolation can eliminate a path step that is generated at a short segment command, as well as
acceleration/deceleration that is caused due to differences of segment length, leading to smooth accurate machining.
Using the automatic speed control function, including “involute interpolation override” and “acceleration clamping during
involute interpolation”, further improves the machining accuracy.
Involute curve is obtained with the following expression: Y

X（θ）= R{cos(θ+θ0) + θ*sin(θ+θ0)｝+ X0 (Xθ,Yθ)
Y（θ）= R｛sin(θ+θ0) - θ*cos(θ+θ0)｝+ Y0
Circle in the right figure is the base circle.
θ
Y0 θ0
R
X
X0
Command format
Involute curve rotation direction (G02.2: clockwise; G03.2: counterclockwise)
G02.2 (G03.2) Xx Yy Ii Jj Rr Ff ; G17 Plane

G02.2 (G03.2) Zz Xx Kk Ii Rr Ff ; G18 Plane
G02.2 (G03.2) Yy Zz Jj Kk Rr Ff ; G19 Plane
X : End point of involute interpolation (X axis)
Y : End point of Y involute interpolation (Y axis)
Z : End point of Z involute interpolation (Z axis)
I : Distance between start point and center of base circle (X axis)
J : Distance between start point and center of base circle (Y axis)
K : Distance between start point and center of base circle (Z axis)
R : Base circle radius
F : Feedrate (in involute curve tangent direction)
The range of command value follows the input range of coordinate position data.
35 IB-1501505-C
3.3.2 Exponential Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
With this function, the rotary axis movement is changed into exponential functions vis-a-vis the linear axis movements.
When exponential function interpolation is performed, linear interpolation is performed between the other axes and the
linear axis. This makes it possible to machine tapered grooves (regular helix machining of tapered shapes) whose helix
angle is always constant.
The function can be used for slotting and grinding end mills and other tools.
[Regular helix machining of tapered shapes]
Z (G00)
(G01)
(G01)
(G02.3/G03.3)
(rotary axis)
A
J1 J2 J3
X
(linear axis)
Helix angle : J1=J2=J3
[Relationship between linear and rotary axes]
X X=B ( e - 1 )
CA
(linear axis) {B, C = constants}
A
(rotary axis)
IB-1501505-C 36
3.3.3 Spline Interpolation (G05.1Q2/G61.2)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function automatically generates spline curves that smoothly pass through rows of dots designated by a fine-
segment machining program, and performs interpolation for the paths along the curves. This enables high-speed and
high-accuracy machining to be achieved.
There are two types of the spline interpolation command format: G61.2 and G05.1Q2.
The high-speed high-accuracy control II/III is required for G05.1Q2 command. Command G05.1Q2 for the high-speed
and smooth machining in the high-speed high-accuracy control II/III mode.
G64/G61.1
G61.2 / G05.1Q2
(Note) While the spline interpolation is valid, the high-speed high-accuracy control III operates as high-speed high-
accuracy control II.
Command format
G61.2 command
G61.2 X__ Y__ Z__ F__ ; Spline interpolation mode ON

or
G61.2 ;
G64 ; Spline interpolation mode OFF
G05.1Q2 command
G05.1 Q2 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Spline interpolation mode ON
G05.1 Q0 ; Spline interpolation mode OFF
37 IB-1501505-C
3.3.4 NURBS Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function realizes NURBS curve machining by commanding NURBS curve parameters (number of stages, weight,
knot, control point). The path does not need to be replaced with fine segments.
This function operates only in the high-speed high-accuracy control II/III mode, so the high-speed high-accuracy control
II/III function is required.
During NURBS interpolation, interpolation takes place at the commanded speed. However, if the curvature is large, the
speed is clamped so that the machine's tolerable acceleration rate is not exceeded.
NURBS interpolation cannot be used during graphic check (continuous/step check).

Linear interpolation that connects the control points is used during graphic check.
The multi-part system simultaneous high-accuracy function is required when the NURBS interpolation is commanded to
2nd part system or higher.
(xn,yn,zn)
(x4 , y4, z4)

(x3 , y3, z3)
Program path passing through

control point
(x2 , y2, z2)
NURBS interpolation curve
(x1 , y1, z1)
(Note) While the NURBS interpolation is valid, the high-speed high-accuracy control III operates as high-speed high-
accuracy control II.
IB-1501505-C 38
3.3.5 3-Dimensional Circular Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
To issue a circular command over a three-dimensional space, an arbitrary point (intermediate point) must be designated
on the arc in addition to the start point (current position) and end point. Using the 3-dimensional circular interpolation
command, an arc shape determined by the three points (start point, intermediate point, end point) designated on the
three-dimensional space can be machined.
Z
Intermediate point
Start point
(current position)
End point
The command format is shown below.
G02.4(G03.4) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 αα1 ... ; Intermediate point designation (1st block)
Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 αα2 ... ; End point designation (2nd block)
: 3-dimensional circular interpolation command
G02.4(G03.4)
: Intermediate point coordinates
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1
: End point coordinates
Xx2, Yy2, Zz2
: Arbitrary axis other than axis used as the reference in 3-dimensional circular interpolation (May be
αα1
omitted)
- The operation is the same for G02.4 and G03.4. (The rotation direction cannot be designated.)
- The axes used as the reference in 3-dimensional circular interpolation are the three basic axes set with the
parameters.
- The X, Y, Z address in the block may be omitted. The intermediate point coordinates omitted in the 1st block
become the start point coordinates, and the end point coordinates omitted in the 2nd block become the intermediate
point coordinates.
- When using the 3-dimensional circular interpolation command, an arbitrary axis can be commanded in addition to
the orthogonal coordinate system (X, Y, Z) used as the reference. The arbitrary axis designated in the intermediate
point designating block (1st block) will interpolate to the command point when moving from the start point to
intermediate point movement. The arbitrary axis designated in the end point command block (2nd block) will
interpolate to the command point when moving from the intermediate point to the end point. The number of arbitrary
axes that can be commanded differs according to the number of simultaneous contour control axes. The total of the
basic three axes used as the reference of the 3-dimensional circular interpolation and the arbitrary axes
commanded simultaneously must be less than the number of simultaneous contour control axes.
39 IB-1501505-C
3.3.6 Spline Interpolation2 (G61.4)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function automatically generates a curve that smoothly passes through within the tolerable error range. The tool is
able to move along the curve, providing smooth machining.
This function allows the machine to operate with the optimum tool path and speed, simply by specifying the tolerance
size, so an operator can easily attain high quality machining.
This function is enabled under the tolerance control, so the specification of the tolerance control is required, too.
The tolerance size is the allowable error value between the path commanded by machining program and the path output
with NC.
Tolerance Command
position
Tool path
When spline interpolation 2 is used in combination with tool center point (TCP) control, spline interpolation 2 is performed
with 5 axes. It generates a curve that passes through the TCP points smoothly within the tolerance, with the rotary axis
angle also within the tolerance. The tool moves along the curve.
Tolerance of rotary axis
Tolerance of linear axis
Program command
position
Tool path
IB-1501505-C 40
Command format
G61.4 (,K__ ) (,R__) ; Spline interpolation 2 mode ON

,K : Tolerance size (mm) linear axis
,R : Tolerance size (deg) rotary axis
Spline interpolation 2 mode with command G61.4 will be cancelled by designating any one of G code group 13.
- G61 (Exact stop check mode)
- G61.1 (High-accuracy control mode)
- G61.2 (Spline interpolation command)
- G62 (Automatic corner override)
- G63 (Tapping mode)
- G64 (Cutting mode)
- G08P1 (High-accuracy control mode start)
- G08P0 (High-accuracy control mode end)
41 IB-1501505-C
IB-1501505-C 42
4
Feed
43 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.1 Feedrate
4.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate (m/min)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
[M system]
The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis by the parameter.
The rapid traverse rate is effective for G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G60 commands.
Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied.
If the high-accuracy control mode's rapid traverse rate is set, the axis will move at that feedrate during high-
accuracy control, high-speed high-accuracy control, high-accuracy spline control or SSS control.
- If the value set for the high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate is 0, the axis will move at the rapid
traverse rate.
- The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis.
- The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate is effective for the G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G60
commands.
- Override can be applied on the high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate using the external signal
supplied.
Rapid traverse rate and high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate setting
Least command increment B C D E
Metric input (mm/min, °/min) 1 to 1000000 1 to 1000000 1 to 1000000 1 to 1000000
Inch input (inch/min) 1 to 100000 1 to 100000 1 to 100000 1 to 100000
Least command increment B : 0.001mm (0.0001inch)
Least command increment C : 0.0001mm (0.00001inch)
Least command increment D : 0.00001mm (0.000001inch)
Least command increment E : 0.000001mm (0.0000001inch)
[L system]
The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis by the parameter.
The rapid traverse rate is effective for G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G53 commands.
Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied.
Rapid traverse rate setting range

Metric input (mm/min, °/min) 1 to 1000000 1 to 1000000 1 to 1000000 1 to 1000000
Inch input (inch/min) 1 to 100000 1 to 100000 1 to 100000 1 to 100000
IB-1501505-C 44
4 Feed
4.1.2 Cutting Feedrate (m/min)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
[M system]
This function specifies the feedrate of the cutting commands, and a feed amount per spindle rotation or feed
amount per minute is commanded.
Once commanded, it is stored in the memory as a modal value. The feedrate modal value is cleared to zero only
when the power is turned ON.
The maximum cutting feedrate is clamped by the cutting feedrate clamp parameter (whose setting range is the
same as that for the cutting feedrate).
If the high-accuracy control mode's cutting clamp speed is set, the cutting feedrate will be clamped at that speed
during high-accuracy control, high-speed high-accuracy control, high-accuracy spline control or SSS control.
- If the value set for high-accuracy control mode cutting clamp speed is 0, the axis will be clamped at the cutting
feed clamp speed.
- High-accuracy control mode cutting clamp speed is set with the parameters.
Cutting feedrate setting range

Metric input (mm/min, °/min) 0.001 to 1000000 0.0001 to 1000000 0.00001 to 1000000 0.000001 to 1000000
Inch input (inch/min) 0.0001 to 100000 0.00001 to 100000 0.000001 to 100000 0.0000001 to 100000
-　G code command for which the cutting feedrate is effective

For others such as G01,G02,G03,G02.1,G03.1,G33, etc., refer to the interpolation specifications.
[L system]
This function specifies the feedrate of the cutting commands, and a feed amount per spindle rotation or feed
amount per minute is commanded.
Once commanded, it is stored in the memory as a modal value. The feedrate modal is cleared to zero only when the
power is turned ON.
The maximum cutting feedrate is clamped by the cutting feedrate clamp parameter (whose setting range is the
same as that for the cutting feedrate).
Cutting feedrate setting range

Metric input (mm/min, °/min) 0.001 to 1000000 0.0001 to 1000000 0.00001 to 1000000 0.000001 to 1000000
Inch input (inch/min) 0.0001 to 100000 0.00001 to 100000 0.000001 to 100000 0.0000001 to 100000
- G code command for which the cutting feedrate is effective

For others such as G01,G02,G03,G02.1,G03.1,G33, etc., refer to the interpolation specifications.
45 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.1.3 Manual Feedrate (m/min)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
The manual feedrate are designated as the feedrate in the jog mode or incremental feed mode for manual operation and
the feedrate during dry run ON for automatic operation. The manual feedrate are set with external signals.
The manual feedrate signals from the PLC include two methods, the code method and value setting method.
Which method to be applied is determined with a signal common to the entire system. The signals used by these
methods are common to all axes.
- Setting range under the code method

Metric input 0.00 to 14000.00 mm/min (31 steps)
Inch input 0.000 to 551.000 inch/min (31 steps)
- Setting range under the value setting method
Metric input 0 to 1000000.00 mm/min in 0.01 mm/min increments
Inch input 0 to 39370 inch/min in 0.001 inch/min increments
Multiplication factor PCF1 and PCF2 are available with the value setting method.
4.1.4 Rotary Axis Command Speed Tenfold

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function multiplies the rotary axis' command speed by 10 during initial inching.
The commanded speeds are as follow.
For the inch system, the rotary axis command speed is multiplied by 10.
For example, if the B axis is the rotary axis in the inch system and the following type
Automatic
Cutting feedrate of machining program is executed, the rotary axis command speed will be multiplied
operation
by 10, and the rotary axis will move at 1000 deg./min.
N1 G1 B100. F100.;
The rapid traverse rate is not multiplied by 10, and is the speed set in the
Rapid traverse rate
parameters.
The command speeds related to manual operation, such as JOG feed, are not
Manual operation
multiplied by 10. The display speed unit also remains as "deg./min".
IB-1501505-C 46
4 Feed
4.2 Feedrate Input Methods
4.2.1 Feed per Minute (Asynchronous Feed)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[M system]
By issuing the G94 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F
as the feedrate per minute (mm/min, inch/min).
Metric input
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm) D(0.00001mm) E(0.000001mm)
Setting unit
Command
Feed per minute Feed per minute Feed per minute Feed per minute
Mode
Command
F(mm/min) F(mm/min) F(mm/min) F(mm/min)
Address
Minimum
1(=1.00) 1(=1.000) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000)
command
(1.=1.00) (1.=1.000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000)
unit
Command 0.01 - 0.001 - 0.0001 - 0.00001 -
range 1000000.00 1000000.000 1000000.0000 1000000.00000
Inch input
Input
B(0.0001inch) C(0.00001inch) D(0.000001inch) E(0.0000001inch)
setting unit
Command
Mode
Command
F(inch/min) F(inch/min) F(inch/min) F(inch/min)
Address
Minimum
1(=1.000) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000)
command
(1.=1.000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000)
unit
Command 0.001 - 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 -
range 100000.000 100000.0000 100000.00000 100000.000000
47 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
[L system]
By issuing the G94 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F
as the feedrate per minute (mm/min, inch/min).
Metric input
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm) D(0.00001mm) E(0.000001mm)
Setting unit
Command
Mode
Command
F(mm/min) F(mm/min) F(mm/min) F(mm/min)
Address
Minimum
1(=1.000) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000)
command
(1.=1.000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000)
unit
Command 0.001 - 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 -
range 1000000.000 1000000.0000 1000000.00000 1000000.000000
Inch input
Input
setting unit
Command
Mode
Command
F(inch/min) F(inch/min) F(inch/min) F(inch/min)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.0100) 1(=0.01000) 1(=0.010000) 1(=0.0100000)
command
(1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000)
unit
Command 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.0000001 -
range 100000.0000 100000.00000 100000.000000 100000.0000000
IB-1501505-C 48
4 Feed
4.2.2 Feed per Revolution (Synchronous Feed)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
By issuing the G95 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F as
the feedrate per spindle revolution (mm/revolution or inch/revolution).
The least command increment and command range of the feedrate designation F are as follows.
[M system]
Metric input
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm) D(0.00001mm) E(0.000001mm)
Setting unit
Command
Feed per revolution Feed per revolution Feed per revolution Feed per revolution
Mode
Command
F(mm/rev) F(mm/rev) F(mm/rev) F(mm/rev)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.001) 1(=0.0001) 1(=0.00001) 1(=0.000001)
command
(1.=1.0) (1.=1.0) (1.=1.0) (1.=1.0)
unit
Command 0.001 - 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 -
range 999.999 999.9999 999.99999 999.999999
Inch input
Input
setting unit
Command
Mode
Command
F(inch/rev) F(inch/rev) F(inch/rev) F(inch/rev)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.00001) 1(=0.000001) 1(=0.0000001) 1(=0.00000001)
command
(1.=1.00) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.00)
unit
Command 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.0000001 - 0.00000001 -
range 99.99999 99.999999 99.9999999 99.99999999
49 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
[L system]
Metric input
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm) D(0.00001mm) E(0.000001mm)
Setting unit
Command
Mode
Command
F(mm/rev) F(mm/rev) F(mm/rev) F(mm/rev)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.0001) 1(=0.00001) 1(=0.000001) 1(=0.0000001)
command
(1.=1.00) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.00)
unit
Command 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.0000001 -
range 999.9999 999.99999 999.999999 999.9999999
Inch input
Input
setting unit
Command
Mode
Command
F(inch/rev) F(inch/rev) F(inch/rev) F(inch/rev)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.000001) 1(=0.0000001) 1(=0.00000001) 1(=0.000000001)
command
(1.=1.000) (1.=1.000) (1.=1.000) (1.=1.000)
unit
Command 0.000001 - 0.0000001 - 0.00000001 - 0.000000001 -
range 99.999999 99.9999999 99.99999999 99.999999999
IB-1501505-C 50
4 Feed
4.2.3 Inverse Time Feed

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
During inside cutting when machining curved shapes with tool radius compensation applied, the machining speed on the
cutting surface becomes faster than the tool center feedrate. Therefore, problems such as reduced accuracy on the
cutting surface may occur.
This reduced accuracy can be prevented with inverse time feed. This function can, in place of normal feed commands,
issue one block of machining time (inverse) in F commands. The machining speed on the cutting surface is constantly
controlled, even if radius compensation is applied to the machining program that expresses the free curve surface with
fine segment lines.
Note that when the calculated machining time exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed, the F command value in the
inverse time feed follows the cutting feed clamp speed.
Regular F command Inverse time feed
Actual machining speed Same

Large Small
F command
F command
Command format is as shown below.
G93 ; Inverse time feed
Inverse time feed (G93) is a modal command and is valid until feed per minute (G94) or feed per revolution (G95) is
commanded.
G00 Xx1 Yy1 ;

G93 ; → Inverse time feed mode ON
G01 Xx2 Yy2 Ff2 ; → In inverse time feed mode
G02 Xx3 Yy3 Ii3 Jj3 Ff3 ; :
G94(G95) ; → Inverse time feed mode OFF
In movement blocks, since processing time is commanded to a line segment, command the feedrate "F" each time.
51 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The feedrate registered by parameter can be assigned by designating a single digit following address F.
There are six F codes: F0 and F1 to F5. The rapid traverse rate is applied when F0 is issued which is the same as the
G00 command.
When one of the codes F1 to F5 is issued, the cutting feedrate set to support the code serves as the valid rate command.
If F6 or larger value is command, the value is regarded as the cutting feedrate which has been directly commanded with
numerical values.
When an F 1-digit command has been issued, the external output signal is output.
When the programmed feedrate has been issued as an F 1-digit command, the feedrate can be increased or reduced by
turning the manual handle.
The feedrate cannot be changed by the 2nd and 3rd handles.
(1) Amount by which speed is varied by manual handle

Speed variation amount ΔF is expressed by the equation below:
FM
F M
ΔF = ΔP ×
K
ΔP : Handle pulses (±)
FM : F1 to F5 upper limit (parameter setting)
K :Speed variation constant (parameter setting)
(Example) When the feedrate is to be increased or reduced by 10 mm/min per manual handle scale increment
If FM is 3600 mm/min, then:
3600
ΔF = 10 = 1× Therefore, K = 360.
K
(2) Conditions under which F1-digit feed is valid
(a) Cycle start must be underway.
(b) Cutting feed must be underway, and the F 1-digit feedrate must be designated.
(c) The F 1-digit valid parameter must be ON
(d) The F 1-digit feedrate change valid signal must be ON.
(e) The handle mode must not be selected.
(f) A dry run must not be in progress.
(g) Machine lock must not be activated.
(h) The parameter settings (the F 1-digit feedrate upper limit and F 1-digit feedrate change constant) must not be
"0".
IB-1501505-C 52
4 Feed
4.2.5 Manual Speed Command

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
In the memory or MDI mode, validate the manual speed command and select either handle feed or jog (manual) feed so
that the automatic operation is carried out at the feedrate.
With a command in the (-) direction, the program path can be reversed. Note that, however, program path can be
reversed only within the currently executing block and not beyond the block.
Whether or not to execute reverse run with a command in the (-) direction is set with the PLC interface.
Furthermore, by setting the parameter, handle, jog and manual feed speed can be executed at the feed speed according
to the ratio of program command speed of running block when issuing the manual speed command in multiple systems.
4.2.7 G00 Feedrate Designation (,F Command)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
Feedrates can be specified for G00 (positioning command).

The speed of tool exchange, axis movement of gantry, etc. can be specified with the machining program so that the
mechanical vibration can be suppressed.
Operations other than the feedrate follows the G00 specification.
Gantry
G00 Z_ ,F2000
G00 X_ ,F1500
G00 X_ ,F500
Spindle
53 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
Command format
The feedrates of the movement in the G00,G00 mode and the movement during the fixed cycle for drilling are
commanded with ",F".
Feedrate designation in G00 block
G00 X__ Z__ ,F1000 ;
Feedrate designation for movement command in G00 mode
G00 ;
X__ Z__ ,F1000 ;
(Note) ", F" command is ignored in the G01 mode.
Feedrate designation for movement command during drilling cycle
G8 □ (G7 □ ) X/Z__ ..... ,F1000;

X/Z__ ...... ,F500;
:
:
G80
:
L system G83/G87: Deep-hole drilling, G84/G88: Tapping, G85/G89: Boring
M system G81: Drilling/Spot drilling, G82: Drilling/Counter boring, G83: Deep-hole drilling, G84: Tapping, G85/G86:
Boring, G87: Back boring, G88/G89: Boring, G73: Step, G74: Reverse tapping, G75: Circular cutting,
G76: Fine boring
",F" command range

- The range is equal to the range of the feed per minute F command (mm/min, inch/min) in the G01 mode.
- Commands that exceed the command range cause the error "P67: F value is exceeding the limit".
- Switching inch/mm is invalid for rotary axes.
IB-1501505-C 54
4 Feed
4.3 Override
4.3.1 Rapid Traverse Override

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Type 1 (code method)

Four levels of override (1%, 25%, 50% and 100%) can be applied to manual or automatic rapid traverse using the
external input signal supplied.
(2) Type 2 (value setting method)
Override can be applied in 1% steps from 0% to 100% to manual or automatic rapid traverse using the external
input signal supplied.
(Note 1) Type 1 and type 2 can be selected by PLC processing.

(Note 2) This function requires a built-in PLC for type 2.
4.3.2 Cutting Feed Override

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Override can be applied in 10% steps from 0% to 300% to the feed rate command designated in the machining
program using the external input signal supplied.
Override can be applied in 1% steps from 0% to 327% to the feed rate command designated in the machining
program using the external input signal supplied.
(Note 1) This function requires a built-in PLC for type 2.
4.3.3 2nd Cutting Feed Override

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Override can be further applied in 0.01% steps from 0% to 327.67% as a second stage override to the feed rate after the
cutting feed override has been applied.
(Note 1) This function requires a built-in PLC.
55 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.3.4 Override Cancel

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
By turning on the override cancel external signal, the override is automatically set to 100% for the cutting feed during an
automatic operation mode (tape, memory and MDI).
(Note 1) The override cancel signal is not valid for manual operation.
(Note 2) When the cutting feed override or second cutting feed override is 0%, the 0% override takes precedence and
the override is not canceled.
(Note 3) The override cancel signal is not valid for rapid traverse.
IB-1501505-C 56
4 Feed
4.4 Acceleration/Deceleration
4.4.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Acceleration/deceleration is applied to all commands automatically. The acceleration/deceleration patterns are linear
acceleration/deceleration, soft acceleration/deceleration, exponent function acceleration/ deceleration, exponent
function acceleration/linear deceleration and any of which can be selected by using a parameter.
For rapid traverse feed or manual feed, acceleration/deceleration is always made for each block, and the time constant
can be set for each axis separately.
Rapid traverse Cutting feed

<Linear acceleration/deceleration> <Linear acceleration/deceleration>
F F
t t
G0tL G0tL G1tL G1tL
<Primary delay> <Primary delay>
F F
t t
G0t1 G0t1 G1t1 G1t1
<Exponential acceleration-Linear deceleration> <Exponential acceleration-Linear deceleration>
F F
t t
G0t1 2×G0t1 G1t1 2×G1t1
<Soft acceleration/deceleration> <Soft acceleration/deceleration>
F F
t t
G0t1 G0t1 G1t1 G1t1
G0t1 G0t1 G1t1 G1t1
G0tL G0tL G1tL G1tL
G0tL:G0 time constant(linear)

G0t1:G0 time constant(primary delay)/The 2nd step time constant of the soft acceleration/deceleration
G1tL:G1 time constant(linear)
G1t1:G1 time constant(primary delay)/The 2nd step time constant of the soft acceleration/deceleration
57 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
(Note 1) The rapid traverse feed acceleration/deceleration patterns are effective for the following:
G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, rapid traverse feed in manual run, JOG feed, incremental feed, return to reference
position.
It is invalid to G31 and handle feed.
(Note 2) Acceleration/deceleration in handle feed mode is usually performed according to the acceleration/deceleration
pattern for cutting feed. However, a parameter can be specified to select a pattern with no acceleration/
deceleration (step).
(Note 3) Acceleration/deceleration time of soft acceleration/deceleration can be changed by parameter as follows.
Total accelerating time:G0tL+G0t1

F S-pattern part time:G0t1
Linear part time:G0tL-G0t1
t
G0t1 G0t1
G0tL
G0tL+G0t1
A rapid traverse time constant can be switched by rapid traverse time constant changeover request signal.
X1 Y1 Z1
Basic rapid Rapid traverse Basic rapid Rapid traverse Basic rapid Rapid traverse
traverse time time constant traverse time time constant traverse time time constant
Set the rapid traverse time constant for switching constant for switching constant for switching
constant by axis
#2004 G0tL #2598 G0tL_2 #2004 G0tL #2598 G0tL_2 #2004 G0tL #2598 G0tL_2
#2005 G0t1 #2599 G0t1_2 #2005 G0t1 #2599 G0t1_2 #2005 G0t1 #2599 G0t1_2
Rapid traverse time Rapid traverse time Rapid traverse time

constant to use constant to use constant to use
Switch between basic rapid

traverse time constant and
rapid traverse time constant for
switching using the rapid
traverse time constant changeover
request signal Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration
IB-1501505-C 58
4 Feed
4.4.2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function performs acceleration and deceleration at a constant inclination during linear acceleration/ deceleration in
the rapid traverse mode. Compared to the method of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, the constant
inclination acceleration/deceleration method makes for improved cycle time.
Rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration are valid only for a rapid traverse command. Also, this
function is effective only when the rapid traverse command acceleration/deceleration mode is linear acceleration and
linear deceleration.
The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/ deceleration
are performed are as follows.
(1) When the interpolation distance is long enough for the rapid traverse rate to be achieved
rapid
L Next block
Ts Ts
Td
T
L
T= +Ts
rapid
Td = Ts + (0 㹼14ms)
-1
rapid
θ = tan ( )
Ts
rapid : Rapid traverse rate

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant
Td : Command deceleration check time
θ : Acceleration/deceleration inclination
T : Interpolation time
L : Interpolation distance
59 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
(2) When the interpolation distance is so short that the rapid traverse rate is not achieved
In case of time-constant acceleration/deceleration:
Speed
rapid
Next block
θ L
Ts1 Ts2 Time
Td
T1
In case of inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration:
Speed
rapid
T1 = Ts1 + Ts2
T2 = 2× Ts1 × L
Next block rapid
L
θ Td = T2 2 + (0 to 14 ms)
Time
Ts1 tan−1 (rapid)
Td θ=
Ts2 Ts1
T2
rapid: Rapid traverse rate (Axis specification parameter #2001 rapid)

Ts1: Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter #2004 G0tL)
Ts2: Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the maximum speed
Td: Command deceleration check time
θ: Acceleration/deceleration inclination
T1: Interpolation time (time-constant acceleration/deceleration)
T2: Interpolation time (inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration)
L: Interpolation distance
The time required to perform a command deceleration check during rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/
deceleration is the longest value among the rapid traverse deceleration check times determined for each axis by the
rapid traverse rate of commands executed simultaneously, the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time
constant, and the interpolation distance, respectively.
IB-1501505-C 60
4 Feed
(3) 2-axis simultaneous interpolation (When linear interpolation is used, Tsx < Tsz, and Lx ≠ Lz)
When 2-axis simultaneous interpolation (linear interpolations) is performed during rapid traverse constant
inclination acceleration and deceleration, the acceleration (deceleration) time is the longest value of the
acceleration (deceleration) times determined for each axis by the rapid traverse rate of commands executed
simultaneously, the rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration time constant, and the interpolation distance,
respectively. Consequently, linear interpolation is performed even when the axes have different acceleration and
deceleration time constants.
Speed
rapid X
Lx Next block
X axis
Tsx Tsx Time
Tdx
rapid Z
Next block
Lz
Z axis
Tsz Tsz Time
Tdz
When Tsz is greater than Tsx,

Tdz is also greater than Tdx, and
Td = Tdz in this block.
Tsx: X axis acceleration/deceleration time

Tsz: Z axis acceleration/deceleration time
Tdx: X axis commanded deceleration check time
Tdz: Z axis commanded deceleration check time
Lx : X axis interpolation distance
Lz : Z axis interpolation distance
The program format of G0 (rapid traverse command) when rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/
deceleration are executed is the same as when this function is invalid (time constant acceleration/deceleration).
This function is valid only for G0 (rapid traverse).
61 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
(4) When the interpolation distance is so short that the acceleration/deceleration time is shorter than the
minimum time constant for constant inclination acceleration/deceleration
If a minimum time constant for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration by the parameter, acceleration/
deceleration speed is adjusted to prevent the acceleration/deceleration time calculated by interpolation distance
from going below the minimum time constant.
Speed
rapid
Next block
Ts2 Time
Ts3
Ts1
Td
T = 2 × Ts2
Td = T 2 + (0 to 14 ms)
rapid: Rapid traverse speed (Axis specification parameter #2001 rapid)

Ts1: Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter #2004 G0tL)
Ts2: Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the maximum speed
Ts3: Minimum time for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration (Axis specification parameter #2198
G0tMin)
Td: Command deceleration check time
T: Interpolation time
L: Interpolation distance
IB-1501505-C 62
4 Feed
4.4.3 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function carries out the acceleration/deceleration according to the torque characteristic of the motor in the rapid
traverse mode during automatic operation. (This function is not available in manual operation.) The rapid traverse
constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration method makes for improved cycle time because the positioning
time is shortened by using the motor ability to its maximum.
In general, the servomotor has the characteristic that the torque falls in the high-speed rotation range.
125
100
Torque [N*m]
75
50
25
0
0 1000 2000 3000 3500
Rotation speed [r/min]

(Note) This characteristic is data at input voltage 380VAC.
In the rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration method, the acceleration has been treated constantly
because this torque characteristic is not considered. So, it is necessary to use a minimum acceleration within the used
speed range. Therefore, the margin of acceleration must be had in a low-speed range. Or if the acceleration is used to its
maximum, the upper limit of the rotation speed must be slowed.
Then, to use the servomotor ability to its maximum, acceleration/deceleration to which the torque characteristic is
considered is carried out by the rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration method.
The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/
deceleration are performed are as follows.
Speed Speed
ta Time tb Time
Acceler- Number of steps is Acceler-

ation automatically adjusted ation It was necessary to slow down the
by parameter setting. acceleration for high speed rotation.
Time Time
(a) Rapid traverse constant inclination (b) Rapid traverse constant inclination
multi-step acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration
63 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
4.5.1 Thread Cutting (Lead/Thread Number Designation)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Thread cutting with designated lead can be performed. Designate the number of threads per inch with the E
address to cut inch threads.
(1) Lead designation

The thread cutting with designated lead is performed based on the synchronization signals from the spindle
encoder.
G33 Zz1/Ww1 Xx1/Uu1 Qq1 Ff1/Ee1 ;

G33 : Thread cutting command
Zz1/Ww1,Xx1/Uu1 : Thread end point coordinates
Qq1 : Shift angle at start of thread cutting (0.000 to 360.000°)
Ff1 : Thread lead (normal lead threads)
Ee1 : Thread lead (precise lead threads)
The thread cutting with designated lead can be performed. Inch threads are cut by designating the number of
threads per inch with the E address.
(2) Thread number designation

Inch threads are cut by designating the number of threads per inch with the E address.
Whether the E command is a thread number designation or lead designation is selected with the parameters.
G33 Zz1/Ww1 Xx1/Uu1 Qq1 Ee1 ;

G33 : Thread cutting command
Zz1/Ww1,Xx1/Uu1 : Thread end point coordinates
Qq1 : Shift angle at start of thread cutting (0.000 to 360.000°)
Ee1 : Thread number per inch
[M system]
Thread cutting metric input
Input
B (0.001mm) C (0.0001mm)
setting unit
Command
F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch) F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Least
1(=1.000) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000)
Command
(1.=1.000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000)
Increments
Command 0.001 - 0.0001 - 0.03 - 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.026 -
range 999.999 999.9999 999.99 999.9999 999.99999 222807.017
Input
D (0.00001mm) E (0.000001mm)
setting unit
Command
address
Least
1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.0000000) 1(=1.00000)
Command
(1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.00000)
Increments
Command 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.0255 - 0.000001 - 0.0000001 - 0.02541 -
range 999.99999 999.999999 224580.0000 999.999999 999.9999999 224719.00000
IB-1501505-C 64
4 Feed
Thread cutting inch input

Input
B (0.0001inch) C (0.00001inch)
setting unit
Command
F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch) F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Least
1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.0000)
Command
(1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000)
Increments
Command 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.025 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.0255 -
range 39.3700 39.37007 9999.999 39.37007 39.370078 9999.9999
Input
D (0.000001inch) E (0.0000001inch)
setting unit
Command
address
Least
1(=1.000000) 1(=1.0000000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.0000000) 1(=1.00000000) 1(=1.000000)
Command
(1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.00000000) (1.=1.000000)
Increments
Command 0.000001 - 0.0000001 - 0.02541 - 0.0000001 - 0.00000001 - 0.025401 -
range 39.370078 39.3700787 9999.99999 39.3700787 39.37007873 9999.999999
(Note 1) It is not possible to assign a lead that causes the feedrate converted into the feed per minute value
to exceed the maximum cutting feedrate.
[L system]
Thread cutting metric input
Input
B (0.001mm) C (0.0001mm)
setting unit
Command
address
Least
1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.00) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.000)
Command
(1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.000)
Increments
Command 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.03 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.026 -
range 999.9999 999.99999 999.99 999.99999 999.999999 222807.017
Input
D (0.00001mm) E (0.000001mm)
setting unit
Command
address
Least
1(=1.000000) 1(=1.0000000) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.0000000) 1(=1.00000000) 1(=1.00000)
Command
(1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.00000000) (1.=1.00000)
Increments
Command 0.000001 - 0.0000001 - 0.0255 - 0.0000001 - 0.00000001 - 0.02540 -
range 999.999999 999.9999999 224580.0000 999.9999999 999.99999999 224719.00000
65 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
Thread cutting inch input

Input
B (0.0001inch) C (0.00001inch)
setting unit
Command
address
Least
1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.0000000) 1(=1.0000)
Command
(1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.0000)
Increments
Command 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.025 - 0.000001 - 0.0000001 - 0.0254 -
range 39.37007 39.370078 9999.999 39.370078 39.3700787 9999.9999
Input
D (0.000001inch) E (0.0000001inch)
setting unit
Command
address
Least
1(=1.0000000) 1(=1.00000000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.00000000) 1(=1.000000000) 1(=1.000000)
Command
(1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.00000000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.00000000) (1.=1.000000000) (1.=1.000000)
Increments
Command 0.0000001 - 0.00000001 - 0.02540 - 0.00000001 - 0.000000001 - 0.025400 -
range 39.3700787 39.37007873 9999.99999 39.37007873 39.370078736 9999.999999
(Note 1) It is not possible to assign a lead that causes the feedrate converted into the feed per minute value
to exceed the maximum cutting feedrate.
IB-1501505-C 66
4 Feed
4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
By commanding the lead increment/decrement amount per thread rotation, variable lead thread cutting can be done.
The machining program is commanded in the following manner.
G34 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Ff1/Ee1 Kk1 ;

G34 : Variable lead thread cutting command
Xx1/Uu1 : Thread end point X coordinate
Zz1/Ww1 : Thread end point Z coordinate
Ff1/Ee1 : Thread's basic lead
Kk1 : Lead increment/decrement amount per thread rotation
Non-lead axis
Lead axis
F+3.5K F+2.5K F+1.5K F+0.5K
Lead speed F+3K F+2K F+K F

F+4K
67 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping
(Note) With digital I/F spindle
4.5.3.1 Synchronous Tapping Cycle

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function performs tapping through the synchronized control of the digital spindle and servo axis. This eliminates the
need for floating taps and enables tapping to be conducted at a highly precise tap depth.
(1) Tapping pitch assignment
G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Dd1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Rr2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 Mm1 ;
G84 : Mode, forward tapping
G74 : Mode, reverse tapping
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole position data, hole drilling position
Zz1 : Hole machining data, hole bottom position
Rr1 : Hole machining data, point R position
Dd1 : Tool spindle number (d is 1 to number of spindles)
Depending on the parameter setting, command as "-d1" to carry out reverse tapping.
Pp1 : Hole machining data, dwell time at hole bottom
Ff1 : Z-axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle rotation
Kk1 : Number of repetitions
Ss1 : Spindle speed
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle during retract
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1 Synchronous, r2=0 Asynchronous)
,Ii1/,Jj1 : In-position width of positioning axis/hole drilling axis
Mm1 : M function designation
(2) Tapping thread number assignment
G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Dd1 Pp1 Ee1 Kk1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Rr2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 Mm1 ;
G84 : Mode, forward tapping
G74 : Mode, reverse tapping
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole position data, hole drilling position
Zz1 : Hole machining data, hole bottom position
Rr1 : Hole machining data, point R position
Dd1 : Tool spindle number (d is 1 to number of spindles)
Depending on the parameter setting, command as "-d1" to carry out reverse tapping.
Pp1 : Hole machining data, dwell time at hole bottom
Ee1 : Tap thread number per 1-inch feed of Z axis
Kk1 : Number of repetitions
Ss1 : Spindle speed
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1 synchronous, r2=0 asynchronous)
,Ii1/,Jj1 : In-position width of positioning axis/hole drilling axis
Mm1 : M function designation
IB-1501505-C 68
4 Feed
(Note) The synchronous tapping cycle can be used for axes other than the Z axis with the plane selection.
Furthermore, in-position checks can be performed at the hole bottom or point R, etc. using the parameters.
The figure below shows the correlation between the in-position width and the movement of the tapping axis of
the synchronous tapping in-position check.
FIN
Hole bottom Point R
↑
Feed
rate
Time T→
G0 feed
G1 G1 start to
In-position finish deceleration deceleration point R→
for G0 feed from start during start during
point R tapping cutting tapping retract
(4) (2) (3) (1)
(1) Section where in-position check is performed using servo in-position width
(2) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for tapping
(3) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for cutting feed (G1, G2, G3)
(4) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for rapid traverse (G0)
69 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
The load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per pass and cutting the workpiece to the
hole bottom for a multiple number of passes.
The amount retracted from the hole bottom is set to the parameters.
Select either the pecking tapping cycle or the deep-hole tapping cycle by parameter.
When the pecking tapping cycle is executed in the synchronous tapping mode, the synchronous tapping cycle function
and pecking tapping cycle function are required.
When "depth of cut per pass Q" is designated in the block containing the G84 or G74 command in the state where the
pecking tapping cycle is selected by parameter, the pecking tapping cycle is executed.
In the following cases, the normal tapping cycle is established.
When Q is not designated
When the command value of Q is zero
When there is no Pecking tapping cycle function
(1) M system
G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1(Ee1) Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ,Rr2 Ll1 ;
G84 : G84 forward tapping cycle
G74 : G74 reverse tapping cycle
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole drilling position
Zz1 : Hole bottom position
Rr1 : Point R position
Qq1 : Depth of cut per pass (designated as an incremental position)
Ff1 : During synchronous tapping: Designation of drilling axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle revolution
(modal)
During asynchronous tapping: Designation of the feedrate for cutting feed (modal)
Pp1 : Dwell time at hole bottom position
Ss1 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Ii2 : In-position width of positioning axis
,Jj2 : In-position width of hole drilling axis
Ll1 : Number of repetitions
IB-1501505-C 70
4 Feed
(2) L system
G84(G88, G84.1, G88.1) Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1(Ee1) Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii ,Jj ,Rr2 Dd1 Ll1 Mm1 ;
G84 : G84 Face forward tapping cycle
G88 : G88 Side　forward tapping cycle
G84.1 : G84.1 Face reverse tapping cycle (It can be commanded by setting of parameter)
G88.1 : G88.1 Side reverse tapping cycle (It can be commanded by setting of parameter)
Xx1,Cc1,Zz1 : Hole position data and : hole bottom position
(modal)
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1:synchronous、r2=0:asynchronous)
Dd1 : Tapping spindle number assignment
(By minus command, reverse tapping can be commanded by setting of parameter.
It can be commanded when it is multiple-spindle control Ⅰ .
Program error occurs when multiple-spindle control Ⅱ is commanded by D command.)
Mm1 : C axis clamp M code
(1): G00 Xx1 Cc1 ,Ii1

(2): G00 Zr1
q1 q1 q1 (3): G01 Zq1 Ff1
(1)
(4): M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)
(3) (2) (5): G01 Z-d Ff1
(4) x1,c1 (6): M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
d (7): G01 Z(q1+d) Ff1
(5) :
(6) (n1): G01 Z(z1-q1*n) Ff1
(n2): G04 Pp1
d (7) (n3): M4
(n4): G01 Z-z1 Ff1
(n5): G04 Pp1
(n6): M3
(n7): G98 mode G00Z-r1 ,Ij1
d G99 mode No movement
(n2) (n1)
(n3) (n5)
(n4) (n6) G99 (n7)
G98
z1 r1
d : Retract amount (parameter)
(Note) This program is for the G84 command. The spindle forward rotation (M3) and reverse rotation (M4) are
reversed with the G74 command.
71 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
In the deep-hole tapping, the load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per pass and cutting
the workpiece to the hole bottom for a multiple number of passes.
Adding this function, the pecking tapping cycle function is also added.
Under the deep-hole tapping cycle, the tool is retracted to the R-point every time.
Select either the pecking tapping cycle or the deep-hole tapping cycle by parameter.
When the deep-hole tapping cycle is executed in the synchronous tapping mode, the synchronous tapping cycle function
and deep-hole tapping cycle function are required.
When "depth of cut per pass Q" is designated in the block containing the G84 or G74 command in the state where the
deep-hole tapping cycle is selected by parameter, the deep-hole tapping cycle is executed.
In the following cases, the normal tapping cycle is established.
When Q is not designated
When the command value of Q is zero
When there is no deep tapping cycle function
(1) M system
G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1(Ee1) Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii ,Jj ,Rr2 Ll1 (Kk1) ;
G84 : G84 forward tapping cycle
G74 : G74 reverse tapping cycle
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole drilling position
(modal)
Pp1 : Dwell time at hole bottom and point R return
Kk1 : Number of repetitions (It commanded by parameter)
IB-1501505-C 72
4 Feed
(2) L system
G84(G88, G84.1, G88.1) Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1(Ee1) Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii ,Jj ,Rr2 Dd1 Ll1 Mm1 ;
G84 : G84 Face forward tapping cycle
G88 : G88 Side forward tapping cycle
G84.1 : G84.1 Face reverse tapping cycle (It can be commanded by setting of parameter)
G88.1 : G88.1 Side reverse tapping cycle (It can be commanded by setting of parameter)
Xx1,Cc1,Zz1 : Hole position data and : hole bottom position
(modal)
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1:synchronous、r2=0:asynchronous)
Dd1 : Tapping spindle number assignment
(By minus command, reverse tapping can be commanded by setting of parameter.
It can be commanded when it is multiple-spindle control Ⅰ .
Program error occurs when multiple-spindle control Ⅱ is commanded by D command.)
Mm1 : C axis clamp M code
(1): G00 Xx1 Cc1

(2): G00 Zr1
q q q
(1) (3): G01 Zq1 Ff1
(4): M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)
(3) (2) (5): G01 Z-q1 Ff1
(4) x1,c1 (6): G04 Pp1
(5) (7): M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
(6)
(8) (7) (8): G01 Z(2*q1)Ff1
(9) (9):
:
(n1): G01 Zz1 Ff1
(n2): G4 Pp1
(n3): M4
(n4): G01 Z-z1 Ff1
(n5): G04 Pp1
(n1)
(n6): M3
(n2)
(n7): G98 mode G00Z-r1 ,Ij1
(n3) G99 mode No movement
(n5)
(n4) (n6) G99 (n7)
G98
z1 r1
(Note) This program is for the G84 command. The spindle forward rotation (M3) and reverse rotation (M4) are
reversed with the G74 command.
73 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.5.3.4 Synchronous Tapping with Multiple Spindles

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― △
This can perform synchronous tapping with multiple spindles simultaneously, and can improve efficiency of the tapping.
You can designate all spindles to constitute.
The command format is the same as the command for normal synchronous tapping.
The multiple spindles to execute the synchronous tapping are designated from the sequence I/F.
4.5.3.5 Synchronous Tapping with Analog I/F Spindle

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function performs tapping using the analog-connected spindle. The functions in the table below can be used using
the spindle analog-connected by inverter, etc. The operation of synchronous tapping cycle other than this function
follows the specification in the table below.
When this function is used, the analog spindle with the function to control the spindle position needs to be connected.
Also, the parameter needs to be turned ON.
The voltage value to be output to the analog spindle is between -10V and 10V, which is determined by the ratio of the
spindle rotation speed corresponding to the command to analog spindle and the setting value of the parameter.
Function name G code

Tapping cycle G84
M system
Reverse tapping cycle G74
Face tapping cycle G84
Face reverse tapping cycle G84.1
L system Longitudinal tapping cycle G88
Longitudinal reverse tapping cycle G88.1
Synchronous tapping cycle G84.2
4.5.4 Chamfering
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Chamfering can be validated during the thread cutting cycle by using external signals.
The chamfer amount and angle are designated with parameters.
Thread cutting cycle
Chamfer angle
Chamfer amount
IB-1501505-C 74
4 Feed
4.5.6 Circular Thread Cutting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
Circular thread in which the lead is in longitudinal direction can be cut.

This function can be used with the G code list 6 or 7.
Command format
Ii Kk
G35(G36) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww ｛｝ Ff/Ee Qq ;
Rr
G35 : Clockwise (CW)
(G36) : Counterclockwise (CCW)
Xx/Uu : X-axis arc end point coordinate
Zz/Ww : Z-axis arc end point coordinate
Ii : X-axis arc center (incremental position of arc center as referenced from start point)
Kk : Z-axis arc center (incremental position of arc center as referenced from start point)
Rr : Arc radius
Ff/Ee : Longitudinal axis (axis with most travel) direction lead
(Ff: normal lead thread cutting, Ee: precise lead threads or inch threads)
Qq : Thread cutting start shift angle (0.000 to 360.000°)
Z W
End point
Start point
U/2
I Z
R
Center
75 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.5.8 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
The servo axis directly detects and compensates of the spindle's delay in tracking by using the communication between
drive unit over the high-speed optical servo network. By minimizing the synchronization error, the accuracy of the
synchronous tapping is increased.
4000 4000
Spindle rotation speed Spindle rotation speed
3000 3000
2000 Implement to 2000
1000 increase the 1000
0 accuracy of 0
−1000 Synchronization the synchronous −1000 Synchronization
error
−2000 error tapping −2000
−3000 −3000
−4000 −4000
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
(sec) (sec)
without OMR-DD control with DMR-DD control
IB-1501505-C 76
4 Feed
4.5.10 Thread Recutting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
The function stores a thread groove position and compensates a start position of spindle thread cutting automatically so
that the tool can pass along the memorized position of the thread groove at the thread cutting execution. Thread
machined workpieces which have problems such as the thread number shortage, striped groove, etc., can be re-
chucked and thread recut.
(1) Re-chucking of thread machined workpiece (2) Memorizing thread groove position (memorizing lead
axis and spindle position)
(3) Moving to start position after tool retract (4) Thread recutting ON and program operation start
The start position of spindle thread cutting is automatically

compensated with the memorized position of the lead axis
and spindle.
Thread recutting correspondence table
Z direction feed thread X direction feed thread

Thread cutting command
Right-handed/Left-handed thread Scroll thread
Thread cutting ○ ○
Continuous thread △ (Note 1) △ (Note 1)
Variable lead thread △ (Note 2) △ (Note 2)
Fixed cycle for turning machining ○ ○
Compound type fixed cycle for turning
△ (Note 3) △ (Note 3)
machining
○ : Machinable △ : Machinable with conditions × : Impossible
Machinable with conditions ( △ )

(Note 1) Continuous thread: Conduct a memorizing of thread recutting position at the groove on the first block of
continuous thread.
(Note 2) Variable lead thread: thread recutting is disable during an automatic operation with thread recutting
enabled when the first thread cutting command is the variable lead thread cutting.
(Note 3) Compound type fixed cycle: Re-finishing can be performed to the finishing allowance.
77 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.5.11 Thread Cutting Override

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
The thread cutting feedrate can be changed by changing the spindle override depending on rough cutting, finish
machining, etc.
The spindle speed during thread cutting is determined with the spindle override at the start of thread cutting.
4.5.12 Variable Feed Thread Cutting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
This function changes the cutting feedrate by the spindle override at the time of the thread cutting. The machining
condition during thread cutting can be changed.
IB-1501505-C 78
4 Feed
4.5.13 Thread Cutting Time Constant Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
"Thread cutting time constant" can be applied to the acceleration/deceleration time constant of the NC control axis during
the thread cutting. Usually, incorrect lead parts occur at the start and the end of thread cutting due to the acceleration/
deceleration of the NC control axis. However, the acceleration/deceleration time, which causes incorrect lead parts, can
be reduced by applying the thread cutting time constant to the NC control axis during the thread cutting so that the
incorrect thread parts can be reduced. Additionally, the machining time can be reduced as much as the acceleration/
deceleration time reduction of thread cutting.
Axis speed
F
Ttop: G01 time constant
Tthr: Thread cutting time constant
Cutting feedrate (max.)
G01 acceleration curve with G01 time constant
Thread cutting rate (max.)
Acceleration time can be reduced
0 Tthr Ttop Ｔime t
G33 acceleration curve with thread cutting time constant
G33 acceleration curve with G01 time constant
G00
Approach distance can be shorter by
applying thread cutting time constant.
G00 G00
G33
Approach position with G01 time

constant
Approach position with thread cutting

time constant
79 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.6 Manual Feed
4.6.1 Manual Rapid Traverse

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the manual rapid traverse mode is selected, the tool can be moved at the rapid traverse rate for each axis
separately. Override can also be applied to the rapid traverse rate by means of the rapid traverse override function.
Rapid traverse override can be set for each part system respectively.
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse override Machine tool

× 25 × 50
× 1 × 100 CNC
Tool
Axis
X Y Z PLC movement
- + - + - + control
Rapid traverse
4.6.2 Jog Feed

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the jog feed mode is selected, the tool can be moved in the axis direction (+ or -) in which the machine is to be
moved at the per-minute feed.
The jog feedrate can be set for each axis with the parameters.
If the jog feedrate is not set with the parameters, the jog feedrate is set with the PLC signal.
There are two methods for PLC signal which sets the jog feed rate: the code method and the value setting method.
The method to be used is selected by PLC signal for each part system. The signals of code and value setting methods
are set for each part system.
Jog Feed rate Override Machine tool

CNC
Tool
0 3000 0 200
Axis
X Y Z PLC movement
- + - + - + control
Manual cutting feed
IB-1501505-C 80
4 Feed
4.6.3 Incremental Feed

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the incremental feed mode is selected, the tool can be operated by an amount equivalent to the designated
amount (incremental value) in the axis direction each time the jog switch is pressed. The incremental feed amount is the
amount obtained by multiplying the least command increment that was set with the parameter by the incremental feed
magnification rate.
The incremental feed amount parameter and its magnification rate can be set for each part system respectively.
Incremental Scale factor

Machine tool
1000 CNC
Tool
Axis
X Y Z PLC movement
- + - + - + control
Step feed
4.6.4 Handle Feed

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
In the handle feed mode, the machine can be moved in very small amounts by rotating the manual pulse generator. The
scale can be selected from X1, X10, X100, X1000 or arbitrary value.
If the least command increment is 10nm or 1nm, the scale can be selected from X5000, X10000, x50000 or X100000, as
well.
Individual axes can be moved in very small amounts separately by rotating the manual pulse generators installed on
each of the axes.
(Note 1) The actual movement amount and scale may not match if the manual pulse generator is rotated quickly.
Up to three handles (manual pulse generators) can be used with the MITSUBISHI CNC.
The handles can be connected to the control unit and remote I/O unit. If the operation panel I/O unit is connected, the
handle can also be connected to the operation panel I/O unit.
81 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.6.5 Manual Feedrate B

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
"Manual feedrate B" is a function that sets an arbitrary axis feedrate from the user PLC separately from the "manual
feedrate". The "manual feedrate B" feedrate setting can be selected from the feedrate common for all axes and the
feedrate independent of reach axis.
By combining the "manual feedrate B" function with the manual/automatic simultaneous function, an arbitrary axis can be
moved at the "manual feedrate B" independently of the machining program operation even during automatic operation.
Similarly, if the jog mode and other manual operation mode are set simultaneously, an arbitrary axis can be moved at a
speed independent from the "manual feedrate" even during the manual operation mode.
The "manual feedrate B" function can move an axis at a speed different from the "manual feedrate". This is not affected
by dry run, or by manual or cutting override, so an arbitrary axis can be moved independently even in operations during
automatic operation or override during manual axis movement.
The relation of the "manual feedrate B" and "manual feedrate" is shown below.
Manual override validity
Dry run validity

Cutting override
Manual feedrate
Dry run speed
Each axis manual feedrate B speed

X axis speed
1st axis
Manual feedrate B speed

2nd axis
Y axis speed

3rd axis
Z axis speed
Each axis manual feedrate B speed B axis speed

4th axis
Manual feedrate B valid

n-th axis Validity
Each axis manual
feedrate B valid Validity
(Note) For the axis to which manual feedrate B is applied, the feedrate is not displayed on the screen.
IB-1501505-C 82
4 Feed
4.6.6 Manual Feedrate B Surface Speed Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
When using the manual feedrate B function and machining by moving the orthogonal axis while rotating the rotary table,
the tool nose and workpiece's relative speed will drop as the tool nears the rotation center if the table rotation speed
remains under the set conditions. This function controls the table rotation speed according to the distance from the
rotation center.
As shown below, the distance (radius) from the rotation center at two points and the rotary axis speed at each point is set
in the parameters. When the "manual feedrate B constant surface speed control valid" signal is turned ON, the rotary
axis speed will be automatically calculated according to the current radius R.
Rotary axis speed

V1
V2
(1) (2) (3)
R1 R2 Radius
(1) If R ≦ R1, then V1 will be applied.

(2) If R1<R<R2, the speed V is calculated with the following expression.
(V2 - V1)
V= *(R - R1)+V1
(R2 - R1)
(3) If R2 ≦ R, then V2 will be applied.
Override can be applied in the range of 0 to 200% in respect to the rotary axis's speed for which the manual feedrate B
surface speed control is valid.
This function can be used with a rotary axis for which the manual feedrate B function is valid.
The manual feedrate B speed and each axis' manual feedrate B speed which are issued from the user PLC is ignored for
an axis for which this function is valid.
83 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.6.8 Manual Speed Clamp

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The maximum speed for manual feed can be switched to the rapid traverse rate or the manual feed clamp speed.
This function is usable, for instance, when the axis speed needs to be clamped at an arbitrary rate for performing a
manual feed with a cutting cover opened.
The clamp speed is switched with the parameter or PLC signal.

The manual feed clamp speed can be set to an arbitrary speed with the parameter.
The manual feedrate can be applied for operation modes as follows:
- Jog mode
- Handle mode
- Incremental mode
- Manual reference position return (high-speed) mode
Rapid traverse rate (rapid)
Manual feed clamp speed (m_clamp)
Manual speed clamp ON
Manual speed clamp OFF
IB-1501505-C 84
4 Feed
4.7 Dwell
With this function, the program command temporarily stops the machine movement and puts the machine into standby
status so that the starting time of the next block can be delayed.
4.7.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When G04 is commanded in the asynchronous feed mode (G94), the machine waits for the specified amount of time
before executing the next block.
Command format
G94 G04 X/U__ ; or G94 G04 P__ ;

X/P/U : Dwell time
(1) G94 is not necessary in the asynchronous feed mode (G94).

(2) The decimal point command is enabled for the dwell time designation with X and U.
(3) The decimal point command can be switched valid/invalid by the parameter for the dwell time designation with P.
When the decimal point command is set to be invalid, the command value below the decimal point with P is ignored.
(4) When the decimal point command is valid or invalid, the dwell time command range for each status is as follows.
Command range when the decimal point command Command range when the decimal point command
is valid is invalid
0 to 99999.999 (s) 0 to 99999999 (ms)
85 IB-1501505-C
4 Feed
4.7.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
When G04 is commanded in the synchronous feed mode (G95), the machine waits for the spindle to rotate for the
number of the revolutions designated.
Command format
G95 G04 X/U__ D__ ; or G95 G04 P__ D__ ;

X/P/U : Number of revolutions for dwell
D : Dwell target spindle (For command using the spindle number, the spindle number should be within the
number of spindles for specifications. For command using the spindle name, the number from 1 to 9 is
valid for the spindle name.)
(1) G95 is not necessary when the D command is assigned in the same block as G04.
(2) G95 is not necessary in the synchronous feed mode (G95).
(3) The decimal point command is enabled for the number of revolutions designation with X and U for dwell.
(4) The decimal point command can be switched valid/invalid by the parameter for the number of revolution for dwell
designation with P. When the decimal point command is set to be invalid, the command value below the decimal
point with P is ignored.
(5) When the decimal point command is valid or invalid, the command range of number of revolution for dwell is as
follows for each status.
Command range when the decimal point command Command range when the decimal point command
is valid is invalid
0 to 99999.999 (rev) 0 to 99999999 (0.001rev)
IB-1501505-C 86
5
Program Memory/Editing
87 IB-1501505-C
5 Program Memory/Editing
5.1 Memory Capacity
Machining programs are stored in the NC memory, DS, and external memory device (front SD card, built-in disk of
display unit, etc.).
When using devices such as the built-in disk (HD) of the display unit, DS and memory card, mass-editing, which is
carried out on those devices, is possible.
The data size that can be handled in the mass-editing differs depending on the devices.
5.1.1 Memory Capacity (Number of Programs Stored)
[M system]
Memory capacity M80 M80 E80 E80

M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
(number of programs stored) TypeA TypeB TypeA TypeB
230kB [600m] (400 programs) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
500kB [1280m] (1000
programs) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1000kB [2560m] (1000

△ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
programs)
2000kB [5120m] (1000
△ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
programs)
[L system]
Memory capacity M80 M80 E80 E80

M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
(number of programs stored) TypeA TypeB TypeA TypeB
230kB [600m] (400 programs) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ○ ―
500kB [1280m] (1000
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
programs)
1000kB [2560m] (1000
△ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
programs)
2000kB [5120m] (1000
△ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
programs)
(Note) The tape length for the multi-part system specifications is the total for all part systems.
IB-1501505-C 88
5.2 Editing
5.2.1 Program Editing

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The following editing functions are possible.
(1) Program erasing

(a) Machining programs can be erased individually or totally.
(2) Program filing

(a) This function displays a list of the machining programs stored (registered) in the controller memory.
(b) The programs are displayed in ascending order.
(c) Comments can be added to corresponding program numbers.
(3) Program copying

(a) Machining programs stored in the controller memory can be copied, condensed or merged.
(b) The program No. of the machining programs in the memory can be changed.
(4) Program editing

(a) Overwriting, inserting and erasing can be done per character.
(5) Mass editing (M800/M80 series)

There are regular editing and mass-editing for program editing. The specification and restrictions are different
between the regular editing and mass-editing.
Refer to the table below for conditions to be mass-editing and its maximum editing size.
Series Conditions to be mass-editing Maximum editing size
- The storage destination for the machining program to be opened is M800S: 20MB
either the built-in disk (HD) of the display unit, USB memory, memory M800W/M80W (Windows-based
M800/M80W card or DS. display): 1GB
- A file size is 1.0MB or larger. (The size could be 2.0MB or larger, M800W/M80W (Windows-less
depending on the parameter settings.) display): 20MB
- The storage destination for the machining program to be opened is
M80/E80 either memory card, USB memory or DS. 10MB
- A file size is 0.5MB or larger.
89 IB-1501505-C
5.2.2 Background Editing

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables one machining program to be created or editing while another program is being run.
Prohibited Program
registered
in memory
O1000
O2000
Display unit Editing
Memory
O3000 operation
O4000
Program editing Machining with memory operation
(1) The data of the machining programs being used in memory operation can be displayed and scrolled on the
setting and display unit, but data cannot be added, revised or deleted.
(2) The editing functions mentioned in the preceding section can be used at any time for machining programs
which are not being used for memory operation.
This makes it possible to prepare and edit the next program for machining, and so the machining preparations
can be made more efficiently.
(3) The machining program will not be searched as the operation target even when searched in the edit screen.
IB-1501505-C 90
5.2.3 Buffer Correction

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
During automatic operation (including memory, SD card, USB memory or DS operation) or MDI operation, this function
initiates single block stop and enables the next command to be corrected or changed.
Only memory or DS operation allows the changes with buffer corrections to be updated in the machining program.
When a program error has occurred, the function enables the block in which the error occurred to be corrected and
operation to be resumed without having to perform NC resetting.
Memory,
The built-in disk of the
display unit (HD),
SD card, Pre-read Execution
Memory mode NC Machine
DS, block block operation
control
USB memory
Display unit
MDI mode
MDI
Buffer correction
91 IB-1501505-C
5.2.5 Multi-part System Simultaneous Program Editing

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
When an operation to open a machining program in the NC memory is performed on the edit screen, machining
programs are opened in the right and left areas at the same time; the specified machining program of the displayed part
system in the edit area being selected and the machining program of another part system with the same name in the
unselected edit area.
5.2.6 Special Program Editing Display for Synchronization between Part Systems
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Pressing the [Synchro view] menu enables synchronized display of the left- and right-side programs aligned using the
timing synchronization symbols, when all the following conditions are met:
- Multi-part system program management is ON
- Multi-program display type is selected
- The left and right edit areas are displaying the same named programs of different part systems stored on the NC
memory
IB-1501505-C 92
5.2.7 Finish Shape View Programming

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function shows the machining shape according to the command at the time the machining program is input, and is
intended to eliminate mistakes in programming.
Therefore, the machining shape can be confirmed easily without performing the automatic operation or the graphic
check.
(Example) For a new program file, confirm the finish shape by inputting the machining program.
Input the machining program.
The input machining program will be reﬂected

in the shape.
* In this example, as the cutting is not
performed with G54, the shape will not be
changed.
When inputting the machining program continuously ...
The input machining program will be reﬂected

in the shape.
93 IB-1501505-C
IB-1501505-C 94
6
Operation and Display
95 IB-1501505-C
6 Operation and Display
6.1 Structure of Operation/Display Panel
Setting display unit consists of the display and keyboard unit.

Refer to "Specifications Manual (Hardware)" for details.
(Note) For Separated-type color touchscreen display (19-type LCD TFT/Windows8), only software keyboard is
available and there is no hardware keyboard.
6.1.1 Color Display (8.4-type LCD TFT)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― □ □ ○ ○ ―
L ― ― ― ― ― □ □ ○ ○ ―
6.1.2 Color Touchscreen Display (10.4-type LCD TFT)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― □ □ ― □ □ ― ― ―
L ― ― □ □ ― □ □ ― ― ―
6.1.3 Color Touchscreen Display (15-type LCD TFT)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― □ □ ― □ □ ― ― ―
L ― ― □ □ ― □ □ ― ― ―
6.1.4 Separated-type Color Display (8.4-type LCD TFT)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
6.1.5 Separated-type Color Touchscreen Display (10.4-type LCD TFT)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
L □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
6.1.6 Separated-type Color Touchscreen Display (15-type LCD TFT)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
L □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
6.1.7 Separated-type Color Touchscreen Display (15-type LCD TFT/Windows8)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
L □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
IB-1501505-C 96
6.1.8 Separated-type Color Touchscreen Display (19-type LCD TFT/Windows8)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
L □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
6.1.9 Separated-type Color Touchscreen Display (19-type Horizontal LCD TFT/Windows8)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
L □ □ ― ― □ ― ― ― ― ―
6.1.11 GOT (GOT2000 Series GT27/GT25 12.1/10.4/8.4/5.7)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
97 IB-1501505-C
6.2 Operation Methods and Functions
6.2.1 Operation Input

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
In addition to the method of directly inputting numeric data, a method to input the operation results using four rules
operators and function symbols can be used for specific data settings.
Numeric values, function symbols, operators and parentheses ( ) are combined and set in the data setting area.
The operation results appear when the INPUTkey is pressed. If the INPUT key is pressed again, the data is processed
and displayed on the screen. The contents in the data setting area are erased.
Examples of operator settings and results Function symbols, setting examples and results
Operation Function Operation
Operation Setting example Function Setting example
results symbol results
Absolute
Addition = 100+50 150.000 ABS = ABS(50-60) 10
value
Square
Subtraction = 100-50 50.000 SQRT = SQRT(3) 1.732
root
Multiplication = 12.3*4 49.200 Sine SIN = SIN(30) 0.5
Division = 100/3 33.333 Cosine COS = COS(15) 0.966
Tangent TAN = TAN(45) 1
Function = 1.2*(2.5+SQRT(4)) 5.4
Arc tangent ATAN = ATAN(1.3) 52.431
6.2.2 Absolute Value/Incremental Value Setting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When setting the data, the absolute/incremental setting can be selected from the menu.
The absolute/incremental settings can be selected on the following screens.

- Common variable screen
- Tool compensation amount screen
- Coordinate system offset screen
IB-1501505-C 98
6.2.3 Multiple Display Connection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ (GOT)
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ (GOT)
By attaching an Ethernet hub, one CNC can be switched to display up to 8 setting display units (CNC monitor2 for GOT
or NC Monitor2) at a time. (However, depending on the specification of machine operation panel, there might be the
limitation of the maximum number of the connectable units.)
6.2.4 Common Display to Multiple NCs

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ (GOT)
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ (GOT)
By attaching an Ethernet hub, one setting display unit can be switched to display up to 64 CNCs. (However, depending
on the specification of machine operation panel, there might be the limitation of the maximum number of the connectable
units.)
6.2.5 Displayed Part System Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
The part system displayed on the screen can be changed with the [$<->$] keys.
The number of displayed part systems is counted by one each time the [$<->$] keys are pressed. The screen
corresponding to that part system opens.
If the number of displayed part systems exceeds the valid number of part systems, the number of displayed part systems
will return to 1.
99 IB-1501505-C
6.2.6 Menu List

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The menu list function displays the menu configuration of each screen as a list making it possible to directly select the
menu for other screens.
When the cursor is moved to the menu, the outline of that menu's functions will also appear. The menu can be selected
while checking the details of the menu.
6.2.7 Display Switch by Operation Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The screen display changes when the screen mode selection switch is changed.
The details corresponding to the operation mode are displayed.
6.2.8 External Signal Display Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
The screen display changes with the signal from PLC.
6.2.9 Screen Saver

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
The screen saver function protects the screen display unit by turning the backlight OFF after the time set in the
parameters has elapsed. The backlight is turned OFF after a certain period of time (automatic change function) or after
the key operations (manual change function).
The screen is displayed again by pressing any key, or by touching anywhere on the screen if the display unit carries a
touch-sensitive screen.
6.2.10 Parameter Guidance

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The parameter guidance function displays the details of the parameters according to the state of the screen currently
being displayed.
If the ? key is pressed on any screen, the parameter guidance window will open. If a pop-up window other than the
parameter guidance window is opened, the parameter guidance window will open over the currently opened pop-up
window.
For the display unit with a touch-sensitive screen, if you hold down the parameter data area (tap the target and keep your
finger down for a while), the guidance of that parameter is displayed.
IB-1501505-C 100
6.2.11 Alarm Guidance

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The alarm guidance displays the alarm message, details and remedy for the alarm currently issued.
By utilizing the guidance information, identify the cause from possible factors and determine the countermeasures.
When a multiple number of alarms are issued at the same time, guidance will be displayed for all the alarm issued.
6.2.12 Machining Program Input Mistake Check Warning

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
If an illegal input is found in the decimal point after the current cursor position, the cursor will move to that position, and a
warning message will appear.
If this function is ON when editing the program, the decimal point will be checked for the block each time an edit key
(alphabet, number, symbol, Delete, etc.) is pressed. The block is not checked when the cursor keys or page feed keys
are pressed.
The warning for illegal machining program can also be issued while editing an MDI program.
The comment block is also subject to the warning for illegal machining program.
A warning does not appear in the following cases.

(1) When the data in the address subject to the illegal decimal point input is "0", a warning will not be issued
regardless of whether there is a decimal point or not. (Example: A warning is not issued for "X0".)
(2) When the data in the address subject to the illegal decimal point input is omitted, a warning will not be
issued. (Example: A warning is not issued for "G28XYZ".)
(3) Blocks containing "[" or "]" are not subject to the warning for illegal machining program.
6.2.14 Screenshot Capture

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ―/ ○ ―/ ○ ○ ○ ―/ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
L ―/ ○ ―/ ○ ○ ○ ―/ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
This function allows to output a bitmap file of a screen displayed on the setting and display unit.
6.2.15 User Selectable Menu Configuration

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function allows to change the display order of operations, procedure and edit screen, and to change display/non-
display selection.
101 IB-1501505-C
6.2.16 PC-NC Network Automatic Connection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ /― ○ /― ― ― ○ /― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ /― ○ /― ― ― ○ /― ― ― ― ― ―
This function supports to restore the connection when the network connection cannot be created between the display
unit and the control unit.
When the connection is not established even after the time out has expired, the connectable control unit IP address list
appears. From the IP address list, the network connection can be re-established and restored when the IP address,
which is to be connected with the control unit, is selected.
6.2.17 Device Open Parameter

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function can set or change the user backed up area of the PLC device from the NC screen.
The following settings are available from the NC screen.
- Divide the device area accordance with the specifications of the machine maker and set and display for each
divided area.
- Switch the display format or data type for each divided area.
6.2.18 SRAM Open Parameter

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function can set or change the SRAM open area for the machine maker from the NC screen.
The following settings are available from the NC screen.
- Divide the SRAM area accordance with the specifications of the machine maker and set and display for each
divided area.
- Switch the display format or data type for each divided area.
6.2.19 MTB Selectable Menu Configuration

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Menu items on the "Monitor", "Setup", and "Edit" screens (of MITSUBISHI standard format) can be moved within a
screen or hidden as desired. The custom screen menu items added by machine tool builders, to the contrary, cannot be
moved or hidden.
IB-1501505-C 102
6.2.20 Remote Desktop Connection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ―/ ○ ―/ ○ △ △ ―/ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L ―/ ○ ―/ ○ △ △ ―/ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
Remote desktop connection enables you to operate an external personal computer through the NC screen when
UltraVNC server is installed in the PC.
In-house Network Control unit [M80]
Connect to LAN1
Server PC that can deal with TCP/IP
Application
UltraVNC Server
Control unit [M800S]
Connect to LAN2
103 IB-1501505-C
6.2.21 VNC Server

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
This function enables status confirmation and remote operation by displaying the NC screen display on the external
computer or tablet PC.
This function can be valid by setting the parameter.
Factory network
Tablet
Control unit [M80]

Application
VNC client
Wireless connection
Wireless LAN
router
Connect to LAN 1
Wired connection
Control unit [M800S]

Application
VNC client
Computer
Connect to LAN 1
Windows-less display unit

[M800W/M80W]
Connect to LAN 1
IB-1501505-C 104
6.3 Display Methods and Contents
6.3.1 Status Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The status of the program now being executed is indicated.

(1) Display of G, S, T, M commands and 2nd miscellaneous command modal values
(2) Feed rate display
(3) Tool compensation No. and compensation amount display
(4) Real speed display (*)
(*) The feed rate of each axis is converted from the final speed output to the drive unit, and is displayed.
However, during follow up, the speed is converted and displayed with the signals from the detector
installed on the servomotor.
6.3.2 Clock Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The clock is built-in, and the date (year, month, date) and time (hour, minute, second) are displayed.
Once the time is set, it can be seen as a clock on the screen.
105 IB-1501505-C
6.3.3 Monitor Screen Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A variety of information related to operation, such as the axis counter, speed display and MSTB command is displayed.
The display can be switched according to the machining application (prototype or mass production).
The following operations regarding operation can be executed:
- Operation search
- Restart search
- Editing of searched machining program
- Trace (Display of machine movement path)
- Check (Display of NC program's tool movement path)
- Correction of running program's buffer
- Counter set
- Manual numeric command, etc.
(1) Simple monitor screen

The information displayed on the simple monitor screen is limited. Therefore, the size of the text is larger and it is
readable from a distance.
(2) Selective display
A part of monitor screen can be customized to suit user's need (to display data which a user always needs to refer
to). The following can be displayed on the selective display area by selecting with the parameter:
- Tool offset
- Common variable
- Workpiece offset, etc.
(Note) The display is not selective on the simple monitor screen.
IB-1501505-C 106
6.3.4 Setup Screen Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Tool/workpiece related settings, user parameter settings, MDI editing, counter setting, manual numeric command
issuing, etc., can be carried out.
(1) Tool compensation amount screen

Tool compensation data is set and displayed on the Tool compensation amount screen.
Tool compensation types I, II and III are available for M system, which can be selected by the parameter. For L
system, tool compensation type III is always used.
When using turning tool or etc. on M system, the tool compensation amount screen for L system is displayed by
setting compensation type III.
The tool radius compensation can be executed with the diameter value by the parameter.
The number of tool compensation sets which can be set/displayed varies depending on the selected number of
compensation sets.
(2) Tool measurement screen
Tool measurement screen is displayed.
(3) Tool management screen
The management information is set and displayed for each tool on the Tool management screen.
The data operates simultaneously with the screen which handles the tool information such as "Tool compensation
amount screen", "Tool life screen" etc., so that the information can be mutually set and displayed.
6.3.5 Edit Screen Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Machining program editing (addition, deletion, change), program check, simple programming, playback and file input/
output can be carried out.
The specified character string can be searched even during the mass-editing.
6.3.6 Diagnosis Screen Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The data related CNC diagnosis can be set and displayed as follows:
- Display of hardware and software configuration
- Display of CNC options
- Diagnosis of PLC interface
- Display of drive unit information
- Display of CNC internal data
- Display of alarm message / alarm history list etc.
- Display of H/W and Operation stop status
- Setting of sampling parameter and sampling of NC internal data
- Diagnosis for functional safety
107 IB-1501505-C
6.3.7 Maintenance Screen Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Parameter setting and display, NC data input/output, NC memory format, etc., can be carried out on the Maintenance
screen.
Important operations are protected with a password.
6.3.8 Home Application

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ /― ○ /― ― ― ○ /― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ /― ○ /― ― ― ○ /― ― ― ― ― ―
19-type vertical display unit has the expansion applications that display the machine status, software keyboard, etc. in
the lower half of the screen in no linkage with the upper half.
The following expansion applications are provided as standard MITSUBISHI CNC specifications:
- Home screen (machine state display)
- Software keyboard
- Software operation panel
- Manual
- Notepad
MTB unique applications can also be added.
<Home screen>
Touch the application button. Touch the home button. Touch the shortcut button.
Touch the shortcut button.
<Operation panel screen> <Software keyboard screen>
IB-1501505-C 108
6.3.9 Home Screen

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
Home screen is able to display the machine status (including spindle loads and positions of linear and rotary axes) which
can be monitored by an operator. Also, each application can be called by pressing the application button on the home
screen. Registered applications differ depending on MTB.
It can be selected by the parameter as to whether to hide, display (display at power ON) or display (not display at power
ON) the home screen.
[Home screen] [Standard screen]
Touch the standard screen

changeover button
Touch the home screen

changeover button
* The screen can also be changed between [Home screen] and [Standard screen] by pressing the window display key
( ).
(Example) When calling the manual display application with the application button
Touch the application

(manual display) button.
Touch the home button.
When the manual to be displayed is touched

on the manual selection screen, the selected
manual is displayed. The manuals which can
be displayed differ depending on MTB.
109 IB-1501505-C
6.3.10 Additional Languages
A language of choice can be selected by parameter setting.
6.3.10.1 Japanese
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.2 English
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6.3.10.3 German
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.4 Italian
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.5 French
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.6 Spanish
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.7 Chinese
6.3.10.7.1 Chinese (Traditional Chinese Characters)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.7.2 Chinese (Simplified Chinese Characters)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
IB-1501505-C 110
6.3.10.8 Korean
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.9 Portuguese
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.10 Hungarian
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.11 Dutch
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.12 Swedish
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.13 Turkish
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.14 Polish
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.15 Russian
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
6.3.10.16 Czech
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
111 IB-1501505-C
IB-1501505-C 112
7
Input/Output Functions and Devices
113 IB-1501505-C
7 Input/Output Functions and Devices
7.1 Input/Output Data
Certain kinds of data handled by the NC system can be input and output between the NC system's memory and external
devices.
7.1.1 Machining Program Input/Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
User Macros and Fixed Cycle Macros are included.
7.1.2 Tool Offset Data Input/Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7.1.3 Common Variable Input/Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7.1.4 Parameter Input/Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7.1.5 History Data Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7.1.7 System Configuration Data Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
IB-1501505-C 114
7.2 Input/Output I/F
7.2.1 RS-232C I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
There are 2 ports (port 1/2) available with the RS-232C interface for both display unit and control unit.
Display unit Control unit

Port Port 1/2 Port 1/2
Baudrate Up to 19.2kbps
Handshake method DC code method, RTS/CTS method possible
Each port can be used for the following application.

<Display unit>
Port 1: Input/output
Port 2: Input/output
<Control unit>
Port 1: Input/output, Tape operation
Port 2: Input/output, Tape operation, GX Developer communication, computer link, handy terminal
7.2.2 SD Card I/F
7.2.2.1 Control Unit-side SD Card I/F [Up to 32GB]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ― ― ―
SD card can be attached inside the control unit and used.
7.2.2.2 Front-side SD Card I/F [Up to 32GB]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ /― ○ /― ○ ○ ○ /― ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ /― ○ /― ○ ○ ○ /― ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
A SD card can be attached in front of the display unit and used.
7.2.3 Ethernet I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
The NC unit can be connected to Ethernet and used.
115 IB-1501505-C
7.2.4 Display Unit-side Data Server I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
A built-in disk (HD) of display unit can be used.
7.2.5 Front-side USB Memory I/F [Up to 32GB]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
A USB memory can be mounted.
7.2.6 USB I/F (GOT Front-side USB I/F)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
A USB memory can be mounted.
7.2.7 SD I/F (GOT Back-side SD Card I/F)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
An SD card can be mounted on the back side of GOT.
IB-1501505-C 116
7.3 Computer Link
7.3.1 Computer Link B

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
Computer link B is a function that passes the data between host computer (hereafter abbreviated to "HOST") and CNC.
This function sends [DC1] to the HOST at the CNC cycle start, and it enables operation to be performed while the
machining programs are received from the HOST.
The computer link has a reception buffer so that operation will be less susceptible to the effects of the data transfer
status at the HOST end.
The high-speed machining mode function is required for high-speed fine-segment machining.
This function cannot be operated in the 2nd and following part systems.
CNC HOST
Operation
CNC RS - 232C
Command
Machining program
117 IB-1501505-C
7.4 Others
7.4.1 Handy Terminal Connection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
This function controls the serial communication (RS232C) of CNC and handy terminal.
Handy terminal is a downsized machine operation panel which enables you to operate the machine including setup at
hand. Consequently, machine interference can be detected at hand and the operability and safety can be improved.
CNC receives data from the handy terminal and outputs them to PLC interface. CNC also sends the transmission data
which PLC set in PLC interface to the handy terminal.
Each MTB needs to create PLC program corresponding to the handy terminal.
The handy terminal needs to be customized such as the configuration of the display area, key input and communication
conditions with CNC.
IB-1501505-C 118
8
Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions
119 IB-1501505-C
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions
8.1 Spindle Functions (S)
8.1.1 Spindle Control Functions
The spindle rotation speed is determined in consideration of the override and gear ratio for the S command commanded
in automatic operation or with manual numerical commands, and the spindle is rotated. The following diagram shows an
outline of the spindle control.
When an 8-digit number following address S (S0 to S±99999999) is commanded, a signed 32-bit binary data and start
signal, or a non-signed 32-bit binary data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
Up to 1 set of S commands can be commanded in one block.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all S commands.
NC
PLC
S command value
S
command 8-digit
S command
Machining program, analysis Start signal
manual numerical
command Spindle rotation 8-digit
command
BIN
Changeover
(Parameter) Spindle rotation
command 8-digit BIN
Spindle drive Spindle output
unit MDS-E command Gear selection
series, etc. creation
Override
Remote I/O unit
D/A converter
Gear ratio
Max. rotation
Analog spindle (Parameter)
(1) The override can be designated as 50% to 120% in 10% increments or 0% to 200% in 1% increments (with
built-in PLC specifications).
The override is not changed while the spindle stop input is ON, during the tapping mode, or during the thread
cutting mode.
(2) The number of gear steps can be commanded up to four steps.
(3) The max. spindle rotation speed can be set for each gear.
(Note) The spindle functions can work on serially connected spindles.

Check the specifications of your machine.
IB-1501505-C 120
8.1.1.1 Spindle Digital I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This interface is used to connect the digital spindle (AC spindle motor and spindle driver).
8.1.1.2 Spindle Analog I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
Spindle control can be executed using an analog spindle instead of the digital spindle.
8.1.1.3 Coil Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrum down to the low-speed range by switching the
spindle motor connections.
This is a system under which commands are assigned from the PLC.
8.1.1.4 Automatic Coil Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrum down to the low-speed range by switching the
spindle motor connections.
This is a system under which the NC unit switches the coils automatically in accordance with the motor speed.
121 IB-1501505-C
8.1.1.5 Encoder Input I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ ○ ○ □ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L □ □ ○ ○ □ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
* Encoder expansion card is required for M800W/M80W
Encoder pulse input used to be fixed to 1024 pulse input on the conventional analogue interface. With this function,
arbitrary pulse can be input by parameters set in R register.
The maximum number of input pulse is 76800. Synchronous feed function can be activated with the arbitrary pulse if the
number of pulse to be used is set in R register and the external signal is turned ON.
Encoder arbitrary pulse input
Encoder
ENC interface
NC
1024 pulse fixed
High resolution Encoder

ENC interface
NC
R register Input pulse
Max76800 pulse
Two kinds of encoders can be switched over and connected. Encoder switch-over is possible, using PLC device.
Encoder changeover pulse input
Encoder1
(High resolution)
ENC interface
NC
Switch with ladder
Switch internally Encoder2
(Low resolution)
IB-1501505-C 122
8.1.1.6 Spindle-mode Servo Motor Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function controls a spindle using the combination of servo motor and servo drive unit (MDS-E Series) which controls
NC axis.
The maximum rotation speed of servo motor is low compared with a spindle motor. However, if the rated output is the
same, the machine components can be downsized by using a servo motor to drive tool spindle, etc., because the servo
motor is smaller than the spindle motor.
Note that some spindle functions can not be used under the spindle-mode servo motor control.
The figure below is the example of the application.

Normally, the components "spindle drive unit + spindle motor" are needed when cutting, drilling or milling is performed on
a lathe with turret type tool selection mechanism, which means two pairs of "spindle drive unit + spindle motor" are
needed; one for a main spindle and one for a turret.
However, downsizing of the turret, space-saving of the lathe and cost reduction can be achieved by replacing the turret
side spindle drive with a servo motor and using spindle-mode servo motor control.
Turret
Z
Gear switching mechanism
Spindle
- Turret rotation
- Tool spindle rotation
S1/C Servo motor
Spindle motor
S2
Rotary tool
Drive unit
123 IB-1501505-C
8.1.1.7 Spindle-mode Rotary Axis Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function enables a rotary axis driven by a servo motor to be controlled as a spindle. When the spindle-mode rotary
axis control command signal is turned ON, the rotary axis is controlled as a spindle. This enables lathe-turning
machining, including synchronous feed and thread cutting, to be performed in synchronization with the feedback speed
of the rotary axis (spindle-mode rotary axis mode). When the signal is turned OFF, positioning and interpolation
commands can be given to the rotary axis (servo axis mode).
The following is the example of the application.
Add S2 as B axis spindle. B axis can be controlled as S2 spindle by setting "2" to B axis parameter "#1020 sp_ax" and
setting the same value as the B axis (servo axis) drive unit I/F number to S2 axis parameter "#3031 smcp_no". B axis
can be controlled as S2 spindle by turning the spindle-mode rotary axis control command signal ON after being used as
B axis for indexing the machining surface. This enables turning machining, including thread cutting.
Milling machining Turning machining

(Spindle-mode rotary axis control command signal OFF) (Spindle-mode rotary axis control command signal ON)
Y Y
X
Z Z
Spindle
S1
Thread cutting
B(S2) S2(B)
Servo motor
B axis (rotary axis) is used for B axis (rotary axis) is controlled as a

indexing the machining surface, etc. spindle (S2). This enables turning
machining.
IB-1501505-C 124
8.1.1.8 Turret Gear Change Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ―
This function enables axes in the semi-closed system to select four types of gear ratios which are set to the spindle
specification parameters according to the control input from the PLC.
There are differences from normal gear change as follows:

(1) Positioning can be made at the predefined motor-end position regardless of the selected gear step during spindle
orientation or change to spindle position control (C axis control).
(2) Gears can be changed during the rotation.
Example of application
(1) Gear change between turret swiveling and tool spindle rotation in turret type tool post
For gear change on a turret where the turret swiveling and tool rotation are switched by physical gear using
one servo or spindle motor as illustrated below, the positioning to Z-phase position of motor end (orientation)
can be made regardless of the selected gear steps by using this function. Consequently, the gears for the
physical gear change are engaged and the physical gears can be changed.
Turret
Gear change mechanism

・Turret swiveling
・Tool spindle rotation
Servo motor
or
Spindle motor
Rotary tool
(2) Gear change during rotation

For example, the tool for polygon has a tool system in which the reduction gear is for starting torque (cutter +
tool folder). If this tool is installed in a tool post that has mechanism which rotates multiple tools by one motor,
the gear change is needed when selecting the polygon tool. However, the gear change can be performed
during the tool rotation without temporary stop so that the tool change time can be reduced.
(3) Gear change during spindle-mode servo motor control

This function is used when gear change is needed in the spindle-mode servo motor control which controls a
servo motor as spindle using the combination of servo drive unit and servo motor.
125 IB-1501505-C
8.1.2 S Code Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When an 8-digit number following address S (S0 to S±99999999) is commanded, a signed 32-bit binary data and start
signal, or a non-signed 32-bit binary data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
One set of S commands can be issued in one block.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all S commands.
S function can be designated with any other kind of commands. In the case where a movement command is in the same
block, two different command sequences are available. Depending on user PLC specifications, either one of the
following two will be applied.
(1) S function is executed after the movement is completed.
(2) S function is executed at the same time as when the movement command is issued.
IB-1501505-C 126
8.1.3 Constant Surface Speed Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables the spindle rotation speed to be adjusted (constant surface speed control) in accordance with the
movement of tool nose point so that the cutting point always remains at the constant speed (constant surface speed).
Using this function for processes such as a cutting-off process is effective for a machining time and tool life, etc.
Note that when the tool nose point is moving to the workpiece zero point, the rotation may be at the maximum rotation
speed of the machine specification and this is dangerous.
Command format
Constant surface speed ON
G96　S__ P__ ;
S : Surface speed designation (-99999999 to 99999999 (m/min), (feet/min))
P : Constant surface speed control axis designation (0 to the maximum number of the
controllable axes in G96 part system.)
Constant surface speed cancel
G97　S__ ;
S : Spindle rotation speed (-99999999 to 99999999 (r/min))
The surface speed is commanded with an S code. For the metric designation, the speed is commanded with an m/min
unit, and for the inch designation, the speed is commanded with a feet/min unit.
In the constant surface speed cancel mode, the S code is a spindle rotation speed command.
The axis for which constant surface speed is controlled is generally the X axis. However, this can be changed with the
parameter settings or with address P in the G96 block.
Select with the parameter whether to enable the spindle rotation command from other part systems to the spindle which
is in the constant surface speed control.
(Note 1) Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface
speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the
allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during
machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine or may cause damage to the operators. Thus
make sure to use this control while the "spindle speed clamp" is enabled. When the constant surface speed
control is commanded, keep enough distance from the program zero point.
(Note 2) If there is only one spindle, the spindle will not operate normally if the constant surface speed control
command, S command or spindle related M command is commanded randomly from each part system. These
commands must be commanded from only one certain part system, or commanded simultaneously with timing
synchronization function.
The controller will execute the following control for the constant surface speed control and S commands. The
part system from which an S command was issued last will have the spindle control rights. That part system
will judge whether the constant surface speed command mode is valid or canceled, and will execute spindle
control.
127 IB-1501505-C
Part system 1 program
G97 S1000 S2000 G96 S200
Part system 2 program
G96 S100
Spindle speed
1000r/min S2000r/min S100m/min S200m/min
Spindle control rights
$1 $2 $1
$1: Part system 1

$2: Part system 2
IB-1501505-C 128
8.1.4 Spindle Override

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function applies override to the rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle assigned by the machining program
command during automatic operation or by manual operation. There are two types of override.

Using an external signal, override can be applied to the commanded rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle
in 10% increments from 50% to 120%.
Using an external signal, override can be applied to the commanded rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle
in 1% increments from 0% to 200%.
(Note 1) Selection between type 1 and type 2 can be designated by user PLC processing.
8.1.5 Multiple-spindle Control
Multiple-spindle control is a function that controls second and following spindles in addition to the first spindle in a
machine tool equipped with multiple spindles.
Multiple-spindle control I can be switched to multiple-spindle control II or vice versa using a parameter and, by so doing,
the spindle control method changes.
Multiple-spindle control I Control based on a spindle selection command (such as G43.1) and spindle control command
(L system only) ([S*****;] or [SO=*****;]), etc.
Multiple-spindle control II Control based on a PLC signal (spindle command selection signal, spindle selection signal) and
spindle control command ([S*****;] only), etc.
Spindle selection command and control command of [SO=*****;] cannot be used.
The figure below shows an example of the configuration for a machine which is equipped with second and third spindles.
Tool spindle
(third spindle)
First spindle Second spindle
Tool post 1
129 IB-1501505-C
8.1.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control I

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Spindle selection command

In a machine with two or more spindles, this function makes it possible to select the spindle to apply the S
commands or feed per revolution.
Spindle selection command (G43.1/G44.1/G44.1 D_) makes it possible to select the spindle.
Using the 1st spindle control command (G43.1) and the 2nd spindle control command (G44.1), the commands can
be given to the spindle designated with the parameter.
Using the arbitrary spindle control command (G44.1 D_), an arbitrary spindle can be selected with address D.
Using all spindles simultaneous control command (G47.1), all spindles are selected.
Use this function when cutting the back of workpiece by shifting it to the second spindle from the first spindle, cutting
multiple workpieces with the respective spindles or on the respective tool posts, etc.
When selecting G43.1 = 1st spindle, G44.1 = 2nd spindle
1st tool post
G43.1 G44.1
1st spindle 2nd spindle

(main spindle) (sub spindle)
G44.1
G43.1
G44.1 Dn "n"th spindle

(sub spindle)
2nd tool post
Command format
G43.1 ; First spindle control mode ON (The spindle to be used is set using the parameter.)
G44.1 ; Second spindle control mode ON (The spindle to be used is set using the parameter.)
G44.1 D__; Arbitrary spindle control mode ON (The spindle to be used is set using address D.)
G47.1 ; All spindles simultaneous control mode ON (Encoder of the 1st spindle is used)
D : Designate the spindle. (For a spindle number command, the range is from 1 to the number of available
spindles, or from 1 to 9 for a spindle name command.)
(2) Spindle control command (Using extended word address (S =****))

In addition to using the "S*****" S commands, it is also possible to assign commands which differentiate each
spindle by using the S =*****.
Command format
S ○ =***** ;
○ : Number assigned as the spindle number (1: first spindle; 2:second spindle; ...; n: "n"th spindle (n =
maximum number of spindles for the specification)); variables can be designated.
***** : Rotational speed or surface speed value assigned by command; variables can be designated.
IB-1501505-C 130
8.1.5.2 Multiple-spindle Control II

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function selects which spindle to perform spindle function (S) command or feed per revolution (synchronous feed)
on a machine equipped with 2 or more spindles.
Command to spindles is issued with one spindle function (S) command, and you can select the target spindle with a PLC
signal (spindle selection or spindle command selection).
A parameter is used to switch the control to multiple-spindle control I.
There are two types of spindle rotation speed control: common to part systems (which validates the S function command
issued last to each spindle), and separated by each part system (which validates the S function command issued last in
the part system to which the selected spindle belongs).
131 IB-1501505-C
8.1.6 Spindle Orientation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function stops the spindle at a specified position.

The spindle zero position is determined to be the Z-phase position at the encoder method spindle orientation (PLG and
external encoder). At the proximity switch method spindle orientation, the spindle zero position is determined to be the
position of the proximity switch attached at the spindle end.
On a lathe, this function can be used for the workpiece positioning to align the attaching/removing direction and the turret
turn positioning for the tool exchanges.
When Z-phase has not yet been passed, pass Z-phase twice (excluding reciprocations within one rotation), and then
position to the orientation position.
When Z-phase has been passed already, immediately position to the orientation position.
The rotation direction of the spindle orientation is determined by the spindle zero point return specification parameter.
The spindle does not rotate if Z-phase has been passed and the orientation position is already established when
orientation command is issued.
When the spindle has been rotating in the direction opposite from that of orientation rotation when the orientation
command is issued, orientation operation will be executed after decelerating to stop. By using the parameter, the
orientation operation can be executed with the spindle revolution direction as it is, without having to decelerate and stop.
(a) Orientation
This function stops the spindle rotation at a certain position when using the digital spindle.
When the orientation command is used, the spindle will rotate several times and then stop at the orientation point.
The orientation position differs depending on the detector.
- When the orientation (PLG and external encoder) is used:
…At the Z-phase position
- When the proximity switch method orientation is used:
…At the proximity switch installation position
(b) Multi-point orientation
This function performs orientation to a position other than the Z-phase position by inputting a shift amount with the
parameter or PLC. The shift amount is -35999 to 35999. (Unit: 360°/36000=0.01°)
(Note 1) Multi-point orientation cannot be executed when using the proximity switch.
(Note 2) Orientation is possible only when the gear ratio is 1:1 for the PLG orientation.
(The orientation is completed at the PLG encoder's Z-phase, so when using reduction gears, the
orientation points will be generated at several points during one spindle rotation.)
(c) Orientation in-position advance output
This function turns the spindle in-position signal ON as soon as the spindle reaches within the second in-position
width. Then, the spindle 2nd in-position signal is turned ON as soon as the spindle reaches within the in-position
width.
Since orientation completion can be predicted using this function, it is possible to eliminate the sequence delay
time, etc. for tool changes and other such operations, thereby achieving a faster takt time.
(d) Proximity switch method orientation
Proximity switch method orientation enables the spindle positioning by providing the proximity switch position
installed on the spindle side as the spindle position zero point.
When the spindle motor and the spindle are connected with V-belt, the spindle position zero point calculated from
the spindle motor position varies due to belt slipping, etc. Thus, the spindle position zero point must be detected
from the proximity switch signal every time orientation or zero point return is carried out.
In the conventional spindle position zero point detection method, the spindle position zero point is calculated from
the spindle drive unit and transmitted to NC when the position detector detects the one-time rotation signal (Z-
phase) for the first time after the system has been turned ON, and the zero point will not be changed thereafter.
In the case of proximity switch signal orientation, NC updates the spindle position zero point every time orientation
or zero point return is carried out.
IB-1501505-C 132
8.1.7 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control)
8.1.7.1 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A spindle can be controlled as the rotary axis. After switching the spindle to the rotary axis, the positioning and the
interpolation between the spindle and other servo axes can be operated in the same way as the servo axis by executing
the position command (the movement command).
The servo axis for controlling the spindle as the rotary axis or the machinery for switching the spindle and servo axis
(such as a gear switching machinery) had been necessary for controlling a spindle readily as the rotary axis, but they are
not necessary with this function.
There are two method for switching a spindle and a rotary axis: PLC signal method and program command method. The
method can be selected with the parameter.
(1) PLC signal method

The spindle mode and the C axis mode can be switched with the servo OFF signal (*SVFn) ON/OF with PLC
ladder.
The interpolation operation is enabled by executing the movement command to the C axis in the C axis mode same
as NC axis.
(a) Switching spindle mode to C axis mode
Change the servo OFF signal (*SVFn) OFF to ON.
(b) Switching C axis mode to spindle mode
Change the servo OFF signal (*SVFn) ON to OFF.
Spindle mode C axis mode Spindle mode
Servo OFF signal Servo ON

(*SVFn)
Servo OFF
Servo ready Ready ON
signal(RDYn)
Ready OFF
(2) Program command method

In the machining program, the program switches to the C axis mode with G00 command, and to the spindle mode
with S command. The C axis servo OFF signal (*SVFn) must be kept ON while the program command method is
selected.
(a) Switching spindle mode to C axis mode
Command [G00 C__ ] in the NC program during the spindle mode. The axis is positioned directly to the
specified position.
The non-interpolation positioning for each axes is performed by specifying [G00 X__ Z__ C__ ] regardless of
the parameter setting, and C axis is switched to the C axis mode.
(b) Switching C axis mode to spindle mode
- The switching is performed with the spindle forward run signal (SRN) ON or the spindle reverse run signal
(SRI) ON and the S command.
- The switching is performed with the rising edge of the spindle forward run signal (SRN) or the spindle reverse
run signal (SRI).
133 IB-1501505-C
8.1.7.2 C Axis Control during Spindle Synchronization

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
This control enables C axis positioning while a long workpiece is controlled by Front and Back spindles that are in
synchronization with each other. Under this control, the machine can perform milling at the center of workpiece.
IB-1501505-C 134
8.1.8 Spindle Synchronization
In a machine with two or more spindles, this function controls the rotation speed and phase of one selected spindle
(synchronized spindle) in synchronization with the rotation of the other selected spindle (reference spindle). This function
can be assigned by G code or by PLC.
It is used in cases where, for instance, workpiece clamped to the reference spindle is to be clamped to the synchronized
spindle instead or where the spindle rotation speed is to be changed while one workpiece remains clamped to both
spindles.
8.1.8.1 Spindle Synchronization I

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The synchronized spindle is designated and the start/end of the synchronization are commanded with the G command in
the machining program.
The other spindle synchronization functions (Spindle synchronization control I/ Spindle synchronization control II/ Tool
spindle synchronization IA/ Tool spindle synchronization IB/ Tool spindle synchronization II/ Spindle superimposition
control) cannot be commanded during executing this function. Also this function cannot be commanded while the above
functions are being executed. In these cases an operation error will occur. However, if multiple spindle synchronization
set control is enabled, multiple spindle synchronization functions can be commanded. For details on the multiple spindle
synchronization set control, refer to "8.1.15 Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control".
Command format
Spindle synchronization control ON (G114.1)

This command is used to designate the reference spindle and the spindle to be synchronized with the reference
spindle, and it places the two designated spindles in the synchronized state.
By designating the synchronized spindle phase shift amount, the phases of the reference spindle and synchronized
spindle can be aligned.
G114.1 H__ D__ R__ A__ ;

H : Designate the reference spindle. (The number will be 1 to available numbers of spindles for command with spindle
number, and 1 to 9 for command with spindle name.)
D : Designate the spindle to be synchronized with the reference spindle. (The number will be 1 to available numbers
of spindle or from -1 to - available numbers of spindle for　command with spindle number, and 1 to 9 or -1 to -9 for
command with spindle name.)
R : Designates the synchronized spindle phase shift amount. (0 to 359.999[°] or 0 to359999[°×10-3])
A : Designates the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant. (0.001 to 9.999[s] or 1 to
9999[ms])
Spindle synchronization control cancel (G113 or G113.1)

This command releases the state of synchronization between two spindles whose rotation has been synchronized
by the spindle synchronization command.
G113 ; (Lathe system)

G113.1 ; (Lathe system/Machining center system)
135 IB-1501505-C
8.1.8.2 Spindle Synchronization II

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The selection of the spindles to be synchronized, the start of the synchronization and other settings are all designated
from the PLC.
The spindle synchronization control mode is established by inputting the spindle synchronization control signal. While
this mode is established, the synchronized spindle is controlled in synchronization with the rotation speed assigned for
the reference spindle.
functions are being executed. In these cases an operation error will occur.
However, if multiple spindle synchronization set control is enabled, multiple spindle synchronization functions can be
commanded.
8.1.8.3 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
This function is for a machine with a spindle motor to rotate a guide bushing: This function allows the guide bushing
spindle motor (G/B spindle) to synchronize with a reference spindle motor (Reference spindle).
The position error compensation function reduces the spindle’s vibration due to the workpiece’s torsion, and the motor’s
overload.
Bar feeder
Bar feeder
Collet Chuck (Reference spindle) Guide bushing

(G/B spindle)
IB-1501505-C 136
8.1.9 Tool Spindle Synchronization I (Polygon)
8.1.9.1 Tool Spindle Synchronization IA (Spindle-Spindle, Polygon)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
With a machine equipped with two or more spindles, this function enables polygon machining between spindles (IA) by
controlling the workpiece spindle rotation in synchronization with the rotary tool spindle rotation. The rotary tool spindle
and workpiece spindle are designated among the spindles.
Control for the workpiece spindle and rotary tool spindle can be performed by Spindle drive unit MDS-*-SP series, etc.
This function can be used with the G code list 2 to 5.
commanded.
Command format
Tool spindle synchronization IA mode command (G114.2)

This command establishes the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode (IA) in which two spindles are rotated in
synchronization at two different speeds. It is required to designate the rotary tool spindle, workpiece spindle and the
rotational ratios (number of rotary tool teeth and number of work angles) of the two designated spindles.
G114.2 H__ D__ E__ L__ R__ ;

H : Selects the rotary tool spindle.
D : Selects the workpiece spindle.
E : Designates the rotary tool spindle rotational ratio.
L : Designates the workpiece spindle rotational ratio.
R : Synchronized spindle phase shift amount
Tool spindle synchronization IA mode cancel command (G113)

This command releases the state of synchronization between two spindles whose rotation has been synchronized by the
spindle synchronization command.
G113 ;
(Note) An axis that involves any travel cannot be put in the same block as Tool spindle synchronization IA mode
cancel command. If the axis address is included in the block, a program error occurs upon the cancel
command, causing the automatic operation to stop.
137 IB-1501505-C
8.1.9.2 Tool Spindle Synchronization IB (Spindle-Spindle, Polygon)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
With a machine equipped with two or more spindles, this function enables polygon machining between spindles (IB) by
controlling the rotary tool spindle rotation in synchronization with the workpiece spindle rotation. The rotary tool spindle
and workpiece spindle are designated among the spindles.
A parameter is used to switch from Tool spindle synchronization IB to Tool spindle synchronization IC or vice versa.
Control for the workpiece spindle and rotary tool spindle can be performed by Spindle drive unit MDS-*-SP series, etc.
This function can be used with the G code list 6 and 7.
commanded.
Command format
Tool spindle synchronization IB mode ON (G51.2 or G251)

This command establishes the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode in which two spindles are rotated in
synchronization at two different speeds. It is required to designate the rotary tool spindle, workpiece spindle and the
rotational ratios (number of work angles and number of rotary tool teeth) of the two designated spindles.
G51.2 H__ D__ P__ Q__ R__ ;

H : Selects the workpiece spindle (spindle).
D : Selects the rotary tool spindle (spindle).
P : Designates the workpiece spindle rotational ratio.
Q : Designates the rotary tool spindle rotational ratio.
R : Synchronized spindle phase shift amount
Tool spindle synchronization IB mode cancel command (G50.2 or G250)
G50.2 ;
(Note) An axis that involves any travel cannot be put in the same block as Tool spindle synchronization IB mode
IB-1501505-C 138
8.1.9.3 Tool Spindle Synchronization IC (Spindle-NC Axis, Polygon)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
This function controls so that the workpiece (spindle) and tool (NC axis) synchronously rotate at the commanded ratio
and allows polygon machining. Tool spindle synchronization IB and Tool spindle synchronization IC can be switched by
the parameter.
This function can be used with the G code list 6 and 7.
Command format
Tool spindle synchronization IC mode ON (G51.2 or G251)
G51.2 P__ Q__ ; Spindle synchronization start (Tool spindle synchronization IC mode start)
P : Spindle rotational ratio
Q : Rotary tool axis rotational ratio
Rotation direction is specified with a sign.
+: Forward run / -: Reverse run
Tool spindle synchronization IC mode OFF (G50.2 or G250)
G50.2 ;
139 IB-1501505-C
8.1.10 Tool Spindle Synchronization II (Hobbing)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
This function is to cut the gear with hob (hob cutter).

A spur gear can be machined by synchronizing and rotating the hob axis and the workpiece axis in a constant ratio.
A helical gear can be machined by compensating the workpiece axis according to the gear torsion angle for the Z axis
movement.
Spur gears Helical gears
By synchronizing and rotating the hob axis and the workpiece axis in a constant rotation ratio, a gear is machined so that
the cutter is engaged with gear.
Hob
Gear
Hob axis : Rotary tool axis on which a hob is mounted.

Workpiece axis : Rotary axis on which a workpiece is mounted.
commanded.
IB-1501505-C 140
8.1.11 Spindle Speed Clamp

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function is to limit the spindle rotation speed to the ranges between the maximum rotation speed and the minimum
rotation speed.
This function can be set by a parameter or a program.
G92 S__ Q__ ; Spindle clamp speed setting

S : Maximum clamp rotation speed
Q : Minimum clamp rotation speed
An alarm will occur if the constant surface speed control is conducted without issuing the spindle clamp speed command
(G92).
8.1.13 Spindle Oscillation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function reciprocates (oscillates) the spindles with designated amplitude and frequency.
141 IB-1501505-C
8.1.14 Spindle Superimposition Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
Spindles are controlled by superimposing the rotation speed of one spindle on the rotary speed of other spindle.
Use this function when the tool spindle needs to be rotated with the superimposed speed on the spindle rotation speed.
If this function is used when tapping is performed to the center of a workpiece clamped to a spindle during its rotation, for
instance, the tapping to the center of the workpiece (shown in Figure (b) below) can be performed during the turning
machining (shown in Figure (a) below) so that the cycle time can be reduced.
commanded.
(1) Conventional method
Synchronous tapping
Forward:
+500 (r/min)
Backward:
-500 (r/min)
(a) (b)
S1=1000(r/min) S1 = 0 (r/min)
Normal turning machining The rotation of the front workpiece is stopped, and then the tapping is
started at the front center.
(2) Using the spindle superimposition control
Synchronous tapping
Forward:
+1500 (r/min)
(b) Backward:
(a) +500 (r/min)
S1=1000(r/min)
Turning (a) and tapping at the front center (b) are performed simultaneously.
IB-1501505-C 142
Command format
Spindle superimposition control valid command

G164 command specifies the reference spindle and superimposed spindle and makes the two spindles to be
superimposed.
G164 H__ D__ ;

H : Select the reference spindle (For command using the spindle number, the spindle number should be within the
number of spindles for specifications. For command using the spindle name, the name is valid from 1 to 9.)
D : Select the superimposed spindle (For command using the spindle number, the spindle number should be within
the number of spindles for specifications. For command using the spindle name, the number from 1 to 9 or from
-1 to -9 is valid for the spindle name.)
Command with the spindle name if all spindle names are set to the spindle name parameter. For others, command
with the spindle number.
Spindle superimposition control cancel command

G113 command cancels the superimposition of two spindles which are rotating by the differential velocity
rotation tool command.
The superimposition can be cancelled also with "Spindle synchronization cancel" signal ON.
G113 ;
(Note) An axis that involves any travel cannot be put in the same block as the spindle superimposition control
143 IB-1501505-C
8.1.15 Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
By setting the parameter, spindle synchronization I, tool spindle synchronization IA / IB (spindle-spindle, polygon), tool
spindle synchronization II (hobbing) and spindle superimposition control can be executed simultaneously for multiple
sets of spindles.
This function enables the following machining.
Spindle synchronization I command (S1-S2) Spindle synchronization I command (S1-S2)

+ Tool spindle synchronization IA command (S3-S4) + Tool spindle synchronization IA command (S1-S5)
S1 S2 S1 S2
S5
S3
S4
Spindle synchronization I command (S1-S2) Spindle/C axis synchronization control command (S1/C1-S2)
+ Tool spindle synchronization II command (S3-C4) + Tool spindle synchronization II command (S5-C1)
S1 S2 S1/C1 S2
S5
S3
C4
Spindle synchronization I command (S1-S2) Tool spindle synchronization IA command (S5-S1)

+ Spindle superimposition control command (S4-S3) + Tool spindle synchronization IA command (S3-S4)
S1 S2 S1
S5
S3
S4 S3 S4
Tool spindle synchronization II command (S5-C1) Spindle superimposition control command (S1-S5)
+ Tool spindle synchronization II command (S3-C4) + Spindle superimposition control command (S4-S3)
C1 S1 S5
S5
S3
C4 S4 S3
(Note 1) The guide bushing spindle synchronization is not included in the number of multiple spindle synchronization
sets.
IB-1501505-C 144
Command format
For details on the command format which starts each function, refer to the respective chapters.
Spindle synchronization control cancel
(1) Command to cancel all synchronization modes

Cancels all the synchronized sets. The format varies depending on the parameter settings.
G113 H0 ; Cancels all the active tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) commands.
G113 D0 ; Cancels all the active spindle synchronization I, tool spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle,
polygon), and spindle superimposition commands.
G113 ;
(2) Spindle synchronization I, tool spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle, polygon), or spindle

superimposition control cancel command
G113 D_ ;
D : Synchronized or superimposed spindle to cancel (For a spindle number command, the range is from 1 to the
number of available spindles, or from 1 to 9 for a spindle name command.)
(3) Tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) cancel command (when the G code list of the program is 2, 3, 4, or 5)
G113 H_ ;
H : Reference spindle to cancel (For a spindle number command, the range is from 1 to the number of available
spindles, or from 1 to 9 for a spindle name command.)
(4) Tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) cancel command (when the G code list of the program is 6 or 7)
Cancel tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) of the specified part system.
G80.4 ;
(5) Tool spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle, polygon) cancel command

Cancel tool spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle, polygon) of the specified part system.
G50.2 ;
145 IB-1501505-C
8.1.16 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
When this function is valid and the spindle actual speed fluctuates for the commanded speed by the program due to
external factors such as load fluctuation, the NC outputs the signal (Spindle speed out of setting range) to PLC and the
operation error occurs.
PLC can take the necessary measure for the fluctuation of the spindle speed using the output signal (Spindle speed out
of setting range) from the NC.
The operation error output from the NC does not stop the automatic operation or the spindle.
A parameter is used to switch whether or not to output the operation error during spindle speed fluctuation detection
(G162).
Spindle rotation speed

(r/min) Allowable fluctuation speed range
(Set by "R" or "I" address.)
G162 command
Spindle speed fluctuation detection in monitor
Time
Spindle speed fluctuation detection: In spindle speed fluctuation (S)
Spindle speed out of setting range detection
Commanded speed
Actual speed
Command format
Starting the spindle speed fluctuation detection

The spindle speed fluctuation detection is started by commanding G162.
G162 S__ P__ Q__ R__ I__ ;

S : Detection target spindle name (1 to 9)
P : Delay time for starting spindle speed fluctuation detection (0 to 99.999 (s))
Q : Spindle speed attainment detection range (1 to 100 (%))
R : Spindle speed fluctuation allowance rate (1 to 100 (%))
I : Allowable fluctuation range in spindle speed (0 to 999999 (r/min))
Canceling the spindle speed fluctuation detection

The spindle speed fluctuation detection is canceled by commanding G163.
G163 S__ ;
S : Detection target spindle name (1 to 9)
IB-1501505-C 146
8.2 Tool Functions (T)
8.2.1 Tool Functions (T Command)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The command is issued with an 8-digit number following address T (T0 - T99999999). The tool function is used to
command the tool No. In the lathe specification controller, the tool compensation (tool length compensation, tool nose
wear compensation) Nos. are also indicated.
(1) M system
Tool function, or T function, is used to designate the tool No. and tool compensation No.
This can be designated with an 8-digit number following address T (0 to 99999999). Up to four sets of T
commands can be issued in one block. Note that the number of T commands to be issued within the same
block is determined by parameter.
BCD output or binary output can be selected by parameter.
Output signal is 8-digit BCD code and start signal, signed 32-bit binary data and start signal, or non-signed 32-
bit binary data and start signal.
T function can be designated with any other kind of commands. In the case where a movement command is in
the same block, two different command sequences are available. Depending on machine specifications, either
one of the following two will be applied.
(a) T function is executed after the movement is completed.

(b) T function is executed at the same time as when the movement command is issued.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all the T commands.
(Note 1) In some setting and display units, there may be screens that cannot display all eight digits.
(2) L system
The command is issued with an 8-digit number following address T (T0 to T99999999). The high-order digits
are designated as the tool No., and the low-order digit(s) are designated as the offset No. Each number of
high/low-order digits depends on the specifications of MTB (the parameter setting).
T
Tool offset No.
Tool No.
T
Tool offset No.

Tool No.
T
Tool offset No.
Tool No.
The tool No. code data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
All the other details are the same as in M system.
147 IB-1501505-C
8.3 Miscellaneous Functions (M)
8.3.1 Miscellaneous Functions

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Miscellaneous function, or M function, is used to command auxiliary functions for NC, such as rotating the spindle
forward/backward or stopping it, as well as turning the cooling oil ON/OFF.
This can be designated with an 8-digit number following address M (0 to 99999999). Up to four sets of M commands can
be issued in one block. Note that the number M commands to be issued within the same block is determined by
parameter.
BCD output or binary output can be selected by parameter.
Output signal is 8-digit BCD code and start signal, signed 32-bit binary data and start signal, or non-signed 32-bit binary
data and start signal.
(Example) G00 Xx1 Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 ;
(1) When 5 or more sets are commanded in one block, only the last 4 sets are valid.
M00, M01, M02, M30, M96, M97, M98 and M99 are used only for some specific purposes and cannot be
assigned as regular M functions.
(2) Processing and completion sequences are required for all M functions except M96, M97, M98 and M99.
Refer to user PLC specification for the relationship between values and functions.
As for M00, M01, M02 and M30, next block is not read into pre-reading buffer due to ban on pre-reading
processing.
(3) Although M00, M01, M02, and M30 output an independent signal for each, the independent output of M00,
M01, M02 and M30 will be reset upon pressing a reset key.
(4) M command can be designated with other commands within the same block. In the case where a movement
command is in the same block, two different command sequences are available. Depending on user PLC
specifications, either one of the following two will be applied.
(a) M function is executed after the movement is completed.
(b) M function is executed at the same time as when the movement command is issued.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all the M commands except M96, M97, M98 and M99.
(Note 1) In some setting and display units, there may be screens that cannot display all eight digits.
8.3.2 Multiple M Codes in 1 Block

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Up to four sets of M commands can be issued in a block.

Respective processing and completion sequences are required for all M commands included in a block (except M98 and
M99).
(Note 1) This function requires a built-in PLC. In this case, the code data and start signals of all the M commands in the
same block are transferred simultaneously from the controller to the PLC, and so high-speed machine control
can be done by the PLC processing sequence.
IB-1501505-C 148
8.3.3 M Code Independent Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the M00, M01, M02 or M30 command is assigned during an automatic operation (tape, memory, MDI) or by a
manual numerical command, the signal of this function is output. It is turned OFF after the miscellaneous function
finishes or by the reset & rewind signal.
Machining program M code independent output Response to controller

M00 M00 Fin1 or Fin2
M01 M01 Fin1 or Fin2
M02 M02 Reset & rewind
M30 M30 Reset & rewind
If movement or dwell command exists in the same block as these M commands, this signal is output upon completion of
the movement or dwell command.
149 IB-1501505-C
8.3.4 Miscellaneous Function Finish

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
These signals inform the CNC system that a miscellaneous function (M), spindle function (S), tool function (T) or 2nd
miscellaneous function (A, B, C) has been assigned and that the PLC which has received it has completed the required
operation. They include miscellaneous function finish signal 1 (FIN1) and miscellaneous function finish signal 2 (FIN2).
Miscellaneous function finish signal 1 (FIN1)

When the controller checks that FIN1 is ON, it sets the function strobes OFF. Furthermore, when the PLC checks that
the function strobes are OFF, it sets FIN1 OFF. The controller checks that FIN1 is OFF and advances to the next block.
Below is an example of a time chart applying when a miscellaneous function has been assigned.
Command
Next block
Miscellaneous function strobe (MF)
Miscellaneous function finish signal

(FIN1)
Miscellaneous function finish signal 2 (FIN2)

When the controller checks that FIN2 is ON, it sets the function strobes OFF and simultaneously advances to the next
block. The PLC checks that the strobe signals are OFF and sets FIN2 OFF.
Below is an example of a time chart applying when a miscellaneous function has been assigned.
Command
Next block
Miscellaneous function strobe (MF)
Miscellaneous function finish signal

(FIN2)
IB-1501505-C 150
8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Traveling

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
This function controls the timing at which miscellaneous functions are output, and it outputs a miscellaneous function
when axis reaches at the designated position movement.
The command format is as follows.
G117 Xx1 Zz1 Cc1 □ □ □ □ ;

G117 : Command of M code output during axis traveling
Xx1,Zz1,Cc1 : Movement start points
□□□□ : Miscellaneous function
(1) This command is issued independently immediately before the block with the movement command that
activates the miscellaneous function.
(2) Single block stop does not apply to this command.
(3) The maximum number of groups to which the miscellaneous functions in the G117 block can be issued is as
follows:
M commands 4 sets
S commands 2 sets
T commands 1 set
2nd miscellaneous
1 set
function
(4) This command can be issued in up to two consecutive blocks.

When issued in three or more consecutive blocks, the last two blocks will be valid.
(Example) G117 Xx1 Zz1 Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 ;
G117 Xx2 Zz2 Mm5 Mm6 Mm7 Mm8 ;
G01 X200 Z200 ;
:
Mm 1 End point (200, 200)

Mm 2 (x2, z2)
Mm 3
Mm 5
Mm 4
Mm 6
(x1, z1) Mm 7
Start point Mm 8
151 IB-1501505-C
8.3.6 Miscellaneous Function Command High-speed Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The miscellaneous command high-speed output shortens a processing time per miscellaneous function. There are two
functions that can be selected individually.
(1) Change miscellaneous command completion method

Select one of the following methods by the parameter.
High-speed method:
The controller inverts a strobe signal logically at the time of outputting a miscellaneous command. The PLC
performs the designated operation and logically inverts the high-speed miscellaneous function finish signal
(MFIN1 to 4, SFIN1 to 6, TFIN1 to 4, BFIN1 to 4). The controller completes the miscellaneous function when
the strobe signal and the high-speed miscellaneous function finish signal become the same logic level.
Normal method:
Conventional method (Refer to "8.3.4 Miscellaneous Function Finish" for details.)
(2) Selecting miscellaneous command completion method

Select whether or not to wait for a finish signal from the PLC using the parameter.
It can be selected for M, S, T or B individually.
IB-1501505-C 152
- High-speed method that waits for a finish signal from the PLC
The miscellaneous function completes by matching the logic level of the finish signal with that of the strobe signal.
Machining program Mxx Myy Next block
M code data Mxx code Myy code

data data
Strobe (MFn) Mxx Myy

strobe strobe
MFINn
- High-speed method that does not wait for a finish signal from the PLC
When a series of miscellaneous commands is issued, the completion of the previous miscellaneous command is
waited.
M code data Mxx code Myy code data

data
Strobe (MFn) Mxx Myy strobe

strobe
MFINn
- Normal method that waits for a finish signal from the PLC
Conventional method.

data

strobe strobe
FIN2
- Normal method that does not wait for a finish signal from the PLC
When a series of miscellaneous commands is issued, the completion of the previous miscellaneous command is
waited.

data

strobe strobe
FIN2
153 IB-1501505-C
8.4 2nd Miscellaneous Functions (B)
8.4.1 2nd Miscellaneous Functions

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The code data and start signals are output when an 8-digit number is assigned following the address code A, B or C -
whichever does not duplicate the axis name being used.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all 2nd miscellaneous commands.
(Note 1) This function requires a built-in PLC.
(Note 2) There are some screens in the setting and display unit that cannot display all eight digits.
8.4.2 2nd Miscellaneous Function Name Extension

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The 2nd miscellaneous function name same as the additional axes (A, B, C) can be used by specifying the command
address of the 2nd miscellaneous function with two characters.
Whether the command address has one character or two characters can be set by the parameter.
The operation of the 2nd miscellaneous function is same as the operation with the one character address method.
IB-1501505-C 154
9
Tool Compensation
155 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
9.1 Tool Length/Tool Position
9.1.1 Tool Length Offset

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
These commands make it possible to control the axis movement by compensating the position of the end point of the
movement command by a compensation amount set on the tool compensation screen.
Using this function, it is possible to compensate the difference in distance between the actual position of the machine's
tool nose and the program coordinate position made by the tool length and to enhance both the programming and
operational efficiency.
(1) M system
G43 Zz1 Hh1 ;

G44 Zz1 Hh1 ;
: Tool length compensation command + direction (z1+h1)
G43
: Tool length compensation command + direction (z1-h1)
G44
: Compensation axis. Tool length compensation can be provided not only for the Z axis but for all the other
Zz1
axes (X, Y, etc.) which can be controlled in the system.
Hh1
: Compensation No.
Compensation can be canceled by the following G commands.
G49 ;
G43 H0 ;
G44 H0 ;
(Note) When the tool length compensation axis is returned to the reference position, the compensation of that axis is
canceled.
IB-1501505-C 156
9 Tool Compensation
(2) L system
(a) Shape compensation
Tool length is compensated in reference to the programmed base position. The programmed base position is
usually the center of the tool rest or the nose position of the base tool.
The programmed base position is The programmed base position is

the center of the tool rest: the nose of the base tool:
Base position
(base point)
Base tool
X-axis tool length Tool used for machining

compensation
X-axis tool length

compensation
Z-axis tool length

compensation
Z-axis tool length
compensation
(b) Wear compensation

The wear of a tool nose can be compensated.
X-axis tool nose wear

compensation amount Z
Z-axis tool nose wear compensation amount
157 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
(c) Command format

Tool compensation is performed by a T command. It is specified in eight digits following address T. Tool
compensation is divided into two types: tool length compensation and tool nose wear compensation. It
depends on the machine specifications as to which digit of T command denotes the tool No., tool length
compensation No. or tool nose wear compensation No. (specified by parameters).
(i) Specifying tool length and wear compensation Nos. together using low-order digits of the T command
T Tool length compensation No. and tool nose wear

compensation No.
Tool No.

compensation No.
Tool No.

compensation No.
Tool No.
(ii) Specifying tool length and wear compensation Nos. separately
T
Tool nose wear compensation No.
Tool length compensation No.
Tool No.
T
Tool No.
T
Tool No.
The tool compensation for the lathe is valid only for the X and Z axes. If an additional axis (Y axis) and the
second additional axis are added, the tool compensation will be validated for each additional axis. It supports 4
axes in total.
The additional axis is the third or fourth axis which is selected using a parameter.
IB-1501505-C 158
9 Tool Compensation
9.1.2 Tool Position Offset

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function uses commands to control the movement by changing the positions of the end points of the movement
commands to positions which have been extended or reduced by an amount equivalent to the tool compensation
amount.
This function can be used to compensate for the difference in distance between the position where the tool on the
machine is actually mounted and the programmed coordinate position based on the tool position and thereby improve
the efficiency of both machining and operation.
G45 G00 Xx1 Yy1 Dd1 ;

G45 : Tool position offset command
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement axes
Dd1 : Offset No.
With tool position offset, the offset operation is performed only for blocks containing a G45 to G48 command.
G45 command G46 command G47 command G48 command

Extension by amount equivalent Reduction by amount equivalent Extension by twice the offset Reduction by twice the offset
to offset amount to offset amount amount amount
Program Program Program Program

command command command command
Actual Actual Actual Actual

movement movement movement movement
amount amount amount amount
(1) If the start and end points are on an axis, the radius can be extended or reduced only for one-quarter, one-half and
three-quarter arcs.
(2) In the case of absolute commands, the position is extended or reduced in each axial direction from the end point of
the previous block along the line of the movement toward the position commanded in the block containing the G45
(or G46, G47 or G48) command.
(3) In the case of simultaneous n axes command, the same amount of offset is applied to all the axes that have the
command within the range of the number of the axes which can be simultaneously controlled. Tool position offset is
also valid for additional axes.
9.1.3 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The tool compensation for the lathe is valid for the first axis (normally X axis) and the second axis (normally Z axis). If
additional or second additional axes are added as the third and subsequent axes, the tool compensation is also valid for
each additional axes.
The additional axes to which the tool compensation is executed are determined according to the parameter setting.
159 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
9.1.4 Tool Position Compensation (G43.7)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The position compensation of a turning tool is executed when turning is performed in a machine of machining center
system. Use of the tool position compensation enables the three base axes (X, Y and Z axes) to be compensated from
the tool base position (base point).
Before setting the compensations of the three base axes, set the parameter to switch the tool compensation display type
to type III.
Y axis tool compen- X axis tool compensation

sation amount amount
(base axis J) (base axis I)
Z(+)
Z axis tool
compensation
amount
(base axis K)
Y(+)
Base position (base point)
X(+)
Command format
G43.7 H__; Tool position compensation start

G49; Tool position compensation cancel
H : Compensation No. (H0 cancels tool position compensation.)
IB-1501505-C 160
9 Tool Compensation
9.2 Tool Radius
9.2.1 Tool Radius Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
These commands function to provide tool radius compensation. Through a combination with the G command and D
address assignment, they compensate for the actual tool center path either inside or outside the programmed path by an
amount equivalent to the tool radius.
The tool path is calculated by the intersection point arithmetic system and, as a result, excessive cut amounts on the
inside of corners are avoided.
G code Function
G38 Vector designation during tool radius compensation
G39 Corner arc during tool radius compensation
G40 Tool radius compensation cancel
G41 Tool radius compensation left command
G42 Tool radius compensation right command
Tool center path
r r
r: Tool radius compensation amount Programmed path
The tool radius compensation command controls the compensation from that block in which G41 or G42 is commanded.
In the tool radius compensation mode, the program is read up to five blocks ahead including blocks with no movement,
and interference check using tool radius is conducted up to three blocks ahead in any of those blocks with movement.
G17 G01 G41 Xx1 Yy1 Dd1 ;

G17 : Compensation plane
G01 : Cutting command
G41 : Tool radius compensation left command
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement axis
Dd1 : Compensation No.
The compensation plane, movement axes and next advance direction vector are based on the plane selection command
designated by G17 to G19.
G17: XY plane, X, Y, I, J
G18: ZX plane, Z, X, K, I
G19: YZ plane, Y, Z, J, K
161 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
An arc is inserted at the corner by the following command during tool radius compensation.
G39 Xx1 Yy1 ;

G39 : Corner arc during tool radius compensation
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement amount
Tool center path Arc inserted at corner
Programmed path
The compensation vector can be changed in following two ways.
G38 Xx1 Yy1 ;

G38 : Vector designation for tool radius compensation
The tool radius compensation vector amount and direction are retained.
G38 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Dd1 ;

G38 : Vector designation for tool radius compensation
Ii1,Jj1 : Compensation vector direction
Dd1 : Compensation vector length
The tool radius compensation vector direction is updated by I and J.
Holding of previous
Tool center path intersection point vector
Vector with length D (i14, j14)
N11 G01 Xx11;
N12 N13 N12 G38 Xx12 Yy12;
N11 N14 N13 G38 Xx13 Yy13;
N15 N14 G38 Xx14 Ii14 Ji14 Dd14;
Intersection point vector
N15 G40 Xx15 Yy15;
The tool radius compensation is canceled by the following command.
G40 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 ;

G40 : Tool radius compensation cancel
Ii1,Jj1 : Compensation vector direction
The vector prior to canceling is prepared by calculating the intersection point with the I and J direction.
Tool center path

When i and j commands
N14 are assigned to G40 N11 G01 Xx11 ;
N12 Xx12 Yy12 ;
N12 N13 Xx13 Yy13 ;
N13
N11 N14 G40 Xx14 Ii14 Jj14 ;
(i14,J14)
IB-1501505-C 162
9 Tool Compensation
9.2.2 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ (*1) △ (*1) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(*1) This function is available during program format switch.
This command serves the function of compensating for the spherical radius of ball end mills. It compensates for the
actual tool center path to be either more outside or inside the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the tool
radius amount in accordance with the 3-dimensional vectors.
G code Function
Tool radius compensation cancel
G40
Tool radius compensation left command (compensation in the direction toward IJK)
G41
Tool radius compensation right command (compensation in the direction away from
G42
IJK)
With 3-dimensional tool radius compensation, the compensation is controlled from the block in which the block
containing the G41 or G42 command has been designated.
G01 G41 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Dd1 ;

G01 : Cutting
G41 : Tool radius compensation left command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Movement axis
Ii1,Jj1,Kk1 : Tool sphere center vectors
Dd1 : Compensation No.
The radius from the tool spherical center to the end nose serves as the compensation amount that corresponds to the
tool compensation No. designated by d1. The compensation Nos. that can be used are limited by the "number of tool
compensation sets." (Refer to the section "9.3.1 Number of Tool Offset Sets".)
If the compensation vectors (tool spherical center vectors) are to be changed, the G41 and I, J and K commands must be
assigned.
Tool
Tool center
coordinates
(x’, y’, z’) (I, J, K) Normal line vector
r: Tool radius
Z (K)
Work
Programmed
coordinates position 3-dimensional
(x, y, z) compensation vector
Y (J) X (I)
163 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
9.2.3 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40/41/42)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Because a tool nose is generally rounded, a hypothetical tool nose point is used for creating programming. As a result,
due to this roundnessof the tool nose, there will be a gap between the programmed shape and the actual cutting shape
during taper cutting or circular cutting. Nose radius compensation is a function to automatically calculate and offset this
error by setting the tool nose radius value.
"Nose radius compensation" is a type of compensation that is available when turning is performed on a lathe.
"Nose radius compensation for machining center system" is a function which enables the nose radius compensation
when turning is performed on a machining center. The basic operation follows the specifications of "Tool Nose Radius
Compensation".
G code Function
G40 Nose R compensation cancel
G41 Nose R compensation left command
G42 Nose R compensation right command
Tool nose center path with no nose R

compensation (Shaded part indicates the
cutting shape gap)
Tool nose center path with Tool nose

nose R compensation center
Tool nose R
Hypothetical tool
nose point
Nose R interference check

In the nose radius compensation mode, the program is read up to five blocks ahead including blocks with no movement,
and an interference check using the nose radius is conducted up to three blocks ahead in any of those blocks with
movement.
IB-1501505-C 164
9 Tool Compensation
9.2.4 Automatic Decision of Nose Radius Compensation Direction (G46/40)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The nose radius compensation direction is automatically determined from the tool nose point and the specified
movement vector.
G code Function
Nose radius compensation cancel
G40
Nose radius compensation ON (Automatic decision of compensation
G46
direction)
The compensation directions based on the movement vectors at the tool nose points are as follows:
Tool nose Tool nose

direction Tool nose point direction Tool nose point
Tool Tool
nose nose
progress 1 2 3 4 progress 5 6 7 8
direction direction
R R L L R L
R L L R R L
(tool nose points 1 to 4)
(tool nose points 5 to 8)
L R R L L R
Mouvement vectors
Mouvement vectors
L R L L R R
L L R R L R
L R R L L R
R L L R R L
R L R R L L
Range of each Range of each
tool nose point tool nose point
(1 to 4) (5 to 8)
9.2.5 Tool Radius Compensation Diameter Designation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Tool diameter designation handles the compensation amount as diameter value and compensates the amount set in the
tool compensation amount screen when tool radius compensation (G41/G42 command) is commanded.
Whether compensation amount is handled in radius value or diameter value is switched by the parameter.
165 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
9.3 Tool Offset Amount
9.3.1 Number of Tool Offset Sets
[M system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

Number of tool compensation sets M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
Number of tool offset sets (99 sets) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ―
Number of tool offset sets (128 sets) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Number of tool offset sets (200 sets) ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○ ― ○
Number of tool offset sets (400 sets) △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Number of tool offset sets (999 sets) △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
[L system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

Number of tool compensation sets M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
Number of tool offset sets (99 sets) ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ○ ○ ―
Number of tool offset sets (128 sets) ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ― ― ○
Number of tool offset sets (256 sets) ― ― ― ― ○ ○ ― ― ― △
The number of tool compensation sets (the number of tool offset sets) for the fixed allocation is shown in the following
tables. Refer to "9.3.3 Number of Tool Offset Sets Allocation to Part Systems" for the arbitrary allocation.
<M system>
Independent for part systems

Common for part systems or 1-part
Function name and multi-part system
system specification
specification
Number of tool offset sets (200 sets) 200 sets Divide the number of tool offset
Number of tool offset sets (400 sets) 400 sets sets by the number to obtain the
number of sets per part system.
(If there is the remainder, the
Number of tool offset sets (999 sets) 999 sets remainder goes to the 1st part
system.)
<L system>
Independent for part systems

Common for part systems or 1-part
Function name and multi-part system
system specification
specification
Number of tool offset sets (99 sets) 99 sets Divide the number of tool offset
Number of tool offset sets (128 sets) 128 sets sets by the number to obtain the
number of sets per part system.
Number of tool offset sets (256 sets) 256 sets
(If there is the remainder, the
Number of tool offset sets (400 sets) 400 sets remainder goes to the 1st part
Number of tool offset sets (999 sets) 999 sets system.)
(Note) Whether the tool compensation memory is provided commonly for the part systems or independently for the
part systems depends on the parameter settings.
IB-1501505-C 166
9 Tool Compensation
9.3.2 Offset Memory
9.3.2.1 Tool Shape/Wear Offset Amount

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function registers the tool shape compensation and wear compensation amounts. Compensation may encompass
two or more axes.
Tool compensation types I, II and III are available for M system, which can be selected by the parameter. For L system,
tool compensation type III is always used.
(1) Shape compensation amount

The tool length compensation amount, tool radius compensation amount, nose radius compensation amount,
nose radius imaginary tool tip point or tool width can be set as the shape compensation amount.
The compensation amount that can be set and used differs depending on whether compensation amount
setting type I,II or III is used.
(2) Wear compensation amount

When the tip of the tool used has become worn, the wear compensation amount is used to compensate this
wear. Types of wear compensation amounts include the tool length wear compensation amount, tool radius
wear compensation amount, and nose radius wear compensation amount.
The wear compensation amount can be used with compensation amount setting types II and III, and it is
added to the shape compensation amount for compensation.
167 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
(a) Type I: 1-axis compensation amount [M system]

This is the value that is used by rotary tools.
As the tool length compensation amount, among the compensation amounts for the position of the tool
moving in the direction parallel to the control axis, the compensation amount in the longitudinal direction
of the rotary tool is registered. The tool length compensation amount is set as a minus value.
As the tool radius compensation amount, among the compensation amounts for the position of the tool
moving in the direction parallel to the control axis, the compensation amount in the radial direction of the
rotary tool is registered. The tool radius compensation amount is set as a plus value.
One compensation amount data is registered in one compensation No., and the compensation Nos. are
assigned using the address D or H commands. When a No. is assigned by a D address command,
compensation is provided in the form of the tool radius; when it is assigned by an H address command, it
is provided in the form of the tool length.
(b) Type II: 1-axis compensation amounts/with wear compensation [M system]

As with type I, type II is for the compensation amounts used by rotary tools.
With type II, four kinds of compensation amount data are registered in one compensation No.: the tool
length compensation amount, tool length wear compensation amount, tool radius compensation amount,
and tool radius wear compensation amount.
When a compensation No. is assigned by address D as the compensation amount, the tool radius is
compensated using the amount obtained by adding the shape compensation amount and tool radius
wear compensation amount. Further, the tool length is compensation using the amount obtained by
adding the shape compensation amount and tool length wear compensation amount.
Tool length compensation amount Wear compensation amount when

Compensation types I Compensation types I and II using type II
R R M
Shape
Tool length compen-
compensation Tool length sation
amount compensa- amount
tion amount
Tool radius wear

compensation
amount Tool length
wear
Workpiece Workpiece compensation
Tool radius wear amount
compensation
amount
Table Table
IB-1501505-C 168
9 Tool Compensation
(c) Type III: 2-axis compensation amounts [M system][L system]

Type III is for the compensation amounts used by non-rotary tools.
As the compensation amounts, the tool length along the X, Y and Z axes and the wear amount along
each of these axes, the nose radius and nose radius wear amount, tool tip point P and tool width can be
registered.
Compensation is carried out in the directions of the X, Y and Z axes from the base position in the
program. Generally, the center of the tool rest or the tip of the base tool is used as the programmed base
position.
1. The programmed base position is the center of 2. The programmed base position is the tip of the
the tool rest: base tool:
Base Base tool

position
(base point) Tool used for machining
Base position
X-axis tool length (base point)
compensation
amount
X-axis tool length
compensation
amount
Z-axis tool length
Z-axis tool length compensation amount
compensation amount
The tool tip contour arc radius (nose radius) of a non-rotary tool with an arc (nose radius) at its tip is
registered as the nose radius compensation amount.
Tool nose
center
Tool nose
X-axis tool length

wear compensa-
tion amount
Z
Nose radius Z-axis tool length wear
Imaginary tool compensation compensation amount
nose point amount
The X-axis tool length compensation amount, Z-axis tool length compensation amount and nose radius
compensation amount are set as plus amounts.
169 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
9.3.2.2 Compensation Type Selection by Parameter

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function switches the tool compensation type with the parameter.
The type is switched to the tool compensation type III by setting the parameter, regardless of #1037 cmdtyp.
This function enables tool compensation for a turning tool by registering the tool compensation amount of the base axes
IJK and tool tip point for a machining center system.
(1) Machining center system

Tool compensation type I and II are used for machining center system. However, use of this function switches the
type to tool compensation type III.
[Correspondence of the registered data between the compensation types]

(a) Tool compensation type I -> Tool compensation type III
The tool compensation amount of tool compensation type I is handled as tool length Z of tool compensation
type III.
(b) Tool compensation type II -> Tool compensation type III
The table below shows the relationship between the registered items.
Tool compensation type II Tool compensation type III

Length Length Z
L wear Wear Z
Radius Nose R
R wear R-wear
(2) Lathe system

The tool compensation type is not switched by using this function.
IB-1501505-C 170
9 Tool Compensation
9.3.3 Number of Tool Offset Sets Allocation to Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
* Variable number of per-part-system tool offset sets
The number of tool offset sets can be set per part system.
There are two types of the allocation: "Arbitrary allocation" which allocates the number of tool offset sets to each part
system arbitrarily and "Fixed allocation" which automatically allocates the number of tool offset sets to each part system
equally, and the type can be selected using the parameter.
The arbitrary allocation enables the efficient allocation because when a certain part system needs only a small number of
offset sets, the rest can be allocated to another part system. If an auxiliary-axis part system does not need the tool offset
set at all, the number of tool offset sets can be set 0 in the auxiliary-axis part system.
"Number of tool offset sets in system" is the total number of tool offset sets of all part systems.
(1) Arbitrary allocation

(a) When the number of tool offset sets is increased in the 1st part system of 4-part system
Number of tool offset sets in system Number of tool offset sets in system
[1000 sets] [1000 sets]
1st part system 1st part system

250
400
2nd part system
250
2nd part system
3rd part system 200
250 3rd part system
200
4th part system
250 4th part system
200
(b) When the number of offset sets is set "0" to the 3rd part system of 3-part system for use of the 3rd part system
as auxiliary-axis part system
Number of tool offset sets in system Number of tool offset sets in system
[1000 sets] [1000 sets]

334
500
2nd part system
333
2nd part system
3rd part system 500
333
3rd part system 0
(2) Fixed allocation

Number of tool offset sets in system [1000 sets]
1st part 1st part 1st part 1st part

system system system 334 system 250
500 (Note 2)
2nd part
2nd part system 250
999
(Note 1) 2nd part system 333 3rd part
system system 250
500 3rd part
system 4th part
333 system 250
(Note 1) The maximum number of tool offset sets per part system is 999.
(Note 2) If there is any remainder, the remainder is allocated to the 1st part system.
171 IB-1501505-C
9 Tool Compensation
IB-1501505-C 172
10
Coordinate System
173 IB-1501505-C
10 Coordinate System
10.1 Coordinate System Type and Setting
The coordinate system handled by the NC is shown below.

The points that can be commanded with the movement command are points on the local coordinate system or machine
coordinate system.
L0
G52
L0
W 0 - 54 G52
G54
G55 W 0 - 55
G92
EXT
M0
ref
L0 Local coordinate system zero point Offset set with parameters
G52 Local coordinate system offset (*1) Offset set with program
W0-54 Workpiece coordinate system zero point (G54) (0 when power is turned ON)
W0-55 Workpiece coordinate system zero point (G55)
G54 Workpiece coordinate system (G54) offset (*1) (*1) The G52 offset is available independently for
G55 Workpiece coordinate system (G55) offset G54 to G59.
G92 G92 coordinate system shift
EXT External workpiece coordinate offset
M0 Machine coordinate system zero point
ref Reference position
IB-1501505-C 174
10.1.1 Machine Coordinate System

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The machine coordinate system is used to express the prescribed positions (such as the tool exchange and stroke end
positions) that are specific to each machine.
The G53 command followed by coordinates moves the tool to the command position in the machine coordinate system.
If a coordinate command is included in the same block as G53, it is treated as a command not in the workpiece
coordinate system but in the machine coordinate system.
(R1) 1st reference position
N03 X
(M) Machine coordinate system

N02
N01
(W1) Workpiece coordinate system 1

500
When the initial position of workpiece coordinate is (0,0) with absolute value command.
N01 G01 X500. Y0. F1000
N02 G53 X-500. Y500.
N03 X-500. Y500.
Command format
G53 X__ (U__) Y__ (V__) Z__ (W__) α__ β__ ;

X/U/Y/V/Z/W/α/β : Axis address (range of coordinate position command (mm, inch))
If the incremental or absolute commands and movement mode have been omitted, operation complies with the modal
command that prevails at the time.
G53 (movement on machine coordinate system) is an unmodal command which is effective only in the block where it is
assigned. The workpiece coordinate system being selected is not changed by this command.
175 IB-1501505-C
10.1.2 Coordinate System Setting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Among the workpiece coordinate systems with the G92, the program coordinate system (the programmed zero point)
can be changed.
When a coordinate system setting is assigned using the G92 command, the G92 offset amount is applied so that the
machine position in the current workpiece coordinate system is set to the coordinate position assigned by the G92
command, as shown in the figure below, and the workpiece coordinate systems are shifted accordingly. The machine
does not run, and all the workpiece coordinate systems from G54 to G59 referenced to the machine coordinate system
(or the external workpiece coordinate system if the external workpiece coordinate offset has been set) are shifted.
Offset of coordinate system by G92 coordinate system setting
Example where W1 is shifted to new W1 when the machine was at the position (x0, y0) above W1 and the G92 Xx1
Yy1; command was assigned when the workpiece coordinate system W1 is modal
(external workpiece coordinate system offset = 0; interrupt amount offset = 0)
G92 offset amount
Machine coordinate system X : x 0 - x1

Y : y 0 - y1
New W1 M
y1
W1
y0
x1
x0
Machine position
The shifted coordinate system is returned to its original position by dog-type reference position return or the program.
IB-1501505-C 176
When the coordinate system setting is commanded by G92, all the workpiece coordinate systems from G54 through G59
referenced to the machine coordinate system undergo a shift.
Coordinate system created by automatic Coordinate system after coordinate system

coordinate system setting setting by G92
M M
Machine coordinate system Machine
coordinate
system
New W1
W1
y’ G92 y1 Old W1
Xx1
x’ Yy1 x1
Tool position G92 command position
(1) All the workpiece coordinates from G54 to G59 move in parallel.
(2) There are two ways to return a shifted coordinate system to its original position.
(a) Carry out dog-type reference position return
(b) Move to machine coordinate system zero point and assign G92 and G53 commands in same block to set
the machine coordinate system.
G90 G53 G00 X0 Y0 ; Positioning at machine coordinate system

zero point.
G92 G53 X0 Y0 ; Coordinate system zero setting in machine
coordinate system.
This returns all the workpiece coordinates
from G54 to G59 to their original positions.
177 IB-1501505-C
10.1.3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
After the power is turned ON, the basic machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system are
automatically set without executing the zero point return.
The coordinate systems created are given below.
(1) Machine coordinate system corresponding to G53
(2) G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate system
(3) Local coordinate systems created under G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate systems
The distances from the zero point of G53 machine coordinate system are set to the controller coordinate related
parameters.
IB-1501505-C 178
10.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection
The workpiece coordinate systems facilitate the programming on the workpiece, serving the reference position of the
machining workpiece as the zero point.
These commands enable the tool to move to the positions in the workpiece coordinate system. There are extended
workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1) in addition to 6 workpiece coordinate systems, which are used by the
programmer for programming (G54 to G59). The number of the extended workpiece coordinate systems varies
depending on the MTB specifications.
Among the workpiece coordinate systems currently selected by these commands, any workpiece coordinate system with
coordinates that have been commanded by the current position of the tool is reset. (The "current position of the tool"
includes the compensation amounts for tool radius, tool length and tool position.)
A hypothetical machine coordinate system with coordinates that have been commanded by the current position of the
tool is set by these commands. (The "current position of the tool" includes the compensation amounts for tool radius, tool
length and tool position.) (G54, G92)
10.1.4.1 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (6 Sets)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Up to 6 workpiece coordinate systems can be selected.

The G54 workpiece coordinate system is selected when the power is turned ON.
G code Function
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 (W1)
Command format
Workpiece coordinate system selection
(G90) G54 to G59 ;
Workpiece coordinate system setting
(G54 to G59)G92 X__ Y__ Z__ a__ ;

X,Y,Z : Coordinate position of end point
a : Additional axis
179 IB-1501505-C
The workpiece coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the machine coordinate system.
Settings can be performed in one of the following two ways:
(1) Setting using the setting and display unit
(2) Setting using commands assigned from the machining program
Machine coordinate system (G53) M
W2 W1
Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate
system 2 (G55) system 1 (G54)
Start
G90 G56 G00 X0 Y0 ;
W4 W3
Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate
system 4 (G57) system 3 (G56)
IB-1501505-C 180
10.1.4.2 Extended Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (48 Sets) G54.1P1 to P48
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
In addition to the six workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59, 48 workpiece coordinate systems can be used by
assigning G54.1Pn command.
The command format to select the workpiece coordinate system using the G54.1Pn command and to move on the
workpiece coordinate system are given below.
Workpiece coordinate system selection
(G90) G54.1Pn ;
Workpiece coordinate system setting
(G54.1Pn) G92 X__ Y__ Z__ a__ ;

X,Y,Z : Coordinate position of end point
a : Additional axis
The numerical value n of P following G54.1 indicates each workpiece coordinate system. Specify a value between 1 and
48.
The workpiece coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the machine coordinate system.
Settings can be performed in one of the following two ways:
(a) Setting using the setting and display unit
(b) Setting using commands assigned from the machining program
G54Pn can be used as the extended workpiece coordinate system selection command by setting the parameter.
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
In addition to the six workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59), 96 workpiece coordinate systems can be used by
assigning G54.1Pn command. Refer to "Extended workpiece coordinate system selection (48 sets) G54.1P1 to P48" for
details.
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
In addition to the six workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59), 300 workpiece coordinate systems can be used by
assigning G54.1Pm command. Refer to "Extended Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (48 sets) G54.1P1 to P48"
for details.
181 IB-1501505-C
10.1.5 External Workpiece Coordinate Offset

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
External workpiece coordinate offset that serves as the reference for all the workpiece coordinate systems is available
outside the workpiece coordinates.
By setting the external workpiece coordinate offset, the external workpiece coordinate system can be shifted from the
machine coordinate system, and all the workpiece coordinate systems can be simultaneously shifted by an amount
equivalent to the offset.
When the external workpiece coordinate offset is zero, the external workpiece coordinate systems coincide with the
machine coordinate system.
It is not possible to assign movement commands with the external workpiece coordinate selected.
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate 4 (G57) coordinate 5 (G58) coordinate 6 (G59)

Machine coordinate system (= External workpiece coordinate system)
Machine coordinate zero point


External workpiece coordinate system
External workpiece coordinate offset

Machine coordinate system
IB-1501505-C 182
10.1.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function presets the workpiece coordinate system, which has been shifted by the programmed command or the
manual operation, as the workpiece coordinate system which has been offset by the programmed command (G92.1)
from the machine zero point by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate offset amount.
The workpiece coordinate system is shifted from the machine coordinate system when the such operations or the
programmed commands as below have been performed.
- When manual intervention has occurred in the manual absolute OFF status
- When a movement command was performed in the machine lock status
- When movement was initiated by handle interrupt
- When a movement command was performed in the mirror image mode
- When a local coordinate system was set using the G52 command
- When a workpiece coordinate system was shifted using the G92 command
Just as when manual reference position return has been performed, this function presets the workpiece coordinate
system which has been shifted once to the workpiece coordinate system which has been offset from the machine zero
point by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate offset amount.
Furthermore, whether to preset relative coordinates as well is selected with a parameter.
Command format
G92.1 (G50.3) X0 Y0 Z0 α0 ; (where α is an additional axis)
Designate the addresses of the axes to be preset.

Axes whose addresses have not designated will not be preset.
Depending on the command type, G50.3 command is used in stead.
A program error results when a value other than 0 is commanded.
183 IB-1501505-C
10.1.7 Local Coordinate System

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function is for assigning a coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system now being selected. This enables
the workpiece coordinate system to be changed temporarily.
The local coordinate system can be selected independently on each workpiece coordinate system G54 to G59.
G code Function
G54 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 1
The command format of the local coordinate system is given below.
(G54) G52 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

(G54) : Workpiece coordinate system selection
G52 : Local coordinate system setting
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Local coordinate offset amount
The local coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the designated workpiece coordinate
system (local coordinate offset).
In the incremental position setting mode, the position obtained by adding the local coordinate offset amount to the
previously specified offset amount serves as the new local coordinate zero point.
If no workpiece coordinates are designated, the local coordinates will be created on the currently selected workpiece
coordinates.
This command is unmodal but the local coordinate system created by G52 is valid until the next G52 command is issued.
The local coordinate system is canceled by the input of the reset signal or by manual or automatic dog-type reference
position return.
Machine coordinate system M

(G53)
L1
Local coordinate
G54 G52
y1
W1
x1
Workpiece coordinate 1
(G54)
IB-1501505-C 184
10.1.8 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The axis designated as the rotary axis with the parameters is controlled with the rotary axis' coordinate system.
The rotary axis includes the rotating type (short-cut valid/invalid) and linear type (workpiece coordinate position linear
type, all coordinate position linear type).
The workpiece coordinate position range is 0 to 359.999° for the rotating type, and 0 to 99999.999° for the linear type.
The machine position and relative position differ according to the parameters.
The rotary axis is commanded with a degree (°) unit regardless of the inch or metric designation.
The rotary axis type can be set with the parameters for each axis.
Rotary axis
Rotating type rotary axis Linear type rotary axis
Linear axis
Workpiece coordinate All coordinate position
Short-cut invalid Short-cut valid
position linear type linear type
Workpiece coordinate
Displayed in the range of 0° to 359.999°. Displayed in the range of 0° to 99999.999°.
position
Machine position/ Displayed in the range of 0° to
Displayed in the range of 0° to 359.999°.
relative position 99999.999°.
The incremental
amount from the end
point to the current
In the same manner as the normal linear axis, moves according to the
position is divided by Moves with a short-cut
ABS command sign by the amount obtained by subtracting the current position from
360, and the axis to the end point.
the end point (without rounding up to 360 degrees.).
moves by the
remainder amount
according to the sign.
Moves in the direction of the commanded sign by the commanded incremental amount starting at the current
INC command
position.
Follows the absolute/relative command for a movement to the interim position.
Reference position Moves and returns in the reference

return Returns to the reference position from the interim position within a 360 position direction for the difference
degree movement. from the current position to the
reference position.
185 IB-1501505-C
10.1.9 Plane Selection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
G17, G18, and G19 are for specifying the planes for the arc, tool radius compensation, coordinate rotation and other
such commands.
G17; Xp-Yp plane designation

G18; Zp-Xp plane designation
G19; Yp-Zp plane designation
(1) A parameter can be used to set either the X, Y or Z axis to which the additional axis is to be parallel.
(2) A parameter can be used to set the initialization status (when the power has been turned ON or when the reset
status has been entered) to G17, G18 or G19.
(3) The movement commands have no connection with the plane selection.
(Example)
With these program commands, X100. is the axis which does not exist on the G19
G19 X100. ; (Yp, Zp) plane, Yp-Zp plane is selected by G19 and the X axis moves by 100. mm
separately from the plane selection.
With these program commands, the Xp-Yp plane is selected by G17 and the arc
G17 X100 . R50. ;
command is controlled on the X-Y plane by this command.
IB-1501505-C 186
10.1.10 Origin Set/Origin Cancel

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Origin set

Origin set is a function that shifts the coordinate system so that the current position is the zero point on the
workpiece coordinate system containing the workpiece coordinate system's offset value.
The relative position counter and workpiece coordinate counter are set to "0" with this operation. In other
words, this is the same as the coordinate system setting command "G92 X0;". (For target axis: X)
Current coordinate
(50, 30)
zero point
Workpiece offset (10, 15)
G92 offset (10, 15)

Machine
zero point
Execution of origin set
Current coordinate
(0, 30)
Workpiece
coordinate zero
point
Workpiece offset (10, 15)
Machine G92 offset (60, 15)

zero point
Items updated by origin set
187 IB-1501505-C
(2) Origin cancel

Origin cancel is a function that manually cancels all deviated amounts, and shifts to the designated zero point
with the workpiece offset.
The relative position counter and machine position counter are set to "0" with this operation. In other words,
this is the same "G92 G53 X0 ;". (For target axis: X)
G54 Workpiece G54 Current coordinates

coordinate zero point (30, 15)
G55 Current coordinates

G52G54 Local offset (30,15)
(20, 15)
G55 Workpiece coordinate

zero point
G54 Workpiece
offset (10, 15)
G52G55 Local offset

(50,30)
G55 Workpiece offset (20, 0)
Machine G92 offset (10, 15)

zero point
Execution of origin cancel
G54 Current coordinates

(60,15)
G54 Workpiece
coordinate zero point G55 Current coordinates
(90,15)
G52G54 Local offset

(0,15)
G55 Workpiece
G54 Workpiece coordinate zero point
offset (10,15)
G52G55 Local offset

(0,30)
G55 Workpiece offset

Machine zero (20,0) ：Items updated by origin cancel
point G92 Offset (0,15)
10.1.11 Counter Set

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The relative position counter can be set to an arbitrary value by operating the setting and display unit screens.
Select the axis and then input a value. Finally, press the INPUT key.
Only the [Relative Position] display field will change to the set value. The other coordinate positions displayed will not
change.
Up to 9 digits can be input in the integer section. The number of digits after the decimal point depends on the parameter
setting.
IB-1501505-C 188
10.1.13 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function can shift the workpiece coordinate system.

When a workpiece coordinate system which is considered at programming is misaligned with an actual set workpiece
coordinate or a workpiece coordinate set by automatic coordinate system setting, the measured workpiece coordinate
system can be shifted to the workpiece coordinate system at the program creation so that the machining can be
performed without modification of the machining program. This function also eliminates the need to change the
machining program even when the workpiece shape is changed.
Setting the shift amount to O' -O to the shift amount of the workpiece coordinate system
X'
O'
Z'
X
X' -Z': Actual measured coordinate system
X .Z: Coordinate system at programming
Z
O
Setting the change amount of the workpiece shape to the shift amount of the workpiece coordinate system
X
X -Z: Coordinate system at programming
Workpiece shape at programming
wk_z: Change amount of workpiece shape
O
Z
X X
wk_Z wk_Z
O O’ O
Z Z
Workpiece for actual machining
Sets wk_z to shift amount of workpiece

coordinate system
The methods for the setting are as follows:

- Setting on screen
- Setting with machining program (G code command)
- Setting by automatic measurement
- Setting and acquiring with system variables
189 IB-1501505-C
10.2 Return
10.2.1 Manual Reference Position Return

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables the tool to be returned manually to the position (reference position) which is characteristic to the
machine.
(1) Return pattern to reference position

[Dog type]
When starting in same direction as final advance When starting in opposite direction as final
direction advance direction
Creep speed
Reference position
return speed
Dog
Dog
R
R
[High-speed type]
Rapid traverse rate
Dog
R
(2) Differences according to detection method
First return after power ON Second return and following

Incremental position detection
Dog-type High-speed type
method
Absolute position detection method High-speed type High-speed type
IB-1501505-C 190
10.2.2 Automatic 1st Reference Position Return

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The machine can be returned to the first reference position by assigning the G28 command during automatic operation.
If the interim point is commanded, the machine is moved up to that point by rapid traverse so that it is positioned and
then returned separately for each axis to the first reference position.
Alternatively, by assigning the G29 command, the machine can be first positioned separately for each axis at the G28 or
G30 interim point, and then positioned at the assigned position.
G code Function
G28 Automatic 1st reference position return
Start position return (The tool first returns to the interim position from the 1st reference position, and
G29
then is positioned at the position assigned in the program.)
The G28 programming format is given below.
G28 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G28 : Return command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Return control axes (coordinate of interim point)
Tool is first positioned by rapid traverse to the assigned position (interim point) and then is returned to the 1st reference
position for each axis independently.
G29 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Return control axes (coordinate of assigned position)
The tool is first moved by rapid traverse for each axis to the interim position which is passed through with G28 or G30,
and is then positioned by rapid traverse at the position assigned by the program.
R1 R
-X
Non-interpolation
G28 movement
G28
Interpolation or
non-interpolation can Interim
be selected point
G29
Interpolation or
non-interpolation can be
G29 selected -Y
R1 1st reference position
191 IB-1501505-C
If the position detector is for the incremental detection system, the first reference position return for the first time after the
NC power has been turned ON will be the dog-type. However, whether the second and subsequent returns are to be the
dog type or the high-speed type can be selected by designating a parameter.
The high-speed type is always used when the position detector is for the absolute position detection system.
(Note 1) The automatic 1st reference position return pattern is the same as for manual reference position return.
(Note 2) The number of axes for which reference position return can be performed simultaneously depends on the
number of simultaneously controlled axes.
(Note 3) If, at the time of the first reference position return, the tool radius compensation or nose radius compensation
has not been canceled, it will be temporarily canceled during the movement to the interim point. The
compensation is restored at the next movement after the return.
(Note 4) If, at the time of the reference position return, the tool length compensation has not been canceled, it will be
canceled and the compensation amount also cleared upon completion of reference position return. The tool
length compensation can also be canceled temporarily using a parameter. In this case, however, the tool
compensation is restored by the next movement command.
(Note 5) Interpolation or non-interpolation can be selected using a parameter for the movement up to the G28 interim
point or for the movement from the G29 interim point to the command point. Non-interpolation applies for
movement from the G28 interim point to the reference position and movement up to the G29 interim point.
(Note 6) When a single block operation is selected, it can be chosen by parameter setting whether or not to enable
interim point stop.
IB-1501505-C 192
10.2.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position Return

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
As with automatic 1st reference position return, commanding G30Pn during automatic operation enables the tool to be
returned to the set points (2nd, 3rd or 4th reference positions) characteristic to the machine. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th
reference positions can be set by parameters.
G code Function
G30 P2 2nd reference position return
G30 P3 3rd reference position return
G30 P4 4th reference position return
G30 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp1 ;

Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Return control axes (coordinate of interim point)
Pp1 : Return position No.
The tool is first positioned by rapid traverse to the assigned interim point and then is returned to the reference position for
each axis independently.
R2
R1
-X
G30 P2
Start point Interim point
G30 P3
G30 P4
R3
R4
-Y
R1: 1st reference position

R2: 2nd reference position
R3: 3rd reference position
R4: 4th reference position
193 IB-1501505-C
(Note 1) The second reference position return is performed if the P address is omitted.
(Note 2) The number of axes for which reference position return can be performed simultaneously depends on the
(Note 3) If, at the time of the reference position return, the tool radius compensation or nose R compensation has not
been canceled, it will be temporarily canceled during the movement up to the interim point. The compensation
is restored at the next movement command after the return.
(Note 4) If, at the time of the reference position return, the tool length compensation has not been canceled, it will be
canceled and the compensation amount also cleared upon completion of reference position return. The tool
length compensation can also be canceled temporarily using a parameter. In this case, however, the tool
compensation is restored by the next movement command.
(Note 5) Whether interpolation or non-interpolation is to apply to the movement up to the interim point can be selected
using a parameter. Non-interpolation applies for movement from the interim point to each of the reference
positions.
(Note 6) When a single block operation is selected, it can be chosen by parameter setting whether or not to enable
interim point stop.
10.2.4 Reference Position Check

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
By commanding G27, a machining program, which has been prepared so that the tool starts off from the reference
position and returns to the reference position, can be checked to see whether the tool will return properly to the reference
position.
Command format

G27 : Check command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Return control axes
Pp1 : Check No.
P1:1st reference position check
P2: 2
P3: 3
P4: 4
The tool is first positioned by rapid traverse to the assigned position and then, if this is the reference position, the
reference position arrival signal is output.
When the address P is omitted, the first reference position verification will be applied.
(Note 1) The number of axes for which reference position check can be performed simultaneously depends on the
(Note 2) An alarm results unless the tool is positioned at the reference position upon completion of the command.
(Note 3) Whether interpolation or non-interpolation is to apply to the movement can be selected using a parameter.
IB-1501505-C 194
10.2.5 Absolute Position Detection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The absolute position detection function holds the position data of the actual machine position and the machine
coordinates in the controller even after the power is turned OFF. When the power is turned ON again, a position
command can be executed in automatic operation immediately without executing reference position return. (High-speed
return is always used for the reference position return command.)
There are two types of absolute position detection method: dog type and dog-less type, which use different reference
position establishment methods.
The type is selected with the parameter.
Adjustment of zero point

Method Details Establishment of zero point
position
The zero point is established
when a torque limit is applied Input a value equivalent to the
Machine end stopper by pressing the machine
on the servo and the torque shift amount on the absolute
method against a set point on the
limit is reached by pressing position setting screen.
Dog-less machine.
against the machine stopper.
type
Method I The zero point is established
Basic position Input a value equivalent to the
The zero point position is set by inputting it through the
alignment shift amount on the absolute
method Method II from the screen. absolute position setting
position setting screen.
screen.
Same method as incremental
Dog-type with dog-type reference Set a value in the parameter.
detection dog-type.
position return completion.
(Note) This function is valid for the NC axis and the PLC axis. This function cannot be used for the spindle and the
auxiliary axis.
195 IB-1501505-C
10.2.6 Tool Exchange Position Return

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
By specifying the tool change position in a parameter and also assigning a tool change position return command in a
machining program, the tool can be changed at the most appropriate position.
The axes for which returning to the tool change position is performed and the order in which the axes begin to return can
be changed by commands.
G30.n ;
n = 1 to 6 : Specify the axes that return to the tool change position and the order in which they return. (For L system, n = 1 to 5)
Command and return order

[M system]
Command Return order

G30．1 Z axis → X axis / Y axis ( → additional axis)
G30．2 Z axis → X axis → Y axis ( → additional axis)
G30．3 Z axis → Y axis → X axis ( → additional axis)
G30．4 X axis → Y axis / Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30．5 Y axis → X axis / Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30．6 X axis / Y axis / Z axis ( → additional axis)
[L system]
Command Return order

G30．1 X axis only ( → additional axis)
G30．2 Z axis only ( → additional axis)
G30．3 X axis → Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30．4 Z axis → X axis ( → additional axis)
G30．5 X axis / Z axis ( → additional axis)
(Note 1) An arrow ( → ) indicates the order of axes that begin to return. A period (/) indicates that the axes begin to
return simultaneously.
Example : "Z axis → X axis" indicate that the Z axis returns to the tool change position, then the X axis does.
(Note 2) G30.6 is only for the M system.
The tool change position return ON/OFF for the additional axis can be set with parameter for the additional axis.
For the order to return to the tool change position, the axes return after the standard axis completes the return to the tool
change position (refer to above table).
The additional axis cannot return to the tool change position alone.
IB-1501505-C 196
11
Operation Support Functions
197 IB-1501505-C
11 Operation Support Functions
11.1 Program Control
11.1.1 Optional Block Skip

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
It is possible to command to selectively ignore a part, from a "/" (slash) code to the end of the block, of a machining
program. When the optional block skip input signal from the external source is turned ON for automatic operation, the
block with the "/" code is skipped. If the optional block skip signal is turned OFF, the block with the "/" code will be
executed without being skipped.
Optional block skip

Programming example
Switch OFF Switch ON
N1 ; N1 N1
N2 ; N2 N2
N3 ; N3 N3
/ N4 ; N4
/ N5 ; N5
N6 ; N6 N6
N7 ; N7 N7
: : :
Skipping from a "/" in the middle of a program to the end of the program can also be enabled by parameter setting.
11.1.2 Optional Block Skip Addition

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
When "/n (n:1 to 9)" (slant code) is programmed at the head of a block, and the optional block skip n input signal from the
external source is turned ON for automatic operation, the block with the "/n" code is skipped.
If the optional block skip n signal is turned OFF, the block with the "/n" code will be executed without being skipped.
IB-1501505-C 198
11.1.3 Single Block

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The commands for automatic operation can be executed one block at a time (block stop) by turning ON the single block
input signal. When the single block input signal is turned ON temporarily during continuous operation, the machine will
stop after that block has been executed.
Even when operation is switched to another automatic operation mode (for example, memory operation mode to MDI
operation mode) during continuous operation, the machine will stop after that block has been executed.
Single block (SBK) ∫∫
∫∫
Automatic operation
start (ST)
∫∫ ∫∫
Movement block G01 X1000… G01 Z100… G01 Z1000…

∫∫
SBK ON at start SBK change during movement SBK ON after block completion
INVALID VALID VALID
As with the multi-part system specification, the following function can be selected instead.
Multi-part system single block (L system)

This function is for executing single block operation while maintaining the synchronization between the part
systems when two or more part systems are operated. When one part system has been stopped by single
block stop, the other part systems are stopped by feed hold.
199 IB-1501505-C
11.2 Program Test
11.2.1 Dry Run

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
F code feed commands for automatic operation can be switched to the manual feed rate data of the machine operation
board by turning ON the dry run input signal.
Dry run switch ON

Command
Rapid traverse selection switch OFF Rapid traverse selection switch ON
G00,G27,G28,G29,G30,G60 Manual feed rate Rapid traverse rate
G01,G02,G03 Manual feed rate Cutting clamp speed
11.2.2 Machine Lock

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the machine lock input signal is set to ON, the NC operations can be executed without assigning commands to the
NC axes.
The feed rate in the machine lock status is the command speed.
The M, S, T and B commands are executed as usual and operation is completed by returning the FIN signal.
(1) Reference position return (manual, G28, G29, G30) is controlled as far as the interim point in the machine lock
status but the block is completed when the interim point is reached.
(2) Machine lock is effective in the signal status applying when the axis has stopped.
(3) Block stop will be applied if the machine lock signal is turned ON to OFF or OFF to ON during automatic
operation.
11.2.3 Miscellaneous Function Lock

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The M, S, T and B (2nd miscellaneous function) output signals are not output to the machine or PLC when the
miscellaneous function lock signal of external input is turned ON. This function can be used when checking only the
movement commands in a program check.
The start signals of the M command are output for the M00, M01, M02 and M30 commands, and so a completion signal
must be returned.
(1) Fixed cycle spindle functions containing an S code and any M, S, T or B function assigned by a manual
numerical command or in automatic operation will not be executed. The code data and strobe (MF, SF, TF,
BF) outputs are stopped.
(2) If this signal is set ON after the code data has already been output, the output is executed as it would normally
be executed until the end (until FIN1 or FIN2 is received and the strobe is turned OFF).
(3) Even when this signal is ON, the M00, M01, M02 and M30 commands among the miscellaneous functions are
executed, and the decode signal, code data and strobe signals are also output as they would be normally.
(4) Any miscellaneous functions which are executed only inside the controller and not output (M96, M97, M98,
M99) are executed as they would be normally even if this signal is ON.
IB-1501505-C 200
11.2.4 Graphic Check
11.2.4.1 Graphic Check

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
The machining program movement path can be confirmed with the graphic drawing without executing automatic
operation. Therefore, the machining program can be checked while drawing the figure accurately at a high speed.
There are two description method for the graphic check function: 2D check and 3D check.
The drawing's viewpoint can be moved, enlarged and reduced while drawing. The three axes displayed are set with the
parameters.
(Note) Automatic operation is disabled during graphic check for M80/E80.
11.2.4.2 3D Solid Program Check

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
The machining program movement path can be confirmed with the graphic drawing without executing automatic
operation. Therefore, the machining program can be checked while drawing the figure accurately at a high speed.
The turning machining and milling for the front and back face of a workpeice can be drawn with the 3D check.
The workpiece shape's viewpoint can be moved, enlarged and reduced while drawing. The three axes displayed are set
with the parameters.
The workpiece shape and tool shape used are set on this screen.
201 IB-1501505-C
11.2.4.3 Graphic Check Rotary Axis Drawing

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
When the rotary axis (C axis) is designated with the parameter in program check (2D), the path is drawn depending on
the rotary axis. The rotary axis can be set for each part system.
Refer to "11.2.4.1 Graphic Check" for details on the graphic check.
(Note 1) When the control axis address other than C axis is designated with the parameter, the path corresponding to
the rotary axis is not drawn.
(Note 2) The workpiece coordinate system must be set so that the center of the rotary axis becomes the coordinate
system zero point.
Image of actual tool and workpiece Example of machining program

X
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
G0C90. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
C
G0C180. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
G0C270. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
Y G80 ;
Z
Drawing image when the rotary axis Drawing image when the rotary axis
drawing is invalid drawing is valid
IB-1501505-C 202
11.2.5 Graphic Trace
11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function draws the machine tool's machine position. The movement path following the actual automatic operation or
manual operation, or the tool tip movement path can be drawn, and the machine operation during machining can be
monitored.
For the display mode, 1-plane, 2-plane and 3-dimensional display are provided. In the 3-dimensional display mode, cubic
shapes can be rotated and tracing of the figure seen from the desired direction can be assigned.
One of the following functions is required for the trace of tool path:
- Tool center point control
- Tool length compensation along the tool axis
- Tool handles feed & interruption, workpiece installation error compensation
- Workpiece installation error compensation
- Inclined surface machining command
- Simple inclined surface machining command
- 3-dimensional tool radius compensation (tool's vertical-direction compensation)
- 3-dimentional manual feed
- R-Navi
203 IB-1501505-C
11.2.5.2 Graphic Trace Rotary Axis Drawing

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
When the rotary axis (C axis) is designated with the parameter in program trace, the path is drawn depending on the
rotary axis. The rotary axis can be set for each part system.
Refer to "11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace" for details on the graphic trace.
(Note 1) When the control axis address other than C axis is designated with the parameter, the path corresponding to
the rotary axis is not drawn.
(Note 2) The workpiece coordinate system must be set so that the center of the rotary axis becomes the coordinate
system zero point.
Image of actual tool and workpiece Example of machining program

X
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
G0C90. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
C
G0C180. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
G0C270. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
Y G80 ;
Z
Drawing image when the rotary axis Drawing image when the rotary axis
drawing is invalid drawing is valid
11.2.6 Machining Time Computation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function analyzes the machining program without moving the axis and calculates the approximate time required for
machining.
Machining time is calculated by accumulating the following times:
- Rapid traverse time
- Cutting feed time
- Dwell time
- MSTB time
The machining time is displayed as "hour: minute: second".
IB-1501505-C 204
11.2.7 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run (Program Check Operation)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
The manual arbitrary reverse run can be performed by controlling the feedrate being in the automatic operation in the
memory or MDI mode in proportion to the manual feedrate by jog or the rotation speed by manual handle.
This function allows a program to run the executed blocks backward (reverse run) after the block stop in the automatic
operation. The buffer correction of the program can be performed after reverse run to a desired point and the corrected
program can be run.
Example of machining operation
$1
$1 $1
N101 G1 Z N103 G4
N102 G1 X
N203 G1 X
N201 T1000 N202 G0 Z
Tool exchange $2
$2 $2 $1: Standby
$1: Turning machining $1: Turning machining $2: Cutting-off machining
$2: Tool exchange $2: Tool positioning
$1: Part system 1

$2: Part system 2
Timing diagram in override 100%
$1 N101 G1 Z N102 G1 X N103 G4
$2 N201 T1000 N202 G0 Z N203 G1 X
Timing diagram in manual arbitrary reverse run

The synchronization is maintained and the cutting-off machining
starts in the part system 2 after the turning machining is
completed in the part system 1 (in forward run).
$1 N101 G1 Z N102 G1 X N103 G4
$2 N201 T1000 N202 G0 Z N203 G1 X
Forward run: Blocks are executed in the order same as automatic operation.
Reverse run: Executed blocks can be executed again in the reverse order.
The total operation time is increased in the timing diagram for the manual arbitrary reverse run, however the
synchronization between part systems can be maintained and the cutting-off machining starts after the turning
machining is completed in forward run. The synchronization between part systems is maintained in both forward
and reverse run.
205 IB-1501505-C
11.2.8 High-speed Simple Program Check

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function checks whether a program error occurs by operating the machining program without the axes movements.
The estimated machining time can be checked in time shorter than the actual execution time of the machining program.
This function is valid with the "High-speed simple program check" signal ON .
The machining program is operated in the reduced time according to the coefficient which is set to the time reduce
coefficient.
The estimated machining time of the machining program is output to time measurement output.
The miscellaneous command code which outputs strobes can be allocated arbitrarily with the parameter during the high-
speed simple program check.
Actual execution time
Reducing execution time according to time reduce coefficient
Execution time by high-speed simple

program check (example: 1/4)
Converting to time of normal operation
Estimated machining time to be output [ms]
IB-1501505-C 206
11.3 Program Search/Start/Stop
11.3.1 Program Search

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The program No. of the program to be operated automatically can be designated and called. Upon completion of search,
the head of the program searched is displayed.
Machining programs are stored in the memory inside the NC system.
11.3.2 Sequence Number Search

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Blocks can be indexed by setting the program No., sequence No. and block No. of the program to be operated
automatically.
The searched program is displayed upon completion of the search.
Machining programs are stored in the memory inside the NC system.
11.3.3 Verification Stop

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
This function enables the single block stop status to be established at any block without having to set the SINGLE
BLOCK switch to ON.
It can be used to readily check the machining shape up to the designated block and resume machining.
G91 ;
:
G00 Z-150. ;
N100 G81 X-100. Z-100. R-50. F100 ;
N101 X-100. ;
→ N102 X-100. ;
N103 Y100. ;
N104 X100. ;
N105 X-100. ;
:
207 IB-1501505-C
4 5 6
3 2 1
Verification stop is executed when drilling of one hole is completed
(N100 block is completed) as shown on the left.
The hole depth is measured to confirm that the dimensions are
correct. If the dimensions are not correct, the tool compensation
amount is changed.
If machining is started from the head of the program, accurate hole
drilling can be carried out.
IB-1501505-C 208
11.3.4 Program Restart

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
With this function, the program search can be executed while updating the coordinate values and the modal information
in the same manner as an actual program operation.
Therefore, this function enables machining from a block in the middle of the program as if the actual machining was
carried out from the beginning.
This function is used to restart machining when a machining program is to be resumed after it has been suspended
midway due to tool damage or for some other reason.
The machine will not move during the search.
When the search is completed, the distance from the current position of the machine (workpiece coordinates) to the
restart position (start point of the searched block) is displayed as restart remaining distance on the screen.
After the program restart, positioning to the restart position is carried out at the cycle start, and automatic operation is
performed for the searched and subsequent blocks.
Positioning to the restart position can also be manually performed.
After the program restart, an arbitrary M, S, T or B command can be executed by the manual numerical value command
before the cycle start.
There are two search methods by the program restart.
Restart method Details

After machining is reset due to a tool breakage, etc., machining is restarted from the designated
sequence number and/or block number.
Restart type 1 Only the program which had been executed just before can be restarted.
Even after the power is turned ON again, the program can be restarted if the program has been
executed before the power supply is turned OFF.
If a machining program different from the machining program to be restarted was run before starting
restart search, specify the sequence No. and block No. before restarting the machining.
A top search must be executed from the screen. Then, command a
Automatic top search OFF
sequence No. and block No., and restart a program.
A top search may not be executed from the screen. A top search is
Restart type 2 automatically executed, so it is not necessary to execute a top search from
the screen. Command a sequence No. and block No., and restart a
Automatic top search ON machining.
An arbitrary program can be restarted by designating the program No.
When a program No. is omitted, the program currently searched is
restarted.
The validity of the automatic top search can be changed with control parameter.
209 IB-1501505-C
11.3.5 Automatic Operation Start

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
With the input of the automatic operation start signal (change from ON to OFF), the automatic operation of the program
that has been operation searched is started by the controller (or the halted program is restarted).
Automatic operation
start (ST)
Movement block G01 X100 … G01 Z100 …
Automatic operation startup is performed on a part system by part system basis.
11.3.6 NC Reset
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables the controller to be reset.
Reset 1 Reset 2 Reset & Rewind

1 G command modals Retained Initialized Initialized
Tool compensation Canceled
2 Retained Canceled
data (no operations)
3 Memory indexing Executed Not executed Executed
4 Errors/alarms Reset Reset Reset
M, S and T code
5 Retained Retained Retained
outputs
M code independent
6 OFF OFF OFF
output
7 Control axis moving Decelerated and stopped Decelerated and stopped Decelerated and stopped
"In reset" signal
8 Output signals "In reset" signal "In reset" signal
"In rewind" signal
IB-1501505-C 210
11.3.7 Feed Hold

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the feed hold signal is set ON during automatic operation, the machine feed is immediately decelerated and
stopped. The machine is started again by the "Automatic operation start (cycle start)" signal.
(1) When the feed hold mode is entered during cycle start, the machine feed is stopped immediately, but the M, S,
T and B commands in the same block are still executed as programmed.
(2) When the mode is switched during automatic operation to manual operation (such as jog feed, handle feed or
incremental feed), the feed hold stop mode is entered.
(3) An interrupt operation based on manual operation (such as jog feed, handle feed or incremental feed) can be
executed during feed hold.
Atomatic operation
start
Feed hold
Axis movement
state
11.3.8 Search & Start

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
If the search & start signal is input in a status where the memory mode is selected, the designated machining program is
searched and executed from its head.
If the search & start signal has been input during automatic operation in the memory mode, search & start is executed
after resetting.
11.3.10 Auto-restart
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A machining program is restarted automatically at the completion of the machining program execution.
211 IB-1501505-C
11.4 Interrupt Operation
11.4.1 Manual Interruption

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Manual interrupt is a function that enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation.
The methods to select the operation mode are as follows:
- Initiates the interrupt by switching from the automatic mode to manual mode
- Initiates the interrupt by selecting the manual mode at the same time as the automatic mode
(Refer to "11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes".)
Whether the manual interrupt amount is to be retained and automatic operation is to be continued is determined by
setting manual absolute mode ON or OFF (refer to "11.4.3 Manual Absolute Switch").
11.4.2 Automatic Operation Handle Interruption

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The handle command can interrupt and be superimposed onto a command without suspending automatic operation and
the machine can be moved by rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation.
If the spindle load is greatly exceeded when cutting a workpiece as per the machining program due to a high rough
cutting amount in face machining, for instance, automatic handle interrupt makes it possible to raise the Z surface and
reduce the load easily without suspending feed in the automatic operation mode.
Automatic handle interrupt is conducted by setting the "automatic handle interrupt" valid switch which is provided
separately from the "manual operation mode". The axis selection, pulse scale factor and operation are conducted as for
manual handle feed.
Whether, after an interrupt, to return to the path of the machining program by automatic operation or remain offset by the
amount equivalent to the interrupt amount is determined using a parameter.
Y Tool
X Z
Interrupt
10
1 100
Workpiece
Handle feed
Automatic
feed
~
G01 Z _ F_;
X _ Y _;
X _ Y_;
Z _ Y _;
~
Feed path with automatic feed and handle feed

superimposed
IB-1501505-C 212
11.4.3 Manual Absolute Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The program absolute positions are updated by an amount equivalent to the distance by which the tool is moved by hand
when the manual absolute switch signal is turned ON.
In other words, the coordinate system based on the original program will not shift even if the tool (machine) is moved by
hand. Thus, if automatic operation is started in this case, the tool will return to the path before manual movement.
M0
X
W
Feed hold stop
Programmed path (absolute command)
Manual interrupt
(The coordinate system W is not shifted)
Path after manual interrupt

Tool passes along same path as that programmed
-Y With manual absolute signal ON
Manual interrupt
(The coordinate
system W is shifted) Manual interrupt amount
M0
X
Feed hold stop
W
Programmed path (absolute command)
W
Manual interrupt
(The coordinate system W is shifted)
Path after manual interrupt
Path is shifted by an amount equivalent to manual interrupt

value (Zero point of the coordinate system W moves)
-Y
With manual absolute signal OFF
The manual absolute ON state will be entered when the power is turned ON.
213 IB-1501505-C
11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
This function suspends the thread cutting cycle if a feed hold signal has been input during thread cutting in a thread
cutting cycle.
If a feed hold signal is input during chamfering or thread cutting without chamfering, operation stops at the position where
the block following the thread cutting is completed.
Position where the block following the thread cutting is

completed
Suspension position
Chamfering angle
Feed hold
Period when thread cutting is

performed
IB-1501505-C 214
11.4.5 Tapping Retract

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
If tapping is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop signal that is input during tapping and the tap is left engaged inside
the workpiece, the tap tool engaged inside the workpiece can be rotated in the reverse direction so that it will be
disengaged by inputting the tap retract signal.
Z spindle
Tap feed Tap retract

(spindle forward) (spindle reverse)
Retract signal
Tap bottom
This function can be used when the machining was interrupted upon reset, emergency stop or power OFF during tapping
cycle.
(Note that "power OFF" is applied only when the absolute position detection system is valid.)
A return is made to the initial point by tap retract.
215 IB-1501505-C
11.4.6 Manual Numerical Value Command

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Commands of spindle function (S), miscellaneous function (M), tool function (T) and 2nd miscellaneous function (B) can
be executed through the Monitor screen or Setup screen.
This enables operations such as spindle speed changing, starting, stopping, calling and selecting assigned tools and
replacing of the spindle tools to be done easily without having to prepare or revise the machining program.
When M/S/T/B which was set with the macro call is commanded by the manual numeric command while the
miscellaneous command macro call is valid, the corresponding user macro subprogram can be executed.
IB-1501505-C 216
11.4.7 Arbitrary Reverse Run

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function allows a program to run the executed blocks backward (hereinafter called "reverse run") after the block stop
in the automatic operation.
The following steps are available:
- Execute the reverse run to the point to go back,
- Run the reversed blocks again following the program (hereinafter called "forward run") and
- Continue the remaining blocks from the point of the interruption.
Maximum 200 blocks can be executed in the reverse run.
Only the 1st to 3rd axes of each part system can be used for this function.
(Example 1) Reverse run
Reverse
run
Block stop
(Example 2) Forward run after the reverse run
Block stop
Forward
run
Reverse
run
217 IB-1501505-C
11.4.8 MDI Interruption

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables MDI programs to be executed during automatic operation in the single block stop status. When the
modal status is changed in the MDI program, the modal status in the automatic operation mode is also changed.
11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation by selecting an automatic
operation mode (tape, MDI or memory) and manual mode (handle, step, jog or manual reference position return)
simultaneously.
(Arbitrary feed based on the PLC is also possible.)
The feed rates for the axes subject to automatic commands and the feed rates for axes subject to manual command are
set separately. The acceleration/deceleration modes (rapid traverse, cutting feed) are also set separately. Rapid traverse
override, cutting feed override and second cutting feed override are valid both for axes subject to automatic commands
and manual commands. Override cancel is valid for axes subject to automatic commands.
Manual interlock is applied to axes subject to manual commands; automatic interlock is applied to axes subject to
automatic commands.
11.4.10 Simultaneous Operation of JOG and Handle Modes

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When executing the jog feed and handle feed, both these feeds are available without changing the mode each time by
inputting the jog mode signal and simultaneous operation of jog and handle modes signal to the control unit. However,
while axis is moving in one of the two modes, the feed in the other mode is not valid.
IB-1501505-C 218
11.4.11 Reference Position Retract

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the retract signal is turned ON during the automatic and manual operation, this function can retract the tool
immediately to a set reference position.
The reference position to be retracted to can be selected from the 1st reference position to 4th reference position with 2-
bit input signal.
Set the retracting order of axes with parameter.
(1) Other operations
(a) When the retract signal is turned ON, the control unit is reset, the operation is interrupted, and the
machining program is indexed.
(b) When the rapid traverse input signal is input, the rapid traverse rate is applied. When the rapid traverse
input signal is not input, the manual feed rate is applied.
(c) If the retract signal is input during execution of a tapping cycle, the operation will be the tapping retract,
and the normal reference position retract will be executed from the end point of tapping retract operation.
(d) Even if the retract signal is input during the thread cutting cycle, it will be invalid. However, if the retract
signal is input in a block other than the thread cutting block, the retracting operation will be executed.
(e) If the retract signal is turned OFF midway during retracting, the operation will decelerate and stop.
However, since the machining program is indexed, the block can not be resumed.
(f) The retract signal is invalid if the coordinate system is not established. An operation error will occur when
the retract signal is input in such case.
219 IB-1501505-C
11.4.12 Tool Retract and Return

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
Even if the machining program's operation is halted and the tool is escaped to change the tool or check the workpiece,
etc., the tool can be returned to the halted point (machining halted point) and machining resumed.
The two main functions are as follow.

- After the machining program is halted, the halt point is designated, and the tool is escaped manually.
The transit points for returning are designated when escaping.
- The tool returns automatically.
When returning, the tool passes through the transit points designated when escaping and returns to the halt point.
Then, machining restarts.
△ Return start point
#2
d e Escape path
#1 No. 1 transit point
#1 #2 No. 2 transit point

e
X
d a,b,c
▽ Y
Halt point Z
a. Machining program halt

b. Halt point designation
c. Operation mode changeover
d. Tool retract
e. Transit point designation
IB-1501505-C 220
11.4.13 Skip Retract

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function is used to return to the opposite advance direction when the skip signal is input during G31 command.
11.4.14 PLC Interruption

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The interrupt program set with the R register is executed with the signals from the PLC during single block stop in
program operation or during the manual mode.
221 IB-1501505-C
IB-1501505-C 222
12
Program Support Functions
223 IB-1501505-C
12 Program Support Functions
12.1 Machining Method Support Functions
12.1.1 Program
12.1.1.1 Subprogram Control [Layers]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○8
L ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 10 ○8
When the same pattern is repeated during machining, the machining pattern can be registered as one subprogram and
the subprogram can be called from the main program as required, thereby realizing the same machining easily. Efficient
use of program can be made. The subprogram is called with the program No. and sequence No. or the file name and
sequence No.
(1) Calling the subprogram with M98 command
M98 P__ H__ L__ ,D__ ;

or, M98 <File name> H__ L__ ,D__ ;
M98 : Subprogram call command
P : Program No. in subprogram to be called. (Own program if omitted.)
Note that P can be omitted only during memory operation MDI operation, high-speed program
server operation, SD card operation and hard disk operation.
(Max. 8-digit value)
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O No. can be called by the parameter.
However, the commanded subprogram is called when the number of digits of the command value
is larger than the one set in the parameter.
<File name> : A file name can be designated instead of the program No. In this case, enclose the file name with
brackets <>.
(The file name can have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
(Example) M98 <PARTS-12.RAF>;
H : Sequence No. in subprogram to be called (Head block if omitted)
L : Number of subprogram repetitions
(If omitted, this is handled as L1. When L0 is set, the subprogram is not called.)
(1 to 9999 times)
,D : Device No. where subprogram is stored. (0 to 4)
If ,D is omitted, the subprogram in the memory will be used.
The device No. is set with the machining parameters.
Subprograms can be nested up to 10 levels deep.
Main program: Subprogram: Subprogram: Subprogram:

Level 0 (P1000) Level 1 (P1) Level 2 (P2) Level 10 (P10)
࣭࣭࣭
P1000 P2 P10
P1
10-level nesting
M98 P2 ;
M98 P1 ; M99 ;
M98 P3 ;
M99 ;
M99 ;

M02/M30 ;
IB-1501505-C 224
A subprogram branch destination or repetition of a subprogram can be specified.
Specifying a subprogram branch destination Specifying repetition of a subprogram
Main program Subprogram Main program Subprogram

P1000 P1 P1000 P1
N1;
Executing
M98 P1 H1; five times
M99;
M98
M9 8 P1
P1 L5;
L 5;
N100;
M98 P1 H100;
M9 9 ;
M99
M99; Return after executing
M02 / M30; M0 2 / M30;
M02 M3 0 ; five times
(2) Returning to main program from the subprogram with M99 command
M99 P__ ;
P : Sequence No. of return destination (returned to block that follows the calling block)
(3) Calling the subprogram with M198 command

A program registered in the data server (SD card in control unit) or Front SD card can be called out as a
subprogram.
To call a program in the SD card as the subprogram, command as shown below in the main program.
M198 P__ L__ ;

or, M198 <File name> L__ ;
M198 : Call command
P : Program No. in SD card to be called as subprogram (Max. 8 digits)
However, the commanded subprogram is called when the number of digits of the command value
is larger than the one set by the parameter.
<File name> : A file name can be designated instead of the program No. In this case, enclose the file name with
brackets <>.
L : Number of subprogram repetitions (Max. 4 digits)
This can be omitted. (If omitted, this is handled as L1.)
When L0 is set, the subprogram is not called.
(Note 1) Sequence No. call (M198 H****) is not possible.

(Note 2) The device that can be used for M198 subprogram call differs depending on the NC models.
The device is the front-side SD card for M800S/M80/E80, or the SD card in the control unit for M800W/M80W.
(Note 3) Calling of the subprogram with the M198 command is limited to once in the subprogram nest.
The subprogram can be called only from the memory or MDI program.
(Note 4) The data from the head of the program to the first LF (lien feed code. 0x0A as hexadecimal) is invalid, and
cannot be run or displayed. Note that if the head starts from an O number (program No.), the program is valid
from the head.
(Note 5) A program registered in an SD card can be executed from only one part system. A program error will occur if
an attempt is made to execute the programs in the SD card simultaneously by two or more part systems. If all
the part system is reset when the error occurred, programs will be displayed as only "%" except for the first
part system.
(Note 6) Refer to "(1) Calling the subprogram with M98 command" for <File name> and calling the subprogram with O
No.　
(4) Returning to main program from the subprogram with M99 command
M99 ;
225 IB-1501505-C
12.1.1.2 Figure Rotation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
If the same pattern is used repeatedly on a concentric circle, one of the rotating machining patterns can be registered as
a subprogram. When the subprogram is called from the main program, if the rotation center is designated, a path similar
to the rotary phase can be easily created on the concentric circle. This simplifies creation of the program.
The program format is shown below.
M98 Ii1 Jj1 (Kk1) Pp1 Hh1 Ll1 ,Dd1;

or, M98 Ii1 Jj1 (Kk1) <File name> Hh1 Ll1 ,Dd1 ;
M98 : Subprogram call command
Ii1 Jj1 (Kk1) : Rotation center coordinates
Pp1 : Program No. in subprogram to be called. (Own program if omitted.)
Note that P can be omitted only during memory operation and MDI operation.
(Max. 8-digit value)
<File name> : A file name can be designated instead of the program No. In this case, enclosed the file name with
brackets <>.
(Example) M98 <PARTS-12.RAF>;
Hh1 : Sequence No. in subprogram to be called (Head block if omitted)
Ll1 : Number of subprogram repetitions
(If omitted, this is handled as L1. When L0 is set, the subprogram is not called.)
(1 to 9999 times)
,Dd1 : Subprogram device No. (0 to 4)
The subprogram in the memory can be used when ,D is omitted.
The device No. is set with the machining parameters.
l1 times Basic figure
j1
Rotation
center i1
IB-1501505-C 226
(1) The first subprogram called out with subprogram call is executed at a 0° rotation angle. The path is created as
commanded.
(2) If the number of repetitions is set to two or more, the rotation angle is obtained from the called subprogram's
start point, end point and rotation center coordinate. The path of the first subprogram is used as a basic figure
and is rotated and arranged for the designated number of call repetitions, using the rotation center coordinates
as a reference.
(3) During figure rotation, all blocks in the subprogram are treated as to be rotated.
(4) If the subprogram start point and end point are not on the same circle having the commanded figure rotation
center coordinates as the center, the axis will interpolate using the subprogram's end point as the start point,
and the end point in the first movement command block in the rotated subprogram as the end point.
(5) The figure is rotated on the workpiece coordinate system, and can be shifted with the G92, G52, G54 to G59
(workpiece coordinate system shift) command.
(6) Functions (reference position return, uni-direction positioning, etc.) on the machine coordinate system for the
rotary plane axis cannot be used while the figure is rotated. However, the machine coordinate system
functions can be used for axes other than the rotation plane.
(7) A program error will occur if figure rotation is commanded during figure rotation.
(8) Figure rotation and program coordinate rotation cannot be commanded simultaneously.
227 IB-1501505-C
12.1.1.3 Scaling
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The shape commanded by the program can be extended or reduced to the desired size by applying a scale factor to the
movement axis command position.
Gcode Function
G50 Scaling cancel
G51 Scaling ON
The program format is given below.

G51 : Call command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Scaling center coordinate position
Pp1 : Scale factor
The scale factor ranges from 0.000001 to 99.999999 times.
Y
sc s1 p1
y1
sc : Scaling center
p1, p2, p3 : Programmed shape
s1, s2, s3 : Shape after scaling
s3
s2
p2
p3
X
x1
(Note 1) Scaling cannot be applied to compensation amount for tool radius compensation, tool position offset, or tool
length compensation, etc. (The compensation and offset are calculated for the scaled shape.)
(Note 2) Scaling applies only to the axes commanded with G51 block; it does not apply to axes which have not been
commanded.
When the scale factor is not assigned, the parameter setting applies instead.
IB-1501505-C 228
12.1.1.4 Axis Name Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The axis name switch function switches the name of command axis and control axis.
G111 Axis name1 Axis name2 ;

: Axis name switch command
G111
: Axes to be performed the name switch command
Axis name 1,2
When the axis name switch command is canceled, assign only "G111;" command.
When switching the name of X-axis and Y-axis by axis name switch command, the machine performs as follow.
<Before axis name
<After axis name switch>
switch>
Command axis name Control axis Command axis name Control axis
X Xaxis -> X Yaxis
Y Yaxis Y Xaxis
(Example)
G111 X Y ;
G01 X100. ; (Y axis moves to 100.mm)
G01 Y100. ; (X axis moves to 100.mm)
229 IB-1501505-C
12.1.2 Macro Program
12.1.2.1 User Macro [Layers]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4
L ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4 ○4
(1) Macro commands 1 ; G65 to G67

In order to carry through one integrated function, a group of control and arithmetic instructions can be used
and registered as a macro program. Furthermore, subprograms with a high degree of expandability can be
configured by setting these macro programs as types which are capable of conducting control and arithmetic
operations using variable commands.
G code Function
G65 Macro call (Sample call)
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 Macro modal call B
G67 Macro modal call cancel
The program formats are given below
G65 P__ L__ --Argument--;or,G65 <File name> L__ --Argument--;

G65 : Call command
P : Program No.
<File name> : File name
When designating the file name, enclose the file name with brackets < >.
L : Number of repetitions
Argument : Variable data assignment
The macro program is called immediately by this command
G66 P__ L__ --Argument--;or,G66 <File name> L__ --Argument--;

G66 : Call command
P : Program No.
The macro program is executed from the block with the axis command following this command.
G66.1 P__ L__ --Argument--;or, G66.1 <File name> L__ --Argument--;

G66.1 : Call command
P : Program No.
The macro program is executed with the word data of each block as the argument.
IB-1501505-C 230
The following macro command functions are available.
#1=<Expression> ;
Arithmetic
Various arithmetic operations can be conducted between variables by the above.
commands
"<Expression>" is a combination of constants, variables, functions and operators.
Assignment of The portion in which the operator is to be given priority can be enclosed in [ ].
priority of Up to five pairs of square parentheses [ ] including the function [ ] can be used.
arithmetic The normal priority of operation is functions and multiplication/division followed by addition/
operations subtraction.
(1) IF[<Conditional
expression>]GOTO n ; The flow of the program can be controlled by these commands. "n"
Control (2) WHILE[<Conditional denotes the sequence numbers of the branching destination. "m"
commands expression>]Do m ; is an identification number, and 1 to 127 can be used. Note that
--- only 27 nestings can be used.
END m ;
(Note 1) The variable commands are provided under the optional specifications independently of the user macros. If
they are to be used, specify the optional specifications separately.
(2) Macro commands 2

Specific G commands and the miscellaneous commands (M, S, T, B) can be used for macro call.
(a) Macro call using G codes

Simply by assigning a G code, it is possible to call user macro programs with the prescribed program
number.
Format
G** P__ L__ Argument;

G** : G code for performing macro call
P : Argument (When macro argument L/P valid function is enabled. Disabled when it is invalid.)
L : Argument (When macro argument L/P valid function is enabled. Disabled when it is invalid.)
Argument : Variable data designation
The correspondence between the G** code which performs macro call and the program number for the
macro to be called is set by a parameter.
Up to 10 codes from G100 to G999 can be used for this command. (The G codes that are used in the
system also can be made available for this use by parameter setting.)
(Note 1) G101 to G110 and G200 to G202 are user macro I codes. However, if a parameter is set for the
G code call code, the G code call will have the priority, and these cannot be used as the user
macro I.
231 IB-1501505-C
(b) Macro call using miscellaneous commands (M, S, T, B code macro call)
Simply by designating an M (or S, T, B) code, it is possible to call user macro programs with the
prescribed program number. (Entered M codes and all S, T and B codes can be used.)
Format
M** (or S**;, T**;, B**;) P__ L__ Argument;

M** (S**, T**, B**) : M (or S, T, B) code for performing macro call
P : Argument (When macro argument L/P valid function is enabled. Disabled when it is
invalid.)
L : Argument (When macro argument L/P valid function is enabled. Disabled when it is
invalid.)
The correspondence between the M** code which performs macro call and the program number for the
macro to be called is set by a parameter. Up to 10 M codes from M00 to M9999, M198 can be entered.
Select codes to be entered other than the codes basically required by the machine and M codes of M0,
M1, M2, M30 and M96 through M99.
(Note 1) G commands in G code macro programs are not subject to macro calls but normal G commands. M
commands in M code macro programs are not subject to macro calls but normal M commands. (The
same applies to S, T and B codes.)
(Note 2) The registration of the program number used for calling the G code macro or M (or S, T, B) code
macro can be done independently for each part system.
(3) Macro argument L/P valid

This function allows the addresses L (number of subprogram repetitions) and P (calling program No.) used as
commands in user macro to be used as arguments. This function is enabled by a parameter.
Followings can be used by user macro.

- G65 Macro call (Sample call)
- G66 Macro modal call A
- G66.1 Macro modal call B
- Macro call using G codes
- Macro call using miscellaneous commands
- ASCII macro
(4) Common variables protection

This function protects the common variables used for machine tool builder macro from being changed by user
operation.
The common variables in the range designated with the parameter cannot be changed by user operation, such
as through a machining program, screen operation or file input.
The range of common variables to be protected can be designated individually for each part system.
IB-1501505-C 232
12.1.2.2 Machine Tool Builder Macro

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables dedicated macro programs made by MTB to be registered in the CNC. By registering the macro as
a program numbered in the 100010000s, the macro program display, editing and input/output can be protected with a
password and the macro program confidentiality can be kept.
Machine tool builder macro programs are stored in a dedicated area which means that the user program registration
area is not reduced in the process.
When registering a machine tool builder macro, secure its space by formatting.
Macro program memory capacity
When the simple programming is in use

When the simple programming is not in use
(Note 1)
Model Max. registrable Max. registrable
Memory capacity (KB) number of programs Memory capacity (KB) number of programs
(programs) (programs)
M800W
128 500 256 600
M800S
M80
M80W 80 100 208 200
E80
C80 80 100 208 200
(Note 1) "When the simple programming is in use" means that the simple programing (NAVI MILL/NAVI Lathe) is
being used and the macro is stored in the machine tool builder macro area.
(Note 2) The memory capacity and the maximum registrable number of programs vary depending on the simple
programing macro when the simple programming macro is registered in the machine tool builder macro area.
The macro program registered as a machine tool builder macro is called out as "G65 command" or "G code macro
equivalent to G65". The macro program is described in the same manner as a conventional machining program.
Variables for the machine tool builder macros can be used within the machine tool builder macros. These variables can
be used commonly within the machine tool builder macro programs.
233 IB-1501505-C
Command format
User macro call (G65)
G65 P__ L__ Argument ;

P : Machine tool builder macro program No.(100010000 to 199999998)
L : Number of repetitions (0 to 9999)
(Note) The machine tool builder macro program cannot be called with G66, G66.1 or M98. Note that a machine
tool builder macro program can be called from a machine tool builder macro program using M98.
Macro call with G code (G***)
G*** Argument;
*** : G code defined in macro definition program or G command macro parameter
Argument is used when a local variable must be delivered to the macro program. Designate a real
value after the address.
Miscellaneous command macro call (M or T code macro call)
M*** Argument; (or T***)

*** : M (or T) code defined in macro definition program
Use this argument when a local variable needs to be passed on to the macro program. Designate a
real value after the address.
(Note) If M96, M97, M98, M99, M198 or the M code for G83 S Mode (for M system only) is commanded,
machine tool builder macro will not be called and the said M code will be handled as a normal
miscellaneous command.
IB-1501505-C 234
12.1.2.3 Macro Interruption

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function inputs from the machine to interrupt the program currently being executed, and instead calls and executes
another program.
The program can be operated flexibly enough to meet varying conditions.
There are two types of interrupts, type 1 and type 2, as described below, and they are selected using a parameter.
[Interrupt type 1] The block being executed is immediately interrupted, and the interrupt program is run
immediately.
[Interrupt type 2] After the block being executed is complete, the interrupt program is executed.
The command format is given below.
M96 P__ H__ ; or, M96 <File name> H__ ; User macro interrupt valid
: Interrupt valid command
M96
: Interrupt program number
P
<File name>
: File name
When designating a file name, enclose the file name in brackets <>.
H
: Interrupt sequence No.
M97 ; User macro interrupt invalid

M97 : User macro interrupt end command
Current program
Interrupt program
M96 Pp1; Op1 ;
Interrupt signal (UIT) not acceptable

within a user macro program
User macro interrupt signal (UIT)
M99 (Pp2) ;
(If Pp2 is specified)

Np2 ;
Np2 ;
M97 ;
235 IB-1501505-C
12.1.2.4 Variable Command
[M system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

Variable sets M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
200 sets ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ―
600 sets ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ― ―
700 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
8000 sets △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
(600 + 100 × number of part systems)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
sets
△ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
sets
[L system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

Variable sets M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
200 sets ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ―
600 sets ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ○ ― ―
700 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
8000 sets △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
sets
△ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
sets
Programming can be given flexible and general-purpose capabilities by designating variables instead of directly
assigning numbers for addresses in programs and by supplying the values of those variables as required when running
the programs.
Arithmetic operations (adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing) can also be conducted for the variables.
Number of variable sets specifications
Type Number Function

Common variables Common variables 1 Common variables 2
500 to 999
600 sets 100 to 199
100100 to 800199(Note 6)
Can be used commonly for main,
400 to 999 sub and each macro program.
For 1-part system 700 sets 100 to 199
100100 to 800199(Note 6)
specifications
400 to 999 When using the common variables
8000 sets 100100 to 800199(Note 6) 100 to 199 across multiple part systems, Some
900000 to 907399 MTB specifications allow you to
designate the number of common
400 to 999 100 to 199×number of
600+100 sets variables that are common to part
For multi-part 100100 to 800199(Note 6) part systems
systems.
system 400 to 999
specifications 7900+100 100 to 199×number of
100100 to 800199(Note 6)
sets part systems
900000 to 907399
Can be used as local in macro
Local variables 1 to 33
program.
ZR device access variables Can be read and written by the PLC
50000 to 52749
(only for C80 series) or GOT.
System variables 1000 to Application is fixed in system.
Local variables in fixed cycle
Fixed cycle variables 1 to 32
program.
IB-1501505-C 236
(Note 1) All common variables are held even when the power is turned OFF.
(Note 2) The common variables can be emptied by resetting or turning the power OFF when the parameters are set
accordingly.
(Note 3) The common variables are divided into the following two types.
Common variable 1: Variables that can be used commonly through the part systems.
Common variable 2: Variables that can be used commonly within that part system's program.
(Note 4) The variable names can be set for some common variables.
(Note 5) The common variables used for machine tool builder macro can be protected from being changed by user
operation.
(Note 6) The part system common variable which can be used is shown in the table below.
Variable sets Common variables 1
600 sets #100100 to #100199

#200100 to #200199
#300100 to #300199
Variable sets #400100 to #400199
700 sets(600+100)
specification #500100 to #500199
#600100 to #600199
#700100 to #700199
8000 sets(7900 ＋ 100) #800100 to #800199
Variable expressions
Variable : #Numerical value #100
(Numerical value: 1,2,3, .....)
: # [Expression] #100
Expression : Numerical value
: Variable
: Expression Operator Expression #100 + #101
: - (minus) Expression -#120
: [Expression] [#110]
: Function [Expression] SIN [#110]
Variable definition
Variable = expression
(Note 1) Variables cannot be used with addresses "O" and "N".
237 IB-1501505-C
12.1.3 Fixed Cycle
List of fixed cycles
M system L system Remarks

Type of fixed cycle Gcode Gcode Gcode Gcode Gcode Gcode Gcode
list 1 list 2 list 3 list 4 list 5 list 6 list 7
G73 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80
: : : : : : :
G89 G89 G89 G89 G89 G89 G89 Refer to 12.1.3.1.
Fixed cycle for drilling G79 G83.2 G79 G83.2 G79 G83.2 Refer to 12.1.3.2 (Type II).
G98 G98 G98 G98 G98 G98 G98 Refer to 4.5.3.
G99 G99 G99 G99 G99 G99 G99

G187 G187 G187 G187 G187 G187 G187
G34
Special fixed cycles G35 - - - - - - Refer to 12.1.3.3.
G36
G174 G90 G77 G90 G77 G90 G77
Fixed cycles for turning
G175 G92 G78 G92 G78 G92 G78 Refer to 12.1.3.4.
machining
G176 G94 G79 G94 G79 G94 G79
G70 G70 G70 G70 G70 G70
Compound-type fixed : : : : : : Refer to 12.1.3.5.

cycles for turning - G76 G76 G76 G76 G76 G76 Refer to 12.1.3.6 (Type II).
machining G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 Refer to 12.1.8.8.
G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2

Small-diameter deep-
G83 - - - - - - Refer to 12.1.3.7.
hole drilling cycle
IB-1501505-C 238
12.1.3.1 Fixed Cycle for Drilling

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) M system
These functions enable drilling, tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1-block
program.
Gcode Function
G73 Step cycle
G74 Reverse tapping cycle
G75 Circular cutting cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle
G80 Fixed cycle cancel
G81 Drilling, spot drilling cycle
G82 Drilling, counterboring cycle
G83 Deep hole drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Backboring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G187 Thread milling cycle
There are two levels of hole machining axis return which apply upon completion of the fixed cycle machining
operation.
Gcode Function
G98 Initial point level return
G99 R point level return
The basic program format for the fixed cycle commands is shown below.
G8*(G7*) X__ Y__ Z__ R__ Q__ P__ F__ L__ S__ ,S__ ,I__ ,J__ ;
G8*(G7*) X__ Y__ Z__ R__ Q__ P__ F__ L__ S__ ,R__ ,I__ ,J__ ;
G8*(G7*) : Hole drilling mode
X/Y : Hole position data
Z/R/Q/P/F : Hole machining data
L : Number of repeats
S : Spindle rotation speed
,S : Spindle rotation speed during return
,R : Synchronization switch
,I : Positioning axis in-position width
,J : Drilling axis in-position width
For details on the synchronous tapping cycle (including pecking tapping cycle and deep-hole tapping cycle), refer to
the section "4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping".
239 IB-1501505-C
G73 G74 G75 G76

Step cycle Reverse tapping cycle Perfect circle cutting cycle Fine boring cycle
G98 mode G98 mode Initial

Initial point G98 mode
Initial point
point Initial point
R point M04 q
R point
q n R point
R point q
q Z point
M03
Z point Z point
q
G98 mode M19 Shift
G99 mode
G99 mode
G99 mode
Z point
G81 G82 G83 G84

Drilling, spot drilling cycle Drilling, counterboring cycle Deep hole drilling cycle Tapping cycle
G98 mode
G98 mode
G98 mode Initial
Initial point Initial point Initial point
point
G98 mode R point R point M03
R point q R point
n
Z point Z point G99 mode Z point
q
G99 mode Dwell M04
G99 mode
Z point
G85 G86 G87 G88

Boring cycle Boring cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle
M19
G98 mode
Initial M03 M03
Initial point G98 mode Initial point Initial point
point
M03 R point
R point R point M03
R point M19
Z point Z point
Z point M05 M03 Z point
M05 G98 mode
Dwell
G89 G187
Boring cycle Thread milling cycle
G98 mode Movement (approach) Dwell
Initial point Z
Helical interpolation
R point
Z point Y Tool pull-out

Dwell
X
Movement
IB-1501505-C 240
(2) L system
These functions enable drilling, tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1-block
program.
Retract
Gcode Drilling axis Drilling work start Motion at hole bottom Use
motion
G80 Cancel
Cutting feed In-position check Rapid
G83 Z Deep-hole drilling cycle1
Intermittent feed Dwell traverse feed
Tapping cycle
In-position check
G84 (Reverse tapping cycle)
Z Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed
(G84.1) Pecking tapping cycle
Spindle CCW
Deep tapping cycle
In-position check
G85 Z Cutting feed Cutting feed Boring cycle
Dwell
G87 X Deep-hole drilling cycle1
Tapping cycle
In-position check
G88 (Reverse tapping cycle)
X Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed
(G88.1) Pecking tapping cycle
Spindle CCW
Deep tapping cycle
In-position check
G89 X Cutting feed Cutting feed Boring cycle
Dwell
G83.2 Z/X Deep-hole drilling cycle2
Rapid
G187 X/Y/Z Cutting feed - Thread milling cycle
traverse feed
The fixed cycle mode is canceled when G80 or some G command of the G01 group is issued. Data is also cleared
to zero simultaneously.
Command format
End-face drilling
G8* X/U__ C/H__ Z/W__ R__ Q__ P__ F__ K__ D__ S__ ,S__ M__ ;
G8* : Hole machining mode (G83, G84, G85)
X/U/C/H : Hole position data
Z/W/R/Q/P/F : Hole machining data
K : Number of repetitions
D : Tool spindle number
M : Miscellaneous command
Longitudinal hole drilling
G8* Z/W__ C/H__ X/U__ R__ Q__ P__ F__ K__ D__ S__ ,S__ M__ ;
G8* : Hole machining mode (G87, G88, G89)
Z/W/C/H : Hole position data
X/U/R/Q/P/F : Hole machining data
K : Number of repetitions
D : Tool spindle number
M : Miscellaneous command
Cancel
G80 ;
241 IB-1501505-C
The drilling cycle motions generally are classified into the following seven.
Motion 1 Motion 2
Initial point
Motion 3
Motion 7
R point
Motion 4
Motion 6
Motion 5
Motion 1: Rapid positioning up to the initial point of X (Z) and C axes.

If the "positioning axis in-position width" is designated, the in-position check is conducted upon completion of
the block.
Motion 2: Output if the C axis clamp M code is given.
Motion 3: Rapid positioning up to the R point.
Motion 4: Hole machining at cutting feed.
If the "drilling axis in-position width" is designated, the in-position check is conducted upon completion of the
block. However, in the case of deep-hole drilling cycles 1 and 2, the in-position check is not conducted with
the drilling of any holes except the last one. The in-position check is conducted at the commanded hole bottom
position (last hole drilling).
Motion 5: Motion at the hole bottom position. It varies depending on the fixed cycle mode.
Spindle CCW (M04), spindle CW (M03), dwell, etc., are included.
Motion 6: Return to the R point.
Motion 7: Return to the initial point at rapid traverse feed.
(Motions 6 and 7 may be conducted as a single motion depending on the fixed cycle mode.)
(Note) With a synchronous tap command, the in-position check is conducted in accordance with the parameters.
Whether the fixed cycle is complete with motion 6 or 7 can be specified by using either of the following G commands:
G98 : Initial level return
G99 : R point level return
These commands are modal. For example, once G98 is given, the G98 mode is entered until G99 is given. The G98
mode is entered in the initial state when the controller is ready.
IB-1501505-C 242
G83/G87
Deep-hole drilling cycle (G83: Z-axis direction, G87: X-axis direction)
When Q command is given When Q command is not given
q q
Z / X point Initial point

R point
G99 mode
G98 mode
Initial point
Z / X point R point
G98 mode
G99 mode
G83.2 G84/88 G85/89

Deep-hole drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle
(C-axis clamp)
(C-axis clamp)
Dwell
Dwell
Dwell f
Dwell Reverse
Dwell rotation of Dwell
Dwell spindle/rotary 2f
tool
Dwell Z / X point
Dwell Initial point Z / X point
R point
G98 mode
R point Initial point
Z / X point (C-axis unclamp)
Forward rotation of
G98 mode
spindle/rotary tool (C-axis unclamp)
・ Output or no output can be set using a Dwell
parameter for the C-axis clamp/unclamp ・ Output or no output can be set using a
M code parameter for the C-axis clamp/unclamp
・ The rotation direction of the tapping is M code
reversed using Reverse tapping cycle
G84.1 (G88.1).
G187
Thread milling cycle
X Dwell
Movement (approach)
Helical interpolation
Y Tool pull-out
Movement
There are two levels of hole machining axis return which apply upon completion of the fixed cycle machining operation.
Gcode Function
G98 Initial point level return
G99 R point level return
243 IB-1501505-C
12.1.3.2 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
In the longitudinal hole drilling fixed cycle, the X axis is designated as the hole drilling axis. However, in the longitudinal
hole drilling fixed cycle (type II), the Y axis can be designated as the hole drilling axis with the longitudinal hole drilling
axis selection function.
The relationship between the longitudinal hole drilling axis selection signal's ON/OFF state and the hole drilling axis of
the fixed cycle for drilling is shown below.
Y axis cross tap function

Gcode Details Hole drilling axis
selection signal state
G80 Cancel - -
ON
G83 Deep hole drilling cycle 1 Z
OFF
ON
G84 (G84.1) Tapping cycle Z
OFF
ON
G85 Boring cycle Z
OFF
ON Y
G87 Deep hole drilling cycle 1
OFF X
ON Y
G88 (G88.1) Tapping cycle
OFF X
ON Y
G89 Boring cycle
OFF X
ON
G83.2 Deep hole drilling cycle 2 Z/X
OFF
IB-1501505-C 244
12.1.3.3 Special Fixed Cycle

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
These functions enable drilling, tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1-block program.
Special fixed cycles must always be used in combination with fixed cycles.
The special fixed cycles are as follows:
Gcode Function
G34 Bolt hole circle
G35 Line at angle
G36 Arc
G37.1 Grid
(1) Bolt hole circle (G34)

The tool starts at the point forming angle θ with the X axis on the circumference of a circle with radius R
whose center is the coordinates designated by X and Y, and it drills "n" number of holes at "n" equal intervals
along the circumference of that circle. The drilling data for the standard fixed cycle of the G81 or other such
command is retained for the drilling operation at each hole position.
All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not retained upon
completion of the G34 command.
G34 Xx Yy Ir Jθ Kn ;
Xx,Yy : Center position of bolt hole circle; this is affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Ir : Radius "r" of circle; it is based on the least command increment and is provided using a positive number.
Jθ : Angle θ at point to be drilled initially; the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be designated; 0 cannot be
assigned.
When 0 has been designated, the alarm will occur. A positive number provides positioning in the counterclockwise
direction;
a negative number provides positioning in the clockwise direction.
X1
n = 6 holes
I
Y1
W
G0 command
Position prior to
execution of G34
command
As shown in the figure, the tool is positioned above the final hole upon completion of the G34 command. This
means that when it is to be moved to the next position, if the command is issued with incremental position, it
will be necessary to calculate the coordinate position. Thus, it is convenient to issue the command with
absolute position.
245 IB-1501505-C
(2) Line at angle (G35)

With the starting point at the position designated by X and Y, the tool drills "n" number of holes each at interval
"d" in the direction forming angle θ with the X axis. A standard fixed cycle applies for the drilling operation at
each of the hole positions and so there is a need to retain beforehand the drilling data (drilling mode and
drilling data). All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not
retained upon completion of the G35 command.
G35 Xx Yy Id Jθ Kn ;
Xx,Yy : The starting point coordinates; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Id : Interval "d"; it is based on the least command increment and when "d" is negative, drilling proceeds in the point
symmetrical direction centered on the starting point.
Jθ : Angle θ; the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled including the starting point; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.
Y
N=5 holes
d
X
y1
W
Position prior to
X1
execution of G35
command
(3) Arc (G36)

The tool starts at the point forming angle θ with the X axis on the circumference of a circle with radius "r"
whose center is the coordinates designated by X and Y, and it drills "n" number of holes aligned at angle
interval △θ. As with the bolt hole circle function, the drilling operation at each of the hole positions is based on
a hold drilling fixed cycle and so there is a need to retain the drilling data beforehand.
All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not retained upon
completion of the G36 command.
G36 Xx Yy Ir Jθ P △ θ Kn ;
Xx,Yy : Center coordinates of arc; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Ir : Radius "r" of arc; it is based on the least command increment and is provided with a positive number.
Jθ : Angle θ at the point to be drilled initially; the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive.
P△θ : Angle interval △ θ; when it is positive, the tool drills in the counterclockwise direction and when it is negative, it drills in
the clockwise direction.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.
n=6 holes
Position prior to
execution of G36 Δθ
command
θ
Y1
W
X1
IB-1501505-C 246
(4) Grid (G37.1)

With the starting point at on the position designated by X and Y, this function enables the tool to drill the holes
on the lattice with "nx" number of holes at parallel intervals of △ x to the X axis. Drilling proceeds in the X-axis
direction. The drilling operation at each of the hole positions is based on a standard fixed cycle and so there is
a need to command the drilling data (drilling mode and drilling data) beforehand. All movements between the
hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not retained upon completion of the G37.1
command.
G37.1 Xx Yy I △ x Pnx J △ y Kny ;

Xx,Yy : The starting point coordinates; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
I△x : X-axis interval △ x; it is based on the least command increment; when △ x is positive, the intervals are provided in the
positive direction as seen from the starting point and when it is negative, they are provided in the negative direction.
Pnx : Number of holes "nx" in the X-axis direction; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.
J△y : Y-axis interval △ y; it is based on the least command increment; when △ y is positive, the intervals are provided in the
positive direction as seen from the starting point and when it is negative, they are provided in the negative direction.
Kny : Number of holes "ny" in the Y-axis direction; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.
Position prior to execution ny=8 holes

of G37.1 command
W
y1 Δ y
Δ x
x1
nx=10 holes
247 IB-1501505-C
12.1.3.4 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
By using this function, the shape normally programmed in several blocks for rough cutting, etc., in the turning machining
can be commanded in one block.
By editing the standard fixed cycle subprograms, the fixed cycle sequences can be changed by the user. The user can
also register and edit an original fixed cycle program.
G code [L system] G code [M system] Function

G77 G174 Longitudinal cutting fixed cycle
G78 G175 Thread cutting fixed cycle
G79 G176 Face cutting fixed cycle
IB-1501505-C 248
(1) Longitudinal cutting fixed cycle (G77/G174)

(a) Straight cutting
Straight cutting in the longitudinal direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:
G77 X/U__ Z/W__ F__ ; [L system]

G174 X__ Z__ F__ ; [M system]
X/U ：X axis end point coordinate
Z/W ：Z axis end point coordinate
F ：Feedrate
4 Rapid traverse feed

U
3 Cutting feed 1 Rapid 2
traverse feed
2 Cutting feed
End point
coordinate
Z W X
Z
(b) Taper cutting

Taper cutting in the longitudinal direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:
G77 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ F__ ; [L system]

G174 X__ Z__ R__ F__ ; [M system]
R ：Taper part depth (radius designation, incremental value, sign is required)
F ：Feedrate

U
3 Cutting feed 1 Rapid 2
traverse feed
2 Cutting feed
End point
coordinate r
Z W
X
Z
r: Taper part depth (radius designation, incremental position, sign is required)
249 IB-1501505-C
(2) Thread cutting fixed cycle (G78/G175)

(a) Straight thread cutting
Straight thread cutting can be performed by the following block:
G78 X/U__ Z/W__ F/E__ Q__ ; [L system]

G175 X__ Z__ F/E__ Q__ ; [M system]
F/E ：Lead of Longitudinal axis (axis which moves most) direction
Q ：Thread cutting start shift angle

U
3 Rapid traverse feed 1 Rapid 2
2 Thread cutting cycle traverse feed
End point coordinate

X
Z W
Z
(b) Taper thread cutting

Taper thread cutting can be performed by the following block:
G78 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ F/E__ Q__ ; [L system]

G175 X__ Z__ R__ F/E__ Q__ ; [M system]
F/E ：Lead of Longitudinal axis (axis which moves most) direction
Q ：Thread cutting start shift angle

3 Rapid traverse feed 1 Rapid U
2 Thread cutting cycle traverse feed 2
End point
r
coordinate
Z W X
Z
r : Taper part depth (radius designation, incremental position, sign is required)
IB-1501505-C 250
Chamfering
α: Thread chamfering amount

Set the chamfer amount with the parameters.
The setting range is 0 to 12.7L with increments of 0.1L.
θ: Thread chamfering angle
The thread chamfering angle can be set in a given parameter in 1° steps in the range of 0 to 89°
251 IB-1501505-C
(3) Face cutting fixed cycle (G79/G176)

(a) Straight cutting
Straight cutting in the end face direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:
G79 X/U__ Z/W__ F__ ; [L system]

G176 X__ Z__ F__ ; [M system]
F ：Feedrate
X 1 Rapid traverse
feed
2 Cutting U
feed 4 Rapid 2
traverse feed
3 Cutting
feed
Z W X
Z
(b) Taper cutting

Taper cutting in the end face direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:
G79 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ F__ ; [L system]

G176 X__ Z__ R__ F__ ; [M system]
F ：Feedrate
r
X
1 Rapid
traverse feed
U
2 Cutting 4 Rapid traverse
feed feed 2
3 Cutting feed
Z W X
Z
r: Taper part depth (radius designation, incremental position, sign is required)
IB-1501505-C 252
12.1.3.5 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The shape normally programmed in several blocks for rough cutting, etc., in the turning machining can be commanded in
one block. This function is useful for machining program simplification.
Compound type fixed cycle for turning machining are as follows:
G code Function
G71 Longitudinal rough cutting cycle
G72 Face rough cutting cycle
G73 Molding material in rough cutting cycle
G70 Finish cycle
G74 Face cutting-off cycle
G75 Longitudinal cutting-off cycle
G76 Compound type thread cutting cycle
253 IB-1501505-C
(1) Longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71)

The finish shape program is called, and straight rough cutting is performed while intermediate path is being
calculated automatically.
The machining program is commanded as follows.
G71 Ud Re ;
G71 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
Ud : Cutting amount (modal) ............... Reversible parameter
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ... Radius value command
Re : Retract amount (modal) ................ Reversible parameter
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ... Radius value command
Aa : Finish shape program No. (If omitted, the program being executed is designated.)
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O no. can specify the finish shape program by the parameter.
If the setting is to call the program with O No., it becomes the A command value program starting with O No.
If the A command is omitted, the program being executed are applied.
If A is omitted, the program following the end of this cycle will be executed at the block after Qq
(finish shape end sequence No.).
A file name can be designated instead of address A by enclosing the file name in brackets <>.
Pp : Finish shape start sequence number (Head of program if omitted.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence number (To end of program if omitted.)
If M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.
Uu : Finishing allowance in X axis direction
(If omitted, finishing allowance in X axis direction is handled as 0.)
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch Diameter/radius value command follows changeover parameter.
Ww : Finishing allowance in Z axis direction
(If omitted, finishing allowance in Z axis direction is handled as 0.)
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch Radius value command
Ff : Cutting speed (If omitted, cutting speed (modal) before G71 is applied.)
Ss, Tt : Spindle command, tool command
(Cycle commanded point)
Rapid traverse feed
X Rapid traverse feed

Cutting
feed 45° e
Cutting feed
Z
u/2
W
d Cutting amount
u/2 Finishing allowance
W Finishing allowance
IB-1501505-C 254
(2) Face rough cutting cycle (G72)

The finish shape program is called, and rough cutting is performed in the end face direction while intermediate
path is being calculated automatically.
The machining program is commanded as follows
G72 Wd Re ;
: Cut depth d. (When P,Q command is not given). (Modal)
: Retract amount e. (Modal)
Wd : Finish shape program No. (If it is omitted, the program being executed is designated.)
Re A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O no. can specify the finish shape program by
Aa the parameter.
If the setting is to call the program with O No., it becomes the A command value program starting
with O No.
If the A command is omitted, the P, Q commands in the program being executed are applied.
Pp A file name can be designated instead of address A by enclosing the file name in brackets <>.
Qq (The file name can have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
: Finish shape start sequence number (Head of program if omitted.)
Uu : Finish shape end sequence number (To end of program if omitted.)
Ww : Finishing allowance in X axis direction
(If omitted, finishing allowance in X axis direction is handled as 0.)
Ff : Finishing allowance in Z axis direction
Ss, Tt (If omitted, finishing allowance in Z axis direction is handled as 0.)
: Cutting feedrate (If omitted, cutting feedrate (modal) before G72 is applied.)
: Spindle command, tool command
S Cycle commanded point
Cutting feed e Rapid traverse feed
45°
X Cutting feed
u/2
Z
E
d Cut depth
u/2 Finishing allowance
W Finishing allowance
255 IB-1501505-C
(3) Molding material in rough cutting cycle (G73)

The finish shape program is called. Intermediate path is automatically calculated and rough cutting is
performed conforming to the finish shape.
G73 Ui Wk Rd ;
- Cutting allowance when P, Q command is not given.
Ui :Cutting allowance in the X axis direction i
- Modal data
Wk :Cutting allowance in the Z axis direction k
- Sign is ignored.
Rd :Split count d
- Cutting allowance is given with a radius designation.
(If it is omitted, the present program is assumed to be
designated.)
Aa :Finish shape program No. A file name can be designated instead of address A by
enclosing the file name in brackets <>. (The file name can
have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
(If it is omitted, the program top is assumed to be designated.)
Pp :Finish shape start sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program end is assumed to be
Qq :Finish shape end sequence No. designated.)
However, if M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.
- Finishing allowance for the finish shape commanded by the
address P or Q.
Uu :Finishing allowance in the X axis direction u - Sign is ignored.
Ww :Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction w - Diameter or radius is designated according to the
parameter.
- The shift direction is determined by the shape
Ff :Cutting feed rate (F function) The F, S, and T commands in the finish shape program are
Ss :Spindle speed (S function) ignored, and the value in the rough cutting command or the
Tt :Tool selection (T function) preceding value becomes effective.
k+w
S1
X S2
S3 i + u/2
7
1
S
13
Z 2
19
6 8
14
12 5
E 18 11 4
17 10 3
16 9
15
A u/2
w
IB-1501505-C 256
(4) Finish cycle (G70)

After rough cutting is performed by using G71 to G73, finish cutting can be performed by using the G70
command.
G70 Aa Pp Qq ;
Aa : Finish shape program No.
(If it is omitted, the program being executed is assumed to be designated.)
Pp : Finish shape start sequence No.
(If it is omitted, the program top is assumed to be designated.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence No.
(If it is omitted, the program end is assumed to be designated.)
However, if M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.
(a) The F, S, and T commands in the rough cutting cycle command G71 to G73 blocks are ignored, and the
F, S, and T commands in the finish shape program become effective.
(b) The memory address of the finish shape program executed by G71 to G72 is not stored. Whenever G70
is executed, a program search is made.
(c) When the G70 cycle terminates, the tool returns to the start point at the rapid traverse feed rate and the
next block is read.
(Example1) Sequence No. designation
~
N100 G70 P200 Q300 ; N200 . . . . . ;

~
N110
N300 . . . . . ;
N120
~
N200
Finish shape program
~
N300
N310
~
(Example2) Program No. designation

~
N100 G70 A100 ;

N110 . . . . . ; O100
N120 . . . . . ;
G01 X100 Z50 F0.5 ;
~
M99 ;
In either example 1 or 2, after the N100 cycle is executed, the N110 block is executed.
257 IB-1501505-C
(5) Face cutting-off cycle (G74)

When the slotting end point coordinates, cut depth, cutting tool shift amount, and cutting tool relief amount at
the cut bottom are commanded, automatic slotting is performed in the end face direction of a given bar by G74
fixed cycle. The machining program is commanded as follows.
G74 Re ;
G74 Xx1/(Uu1) Zz1/(Ww1) Pi Qk Rd Ff ;
Re : Retract amount e (when X/U, Z/W command is not given) (Modal)
Xx1/Uu1 : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental position)
Zz1/Ww1 : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental position)
Pi : Tool shift amount (radius designation, incremental position, sign not required)
Qk : Cut depth k (radius designation, incremental position, sign not required)
(If sign is not provided, relief is made at the first cut bottom. If minus sign is provided,
Rd : Relief amount at cut bottom d
relief is made not at the first cut bottom but made at the second cut bottom and later.)
Ff : Feed rate
z w
11
10 Start point
9 5 1 12
i 8 7 4 3 2
6
d
9 and 12 just before the last cycle are
u/2 executed with the remaining distance.
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11 and 12 are executed
at the rapid traverse feed rate.
e
B
x
k k k k
IB-1501505-C 258
(6) Longitudinal cutting-off cycle (G75)

When the slotting end point coordinates, cut depth, cutting tool shift amount, and cutting tool relief amount at
the cut bottom are commanded, automatic slotting is performed in the longitudinal direction of a given bar by
G75 fixed cycle. The machining program is commanded as follows.
G75 Re ;
G75 Xx1/(Uu1) Zz1/(Ww1) Pi Qk Rd Ff ;
Re : Retract amount e (when X/U, Z/W command is not given) (Modal)
Xx1/Uu1 : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental position)
Zz1/Ww1 : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental position)
Pi : Cut depth i (radius designation, incremental position, sign not required)
Qk : Tool shift amount k (radius designation, incremental position, sign not required)
(If sign is not provided, relief is made at the first cut bottom. If minus sign is
Rd : Relief amount at cut bottom d provided, relief is made not at the first cut bottom but made at the second cut
bottom and later.)
Ff : Feed rate
z w
Start point
12
i
e 2 1
i 3
4 9 and 12 just before the last cycle are
5 executed with the remaining distance.
i 11 u/2 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11 and 12 are executed
6 at the rapid traverse feed rate.
i 7
8
9
B
d 10
k x
259 IB-1501505-C
(7) Compound type thread cutting cycle (G76)

When the thread cutting start and end points are commanded, cut at any desired angle can be made by
automatic cutting so that the cut section area (cutting torque) per time becomes constant in the G76 fixed
cycle.
Various longitudinal threads can be cut by considering the thread cutting end point coordinate and taper height
constituent command value.
Command Format
G76 Pmra Q △ dmin Rd ;

G76 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Ri Pk Q △ d Fl ;
m : Cut count at finishing 01 to 99 (modal)
r : Chamfering amount 00 to 99 (modal). Set in 0.1-lead increments.
a : Nose angle (included angle of thread) 00 to 99 (modal) Set in 1-degree increments.
△ dmin : Least cut depth
When the calculated cut depth becomes smaller than △ dmin, the cut depth is clamped at △ dmin.
d : Finishing allowance (modal)
Xx1/Uu1 : X axis end point coordinate of thread part. --- Absolute/Incremental position
Zz1/Ww1 : Z axis end point coordinate of thread part. --- Absolute/Incremental position
Ri : Taper height constituent in thread part (radius value). When i = 0 is set, straight screw is made.
Pk : Thread height. Designate the thread height in a positive radius value.
Q△d : Cut depth. Designate the first cut depth in a positive radius value.
Fl : Thread lead
IB-1501505-C 260
Configuration of one cycle

In one cycle, 1, 2, 5, and 6 move at rapid traverse feed and 3 and 4 move at cutting feed designated in F
command.
When Ri is negative
z w
S
6 1
u/2
4
2
3
(- i)
k
x r
a° /2
When Ri is positive
z w
S
6 1
5
2
u/2
4 k
3
i
a° /2
r
x
a°
First time Δd
k Second time
Δd× √ 2
nth time Δd× √ n
Finishing allowanced
(Cut "m" times at finishing)
261 IB-1501505-C
12.1.3.6 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (Type II)
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
Pocket shapes can be machined in the longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71) and face rough cutting cycle (G72).
The cutting method differs according to whether pocket machining is ON or OFF.

Pocket machining OFF ....... Method to pull up the tool in a 45-degree direction from the workpiece
Pocket machining ON ......... Method that traces the shape (After executing the last trace, the tool is pulled up in the
X axis direction.)
Pocket machining is designated with the program (H address) or parameter.
Command format (This is a command format when the G71 is commanded. The G72 command is based on the G71
command.)
G71 Ud Re Hh ; <- (can be omitted when values set in parameters are used)
<H0:Used for finished shapes without pockets> <H1:Mainly used for finished shapes with pockets>
G71 Ud Re H 0; (R) G71 Ud Re H 1; (R)

G71 Pp Qq . . ; (R) G71 Pp Qq .. ; (R)
q Rough cutting start point q Rough cutting start point

(R/f) (R/f)
d (f) d
(f)
X X
(f) (R)
(R) Hole
(f) 45° e p u/2 bottom p u/2
(f) e w
Z w Z
Ud : Cut amount (modal) ........................ Reversible parameter

Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ..... Radius value command
Re : Retract amount (modal) .................. Reversible parameter
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch .... Radius value command
Hh : Pocket machining (modal) ............. Reversible parameter
0 : Select this only for finished shapes without hollow areas (pockets).
With the beginning of the pockets, the tool is pulled up in the 45-degree direction with each cycle until the
finished shape is finally traced.
1 : This can be selected regardless of whether the finished shape has hollow (pocket) parts or not.
A method that traces the finished shape with each cycle is used for the beginning of the pockets.
Depending on the parameter setting, pocket machining ON/OFF is automatically determined by the number
of axes in the finish shape start block.
Aa : Finish shape program No. (If omitted, the program being executed is designated.)
Pp : Finish shape start sequence number (Head of program if omitted.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence number (To end of program if omitted.)
Uu : Finishing allowance in X axis direction (If omitted, finishing allowance in X axis direction is handled as 0.)
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ....... Diameter/radius value command follows changeover parameter.
Ww : Finishing allowance in Z axis direction (If omitted, finishing allowance in Z axis direction is handled as 0.)
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ......... Radius value command
Ff : Cutting feed rate (If omitted, cutting feed rate (modal) before G73 is applied.)
Ss, Tt : Spindle command, tool command
IB-1501505-C 262
12.1.3.7 Small-diameter Deep-hole Drilling Cycle

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
In deep hole drilling, cutting and retract are repeated and the workpiece is machined multiple times. In addition, when
PLC signals are input during cutting, the cutting for the time concerned is skipped. In this way, this cycle reduces the
load applied to the tool.
Command format
The small-diameter deep-hole drilling cycle mode is established by designating the M code command which was set in
the parameter.
If the G83 command is designated in this mode, the small-diameter deep-hole drilling cycle is executed.
The mode is canceled by the following conditions.
- Designation of a fixed cycle cancel command (G80, G commands in Group 1)
- Resetting
The signal is not output in respect to the M command which changes the mode to the small-diameter deep-hole drilling
mode.
G83 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Ii1 Pp1 ;

Xx1, Yy1 : Hole drilling position
Rr1 : R point position
Qq1 : Depth of cut in each pass (designated with incremental position)
Ff1 : Cutting feed rate
Ii1 : Feedrate from R point to the cutting start position, the speed for returning from hole bottom
12.1.4 Mirror Image
12.1.4.1 Mirror Image by Parameter Setting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A parameter is used to designate the axis for which the mirror image function is to be executed before the machining
program is run.
When mirror image is set to ON by the parameter, an operation which is symmetrical on the left and right or at the top or
bottom is performed.
Each axis has its own parameter.
12.1.4.2 Mirror Image by External Input

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Signals from an external device (PLC) to request the mirror image operation either while a machining program is running
or before it is run.
When ON has been set for mirror image from an external device, an operation which is symmetrical on the left and right
or at the top or bottom is performed.
Each axis has its own request signal.
263 IB-1501505-C
12.1.4.3 Mirror Image by G Code

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Using a program for the left or right side of a shape, this function can machine the other side of the shape when a left/
right symmetrical shape is to be cut.
Mirror image can be applied directly by a G code when preparing a machining program.
Gcode Function
G50.1 G code mirror image cancel
G51.1 G code mirror image ON
The program format for the G code mirror image is shown below.
G51.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G51.1 : Mirror image on
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Command axes and command positions
With the local coordinate system, the mirror image is applied with the mirror positioned respectively at x1, y1 and z1.
The program format for the G code mirror image cancel is shown below.
G50.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G50.1 : Mirror image cancel
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Command axes
The x1, y1 and z1 indicate the axes for which the mirror image function is to be canceled and the coordinate position is
ignored.
In the case of G51.1 Xx1 ;
Original shape (program)

Shape achieved when machining
Y program for the left side has been
executed after the mirror command
X
Mirroring axis
IB-1501505-C 264
12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
With machines in which the base tool post and facing tool post are integrated, this function enables the programs
prepared for cutting at the base side to be executed by the tools on the facing side.
The distance between the two posts is set beforehand with the parameter.
The command format is given below.
Gcode Function
G68 Facing tool post mirror image ON
G69 Facing tool post mirror image OFF
When the G68 command is issued, the subsequent program coordinate systems are shifted to the facing side and the
movement direction of the X axis is made the opposite of that commanded by the program.
When the G69 command is issued, the subsequent program coordinate systems are returned to the base side.
The facing tool post mirror image function can be set to ON or OFF automatically by means of T (tool) commands without
assigning the G68 command.
A parameter is used to set ON or OFF for the facing tool post mirror image function corresponding to the T commands.
Base post
X
Programmed path
(G69)
Parameter for distance

Z between posts (radial value,
X axis only)
(G68)
Facing side path (mirror
image ON)
Facing post
12.1.4.5 T Code Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
If, when tools that correspond to tool Nos. 1 to 64 are selected (T commands), these are tool Nos. for which the facing
tool post mirror image function has already been designated with a parameter, the status equivalent to G68 (facing tool
post mirror image ON) is established. When the commands apply to tool Nos. for which the facing tool post mirror image
function is not designated, the status equivalent to G69 (facing tool post mirror image OFF) is established.
265 IB-1501505-C
12.1.5 Coordinate System Operation
12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
When it is necessary to machine a complicated shape at a position that has been rotated with respect to the coordinate
system, you can machine a rotated shape by programming the shape prior to rotation on the local coordinate system,
then specifying the parallel shift amount and rotation angle by means of this coordinate rotation command.
The program format for the coordinate rotation command is given below.
(1) M system
G68 Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 ; Coordinate rotation ON

G69 ; Coordinate rotation cancel
G68 : Call command
G69 : Cancel command
Xx1,Yy1 : Rotation center coordinates
Rr1 : Angle of rotation
(Example)
Y
Y’
Actual X’
machining
shape
(Programmed
coordinate)
X
IB-1501505-C 266
(2) L system
G68.1 Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 ; Coordinate rotation ON

G69.1 ; Coordinate rotation cancel
G68.1 :Call instruction
Xx1,Zz1 :Rotation center coordinates
Rr1 :Angle of rotation
(Note) This function rotates the coordinate system and realizes mainly drilling and tapping.
(Example)
X’
(Programmed coordinate)
Z’
Actual
machining
shape
267 IB-1501505-C
12.1.5.2 Coordinate Rotation by Parameter

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
If a deviation occurs between the workpiece alignment line and machine coordinate system's coordinate axis when the
workpiece is mounted, the machine can be controlled to rotate the machining program coordinates according to the
workpiece alignment line deviation. The coordinate rotation amount and the rotation center are set with the parameters.
The coordinate rotation amount can also be set with the G10 command.
Ym
Rotation center
G57
W4'
G56
W3' Rotation angle
W2
W1
G55
W2'
G54
W1'
M Xm
(1) As for the rotation center coordinate position, designate the position on the machine coordinate system.
(2) All workpiece coordinate systems from G54 to G59, G54.1 rotate with the rotation command.
The machine coordinate system does not rotate.
(3) If the setting is made on the parameter screen, the setting value will be valid at the timing of the followings:
Automatic operation:
After setting the parameters, the setting value will be valid from the next block.
Manual operation:
After setting the parameters, the setting value will be valid when the PLC signal (Coordinate rotation by
parameter: Coordinate switch for manual feed) is ON.
IB-1501505-C 268
12.1.5.3 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
With the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion function, a new coordinate system can be defined by rotating and moving
in parallel the zero point in respect to the X, Y and Z axes of the currently set workpiece coordinate system. By using this
function, an arbitrary spatial plane can be defined, and machining on that plane can be carried out with normal program
commands.
Y’
G68 program coordinate
system
Z’
Machine coordinate system X’
system Z
When the G68 command is issued, the zero point is shifted by the command value (x, y, z) in respect to the current local
coordinate system. A new G68 program coordinate system rotated by the designated rotation angle r in respect to the
commanded rotation center direction (i, j, k) is created.
The local coordinate system is the same as the workpiece coordinate system when the local coordinate system offset is
not ON.
The program format is as follows.
G68 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Rr ;
G68 : 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode command
: Rotation center coordinates
Xx,Yy,Zz
Designate with the absolute position of the local coordinate system.
Ii,Jj,Kk : Rotation center axis direction
1:Designated、0:Not designated
Note that "1" is designated for only one of the three axes. "0" is designated for the other two axes.
Rr : Rotation angle
The counterclockwise direction looking at the rotation center from the rotation center axis direction is positive (+).
The setting range is -360 to 360°, and the increment follows the least command increment.
G69 ;
G69 : 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode cancel command
269 IB-1501505-C
12.1.6 Dimension Input
12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering/Corner R

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
This function executes corner processing by automatically inserting a straight line or an arc by the commanded amount
between two consecutive movement blocks (G01/G02/G03).
The corner command is executed by assigning the ",C" or ",R" command for the block at whose end point the corner is
inserted.
(1) Corner chamfering I/ Corner R I

When ",C" or ",R" is commanded for linear interpolation, corner chamfering or corner R can be inserted
between linear blocks.
Corner chamfering I Corner R I
Example: Example:
N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 ,Cc1 ; N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 ,Rr1 ;
N2 Zz2 ; N2 Zz2 ;
N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 ,Cc1 ;

N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 ,Rr1 ;
N2 Zz2 ;
N2 Zz2 ;
c1
N2 N2
c1
r1
N1 N1
(Note 1) If a corner chamfering or corner R command is issued specifying a length longer than the N1 or N2 block,
a program error occurs.
IB-1501505-C 270
(2) Corner chamfering II/ corner R II

When ",C" or ",R" is commanded in a program between linear-circular, corner chamfering or corner R can be
inserted between blocks.
When the parameters are set, "I_", "K_", "C_" can be used to command chamfering instead of ",C", and "R_"
can be used to command rounding instead of ",R_". (L system only)
(a) Corner chamfering II (Linear - circular)
Example: G01 X_Z_ ,Cc1;

G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1;
Hypothetical corner intersection Cc1
Cc1
Chamfering end point 1
Chamfering start point

2
(b) Corner chamfering II (Circular - linear)
Example: G03 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Cc1;

G01 X_Z_;
Hypothetical corner intersection Cc1
Cc1
2
Chamfering end point

1
(c) Corner chamfering II (Circular - circular)
Example: G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Cc1;

G02 X_Z_ Ii2 Kk2;
Hypothetical corner intersection
Cc1
Cc1
Chamfering Chamfering
end point start point
2 1
271 IB-1501505-C
(d) Corner R II (Linear - circular)
Example: G01 X_Z_ ,Rr1;

G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1;
Corner R start point
Hypothetical corner
intersection 1
Rr1
Corner R end point
(e) Corner R II (Circular - linear)
Example: G03 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Rr1;

G01 X_Z_;
Corner R end point
Hypothetical corner
intersection 2
Rr1
(f) Corner R II (Circular - circular)
Example: G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Rr1;

G02 X_Z_ Ii2 Kk2;
Hypothetical corner intersection
1
Corner R
start point
Rr1
IB-1501505-C 272
(3) Specification of corner chamfering Expansion/ corner R Expansion

An E address can be used to specify the speed for corner chamfering or corner R. This enables a corner to be
cut to a correct shape.
(Example)
G01 X_Z_ ,Cc1 Ff1 Ee1 ;

X_Z_ ;
G01 X_Z_ ,Rr1 Ff1 Ee1 ;

X_Z_ ;
X
F
An E address is a modal and remains effective for feeding in next corner chamfering or corner R.
An E address has two separate modals: synchronous and asynchronous feed rate modals. The effective feed
rate is determined by synchronous (G95) or asynchronous (G94) mode.
If an E address is specified in 0 or no E command has been specified, the feed rate specified by an F
command is assumed as the feed rate for corner chamfering or corner R.
An E address modal is not cleared even if the reset button is pressed.
It is cleared when the power is turned OFF. (In the same manner as F commands.)
273 IB-1501505-C
(4) Corner chamfering / corner R (I, K designation) (L system only)

With this command format, by means of parameter settings, corners are chamfered using the "I", "K" or "C"
address without a comma, and corners are rounded using the "R" address.
The ",C" and ",R" addresses with commas can also be used.
(a) Corner chamfering (I, K designation)

Corners are chamfered using the "I_", "K_" or "C_" address with no comma.
Corners can be chamfered to any angle.
Signs, if they are provided for the corner chamfering commands, are ignored.
Command format
N100 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Ii1/Kk1/Cc1 ;

N200 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 ;
Xx1/Uu1 : X-axis end point coordinate
Zz1/Ww1 : Z-axis end point coordinate
Ii1/Kk1/Cc1 : The length from the hypothetical corner intersection to the chamfering start point or
chamfering end point is designated using the I, K or C address.
Chamfering end point

N200

i, k, c
N100 Hypothetical corner

i, k, c intersection
0 Z
- If multiple "I", "K" or "C" addresses or duplicated addresses have been designated in the same
block, the last address will take effect.
- If both corner chamfering and corner R commands are present in the same block, the last command
will take effect.
- If "C" is used as the name of an axis, corner chamfering commands cannot be designated using the
"C" address.
- If "C" is used as a 2nd miscellaneous function, corner chamfering commands cannot be designated
using the "C" address.
- Corner chamfering commands using the "I" or "K" address cannot be designated in an arc command
block. "I" and "K" are the arc center commands.
IB-1501505-C 274
(b) Corner R (I, K designation)

Corners are rounded using the "R_" address with no comma.
Corners can be rounded to any angle.
Signs, if they are provided for the corner R commands, are ignored.
Command format
N100 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Rr1 ;

N200 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 ;
Xx1/Uu1 : X-axis end point coordinate
Zz1/Ww1 : Z-axis end point coordinate
Rr1 : Radius of corner R arc
Corner R end point
N200
Hypothetical corner
N100 intersection
0 Z
- If both corner chamfering and corner R commands are present in the same block, the last address
will take effect.
- Corner R commands using the "R" address cannot be designated in an arc command block. "R" is
regarded as the arc radius command in such a block.
275 IB-1501505-C
(5) Interrupt during corner chamfering / Interrupt during corner R

Shown below are the operations of manual interruption during corner chamfering or corner R.
(a) With an absolute value command and manual absolute switch ON:
N1 G28 XZ;
N2 G00 X40. Z120.;
N3 G03 X140.Z70. K-50. ,R20. F100 ;
N4 G01 X40. Z20. ;
: 140.
N4
N3
40.
Z
20. 70. 120. (mm)
Amount of interruption
Path with interruption

Path without interruption
(b) With an incremental value command or manual absolute switch OFF:
N1 G28 XZ;
N2 G00 U40. W120.;
N3 G03 U100. W-50. K-50. ,R20.
F100 ;
N4 G01 U-100.W-50. ; 140.
:
N4
N3
40.
Z
20. 70. 120. (mm)
Amount of interruption
Path with interruption

Path without interruption
IB-1501505-C 276
12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
The end point coordinates are automatically calculated by assigning one element (one component of the selected plane)
of the end point coordinates and the linear angle.
G17 Xx1 Aa1 ; or G17 Yy1 Aa1 ;

G17 : Plane selection
Xx1,Yy1 : 1 element of the end point coordinate
Aa1 : Angle
Example
Y
End point (Automatically
calculated with operation)
Start point X
(Note 1) If the axis "A" or 2nd miscellaneous function "A" is used, address "A" is treated as the axis "A" command or the
2nd miscellaneous function, respectively.
277 IB-1501505-C
12.1.6.3 Geometric Command

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When it is difficult to find the intersection point of two straight lines with a continuous linear interpolation command, this
point can be calculated automatically by programming the command for the angle of the straight lines.
Example
N1 G01 Aa1 Ff1 ;
X N2 Xx1 Zz1 Aa2;
x1 End point (x1, z1)

2
N2
a: Angle (°) formed between straight line
a2 and horizontal axis on plane.
The plane is the selected plane at this time.
Automatic a1
intersection point N1
calculation
Start point
Z
W1 z1
(Note 1) This function cannot be used when using the A axis or 2nd miscellaneous function A.
IB-1501505-C 278
(1) Automatic calculation of two-arc contact

When two continuous circular arcs contact with each other and it is difficult to find the contact, the contact is
automatically calculated by specifying the center coordinates position or radius of the first circular arc and the
end point (absolute position) and center position or radius of the second circular arc.
Example
G18 G02 Ii1 Kk1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Ii2 Kk2 Ff2 ;
OR
G18 G02 Ii1 Kk1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Rr2 Ff2 ;
OR
G18 G02 Rr1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Ii2 Kk2 Ff2 ;
A C (xc,zc)
r1 (p2,q2)
B' (?,?)
(p1,q1)
I and K : Incremental position from arc end point r2

P and Q : Arc center position (absolute position)
I and K are the arc center position (incremental position); distances from the start point in the first block or
distances from the end point in the second block. P and Q (X, Z arc center position (absolute position)) can be
commanded instead of I and K commands.
(2) Automatic calculation of linear-arc intersection

When it is difficult to find the intersections of a given line and circular arc, the intersections are automatically
calculated by programming the following blocks.
Example
G18 G01 Aa1 Ff1 ;
G02 Xxc Zzc Ii2 Kk2 Hh2 (,Hh2) Ff2 ;
r1 B' (?,?)
H=0 H=1
B (?,?) (p2,q2)
a1
A
C (xc,zc)
I and K : Incremental position from arc end point
H = 0 : Intersection with shorter line (B point)
H = 1 : Intersection with longer line (B’ point)
The p2 and q2 can be commanded instead of Ii2 and Kk2.

The linear - arc contact is automatically calculated by designating R instead of I and K (P, Q).
279 IB-1501505-C
(3) Automatic calculation of arc-linear intersection

When it is difficult to find the intersections of a given circular arc and line, the intersections are automatically
calculated by programming the following blocks.
Example
G18 G03 Ii1 Kk1 Hh1 Ff1 ;
G01 Xxc Zzc Aa1 Ff1 ;
(p1,q1)
B' (?,?) B (?,?)
a1
H=1
r1 H=0
C (xc, zc)
I and K : Incremental position from arc end point

H = 0 : Intersection with shorter line (B point)
H = 1 : Intersection with longer line (B’ point)
The p1 and q1 can be commanded instead of Ii1 and Kk1.

The arc - linear contact is automatically calculated by designating R instead of I and K (P, Q).
(4) Automatic calculation of linear-arc contact

When it is difficult to find the contact of a given line and circular arc, the contact is automatically calculated by
programming the following blocks.
Example
G01 Aa1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Rr1 Ff1 ;
C (xc,zc)
r1
B (?,?)
a1
A
The linear - arc intersection is automatically calculated by designating R instead of P and Q (I, K).
(5) Automatic calculation of arc-linear contact

When it is difficult to find the contact of a given circular arc and line, the contact is automatically calculated by
programming the following blocks.
Example
G02 Rr1 Ff1 ;

G01 Xxc Zzc Aa1 Ff1 ;
B (?,?)
A
r1
a1
C(xc, zc)
The arc - linear intersection is automatically calculated by designating R instead of P and Q (I, K).
IB-1501505-C 280
12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
With this function, the end point position is commanded with the radius and angle.
Command format
G16 ; Polar coordinate command mode ON
G15 ; Polar coordinate command mode OFF
Example of program
G1x ; Plane selection for polar coordinate command (G17/G18/G19)

G16 ; Polar coordinate command mode ON
Polar coordinate command
G9x : Center selection for polar coordinate command (G90/G91))
G90…The workpiece coordinate system zero point is the polar coordinate center.
G91…The present position is the polar coordinate center.
x1 : 1st axis for the plane…The radius commanded
y1 : 2nd axis for the plane…The angle commanded
Commanded position
G9x G01 Xx1 Yy1 F2000 ; (end point)
:
x1
Plus
Minus Present position

y1
X
For G90/G17(X-Y plane)
G15 ; Polar coordinate command mode OFF
281 IB-1501505-C
12.1.7 Axis Control
12.1.7.1 Chopping
12.1.7.1.1 Chopping
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
This function continuously raises and lowers the chopping axis independently of the program operation when workpiece
contours are to be cut. It can be used for grinding operations using machining centers, for instance.
Which of the axes is to serve as the chopping axis is set by a parameter beforehand.
(1) Chopping action
Grindstone
Chopping action
Workpiece
Start Stop
Base position
The chopping operation is initiated by setting
Rapid traverse Rapid the upper dead point position, lower dead point
traverse position and number of cycles (number of up/
Upper dead point
down movements per minute) and pressing the
chopping start switch.
Lower dead point
(Note 1) The upper dead point position, lower dead point position and number of cycles are set and the start and
stop commands are designated by input signals from the user PLC.
(Note 2) The setting for the number of cycles differs according to the motor, inertia and other factors.
The chopping operation is performed as follows.

(a) The axis moves from the base position to the upper dead point by rapid traverse.
(b) Next, the axis moves repeatedly from the upper dead point to the lower dead point and then from the lower
dead point to the upper dead point. (Sinusoidal waveforms)
The feed rate is tailored to achieve the number of cycles set for the up/down motion.
Chopping override
Override in 1% increments from 0% to 100% can be applied to the chopping operation.
(Note) Bear in mind that the override increment differs according to the machine specifications.
IB-1501505-C 282
12.1.7.2 Normal Line Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function controls the swiveling of the C axis (rotary axis) so that the tool is always pointing in the normal line
direction for the X and Y axes movement commands during program operation. It can be used for machining hale, for
sewing operations involving sewing machines, carpets, etc. It is valid for only one C axis (rotary axis).
At the block seams, the C axis turning is controlled so that the tool faces the normal line direction at the next block's start
point.
C-axis center (rotary axis)
Tool tip position
C axis swiveling
During arc interpolation, the C axis turning is controlled in synchronization with the operation of arc interpolation.
C-axis center (rotary axis)
Tool
Tool end position
Gcode Function
G40.1 Normal line direction control cancel
G41.1 Normal line direction control left ON
G42.1 Normal line direction control right ON
283 IB-1501505-C
12.1.7.3 Circular Cutting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
In circular cutting, a system of cutting steps are performed: first, the tool departs from the center of the circle, and by
cutting along the inside circumference of the circle, it draws a complete circle, then it returns to the center of the circle.
The position at which G12 or G13 has been programmed serves as the center of the circle.
The program format is given below.
G12/(G13) Ii Dd Ff ;
G12 : Circular cutting command CW (clockwise)
G13 : Circular cutting command CCW (counter clockwise)
Ii : Radius of complete circle
Dd : Compensation No.
Ff : Feed rate
When the G12 command is used (path of tool center)

0→1→2→3→4→5→6→7→0
When the G13 command is used (path of tool center)
0→7→6→5→4→3→2→1→0
Radius
of circle
1
0 2
X
4 6
Compen- 3
sation
amount
(Note 1) Circular cutting is carried out on the plane which has been currently selected (G17, G18 or G19).
(Note 2) The (+) and (-) signs for the compensation amount denote reduction and expansion respectively.
IB-1501505-C 284
12.1.8 Multi-part System Control
12.1.8.1 Timing Synchronization between Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
Multiple machining programs can be operated independently at same time for multi-axis and multi-part system mixed
control CNC. This function enables the timing synchronization between part systems or the operation of only one part
system while the machining programs are being operated independently for each part system.
Command format
Timing synchronization with ! code
!n ( !m... ）L ＿ ;
!n !m : Part system number for timing synchronization (Multiple command can be performed.)
Follows the parameter if part system number is omitted.
L : Timing synchronization number (0 to 9999)
Timing synchronization with ! code is also valid among three part systems and more.
Timing synchronization with M code
M*** ;
***　 : M code for timing synchronization
The range of M code for the timing synchronization is determined with the minimum and maximum values set with
the parameter beforehand.
Part system i Part system n Part system m

program program program
Pi 1
Pn 1
Pm 1
!n !m L1;
!i !m L1;
Simultaneously start after Timing
timing synchronization block synchronization Timing !i !n L1;
synchronization
Pi 2 Pi 2 Pi 2
Pi 1 wait Pi 2
Part system i
Pn 1 wait Pn 2
Part system n
Pm 1 Pm 2
Part system m
Simultaneously start
(Note 1) The timing synchronization can be disvalued with the parameter setting and "Timing synchronization between
part systems ignored" signal. When a part system to be waited for a simultaneous operation is not operating,
the currently operating part system will move on to the next block without executing timing synchronization.
This function is useful when conducting a program check on each part system.
(Note 2) The timing synchronization command is normally assigned as a separate command. However, if a movement
command and M, S or T command have been assigned in the same block, a parameter is set to decide
whether timing synchronization is executed upon executing of the movement command and M, S or T
command, or the movement command and M, S or T command are executed upon completion of timing
synchronization.
285 IB-1501505-C
12.1.8.2 Start Point Designation Timing Synchronization

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
control CNC. This function enables the timing synchronization with the position in the movement block while the
machining programs are being operated independently for each part system.
When a workpiece is being delivered from part system 1 to part system 2, the movement operation in part system 2 can
be started in the middle of the part system 1 tool post movement with this function so that the machining time can be
reduced.
A part system for start point designation timing synchronization can be designated by adding ! code on the command
block G115 and G116.
IB-1501505-C 286
(1) Start point designation timing synchronization Type 1 (G115)

Command format
!n L ＿ G115 X ＿ Z ＿ C ＿ ;
!n : Part system number for timing synchronization
G115 : G command
XZC : Start point (Designate an axis which checks the timing synchronization and workpiece coordinate value
in other part system)
(a) The other part system starts first when timing synchronization is executed.
(b) The own part system waits for the other part system to move and reach the designated start point, and then
starts.
Part system 1
(Own part system) !2 G115
Timing synchronization
Part system 2
(Other part system) !1
G0 X_
Designated start point
Part system 1
Part system 2
(Other part system) !1 G0 X_
(c) When the start point designated by G115 is not on the next block movement path of the other part system, the
own part system starts once the other part system has reached each start point axis coordinate position.
X also passes
through.
Z passes through.
← : Movement
◎ : Command point
△ : Actual start point
287 IB-1501505-C
(2) Start point designation timing synchronization Type 2 (G116)

Command format
!n L ＿ G116 X ＿ Z ＿ C ＿ ;
!n : Part system number for timing synchronization
G116 : G command
XZC : Start point (Designate an axis which checks the timing synchronization and workpiece coordinate value
in own part system)
(a) The own part system starts first when timing synchronization is executed.
(b) The other part system waits for the own part system to move and reach the designated start point, and then
starts.

Part system 1
G0 X_
Timing
Part system2 synchronization

Part system1
G0 X_
Part system2
(c) When the start point designated by G116 is not on the next block movement path of the own part system, the
other part system starts once the own part system has reached each start point coordinate position.
X also passes
through.
Z passes through.
← : Movement
◎ : Command point
△ : Actual start point
IB-1501505-C 288
12.1.8.3 Mixed Control
12.1.8.3.1 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
Performs the mixed control (cross axis control) by G command or PLC signal.
Any axis to be replaced by another axis between part systems.

This makes it possible to perform operations which are not possible with regular axis configurations: for instance, tools
which are provided only on part system 1 can be used for machining on part system 2.
1st part system 2nd part system 1st part system 2nd part system
(X1,Z1,C1) (X2,Z2,C2) (X1,Z2,C2)
X1 X1
Z2 Z1
C1 C2 C1 C2
Z2
Mix X1 axis and
Z1
X2 axis.
X2 X2
289 IB-1501505-C
12.1.8.3.2 Arbitrary Axis Exchange Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
An arbitrary axis can be exchanged freely between part systems in the multiple part systems.
The machining can be freer in the multiple part systems by exchanging an axis which can be commanded for machining
programs in each part system.
This makes it possible to perform operations which are not possible with regular axis configurations: for instance, tools
which are provided only on the 1st part system can be used for machining on the 2nd part system.
(Example) Using X1 axis in part system 2
Before axis exchange After axis exchange

1st part system (X1, Z1, C1) 2nd part system (X2, Z2, C2) 1st part system (Z1, C1) 2nd part system (X1, Z2, C2)
Machining with 1st spindle Machining with 2nd spindle Machining with 1st spindle Machining with 2nd spindle
2nd tool post 2nd tool post
X2
Z2
C1 C2 C1 C2
Z2
X1
X1
Z1
1st tool post 1st tool post
Command format
Arbitrary axis exchange command
Commands the arbitrary axis exchange by G140.
G140 command address = axis address command address = axis address...;

Command address : Designate the command address used in commands such as the movement command with one
alphabetical character set to the parameter after the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140).
Axis address : Designate the axis name for arbitrary axis exchange with two alphanumeric characters set to
the parameter.
Arbitrary axis exchange return command

Returns the control right of the axis, exchanged by the previous arbitrary axis exchange command (G140) in the
commanded part system, to the state before the axis exchange.
G141 ;
Reference axis arrange return command

Returns the control right of the axis, exchanged by the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140) in the commanded
part system, to the power-on state.
G142 ;
(Note) For G code list 6 and 7, replace G140, G141 and G142 with G165, G166 and G167.
IB-1501505-C 290
12.1.8.4 Control Axis Superimposition
12.1.8.4.1 Control Axis Superimposition

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
In the multi-part system, an axis in a part system can be superimposed on an axis in another part system and can be
controlled.
This is effective when machining by the 1st part system (X1, Z1) and the 2nd part system (X2, Z2) are executed
simultaneously for the machine configuration where a workpiece moves by a movement command to the Z axis
direction. The machining of the reference axis part system (the 1st part system) and the superimposed axis (the 2nd part
system) can be operated simultaneously with no need to fix the workpiece position for machining in the superimposed
part system (the 2nd part system).
Reference axis: The basic in the control axis superimposition function (moves only by its own axis command)
Superimposed axis: The axis which moves including the reference axis movement in the control axis superimposition
function (moves by reference axis or/and own axis command).
The control axis superimposition can be commanded with G code or PLC signal.
Command format
Superimposition start command
G126 Superimposed axis name = Reference axis name,P__ ;

Superimposed axis name : Specify the superimposed axis name for the superimposition control with 2 alphanumeric
characters set to the parameter.
Reference axis name : Specify the reference axis name for the superimposition control with 2 alphanumeric
characters set to the parameter.
Put the symbol "-" at the beginning of the reference axis name for synchronizing the
superimposed axis with the reference axis in the reverse direction.
, (comma) : Specify as delimiter when the address is needed to be assigned after "superimposed axis
name = reference name".
P : Superimposed axis workpiece coordinate system designation (The command range of
the coordinate value is mm/inch. The decimal point command is valid.)
Superimposition end command
G126 Superimposed axis name;

Superimposed axis name : Specify the name of the superimposed axis which is working for the superimposition
control with 2 alphanumeric characters set to the parameter.
291 IB-1501505-C
While using the control axis superimposition function, the workpiece zero point of the superimposed axis
moves according to the movement amount of the reference axis. Because the superimposed axis tries to
maintain the position in the workpiece coordinate system, it moves as much as the movement amount of the
reference axis.
Command : Z1 (Reference axis)

G126 Z2 = Z1; X1 1st tool post
Z2 (Superimposed axis)
Reference axis : Z1
Superimposed axis : Z2 Before
movement 2nd tool post
After
movement
Superimposition control among 3 axes

Superimposition can be controlled among 3 axes.
3 axes tandem superimposition is the condition that an axis is the superimposed axis and becomes the reference
axis for another superimposed axis at same time. The first superimposed axis is "1st superimposed axis" and the
other axis is "2nd superimposed axis" for 3 axes tandem superimposition.
Command :
1st tool post
G126 Z2 = Z1; Z1 Z3
: (Reference axis) (2nd superimposed axis)
Z2
G126 Z3 = Z2; Before X1 (1st superimposed axis)
movement
Reference axis : Z1 2nd tool post

1st superimposed axis : Z2
2nd superimposed axis : Z3
After
movement
IB-1501505-C 292
12.1.8.4.2 Arbitrary Axis Superimposition Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
The arbitrary control axis in other part system can be moved by superimposing on the movement command for the
arbitrary control axis in own part system.
12.1.8.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Synchronization control enables an arbitrary control axis in the other part system to move in synchronization with the
movement command assigned to an arbitrary control axis.
The direction in which the axis is to move synchronously can also be reversed using a parameter.
Example of processing with Z1 axis synchronized with Z2 axis in the first part system (X1, Z1) and the second part
system (Z2)
Part system 1 (X1, Z1) Part system 2 (Z2)
X1
Z1 (Reference axis) Z2 (Synchronized axis)
During synchronization, as the synchronized axis moves in synchronization with the reference axis regardless of
automatic operation or manual operation, the movement command cannot be issued to the synchronized axis.
There are two types of control axis synchronization between part systems depending on the command method: Control
axis synchronization between part systems I (G command) and control axis synchronization between part systems II
(PLC signal). The method is chosen depending on the parameter setting.
293 IB-1501505-C
Command format (Control axis synchronization between part systems I)
Synchronization start command
G125 Synchronized axis name = Reference axis name ;

Synchronized axis name : Command the axis name to be operated as synchronized axis under the control axis
synchronization between part systems with two alphanumeric characters set to the
parameter.
Reference axis name : Command the axis name to be operated as reference axis under the control axis
parameter.
Synchronization end command
G125 Synchronized axis name ;

Synchronized axis name : Command the axis name to be operated as synchronized axis under the control axis
parameter.
IB-1501505-C 294
12.1.8.6 Balance Cut

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
control CNC. This function enables the operation start timing synchronization between tool posts of two part systems.
When workpiece that is relatively long and thin is machined on a lathe, deflection may result, making it impossible for the
workpiece to be machined with any accuracy. In cases like this, the deflection can be minimized by holding tools
simultaneously from both sides of the workpiece and using them in synchronization to machine the workpiece (balance
cutting). This method has an additional advantage: since the workpiece is machined by two tools, the machining time is
reduced.
This function enables the movements belonging to two different part systems to be synchronized so that this kind of
machining can easily be accomplished.
$1
$3
Command format
Balance cut command ON (modal)
!n L__ G15 ;
!n : Part system number for balance cut
Follows the parameter if the part system number is omitted.
* !n LI can be omitted.
Balance cut command OFF (modal)
G14 ;
(Note) The G code varies depending on the G code list.
G code list other than 6/7 G code list 6, 7

Balance cut command ON G15 G68
Balance cut command OFF G14 G69
G14 and G15 are modal commands. When the G15 command is assigned, the timing synchronization is being executed
in all of the cutting feed command blocks until the G14 command is assigned or until the modal information is cleared by
the reset signal. The timing synchronization is possible in all blocks by the parameter.
295 IB-1501505-C
Part system 1 program Part system 3 program
T 0 1 01; T 0 1 0 2;
G00 X_ Z_; G00 X_ Z_;
!3G15; !1G15
G01 Z_ F0. 4; G01 Z_ F0. 4;
: :
: :
Whereas synchronization is possible only with the next block when using the code "!" of timing synchronization between
part systems, the balance cutting function provides synchronization (at the block start timing) with multiple consecutive
blocks.
IB-1501505-C 296
12.1.8.7 Common Memory for Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
For a machine with multiple part systems, the common variables and tool compensation memory which exist for each
part system can be made common for all part systems by setting the parameters.
(1) Common variables
In the multi-part system, normally the common variables #100 to #199 are used for each part system, and
variables #500 to #999 are common for the part systems. When this function is valid, the common variables
#500 to #999 also become variables for each part system.
To use part or all of the common variables #100 to #199 and #500 to #999 commonly for all part systems, set
the number of parameters to be used commonly for the part systems in variables #100 to #199 and #500 to
#999.
As for the variables designated to be common to part systems, the data for part system 1 is used.
(2) Tool compensation memory

When this specification is valid, the tool compensation memory used for operation in the 2nd or following part
system changes to be used with the part system 1 data. Thus, the 2nd part system and following data is not
used when the common data is used for the part systems.
This function is only for the lathe system and supported up to 2 part systems.
(Note) The setting (such as number of axes and axis names) for the tool compensation amount of part system 1 and
part system 2 must be the same.
If the settings differ, the setting of part system 1 will be applied.
12.1.8.8 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting
Multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting allows different part systems to perform thread cutting simultaneously on
one spindle.
Multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting has two commands; the command (G76.1) for simultaneously cutting
threads in multiple places, which is known as "multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting cycle I", and the command
(G76.2) for simultaneously cutting a thread by two part systems, which is known as “two-part system simultaneous
thread cutting cycle II".
Chamfering is available for multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting cycle I and two-part system simultaneous
thread cutting cycle II.
Multi-part system simultaneous Two-part system simultaneous

thread cutting cycle I (G76.1) thread cutting cycle II (G76.2)
1st part system

1st part system
4th part system
2nd part system
3rd part system
297 IB-1501505-C
12.1.8.8.1 Two-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
When G76.2 is issued in the 1st and 2nd part systems, waiting is done until G76.2 is issued in each part system.
The thread cutting cycle starts when the commands are aligned properly.
G76.2 assumes the same thread cutting, and deeply cuts in with the cutting amount using 1st part system and 2nd part
system alternately.
$1 $2
: :
G00 X＿ Z＿ ; :
G76.2 …… ; G00 X＿ Z＿ ;
: G76.2 …… ;
: :
Cutting with 2nd

part system Cutting with
Cutting with
1st part system 2nd part
system
Cutting with
1st part Cutting with 1st
system part system
a° △d
△d×√2
△d×√n
K Cutting with 2nd
part system
Finishing allowance d
IB-1501505-C 298
Command format
G76.2 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ P__ Q__ A__ F__ ;

X/U : X-axis end point coordinates of thread section
Z/W : Z-axis end point coordinates of thread section
R : Taper height component at thread section
P : Thread height
Q : Cut amount
A : Thread cutting start shift angle
F : Thread lead
(Note) Two-part system simultaneous thread cutting cycle II (G76.2) can be commanded in part system 1 or 2 only. A
program error will occur when issuing the command in the other part systems.
299 IB-1501505-C
12.1.8.8.2 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
If G76.1 is given to multiple part systems, each part system waits for G76.1 to be commanded.
The thread cutting cycle starts when the G76.1 commands are aligned properly.
When "J134" is commanded in $1, $3 and $4
$1 $3 $4
: : :
G00 X＿ Z＿ ; : :
G76.1 … J134; : G00 X＿ Z＿ ;
: G00 X＿ Z＿ ; G76.1 … J134;

: G76.1 … J134; :
: :
Command for the 1st part system
Command for the 4th part system
Command for the 3rd part

system
Thread cutting will start simultaneously

after waiting for the 1st, 3rd and 4th part
systems.
Command format
G76.1 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ P__ Q__ J__ F__ ;

X/U : X axis end point coordinate of thread part
Z/W : Z axis end point coordinate of thread part
R : Taper height constituent in thread part
P : Thread height
Q : Cut depth
J : Part system for simultaneous thread cutting
Ones digit: Part system number for the 1st set
Tens digit: Part system number for the 2nd set
:
Ten-millions digit: Part system number for the 8th set
F : Thread lead
IB-1501505-C 300
12.1.8.9 Multi-part System Program Management

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
In a system composed of multiple part systems, this function manages the program storage method, program search
method and program input/output.
- This facilitates the management of such machining programs that run simultaneously in multiple part systems.
- This enables separate programs that run simultaneously in multiple part systems to be handled under one common
name.
- The parameter enables or disables this function.
- NC memory (*1) is the only device compatible with this function.
(*1) MDI and machine tool builder’s macro are included.
<Multi-part system program management INVALID>
Program management Program management

common for part systems common for part systems
Machining programs MDI

Common for part Common for part systems
systems
100.PRG
200.PRG Programs are shared and
managed across part
300.PRG systems.
Programs are shared and

managed across part
systems.
<Multi-part system program management VALID>
Program management for each part system Program management for each part system
Machining programs MDI
$1 $2 $n
$1 $2 $n
. . .
100.PRG 100.PRG 100.PRG
200.PRG 200.PRG 200.PRG
Programs are managed for each part system separately.
300.PRG 300.PRG . . . 300.PRG
Same program Nos. can be

managed across part systems
in batch
Programs are managed for each part system separately.
Each part system can have its own program Nos.
$1: Part system 1

$2: Part system 2
$n: Part system n
301 IB-1501505-C
12.1.8.10 Synchronization between Part Systems
12.1.8.10.1 Single Block between Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Single block between part systems is the function for executing single block operation while maintaining the
synchronization between the part systems when two or more part systems are operated in the multi-part system. When
one part system has been stopped by single block stop, the other part systems pause in the cycle operation.
In the normal single block, the synchronization between the part systems differs from the synchronization during the
continuous operation because the other part systems continue the operation without stop even a part system is stopped
by single block stop, and the tool interference could occur in some cases. The synchronization between part systems
can be maintained the same as the continuous operation by the single block operation with part systems synchronized.
Valid/invalid can be switched with the PLC signal.
(Example) 3 part systems lathe
Stop Pause Pause Stop Pause Pause

$1
(Single block operation valid)
Pause Pause Stop Pause Pause Stop

$2
Pause Stop Pause Pause Stop Pause

$3
Block separation
Stop: Single block stop

Pause: Cycle operation pause
$1: Part system 1
$2: Part system 2
$3: Part system 3
IB-1501505-C 302
12.1.8.10.2 Dwell/Miscellaneous Function Time Override

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Override can be applied to dwell time and miscellaneous function finish wait time of all part systems. The synchronization
between part systems can be maintained when the multiple machining programs are operated with override in the multi-
axis and multi-part system mixed control CNC.
If a machining program that performs cutting-off machining in part system 2 ($2) after the completion of turning
machining in part system 1 ($1) is executed with override when this function is invalid, part system 1 and part system 2
will be out of synchronization and the machining may not be operated properly.
The differences on the start timing for each command are shown in (1) to (3) when executing the machining with the part
system 1 ($1) and part system 2 ($2) as shown in the figure below.
$1
$1 $1
G01 Z
G01 X
G01 X
T1000 G00 Z
Tool exchange $2
$2 $2 $1: Standby
$1: Turning machining $1: Turning machining $2: Cutting-off machining
$2: Tool exchange $2: Tool positioning
(1) Override 100%

Time
G01 Z G01 X G04

$1
T1000 G00 Z G01 X

$2
(2) When this function is invalid Only feed time doubled in the operation with override 50%.
Override 50% Part systems are out of synchronization and the cutting-off
machining starts during turning machining.
G01 Z G01 X G04

$1
T1000 G00 Z G01 X

$2
(3) When this function is valid

Override 50% Feed time, dwell time and miscellaneous function finish wait time double in the
operation with override 50%.
The synchronization between part systems are maintained and the cutting-off
machining stars after the completion of the turning machining.
G01 Z G01 X G04

$1
T1000 G00 Z G01 X

$2
303 IB-1501505-C
12.1.8.10.3 Synchronization between Part Systems OFF

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Synchronization between part systems and feedrate change are turned OFF in a part of a machining program to
eliminate a synchronization relation between part systems by single block operation with part systems synchronized or
variation of a machining program feedrate by dry run. This function is effective mainly in blocking the cycle operation
pause or feedrate variation in only some of part systems when the sub part system control II function is being used.
When loader control and ATC control which are operated independently of machining are performed with a sub program
or sub part system control, this function enables a operation with synchronization between part systems in machining
part systems and an independent operation in sub part systems.
ON/OFF can be switched with the system variable or the PLC signal.
Part system 1 ($1) Part system 2 ($2)

Machining program Machining program
P11 P21
Sub Part system
Machining program
G144 Calling sub part Synchronization between

system part systems OFF
! L10; ! L10;
SUB
P12 P22 Loader control
Synchronization No synchronization Synchronization between

Simultaneous relation between Simultaneous relation between part systems ON
machining part systems is machining part systems is M99
with $1 and $2 needed. with $1 and $2 needed.
%
% %
P11 P12
$1
P21 Waiting P22
$2
SUB
Sub part system
Synchronization between part systems OFF
The behaviors with synchronization between part systems OFF is as follows:
- The pause is not made from other part systems.

Single block between part systems
- The other part systems do not pause with block stop.
Dwell/miscellaneous function time override - Override is invalid.
IB-1501505-C 304
12.1.8.11 Sub Part System Control I

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
This function activates and operates any non-operating part system (sub part system) in the multi-part system.
Sub part system control I can be used in the same manner as calling subprogram in a non-operating part system. An
auxiliary axis machining program can be controlled in the sub part system by commanding Sub part system control I
(G122) from the main part system.
In the usage example below, the tool positioning starts to the machining start point at the same time (time T1) as the start
of gantry retract by using Sub part system control I (G122) in the flow from feeding the workpiece to moving to cut start
position in order to reduce the cycle time.
Select whether main part system or sub part system for each part system in Sub part system control I. When using a part
system as sub part system, by setting the operation mode to "Sub part system I operation mode" with the PLC signal and
commanding Sub part system control I (G122) from an operating part system, it is possible to activate the part system in
the sub part system I operation mode as sub part system.
(1) Feed the workpiece (2) Clamp (3) Retract the gantry (4) Move to
the workpiece cut start position
Z1 Gantry
Tool
X1
Workpiece
X3
Z3
Flow of machining
Machining process when Sub part system control is OFF
Main part system ($1) (1) Feed (2) Clamp (3) Retract gantry (4) Move to cut start position
workpiece workpiece
Time
T1 T2
T1: Time when gantry retract is started

Machining process when Sub part system control is ON
T2: Time when gantry retract is completed
Sub part system ($2) (1) Feed (2) Clamp (3) Retract gantry
workpiece workpiece
Main part system ($1) Wait for completion of sub part (4) Move to cut start
system position
Time
Activate sub part system T1 T2
305 IB-1501505-C
Command format
Activate sub part system

Command an activation of sub part systems by Sub part system control I with G122.
G122 A__ P__ Q__ K__ D__ B__ H__ Argument;

Or, G122 <File name> P__ Q__ K__D__ B__ H__ Argument;
A : Program No. (1 to 99999999 or 100010000 to 199999998)
<File name> : File name of program (up to 32 characters)
P : Start sequence number (Head of program if omitted.)
Q : End sequence number (To end of program (M99) if omitted.)
K : Number of repetitions (1 to 9999)
D : Synchronization control (0/1)
B : Sub part system identification number (1 to 7)
H : Sub part system reset type (0/1)
Argument : Argument of sub part system local variable (Setting rage of local variable (decimal point command is
valid))
Complete sub part system

Command M99 in sub part system to complete an operation of sub part system.
M99 ;
Cancel the standby status for completion of sub part system

When a sub part system is activated in the completion wait method (D0 command), it is possible to cancel the
standby status for completion of sub part system in a calling part system by commanding G145 in the sub part
system program. G145 is ignored in a sub part system activated in the parallel control method (D1 command).
G145 ;
IB-1501505-C 306
12.1.8.12 Sub Part System Control II

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
This function activates and operates any non-operating part system (sub part system) in the multi-part system. Using sub
part systems enables parallel operation between an operating program in main part system and a program called with
Sub part system control II (G144).
Sub part systems does not have any controllable axes soon after the activation. When an axis is needed to be controlled
in sub part system, command the arbitrary axis exchange control (G140) to give sub part system authorization to control
the axis.
In the machine configuration below, when performing the back drill machining (machining (a)) and the cutting by tool
(machining (b)), machining (a) and (b) are operated in order only with main part system, however machining (a) and (b)
can be operated simultaneously by using the sub part system in addition to the main part system, resulting in a shorter
cycle time. In the usage example below, T2 (time when machining (b) is completed) is shorter.
X1
Z1
Tool
Back drill
A1
Machining process when Sub part system control is OFF
Operating in main part system

(a) Back drill machining
(b) Cutting by tool Operating in main part system
Time
T1 T2 T1: Time when back drill machining is completed
Machining process when Sub part system control is ON T2: Time when cutting by the tool is completed
(a) Back drill machining Operating in sub part system
(b) Cutting by tool Operating in main part system
Time
Activation of T1 T2
sub part system
307 IB-1501505-C
Command format
Activate sub part system

Command an activation of sub part systems by Sub part system control II with G144.
G144 A__ P__ Q__ K__ D__ B__ H__ Argument;

Or, G144 <File name> P__ Q__ K__D__ B__ H__ Argument;
A : Program No. (1 to 99999999 or 100010000 to 199999998)
<File name> : File name of program (up to 32 characters)
P : Start sequence number (Head of program if omitted.)
Q : End sequence number (To end of program (M99) if omitted.)
K : Number of repetitions (1 to 9999)
D : Synchronization control (0/1)
B : Sub part system identification number (1 to 9999)
H : Sub part system designation (1 to number of part system that can be used)
Argument : Argument of sub part system local variable (Setting rage of local variable (decimal point command is
valid))
Complete sub part system

Command M99 in sub part system to complete an operation of sub part system.
M99 ;
Cancel the standby status for completion of sub part system

When a sub part system is activated in the completion wait method (D0 command), it is possible to cancel the
standby status for completion of sub part system in a calling part system by commanding G145 in the sub part
system program. G145 is ignored in a sub part system activated in the parallel control method (D1 command).
G145 ;
IB-1501505-C 308
12.1.9 Data Input/Output by Program
12.1.9.1 Parameter Input by Program

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed in the machining programs.
Command format is as follows.
G10 L70 ; Data setting start command

Pparameter No. Spart system No. Aaxis No. H □ data ; ................. Bit parameter;
Pparameter No. Spart system No. Aaxis No. Ddata ; ..................... Numerical value parameter
Pparameter No. Spart system No. Aaxis No. <character string> ; ... Character string parameter
G11 Data setting end command
(Note 1) The sequence of addresses in a block must be as shown above.

When an address is commanded two or more times, the last command will be valid.
(Note 2) The part system No. is set in the following manner: "1" for 1st part system, "2" for 2nd part system, and so
forth.
If the address S is omitted, the part system of the executing program will be applied.
As for the parameters common to part systems, the command of part system No. will be ignored.
(Note 3) The axis No. is set in the following manner: "1" for 1st axis, "2" for 2nd axis, and so forth.
If the address A is omitted, the 1st axis will be applied.
As for the parameters common to axes, the command of axis No. will be ignored.
(Note 4) Address H is commanded with the combination of setting data (0 or 1) and the bit designation ( □ ) (0 to 7).
(Note 5) Only the decimal number can be commanded with the address D.
The value that is smaller than the input setting increment (#1003 iunit) will be round off to the nearest
increment.
(Note 6) The character string must be put in angled brackets "<" and ">".
If these brackets are not provided, the program error (P33) will occur.
Up to 63 characters can be set.
(Note 7) Command G10L70, G11 in independent blocks. A program error (P33, P421) will occur if not commanded in
independent blocks.
(Note 8) The following data cannot be changed with the G10 L70 command:
Tool compensation data, workpiece coordinate data, PLC switch, and PLC axis parameter.
(Note 9) The settings of the parameters with (PR) in the parameter list will be enable after the power is turned OFF and
ON. Refer to the parameter list in your manual.
309 IB-1501505-C
12.1.9.2 Compensation Data Input by Program

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The value of the workpiece coordinate systems selected can be set or changed by program commands.
The tool offset amounts, which have been set from the setting and display unit, can be input by program commands.
(1) Workpiece coordinate system offset input
[M system]
The position of the workpiece coordinate systems selected by the G54 to G59 commands can be set or
changed by program commands.
During the absolute value (G90) mode, the commanded offset amount serves as the new offset, whereas
during the incremental value (G91) mode, the currently set offset plus the commanded offset serves as the
new offset.
Gcode Function
G10 L2 P0 External workpiece coordinate system setting
G10 L2 P1 Workpiece coordinate system 1 setting (G54)
G10 L20 Pn (n=1 to 300) Extended workpiece coordinate system setting (G54.1 P1 to P300)
Command format
G10 L2(L20) P__ X__ Y__ Z__ ;

G10 L2(L20) : Workpiece coordinate system setting command
P : Workpiece coordinate system No.
X,Y,Z : Setting values
(Note 1) L2 can be omitted. If the command P is omitted, the specified offset is treated as that of the currently
selected workpiece coordinate system.
(Note 2) L20 is used to designate the extended workpiece coordinate system.
IB-1501505-C 310
[L system]
When the command is given with absolute values (X, Z and R), the offset is updated with the values. On the
other hand, when the command is given with incremental values (U, W and C), the currently set offset plus the
commanded offset serves as the new offset.
Gcode Function
G10 L2 P0 External workpiece coordinate system setting
G10 L20 Pn (n=1 to 48) Extended workpiece coordinate system setting (G54.1 P1 to P48)
Command format
G10 L2(L20) P__ X__ (U__) Z__ (W__) ;

G10 L2(L20) : Workpiece coordinate system setting command
P : Compensation No.
X,Z : Compensation amount for each axis(absolute)
U,W : Compensation amount for each axis(incremental)
(Note 1) L2 can be omitted. If the command P is omitted, the specified offset is treated as that of the currently
selected workpiece coordinate system.
(Note 2) L20 is used to designate the extended workpiece coordinate system.
311 IB-1501505-C
(2) Tool compensation input

The tool compensation amounts, which have been set from the setting and display unit, can be input by
program commands.
The command format differs between the [M system] and the [L system].
[M system]
Type I
G code Function
G10 L10 Tool compensation amounts
TypeII
Gcode Function
G10 L10 Tool length shape compensation amount
G10 L11 Tool length wear compensation amount
G10 L12 Tool radius shape compensation amount
G10 L13 Tool radius wear compensation amount
Command format
G10 L__ P__ R__ ;

G10 L : Command for setting compensation amount
R : Compensation amount
[L system]
Gcode Function
G10 L10 Tool length compensation amount
G10 L11 Tool wear compensation amount
Command format
G10 L10(L11) P__ X__ (U__) Z__ (W__) [Additional axis]__ [2nd additional axis]_R__
(C__) Q__ ;
G10 L10(L11) : Command for setting compensation amount
X,Z : Compensation amount for each axis (absolute)
U,W : Compensation amount for each axis (incremental)
Additional axis : Additional axis compensation amount (absolute)
2nd additional
: 2nd additional axis compensation amount (absolute)
axis
R : Nose R compensation amount (absolute)
C : Nose R compensation amount (incremental)
Q : Hypothetical tool nose point
(Note 1) L11 can be omitted.
IB-1501505-C 312
(3) M system turning tool compensation input

By setting the parameter in M system, the compensation amount, Nose R compensation amount and tool nose
point for three basic axes can be written with the following G10 format. In the absolute value (G90) mode, the
commanded compensation amount is new compensation amount. In the incremental value (G91) mode, new
compensation amount is obtained by adding the commanded compensation amount to the currently set
compensation amount.
Command format
Shape compensation
G10 L12 P__ X__ Y__ Z__ R__ Q__ ;

P : Tool shape compensation number (1 to the number of tool offset sets)
X : X axis compensation amount
Y : Y axis compensation amount
Z : Z axis compensation amount
R : Tool nose radius compensation amount
Q : Hypothetical tool nose point number
Wear compensation
G10 L13 P__ X__ Y__ Z__ R__ Q__ ;

P : Wear compensation number (1 to the number of tool offset sets)
X : X axis compensation amount
Y : Y axis compensation amount
Z : Z axis compensation amount
R : Tool nose radius compensation amount
Q : Hypothetical tool nose point number
(4) Cancelling the compensation input

Command format
G11 ;
313 IB-1501505-C
12.1.9.3 Tool/Material Shape Input by Program

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Tool shape data on the tool management screen (M system) and workpiece shape data (L system) of the 3D solid
program check (hereinafter referred to as 3D check) can be set with the machining program. There is no need to input
the tool/workpiece shape on the screen for 3D check.
(1) L100 command format

Tool shape data on the tool management screen can be set by the machining program with this function.

P__ T__ K__ D__ H__ I__ J__ C__ ; Data setting command
G11 ; Data setting end command
P : Data number (The maximum number varies depending on the number of tool management data sets.)
T : Tool number (0 to 99999999)
K : Type
D : Shape data 1 (decimal point allowed)
H : Shape data 2 (decimal point allowed)
I : Shape data 3 (decimal point allowed)
J : Shape data 4 (decimal point allowed)
C : Tool color
(Note 1) Omitted addresses cannot be set.

(Note 2) Omitting address P or T causes the program error.
(Note 3) On graphic check of M800、M80W series, only drawing is reflected to the graphic check. Tool shape data will
not be rewritten.
(Note 4) On graphic check of M80/E80 series, tool shape data will be rewritten.
IB-1501505-C 314
(2) L101 command format

Workpiece shape data can be set by the machining program for 3D solid program check with this function.

C__ R__ D__ E__ L__ A__ K__ W__ F__ P__ H__ I__ J__ ; Data setting command
G11 ; Data setting end command
C : Workpiece shape
R : Number of angles (3 to 99)
D : Outside diameter of workpiece (0.001 to 99999.999 mm, 0.0001 to 9999.9999 inch)
E : Inside diameter of workpiece (0.001 to 99999.999 mm, 0.0001 to 9999.9999 inch)
L : Workpiece length (0.001 to 99999.999 mm, 0.0001 to 9999.9999 inch)
A : Installation angle (0.000 to 359.999°)
K : Front face workpiece zero point position Z (-1 or 0.000 to 99999.999 mm, -1 or 0.0000 to 9999.9999 inch)
W : Back face workpiece zero point position Z (-1 or 0.000 to 99999.999 mm, -1 or 0.0000 to 9999.9999 inch)
F : Workpiece color
P : Machining surface color
H : Tapping/Thread machining surface color
I : Interference surface color
J : Cross-section color
(Note 1) Omitted addresses cannot be set.

(Note 2) Omitting address C causes the program error.
(Note 3) On graphic check of M800、M80W series, only drawing is reflected to the graphic check. Workpiece shape
data will not be rewritten.
(Note 4) On graphic check of M80/E80 series, workpiece shape data will be rewritten.
315 IB-1501505-C
12.1.9.5 API Section and Sub-section Nos. Input/Output by Program

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
NC internal data can be read/written by specifying the section number, sub-section number, part system number and
axis number using system variables.
12.1.9.6 R-Navi Data Input by Program

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function enables the R-Navi setup parameters to be configured from a machining program.
After the parameters have been configured from the program, you can check the values or select the machining surface
from the setup screen.
Command format
G10 L110 ; Workpiece data setting

G10 L111 ; Machining surface data setting
Refer to "17.2.17 R-Navi" for details.
IB-1501505-C 316
12.1.10 Machining Modal
12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When tapping mode commands are issued, the NC system is set to the following internal control modes required for
tapping.
1. Cutting override is fixed at 100%.
2. Deceleration commands at joints between blocks are invalid.
3. Feed hold is invalid.
4. Single block is invalid.
5. "In tapping mode" signal is output.
G code Function
G63 Tapping mode ON
The tapping mode command will be canceled with the following commands:
- Exact stop check mode (G61)
- Automatic corner override (G62)
- Cutting mode (G64)
- High-accuracy control mode command (G61.1/G08P1) [M system]
The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned ON.
12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When a cutting mode command is issued, the NC system is set to the cutting mode that enables smooth cutting surface
to be achieved. In this mode, the next block is executed continuously without the machine having to decelerate and stop
between the cutting feed blocks: this is the opposite of what happens in the exact stop check mode (G61).
G code Function
G64 Cutting mode ON
The cutting mode command will be canceled with the following commands:
- Exact stop check mode (G61)
- Automatic corner override (G62)
- Tapping mode (G63)
- High-accuracy control mode command (G61.1) [M system]
The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned ON.
317 IB-1501505-C
12.1.11 High-speed Parts Machining
12.1.11.1 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
This function enables the next block to start (overlap) without waiting for positioning (G00) or reference position return
(G28/G30). Consequently, cycle time of machining including operation of positioning (G00) or reference position return
(G28/G30) can be reduced.
Adjust the overlap amount with command by machining program or with the parameter, and specify it as in-position width
for rapid traverse overlap.
Also, the operation does not decelerate between blocks if the movement command continues in same direction.
The overlap is also valid when the block after G00 is G1 instead of G00 or G28/G30 and it is invalid when G00 or G28/
G30 is commanded after G28 continuously.
Example of application of rapid traverse overlap in tool exchange operation

Interim point In-position width
N2
Speed
N2(G28)
N1
N2(G28) Time
Cycle time is reduced

Speed
N1(G00)
N1 N2 N3
Time
Program path
Command path from NC
Example of application of rapid traverse overlap in continuous drilling operation

In-position width
Speed
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 Time
N3(G00) Speed
Cycle time is reduced
N4(G00)
N2(G00)
N1 N2 N3 N4 N54 Time
N1(G01) N5(G01)
Program path
Command path from NC
IB-1501505-C 318
Command format
The command format to switch the rapid traverse overlap function for G00 to valid/invalid is as follows:
G0.5 P1 J__ K__ ; Rapid traverse overlap function for G00 ON
J : Liner axis in-position width (0.000 to 1000.000 (mm))

K : Rotary axis in-position width (0.000 to 1000.000 (°))
G0.5 P1 J__ K__ ; Rapid traverse overlap function for G00 OFF
319 IB-1501505-C
12.2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions
12.2.1 Automatic Corner Override

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When cutting with tool radius compensation, this function applies feedrate override automatically to decrease cutting
load at the inside corner cutting or the inside cutting of corner R.
There are automatic corner override (G62) and inside arc override as the automatic corner override.
Automatic corner override (G62) is valid until the tool radius compensation cancel (G40), exact stop check mode (G61),
high-accuracy control mode (G61.1), tapping mode (G63), or cutting mode (G64) command is issued.
Inside arc override is valid without automatic corner override (G62) during tool radius compensation mode (G41/G42).
This can also be enabled with the parameter setting when the tool radius compensation mode (G41/G42) and the
automatic corner override mode (G62) are active.
Automatic corner override (G62) inside corner
Programmed path
θ Machining allowance (finished shape)
workpiece
S
Workpiece surface
③ shape
②
①
Tool center path
Machining
allowance
Ci
Tool
θ : Max. angle at inside corner

Ci : Deceleration range (IN)
Operation
(a) When G62 command is not given :
When the tool moves in the order of (1) -> (2) -> (3) in the figure above, the machining allowance at (3) is
larger than that at (2) by an amount equivalent to the area of shaded section S and so the tool load increases.
(b) When G62 command is given :
When the inside corner angle θ in the figure above is less than the angle set in the parameter, the override set
into the parameter is automatically applied in the deceleration range Ci.
Command format
G62; Automatic corner override
IB-1501505-C 320
12.2.2 Deceleration Check
This function leads the machine to decelerate and stop at the join between axis movement blocks before executing the
next block. This is effective to alleviate the machine shock and prevent the corner rounding when the feed rate of the
control axis changes suddenly.
There are three methods for deceleration check: command deceleration check method, smoothing check method and in-
position check method.
Without deceleration check With deceleration check
N010 G01 X100 ; N010 G09 G01 X100 ;

N011 G01 Y-50 ; N011 G01 Y-50 ;
A sharp edge is formed because

Corner rounding occurs because the N011 block is started after the
the N011 block is started before N010 command is decelerated and
the N010 command is completely stopped.
finished.
The conditions for executing deceleration check are described below.

(1) Deceleration check in the rapid traverse mode
In the rapid traverse mode, the deceleration check is always performed when block movement is completed
before executing the next block.
(2) Deceleration check in the cutting feed mode

In the cutting feed mode, the deceleration check is performed at the end of block when any of the conditions
below is applicable before executing the next block.
(a) When G61 (exact stop check mode) is selected.
(b) When the G09 (exact stop check) is issued in the same block.
(c) When the error detect switch (PLC signal) is ON.
321 IB-1501505-C
The following deceleration check methods can be selected with the parameter to each feed command during rapid
traverse command and cutting feed command.
(1) Command deceleration check method

The deceleration is completed after the deceleration check time (Note) has passed after the interpolation.
NC command speed Deceleration check time

Speed
Interpolation is completed Block is completed
(2) Smoothing check method

The deceleration is completed after the deceleration check time (Note) has passed after the interpolation and
all axes smoothing has become zero.

Speed
(3) In-position check method

The deceleration is completed after the deceleration check time (Note) had passed after the interpolation, all
axes smoothing has become zero and all axes have become in-position.

Speed
Actual motor
rotation speed
(Note) Deceleration check time: automatically calculated from the acceleration/deceleration mode and time
constant.
IB-1501505-C 322
12.2.2.1 Exact Stop Check Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A deceleration check is performed when the G61 (exact stop check mode) command has been selected.
G61 is a modal command. The deceleration is applied at the end points of each block to all the cutting commands (G01
to G03) subsequent to G61 and the in-position status is checked.
Refer to "12.2.2 Deceleration Check" for details on the deceleration check.
12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A deceleration check is performed when the G09 (exact stop check) command has been designated in the same block.
The G09 command should be issued in the same block as the cutting command. It is an unmodal command.
12.2.2.3 Error Detection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
To prevent rounding of a corner during cutting feed, the operation can be changed by turning an external signal switch
ON so that the axis decelerates and stops once at the end of the block and then the next block is executed.
The deceleration stop at the end of the cutting feed block can also be commanded with a G code.
323 IB-1501505-C
12.2.2.4 Programmable In-position Check

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
",I" address is used to designate the in-position width for a linear interpolation command from the machining program.
The in-position width designated with a linear interpolation command is valid only in cases when the deceleration check
is performed, such as:
- When the error detect switch is ON.
- When the G09 (exact stop check) command has been designated in the same block.
- When the G61 (exact stop check mode) command has been selected.
G01 Xx1 Zz1 Ff1 ,Ii1 ;

Xx1, Zz1 : Linear interpolation coordinate position of each axis
Ff1 : Feed rate
,Ii1 : In-position width
As with linear interpolation, ",I" address is used to designate the in-position width for a positioning command from the
machining program.
G00 Xx1 Zz1 ,Ii1 ;

Xx1, Zz1 : Positioning coordinate position of each axis
,Ii1 : In-position width
In-position check operation

As for G01, after it is verified that the position error of the block in which the deceleration check is performed by
the linear interpolation command (G01) is less than the in-position width of this command, the execution of the
next block is commenced.
As for G00, after it is verified that the position error of the positioning command (G00: rapid traverse) is less
than the in-position width of this command, the execution of the next block is commenced.
12.2.2.5 Automatic Error Detection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function is effective to reduce the extension of cycle time for the cutting at the corner and realize the high edge
accurate machining.
IB-1501505-C 324
12.3 High-speed and High-accuracy Functions [kBPM: k Block per Minute]
12.3.1 High-speed Machining Mode
12.3.1.1 High-speed Machining Mode I (G05P1) Maximum [kBPM]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ 33.7 △ 33.7 △ 33.7 △ 33.7 ○ 33.7 ○ 33.7 ○ 16.8 ― ― △
L △ 33.7 △ 33.7 △ 33.7 △ 33.7 ○ 33.7 ○ 33.7 ― ― ― △
This function runs a machining program that approximates a free curve with fine segments at a high speed.
This is effective in increasing the speed of machining dies with a free curve.
The command format is as follows.
G05 P1 : High-speed machining mode I start

G05 P0 : High-speed machining mode I cancel
In addition to the G05P0 command, the high-speed machining mode I is canceled with the following commands.
- High-speed machining mode II (G05P2)
- High-speed high-accuracy control I (G05.1Q1)
- High-speed high-accuracy control II (G05P10000)
Fine segment capacity

G1 block fine segment capacity (unit: kBPM)
Mode Command Maximum feed rate when G1 block is executed

33.7 (M800W/M800S/M80W/M80 TypeA)
High-speed machining mode Ⅰ G05 P1
16.8 (M80 TypeB)
The above performance applies under the following conditions.
- 6-axis system (including spindle) or less
- 1-part system
- 3 axes or less commanded simultaneously in G01
- Block containing only axis name and movement amount (Does not contain macro or variable command)
- During G61.1 high-accuracy control mode or during cutting mode (G64)
It may not be possible to attain the specified feed rate if deviated from the above conditions.
(1) During the high-speed machining mode I, the blocks are pre-read. If the length of the block is sufficiently
short in respect to the command speed, and enough to be completed with one interpolation calculation,
several blocks may be combined and converted into a block length that can be completed with one
interpolation.
: Program command
: Command when program commands are combined and converted
Command in high-speed machining mode I
(2) Override, maximum cutting speed clamp, single block operation, dry run, manual interruption, graphic
trace and high-accuracy control mode are valid even during the high-speed machining mode I.
325 IB-1501505-C
12.3.1.2 High-speed Machining Mode II (G05P2) Maximum [kBPM]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ 168 △ 168 △ 168 △ 168 ○ 67.5 ○ 67.5 ○ 67.5 ― ― △
L △ 168 △ 168 △ 168 △ 168 ○ 67.5 ○ 67.5 ― ― ― △
This function runs a machining program that approximates a free curve with fine segments at a high speed.
Higher fine segment processing capacity can make the cutting speed faster, resulting in reducing the cycle time and
improving the quality of the machining surface.
This function can be used simultaneously in up to two part systems.
Command format
G05 P2 : High-speed machining mode II start

G05 P0 : High-speed machining mode II cancel
In addition to the G05P0 command, the high-speed machining mode II is canceled with the following commands.
- High-speed machining mode I (G05P1)
- High-speed high-accuracy control III (G05P20000)

The following is the fine segment capacity while high-speed machining mode II is valid.
Fine segment processing capacity (unit: kBPM)

M: Machining center system
L: Lathe system
Number of part Number of setting M850/M830 M80W/M80 TypeA M80 TypeB

systemsNumber of axes part systems M L M L M L
1-part system 1-part system 168 168 67.5 67.5 67.5 ― (*2)
1-part system 100 100 67.5 67.5 67.5 ― (*2)
2-part system
2-part system 67.5 67.5 33.7 33.7 33.7 ― (*2)
4-part system 1-part system - (*1) 33.7 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
Less than 16 axes 2-part system - (*1) 33.7 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
5-part system or more 1-part system - (*1) 16.8 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
or
17 axes or more 2-part system - (*1) 16.8 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
(*1) The maximum number of part systems is 2

(*2) There is no specifications for high-speed machining mode II.
(Note) The above performance applies under the following conditions.

- Block containing only axis name and movement amount (Does not contain macro or variable
command)
- During tool radius compensation OFF (G40)
IB-1501505-C 326
12.3.2 High-accuracy Control
12.3.2.1 High-accuracy Control (G61.1/G08)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
Machining errors caused by delays in control systems can be inhibited. This function is useful for machining which needs
to make an edge at a corner or reduce an error from an inner route of curved shape. In high-accuracy control,
acceleration/deceleration is performed not to cause machining error by pre-reading blocks and acceleration/deceleration
is automatically performed according to a machining shape so that the machining error is inhibited with minimizing an
extension of machining time.
High-accuracy control OFF High-accuracy control ON
NC command NC command
Corner shape

commanded shape commanded shape
commanded shape commanded shape
NC NC
command command
Curve shape
High-accuracy control is valid in High-accuracy control command (G08P1/G61.1), High-speed high-accuracy control I
command (G05.1Q1), High-speed high-accuracy control II command (G05P10000), High-speed high-accuracy control III
command (G05P20000) and Spline interpolation command (G61.2).
One or more of the functions in the table below must be ON. Program error (P123) occurs if the high-accuracy control is
commanded with all of functions OFF status.
Function name Details

High-accuracy control This function enables High-accuracy control.
High-speed high-accuracy control I This function enables High-speed high-accuracy control I.
High-speed high-accuracy control II This function enables High-speed high-accuracy control II.
High-speed high-accuracy control III This function enables High-speed high-accuracy control III.
Spline interpolation This function enables Spline interpolation.
327 IB-1501505-C
Command format
High-accuracy control ON
G61.1 ;
or, G08 P1;
High-accuracy control OFF
G08 PO ;
or, G command in G code group 13 expect G61.1
High-accuracy control can be cancelled with either command regardless of enabled high-accuracy control.
High-accuracy control inhibits machining errors with minimizing an extension of machining time using the following
functions.
(1) Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
(2) Optimum speed control
(3) Vector accuracy interpolation
(4) Feed forward control
(5) S-pattern filter control
(1) Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

Velocity waveform is smoothed by performing acceleration/deceleration control on movement commands to inhibit
shocks caused by rapid acceleration at the machine movement start/stop. However, if the high-accuracy control is
OFF, a corner rounding may occur at the joint between blocks or a path error may occur for the commanded shape
which has been described in machining program because the acceleration/deceleration process is performed after
the interpolation.
If the high-accuracy control is ON, the acceleration/deceleration process is performed before the interpolation to
solve the problems mentioned above. This acceleration/deceleration before interpolation enables machining with a
faithful path to the commanded shape of machining program. Furthermore, the acceleration/deceleration time can
be reduced because the constant inclination acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation.
(2) Optimum speed control
When the moving direction is changed on the corner, arc, etc., acceleration corresponding to the amount of change
and the feedrate is generated. When the acceleration is large, there is a possibility of machine vibration and it may
remain stripes on the machining surface.
In the high-accuracy control mode, the deceleration control (optimum speed control) is performed to keep the
generated acceleration under the allowance which has been designed with the parameter so that the problem
mentioned above can be solved. The optimum speed control suppresses the machine vibration and enables highly
accurate machining while minimizing the extension of cycle time.
IB-1501505-C 328
(3) Vector accuracy interpolation

When a fine segment is commanded and the angle between the blocks is extremely small (when not using corner
deceleration), interpolation can be carried out more smoothly using the vector accuracy interpolation.
Vector accuracy interpolation
Commanded path
(4) Feed forward control

This function reduces path errors caused by delay of servo systems. Path errors caused by acceleration/
deceleration of NC can be eliminated by acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, however errors caused by
delay of servo systems cannot be eliminated by acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Therefore, when the
arc shape of radius R (mm) is machined at speed F (mm/min) as the figure (a) below, for instance, the lag time
occurs between the NC commanded speed and the actual tool speed in amount of the servo system time constant
and the path error ΔR (mm) occurs. Feed forward control generates the command value taking the delay of servo
systems as shown in figure (b) below so that the path error caused by delay of servo systems can be inhibited.
(a) NC command and actual tool movement during Feed forward control OFF
Speed
F
NC commanded shape
R ΔR
Delay of servo NC commanded speed
Actual tool speed
Time Actual tool path
(b) NC command and actual tool movement during Feed forward control ON
NC commanded speed is set forward

Speed according to a expected delay. NC commanded
(Feed forward control) shape
Time
Actual tool path
Actual tool speed
(corresponding to original NC commanded speed)
329 IB-1501505-C
(5) S-pattern filter control

S-pattern filter (soft acceleration/deceleration filter) is the function that inhibits the machine vibration by smoothing a
velocity waveform. There are types of filters as follows:
- G1/G0 S-pattern filter
- Jerk filter
- S-pattern filter 2
Smoothing velocity waveform of Making velocity waveform of Smoothing each axis speed
inclination-constant linear S-pattern filter even smoother after interpolation
acceleration/deceleration
inclination-constant
S-pattern Jerk filter Interpolation S-pattern
linear acceleration/
filter (axis distribution) filter 2
deceleration
Axis Axis
speed speed
Synthesis Synthesis Synthesis Time Time

rate rate rate Axis Axis
speed speed
Time Time Time Time Time
IB-1501505-C 330
12.3.2.2 Multi-part System Simultaneous High-accuracy Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
* Up to two part systems.
High-accuracy control and high-speed machining mode are available respectively in all part systems, however, the
simultaneous usage of high-accuracy control and high-speed machining mode (including High-speed high-accuracy
control I/II/III) are available only in part systems which are limited by the parameter "High-speed high-accuracy enabled
part system". The high-accuracy control and high-speed machining mode can be used simultaneously in the part system
which is set to "1" for "High-speed high-accuracy enabled part system". The program error (P129) occurs when the high-
accuracy control and high-speed machining mode are used simultaneously in the part system which is set to "0" for
"High-speed high-accuracy enabled part system".
Note that up to 2 part systems can be set to "1" for "High-speed high-accuracy enabled part system". If 3 or more part
systems are set to "1", MCP alarm (Y51) occurs. If all part systems are set to "0" for "High-speed high-accuracy enabled
part system", only the first part system is handled as the one with the parameter set to "1".
Up to 2 part systems can be set to "1"
$1 High-speed high-accuracy enabled $2 High-speed high-accuracy enabled

part system = 1 part system = 1
G28 X0 Y0; G08P0 G05P0 G28 X0 Y0; G08P0 G05P0

G08 P1; G08P1 G05 P10000; G08P1 G05P2
G05 P2; G05P2 G91 G01 F3000;
G91 G01 F3000; X1.;
: High-speed : High-speed
: high-accuracy : high-accuracy
: :
: :
G05P0; G05P0 :
G08 P0; G08P0 G05P0; G08P0 G05P0
M02; M02;
$3 High-speed high-accuracy enabled $4 High-speed high-accuracy enabled
part system = 0 part system = 0
G28 X0 Y0; G08P0 G05P0 G28 X0 Y0; G08P0 G05P0

G08 P1; G08P1 G05 P10000; G08P1 G05P2 Alarm
: G91 G01 F3000;
G08 P0; G08P0 X1.;
G05 P2; G05P2 :
: :
G08 P1; G08P1 Alarm :
: :
G08 P0; :
G05 P0; G05P0;
M02; M02;
(Note) It is limited also in G61.1 command.
331 IB-1501505-C
12.3.2.3 SSS Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― (*1) ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― (*1) ― (*1) ―
(*1) eSSS supported.
Machining programs that approximate a freely curved surface with fine segments are run at high speed and with high
accuracy. This function enables machining with less scratches and streaks on the cutting surface compared to the
conventional high-accuracy control function.
When the speed control with reference to the angle between two blocks, such as the conventional high-accuracy control
"Optimum corner deceleration", is applied, the acceleration and deceleration may be frequently repeated for local steps
and errors, resulting in scratches and streaks on the cutting surface.
With SSS (Super Smooth Surface) control, the large area path information is used instead of just the angle between the
blocks. Thus, optimum speed control that is not adversely affected by minute steps or waviness is possible. This reduces
the parts which get scratch like marks and streaks on the cutting surface.
Multiple part systems simultaneous high-accuracy function is required to conduct the SSS control in the second or
following part systems.
[Features of SSS control]

(1) This is valid for machining a mold with a smooth shape using a fine segment program.
(2) This speed control is not easily affected by the error found in the path.
(3) Even if corner deceleration is not required, the speed is clamped if the predicted acceleration is high.
(The clamp speed can be adjusted with the parameter "Clamp speed coefficient".)
The length of the path direction recognized with SSS control can be adjusted with the parameter. The range is increased
as the setting value increases, and the effect of the error is reduced.
(Note 1) When using this function, one of the following SSS-controlled high-accuracy control functions is required, as
well.
- High-accuracy control (G61.1)
- High-accuracy control (G08P1)
- High-speed high-accuracy control III (G05P20000)
(Note 2) The performance of fine-segment execution during SSS control differs depending on the type of high-accuracy
control mode and machine model to be combined.
IB-1501505-C 332
12.3.2.4 Tolerance Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function obtains the optimum clamp speed for corners or curves based on the designated tolerance to perform
operations. It also ensures smooth passing in corner sections within the tolerance range, which suppresses machine
vibrations.
This function allows the machine to operate with the optimum tool path and speed, simply by specifying the tolerance, so
an operator can easily carry out high quality machining.
The tolerance refers to the allowable error amount between the path commanded in the machining program and the path
output by NC.
This function requires the SSS control specifications because it can only be used under SSS control.
Program command path
Path commanded by NC to drive unit
Tool path
Tolerance control: Invalid Tolerance control: Valid
333 IB-1501505-C
12.3.2.5 Variable-acceleration Pre-interpolation Acceleration/Deceleration

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function is useful when each axis differs in the characteristics (responsiveness) during SSS control (4-axis/5-axis
machine, etc.).
The normal acceleration/deceleration before interpolation performs the acceleration/deceleration by setting acceleration
common to all axes. Therefore, if the high responsiveness and low responsiveness coexist in axes, the acceleration
needs to be set to suit the axis with low responsiveness.
On the other hand, the variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration can perform the acceleration/
deceleration by setting diverse acceleration to each axis. Therefore, the acceleration for the axis with high
responsiveness can be larger than before so that cycle time can be reduced especially in the indexing machining.
Shortening indexing machining time (when responsiveness of linear axis is higher than responsiveness of rotary axis)
Synthesis
rate Variable-acceleration pre-interpolation
acceleration/deceleration
Rotary axis Linear axis Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Time
Shortened
12.3.2.6 High-accuracy Acceleration/Deceleration Time Constant Extension

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
* 1st part system only.
This extends the upper limit of cutting feed time constant from 5,000[ms] to 30,000[ms] for acceleration/ deceleration
before interpolation.
In the multi-part system, this function cannot be used together as an alarm will occur.
IB-1501505-C 334
12.3.2.7 Axis-based Acceleration Tolerance Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
* The first part system only.
The acceleration to be generated at a seam between blocks is evaluated for each axis to control deceleration so that the
seam is passed at the optimum speed. This enables highly accurate edge machining. The optimum deceleration speed
is calculated so that the acceleration of each axis to be generated at the seam is equal to or less than the tolerable
acceleration for each axis, which is determined by maximum speed for each axis, time constant for each axis, and the
accuracy coefficient. The machine decelerates to the speed in advance, and then accelerates back to the command
speed after passing the corner.
This control enables deceleration at an appropriate speed for the characteristics of each axis even when machine
vibrations may easily occur due to a low tolerable acceleration for a specific axis (rotary axis). This means that the
deceleration speed can be raised at a corner where acceleration is generated only for an axis with a high tolerable
acceleration, leading to a reduced cycle time.
335 IB-1501505-C
12.3.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control
A machining program that approximates a free curve with fine segments can be run at a high speed and with a high
accuracy. This function is effective in decreasing the cycle time of machining dies with free curves. This function is also
useful in machining which needs to make an edge at a corner or reduce a path error from inner route of curved shape
because the high-accuracy control mode is turned ON automatically.
12.3.3.1 High-speed High-accuracy Control I (G05.1Q1) Maximum [kBPM]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ 67.5 △ 67.5 △ 67.5 △ 67.5 ○ 33.7 ○ 33.7 ○ 33.7 ― ― △
L △ 67.5 △ 67.5 △ 67.5 △ 67.5 ○ 33.7 ○ 33.7 ― ― ― △
Command format
G05.1 Q1 ; High-speed high-accuracy control I ON

G05.1 Q0 ; High-speed high-accuracy control I OFF

The following is the fine segment capacity while high-speed high-accuracy control I is valid.

L: Lathe system

1-part system 1-part system 67.5 67.5 33.7 33.7 33.7 ― (*2)
1-part system 67.5 67.5 33.7 33.7 33.7 ― (*2)
2-part system
2-part system 33.7 33.7 16.8 16.8 16.8 ― (*2)
4-part system 1-part system ― (*1) 33.7 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
Less than 16 axes 2-part system ― (*1) 33.7 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
5-part system or more 1-part system ― (*1) 16.8 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
or
17 axes or more 2-part system ― (*1) 16.8 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)

(*2) There is no specifications for high-speed high-accuracy control I.

command)
IB-1501505-C 336
12.3.3.2 High-speed High-accuracy Control II (G05P10000) Maximum [kBPM]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ 168 △ 168 △ 168 △ 168 ○ 67.5 ○ 67.5 ○ 67.5 ― ― △
L △ 168 △ 168 △ 168 △ 168 ○ 67.5 ○ 67.5 ― ― ― △
Command format
G05 P10000 ; High-speed high-accuracy control II ON

G05 P0 ; High-speed high-accuracy control II OFF

The following is the fine segment capacity while high-speed high-accuracy control II is valid.

L: Lathe system

1-part system 1-part system 168 (*3) 168 (*3) 67.5 67.5 67.5 ― (*2)
1-part system 100 100 67.5 67.5 67.5 ― (*2)
2-part system
2-part system 67.5 67.5 33.7 33.7 33.7 ― (*2)
4-part system 1-part system ― (*1) 33.7 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
Less than 16 axes 2-part system ― (*1) 33.7 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
5-part system or more 1-part system ― (*1) 16.8 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)
or
17 axes or more 2-part system ― (*1) 16.8 ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*1) ― (*2)

(*2) There is no specifications for high-speed high-accuracy control II.
(*3) 100kBPM for a time constant expansion system, or during tool center point control, inclined surface
machining or workpiece installation error compensation.
(Time constant expansion system can be used in a system configured with a single part system when the
specification is valid.)

command)
337 IB-1501505-C
Additional functions when high-speed high-accuracy control II/III mode is ON

(1) Fairing
If the protruding path (zigzagging path) is shorter than the parameter setting values in the machining program
generated with a CAM, etc., this function can be used to eliminate the protruding paths smaller than the setting
value so that the front and back paths are smoothly connected.
This function is valid only for continuous linear commands (G1).
G1
G1 G1
Before fairing After fairing
If there is any protruding path after fairing, fairing is repeated.
Before fairing After first fairing After final fairing
There is the smooth fairing function in addition to the fairing function.

When a minute step exists on a commanded path, for instance, the path after compensation differs between
fairing and smooth fairing as follows:
Commanded path
Commanded position G90 G00 X0 Y0;
N07 N08 N09 N10 G01;
N01 X0.100 Y0.000;
N06 N02 X0.200 Y0.000;
N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N03 X0.300 Y0.000;
N04 X0.400 Y0.000;
Path after compensation by fairing
Eliminating blocks shorter N05 X0.500 Y0.000;
than designated length N06 X0.500 Y0.010;
N07 X0.600 Y0.010;
N08 X0.700 Y0.010;
N09 X0.800 Y0.010;
Path after N10 X0.900 Y0.010;
Path after compensation by smooth fairing compensation
Compensating commanded
positions in blocks around a step
IB-1501505-C 338
(2) Smooth fairing

This function interpolates the command position of machining program so that the movement path becomes
smooth. This is used in cases of executing a fine-segment machining program at low speed for smooth
machining and executing a long-segment rough machining program for smooth machining.
Refer to "12.3.3.4 Smooth Fairing" for details.
(3) Acceleration clamp speed

With the cutting feed clamp speed during the high-speed high-accuracy control II mode, when the parameter is
set, the speed is clamped so that the acceleration generated by each block movement does not exceed the
tolerable value. This function clamps the speed optimally even at a section where" angle change at each block
is small but entire curvature is large" such as shown below. The tolerable acceleration value is calculated from
the parameter setting values.
R If the tool moves along the large curvature

section without deceleration, a large
acceleration is generated resulting in a path
error from the inner route.
(4) High-speed mode corner deceleration

Conventionally during high-accuracy control, if the angle is large between the adjacent blocks in the machining
program, this function automatically decelerates so that the acceleration generated when passing through the
corner is within the tolerable value.
If a small block is inserted at the corner section with the machining program generated with the CAM, etc., the
corner passing speed will not match the periphery. This can affect the machining surface.
If this type of small block is inserted when using high-speed mode corner deceleration, the corner will be
largely judged by the parameter settings.
The small block is excluded when the angle is judged, but it not excluded from the actual movement command.
If this function is valid, the axis

decelerates at the corner without being
affected by the small block.
339 IB-1501505-C
12.3.3.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control III (G05P20000) Maximum [kBPM]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ 270 △ 270 △ 270 △ 270 ○ 135 ○ 135 ― ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Command format
(1) Setting to enable the function by G code
High-speed high-accuracy control III can be enabled by the following G code command. If the following G code
is commanded, the high-speed high-accuracy control III mode will be ON even the parameter "High speed/
accu 3" is OFF.
G05 P20000 ; High-speed high-accuracy control III ON

G05 P0 ; High-speed high-accuracy control III OFF
(2) Setting to enable the function by parameter

The high-speed high-accuracy control II command can be treated as the high-speed high-accuracy control III
command by enabling the parameter "High speed/accu 3".
G05 P10000 ; High-speed high-accuracy control III ON

G05 P0 ; High-speed high-accuracy control III OFF
G05P2 command in high-accuracy control mode can also be treated as the high-speed high-accuracy control III
command.
IB-1501505-C 340

The following is the fine segment capacity while high-speed high-accuracy control III is valid.

L: Lathe system

1-part system 1-part system 270 (*3) ― (*2) 135 (*4) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2)
1-part system 168 ― (*2) 135 ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2)
2-part system
2-part system 100 ― (*2) 67.5 ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2)
4-part system 1-part system ― (*1) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2)
Less than 16 axes 2-part system ― (*1) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2)
5-part system or more 1-part system ― (*1) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2)
or
17 axes or more 2-part system ― (*1) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2) ― (*2)

(*2) There is no specifications for high-speed high-accuracy control III.
(*3) 100kBPM for a time constant expansion system, or during tool center point control, inclined surface
(*4) 67.5kBPM for a time constant expansion system, or during tool center point control, inclined surface
(Time constant expansion system can be used in a system configured with a single part system when the
specification is valid.)

command)
341 IB-1501505-C
12.3.3.4 Smooth Fairing

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
A path can be smoothen by compensating commanded positions of a machining program. This function is useful when
executing a fine segment program to machine smoothly at low speed or a rough machining program with long segment
to machine smoothly.
This function is enabled while high-speed high-accuracy control II is ON or while high-accuracy control is ON in high-
speed machining mode II/III, and performs compensation in consecutive G01 command during the time.
Refer to "12.3.3.2 High-speed High-accuracy Control II (G05P10000) Maximum [kBPM]" for the differences between
fairing and smooth fairing.
Commanded path G90 G00 X0.271 Y0.161;

G01;
N01 X0.319 Y0.249;
Commanded position N02 X0.415 Y0.220;
N03 X0.475 Y0.299;
N05 N07 N04 X0.566 Y0.256;
N09
N03
N05 X0.638 Y0.325;
N01 N06 N11
N04 N08 N06 X0.720 Y0.268;
N02 N10 N07 X0.803 Y0.325;
N12 N08 X0.875 Y0.256;
N09 X0.965 Y0.299;
N10 X1.026 Y0.220;
N11 X1.122 Y0.249;
N12 X1.169 Y0.161;
Smooth fairing OFF Smooth fairing ON
Compensated position
Tool path Tool path

Commanded position Commanded position
(Note) While smooth fairing is valid, the high-speed high-accuracy control III operates as high-speed high-accuracy
control II.
IB-1501505-C 342
12.3.4 Machining Condition Selection I

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ○
The machining condition parameter set which is consists of parameters related to the high-accuracy control can be
configured in advance for each machining application (such as part machining or die machining) or machining process
(such as rough or finishing), and it can be switched according to the purpose.
This can easily perform the machining which meets the conditions for the intended machining.
Multiple part systems simultaneous high-accuracy function is required to apply the machining conditions to the second or
following part systems.
The machine condition commanded by G code command will reflect only to commanded part system.
12.3.5 Direct Command Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function reduces the loads of NC machining program analysis and interpolations as much as possible so that
machining programs composed of fine segments are executed at high-speed with a processing speed.
Compared to normal machining modes, this function is effective for accelerating 3-dimensional machining of curved
surface such as variable cam machining.
343 IB-1501505-C
12.4 Programming Support Functions
12.4.1 Playback
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ○
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function enables creation of a program while proceeding with sample machining by manual (handle or job) feed or
mechanical handle feed. A machining program can be edited by using the playback movement amount obtained by
manual operation as the program command values.
Playback edit is disabled for the machining program in the mass-editing mode.
IB-1501505-C 344
12.4.3 Interactive Cycle Insertion

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function enables to interactively insert a cycle to assist in the machining and setup for the program opening on the
edit screen.
The programming time can be reduced by using this function.
The cycle can easily be inserted by editing data in an interactive window.
[Operation image to insert a cycle]
Edit screen Cycle list window Cycle edit window Edit screen
Press the Press the

Move the cursor to menu Select the cycle to be Edit the cycle data menu The cycle is inserted to
the position to insert inserted in the cycle list. interactively. the cursor position.
the cycle.
The program of the cycle block inserted once can directly be edited on the edit screen, and can be re-edited in the cycle
edit window if the cycle format is not changed.
Cycle edit window Program

：
Insert a new cycle by New G180 P1 A_ (turning - front face - rough);
setting a data insertion ：
Machining width 100.000 Behavior of cycle
G1 Z-100.000; ;
Behavior of the cycle changes
according to the modification
Modification After the Before the
modification modification
Cycle edit window Opera
： tion
G180 P1 A_ (turning - front face - rough);
Reflect the modification
Re-edit ： 1
100
Machining width 200.000 G1 Z-200.000;
200
345 IB-1501505-C
[Types of Cycle]
Machining cycle can be inserted.
In accordance with the NC system set by the parameter, either cycle for lathe or cycle for machining center can be
selected.
For cycle types, there are "Normal type" and "Extend type" of MITSUBISHI cycle and arbitrary cycle type "Custom type"
prepared by MTB.
For "Normal type", there are normal format and special format, which is set with the parameter.
Press the menu [Normal type], [Extend type] or [Custom type] to be selected on the interactive cycle screen. Select a
cycle type to be changed on the displayed cycle list window to switch the cycle.
Cycle for Lathe system

○ : Cycle insertion available - : No specification
Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3

Standard type Expansion type
Cycle type Machining cycle Machining portion
Turning hole Drilling Front ○ ○
Deep-hole drilling Back
○ ○
Tapping ○ ○
Deep-hole tapping ○ ○
Reaming - ○
Boring ○ ○
Turning Turning Outer diameter ○ ○
Turning (compound) Inner diameter
○ ○
Front
Copying ○ ○
Back
Grooving ○ ○
Cutting-off ○ ○
Thread cutting Outer diameter ○ ○
Thread cutting (compound) Inner diameter
○ ○
Thread recutting ○ ○
Thread recutting (compound) ○ ○
Milling hole Drilling Periphery ○ ○
Deep-hole drilling Side
○ ○
Front
Step drilling ○ ○
Back
Tapping ○ ○
Reaming - ○
Boring ○ ○
Milling Pocketing Side - ○
Front
Grooving Back - ○
IB-1501505-C 346
Cycle for Machining center system

○ : Cycle insertion available 　- : No specification
Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2
Standard type Expansion type
Cycle type Machining cycle
Hole Drilling ○ ○
Deep-hole drilling ○ ○
Step drilling ○ ○
Tapping ○ ○
Reaming - ○
Boring ○ ○
Milling Plane - ○
Display of cycle list window

The cycle list window is displayed in the area opposite to the editing area. There are two display types for cycle list
window, "image display type" and "tree display type", which can be switched Change list button.
Image display type Tree display type
Change list button
347 IB-1501505-C
12.4.4 Simple Programming (NAVI MILL/LATHE)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
Create a part program by using NAVI MILL (for machining center system) or NAVI LATHE (for lathe system).
(1) The following machining processes can be edited.
M system L system
- Hole drilling (Drilling, deep hole drilling, step, boring, <Turning machining>
tapping) - Turning (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- Surface cutting (Circle, square) - Copying (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- Contour cutting (Circle, square, arbitrary shape) - Threading (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- Pocket machining (Circle, square, L pattern, U pattern) - Grooving (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- EIA - Trapezoid grooving (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- Hole drilling (Drilling, deep hole drilling, step, tapping)
- EIA
- Cutting-off
<Milling machining>
- Milling hole machining (Drilling, deep hole drilling, boring,
tapping)
[Hole pattern]
- Random (Front face, outer periphery, side face)
- Line (Front face, outer periphery, side face)
- Arc (Front face, side face)
- Circle (Front face, side face)
- Square (Front face, side face)
- Lattice (Front face, side face)
- Key groove (Front face, outer periphery, side face)
- Contour machining (Front face, outer periphery, side face)
<Auxiliary operation>
- Delivery
<Balance cut>
- Turning balance cut
- Copying balance cut
- Two-part system simultaneous thread cutting
(2) Cutting conditions are automatically determined from tool management data and cutting condition file.
(3) The operation screen consists of the list view area and the operation view area. In the list view area, the entire
part program can be seen at all time. In the operation view area, there are guide drawings related to each input
item, which allows an easy data input.
(4) Program Checker enables the tool paths of a part program to be graphically traced. With this function, an input
error can be detected at an earlier stage.
(5) Guidance function provides an operator with error recovery information.
(6) Part program is a macro-program-based NC program. Process commands can be added in the edit screen.
(7) The macro program above can be customized by the machine tool builder.
12.4.5 G code Guidance

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
G code guidance is a function to display illustration of the contents or movements of the commanded format for the G
code currently under editing. This is used when creating or editing a machining program.
With this function, the G code contents under the editing process can be checked on the spot.
IB-1501505-C 348
12.4.7 DXF Data Input

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
This function is a support for the interactive cycle insert function.

This function allows you to import a DXF drawing file from an external I/O device through DXF data input window, extract
the figure element data from the drawing, and add them as arbitrary shape data or as hole position data to the cycle
being edited using the interactive cycle insertion function.
DXF data input function requires FCU8-MU542 or -MA542 for M800S, or FCU8-MU512 for M80.
The supported devices are as follows:

- HD
- Memory card (front-side SD card)
- DS (back-side SD card)
- USB memory
DXF format
drawing file
Use CAD software on an external PC to create a

drawing file in the DXF format.
Load the drawing file from
HD, SD or USB memory.
By determining the selected figure element, you set the element type and
coordinate value of the extracted element directly as arbitrary shape data.
You can add each element and input the coordinate values through the
drawing operation.
349 IB-1501505-C
IB-1501505-C 350
13
Machine Accuracy Compensation
351 IB-1501505-C
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation
13.1 Static Accuracy Compensation
13.1.1 Backlash Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function compensates for the error (backlash) produced when the direction of the machine system is reversed.
The backlash compensation can be set in the cutting feed mode or rapid traverse mode.
The amount of backlash compensation can be set separately for each axis. It is set using a number of pulses in
increments of one-half of the least command increments. The output follows the output unit system. The "output unit
system" is the unit system of the machine system (ball screw unit system).
IB-1501505-C 352
13.1.2 Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation [sets]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ 32 ○ 32 ○ 32 ○ 32 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 10
L ○ 32 ○ 32 ○ 32 ○ 32 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 16 ○ 10
With the reference position defined as the base, set the compensation amount in the division points obtained by equally
dividing the machine coordinates.
According to the specified parameters, this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball screw pitch error,
etc.
The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental system. Select the desired method with the
parameter.
Machine position between division points n and n+1 is smoothly compensated by the linear approximation of the
Up to 32 sets of axes can be set for the compensation for M800 Series, or up to 16 sets of axes for M80/E80 Series.
Up to 1899 points can be set for the compensation for M800 and M80/E80 Series.
[Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position]
Actual machine
position Ideal machine
position
Actual machine
position for which
no compensation
has been made
▲ ▲ ▲ Command machine
position
Reference position
Compensation ▲: Division point
amount
Compensation between
amount division points
n n+1 n+2 position
(Note 1) Compensation points 1899 is a total including the points for memory-type relative position error compensation.
(Note 2) A scale of 0 to 99-fold is applied on the compensation amount.
353 IB-1501505-C
13.1.3 Memory-type Relative Position Error Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This method, according to the parameters specified in advance, compensates the relative position error between two
orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving stand.
Specify the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction in the division points obtained by equally dividing
the machine coordinates of the base axis.
The base axis is one of the two orthogonal axes to which relative position compensation applies. This axis is used as the
criterion for relative-error measurement. The compensation axis is the coordinate axis that is orthogonal to the base axis.
The compensation is actually made for this coordinate axis.
Machine position between division points n and n+1 is smoothly compensated by the linear approximation of the
Up to 32 sets of axes can be set for the compensation for M800 Series, or up to 16 sets of axes for M80/E80 Series.
Up to 1899 points can be set for the compensation for M800 and M80/E80 Series.
[Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position]
Actual machine
position of
compensation axis Actual machine position for
which no compensation has
been made
▲: Division point
Command machine
▲ ▲ ▲ position along base
axis
Reference position n n+1 n+2
position
Compensation
amount between
division points
Compensation
amount
(Note 1) Compensation points 1899 is a total including the points for memory-type pitch error compensation.
(Note 2) A scale of 0 to 99-fold is applied on the compensation amount.
IB-1501505-C 354
13.1.4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
The coordinate system can be shifted by inputting a compensation amount from the PLC. This compensation amount will
not appear on the counter (all counters including machine position). If the machine's displacement value caused by heat
is input for example, this can be used for thermal displacement compensation.
Machine coordinate zero point when the external machine

coordinate system offset amount is 0.
Compensation vector according to external machine coordinate
13.1.5 Circular Error Radius Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
With commands designated during arc cutting, this function compensates for movement toward the inside of the arcs
caused by a factor such as servo delay.
355 IB-1501505-C
13.1.6 Ball Screw Thermal Expansion Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
This compensates the axis feed error caused by the ball screw thermal expansion, etc. using the values set in the R
register's thermal displacement compensation parameter.
The compensation amount at the end of the machine error compensation range (mdvno to pdvno) is set. The
compensation line is obtained from the set compensation amount, and is linearly distributed in the machine error
compensation range to attain smooth compensation. A compensation amount that changes during operation can also be
compensated.
Compensation line
Compensation amount
maxcmp (with sign) Referring

to "offset" position
Compensa-
Reference position tion amount
(legcmp)
Ball screw
Machine position
Motor Hold
offset (with sign)
Machine error compensation range

mdvno (= thermal expansion compensation pdvno
range)
(1) Conditions under which thermal displacement compensation is valid

- When function is valid.
- When axis No. and parameter (offset, maxcmp) is set in R register.
- When pitch error compensation parameter is set correctly.
(2) Compensation operation

- The machine error compensation range is compensated with the thermal displacement compensation
amount (absolute position compensation amount) obtained with the compensation line.
- The compensation amount is immediately calculated when thermal displacement compensation is
validated.
- When the compensation amount is changed, the new compensation line is immediately obtained, and the
range is compensated again with that compensation amount.
- Thermal displacement compensation can be used with machine error compensation. In this case, the
sum of the machine error compensation amount and the thermal displacement compensation amount is
added to the machine position and issued as the NC command.
IB-1501505-C 356
13.1.7 Rotation Center Error Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
In the machine having a rotary axis, the rotation center deviates due to the assembly error of the rotary axis. Thus, if a
machining is carried out with the rotary axis, the machining accuracy is impaired because an error is caused in the
relative position between the tool and workpiece.
There are two types of rotation center deviation. One is "position deviation", in which the rotation center is shifted in the
planar direction, and the other is "angle deviation", in which the rotation center inclines.
Higher-accuracy machining is realized by compensating for these two types of deviation.
[Position deviation and angle deviation]
Angle deviation Machine design rotation center line

Actual rotation center line
Position deviation
[Compensation for the deviation of the rotation center]
: Machine design rotation center

: Actual rotation center
Compensation
amount
C axis Compensation C axis

C axis rotation enabled rotation
rotation Error
<No deviation> <With deviation> <When this function is enabled>

Y
Machining accuracy is The error between the tool
impaired because an error and workpiece is compen-
X is caused in the position sated for by using the
between the tool and measurement result
workpiece. (parameter) of the deviation.
357 IB-1501505-C
13.1.8 Position-dependent Gradually Increasing-type Backlash Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Usually, minute bumps are generated when the machine movement direction is reversed. (Lost motion) However, due to
various mechanical system factors, there may be cases where the bumps do not change in steps but gradually change
after the direction reversal. (Gradually increasing-type lost motion)
Depending on the mechanical structure, the gradually increasing-type lost motion includes the type where the bump
amount depends on "duration of time" from when the machine movement direction is reversed and the type where the
bump amount depends on "distance". When the bump amount depends on "duration of time", compensation is possible
with the OMR-II function. (13.2.4 OMR II(Backlash with Filter)).
With this function, the gradually increasing-type lost motion which depends on the distance from the point where the
machine movement direction is reversed can be compensated by controlling the variation of backlash compensation
amount according to the distance from the direction reversal point.
<When the bump amount changes according to speed>
Basic circle
Measurement
result F500 Shapes at rising edge of bumps are steep when
the speed is low. → Bumps depend on time.
F1000
F2000
Compensation with OMR-II function
F5000
<When the bump amount does not change according to speed>
Basic circle
Measurement
F500
result
Shapes at rising edge of bumps do not change even
F1000 when the speed changes. → Bumps depend on
position
F2000
F5000
Compensation with this function
IB-1501505-C 358
13.1.9 Two-way Pitch Error Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Two-way pitch error compensation function is used to compensate the pitch error in each direction by setting the pitch
error compensation amount when moving in the positive and negative direction.
This function reduces the difference of tool path between the positive and negative direction.
13.1.11 Spatial Error Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function can compensate for three-dimensional errors of a machine tool due to its linear and rotary axes. This
measures the spatial errors caused by the linear and rotary axes with a measuring device, and inputs the measurement
results to the NC to make an error data file. The function calculates the compensation amount based on the error data
file and adds the calculated compensation amount of the linear and rotary axes to the drive command position to perform
the compensation. The function can reduce deterioration of machining accuracy due to mechanical errors, which will
lead to high-accuracy machining.
This function is enabled for a machine where three linear axes form a right-handed orthogonal coordinate system.
Error due to linear axis/

File input/output
Error resulting from rotary axis motion screen
Rotary-axis angle deviation
Measuring device: NC
Laser tracker, etc.
Measurement result Error data file
Calculates
Measures error compensation
amount
Compensation
amount
Adds compensation
amount
Position command to drive
Commanded position
359 IB-1501505-C
13.2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation
13.2.1 Smooth High-gain (SHG) Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This is a high-response and stable position control method using the servo system. This SHG control achieves an
approximately three-fold position loop gain equally compared to the conventional control method.
The features of the SHG control are as follows.
(1) The acceleration/deceleration becomes smoother, and the mechanical vibration can be suppressed (approx.
1/2) during acceleration/deceleration. (In other words, the acceleration/deceleration time constant can be
shortened.)
Conventional control (position loop gain SHG control (position loop gain = 50rad/S)
= 33rad/S)
Step response
Conventional 6.0
Speed control
Current
SHG control 3.0
Machine
vibration
Machine vibration
Time Time amount (μm)
(2) The shape error is approx. 1/9 of the conventional control.
Y
Conventional
SHG control Feed rate 3000mm/min. control 22.5
Radius 50mm
Conventional SHG control
control X 2.5
SHG control
1.0
+ FF
SHG control + FF (Feed forward)
Roundness error (μm)
(3) The positioning time is approx. 1/3 of the conventional control.
Droop during rapid traverse deceleration

Droop
Conventional
SHG control 200
Conventional control control
SHG control 70
SHG control + FF (Feed forward)
SHG control +
FF (Feed 60
forward)
Positioning time (ms)

Time
IB-1501505-C 360
13.2.2 Dual Feedback

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
If the motor and machine coupling or machine system's rigidity is low (ex. large machine, etc.) when using a closed loop
system, the response during acceleration/deceleration will vibrate and cause overshooting. This can cause the position
loop gain from increasing. The dual feedback function is effective in this case.
To validate the dual feedback function, use position feedback with a motor side detector in ranges with high acceleration
to enable stable control. In ranges with low acceleration, use position feedback with the machine side detector (scale).
This will make it possible to increase the position loop gain.
The machine side detector (scale) is required separately.
Table
Position droop Speed command
Position Servo
Position control
command motor
+
-
Linear scale
High frequency FB element Position FB ENC
Low frequency dead band

FB element +
- +
Primary
delay filter - Position FB
Dual feedback control
The state will approach the semi-closed loop system as the primary delay filter's time constant increases, so the position
loop gain limit will increase. Note that the limit of the position loop gain increased with the dual feedback function is the
same as the position loop gain limit for a semi-closed system that does not use a machine side detector (scale, etc.). In
addition, the positioning time will increase as the primary delay filter time constant increases.
13.2.3 Lost Motion Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function compensates the error in the protrusion shape caused by lost motion at the arc quadrant changeover
section during circular cutting.
361 IB-1501505-C
13.2.4 OMR II (Backlash with Filter)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
The OMR (Optimal Machine Response) control function estimates the machine or motor model (moment of inertia, clone
friction, viscosity coefficient, etc.) that can cause a path error (error in actual tool path in respect to the path commanded
with the program). High-accuracy machining is achieved by carrying out feed forward control based on that model. This
allows error cased by quadrant protrusions during circular interpolation or quadrants on the inner side of the path to be
greatly reduced.
OMR-II is a function that focuses on the quadrant protrusions, and improves the path error with this. Quadrant path
compensation is included in OMR-II.
The quadrant protrusion compensation function improves quadrant protrusions by issuing compensation to the backlash
compensation amount to compensate the error when the machine system direction is reversed.
By adding the compensated backlash compensation amount to the position command and sending it to the servo, the
gradually increasing-type lost motion which occurs at quadrant changeover can be compensated.
Backlash compensation
amount Quadrant
Machine error
protrusion
compensation
compensation
Position command (Fdt) +

Interpolation
Servo
process
+
IB-1501505-C 362
13.2.6 OMR-FF
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
The OMR (Optimal Machine Response) control estimates the causes (moment of inertia, clone friction, viscosity
coefficient, etc.) of the path error (error in actual tool path in respect to the path commanded with the program) by making
a model of the control target. Feed forward control is carried out based on that model.
With the OMR-FF control method, highly accurate machining can be achieved by using the command filter function to
suppress vibration in addition to the reverse model feed forward function.
The reverse model feed forward function estimates the control target's vibration characteristics using a reverse model.
The feed forward command for the appropriate position, speed and current can be obtained from this estimation. This
allows the machine position to be tracked to the commanded position without causing vibration when using machine
tools with low rigidity.
When the command filter function is also used, the high-range vibration elements in the command can also be
suppressed.
New control method to bring out the full potential of a high-speed high-acceleration machine
◆ High tracking ability for the command (Smaller path error)
◆ Suppression of the machine vibration (Suppress low-range vibration without losing tracking ability)
Torque FF
J . s2
Motor Machine end
Notch
Speed FF torque position
filter Machine
s F/B controller
Scale model system
Target Position
path position
Scale command
model Machine system
reverse model
OMR-FF control Motor position
Determine response Trace load position to scale

characteristics of model position without causing
machine end position vibration
Set parameters:
(1) Scale model time constant
(2) Machine system resonance frequency ωp, anti-resonance frequency ωz, attenuation rate ζ,
inertia J
363 IB-1501505-C
13.2.7 Distance-coded Reference Position Detection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
This is the function where the scale with absolute address reference mark is used to establish the reference point in the
relative position detection system.
When the reference point has not been established, it is necessary to move the axis to the reference point. On the other
hand, with this function, the reference point is established by moving the axis only for several reference marks, resulting
in a significant reduction of the axis movement amount.
No dog is used as the position is calculated using reference marks.
<Reference point establishment process>
▲
Reference mark Dog
Ordinary method
Reference point established
This function
Reference point established
IB-1501505-C 364
14
Automation Support Functions
365 IB-1501505-C
14 Automation Support Functions
14.1 Measurement
14.1.1 Skip
14.1.1.1 Skip
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the external skip signal is input during linear interpolation with the G31 command, the machine feed is stopped
immediately, the remaining distance is discarded and the commands in the next block are executed.
[M system]
G31 X__ Y__ Z__ α__ R__ F__ ; (α is the additional axis.)
X,Y,Z,α, : Coordinate values of each axis. Command with absolute or increment values.
R : Acceleration/deceleration command
F : Feed rate (mm/min)
[L system]
G31 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ F__ ;

X,Z,U,W : Command values
R : Acceleration/deceleration command
F : Feed rate (mm/min)
Skip signal input
Feed rate
Programmed end
point
Remaining
Actual movement distance distance Position
Command value
(1) The cutting feed override and dry run are enabled or disabled by the respective parameters.
(2) The feedrate switches as follows according to the parameter setting.

- The value of address F given in the G31 block, or if F is not commanded, the value set by the parameter.
- The F modal value commanded in the program.
IB-1501505-C 366
(3) Command by G31 command basis for acceleration/deceleration command (R0/R1).

When R0 command is issued or R command is omitted, automatic acceleration/deceleration is not performed but
step acceleration/deceleration is performed after interpolation in G31 block.
If R1 command is issued, automatic acceleration/deceleration is performed after interpolation even when skip signal
is input.
A command is not issued or a command other than R0/R1 is issued, it will be the operation of acceleration/
deceleration time constant=0(R0) and automatic acceleration/deceleration is not performed after interpolation.
Acceleration/deceleration when R0 command is issued or R command is omitted

Skip signal
Speed
F
Time
Acceleration/deceleration when R1 command is issued Skip signal
Speed
F
Time
Skip time constant Skip time constant
Changeover of acceleration/deceleration type with R command
(4) The approximate coasting distance up to feed stop based on the detection delay in the skip signal input is
calculated as below.
F F
0= Tp+ (t1 t2)
60 60
F F
= (Tp+t1) t2
60 60
1 2
δ : Coasting distance (mm)

F : G31 rate (mm/min)
Tp : Position loop time constant (s) = (position loop gain)-1
t1 : Response delay time (s) = (A period of time from when the skip signal is detected until it reaches the
control device.)
t2 : Response error time 0.001 (s)
(Note 1) Skipping during machine lock is not valid.
367 IB-1501505-C
14.1.1.2 Multiple-step Skip

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function realizes skipping by designating a combination of skip signals for each skip command.
(1) G31.n method
This function carries out skipping by designating a combination of skip signals for each skip command (G31.1,
G31.2, G31.3).
The combination of the skip signals are designated with parameters for each G code (G31.1, 31.2, 31.3), and
the skip operation is executed when all signals in the combination are input.
G31.n Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff1 ;

G31.n : Skip command (n=1, 2, 3)
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Axis address and target position
Ff1 : Feedrate (mm/min)
(2) G31Pn method

As with the G31.n method, the valid skip signal is designated and skip is executed. However, the method of
designating the valid skip signal differs.
The skip signals that can be used are 1 to 8. Which is to be used is designated with P in the program. Refer to
Table 1 for the relation of the P values and valid signals.
Skip can be executed on dwell, allowing the remaining dwell time to be canceled during the dwell command
(G04) and the next block executed under the skip conditions (to distinguish external skip signals 1 to 8) set
with the parameters.
G31 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp Ff1 ;

G31 : Skip command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Axis address and target position
Pp : Skip signal command
Ff1 : Feedrate (mm/min)
(a) Specify the skip rate in command feedrate F. However, F modal is not updated.
(b) Specify skip signal command in skip signal command P. Specify the P value in the range of 1 to 255. If it
exceeds the specified range, a program error occurs.
(c) When the skip signals are commanded in combination, the skip operation takes place with OR result of
those signals.
Table 1 Valid skip signals
Valid skip signal

Skip signal command P
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 ○
2 ○
3 ○ ○
4 ○
5 ○ ○
: : : : : : : : :
253 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
254 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
255 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
IB-1501505-C 368
14.1.1.4 PLC Skip

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
This function enables skip operations to be performed by signals which are input from the user PLC.
14.1.1.5 Speed Change Skip

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function is used to change the feed rate or to stop the movement by inputting the skip signal during the linear
interpolation.
After stopping the movement with skipping, the remaining movement command is canceled and the next block is
executed.
In addition to the speed change skip function, the high-speed skip option and multiple-step skip function are required to
use this function.
G31 Xx Yy Zz Ff F1 = f1 ... Fn = fn ; (n is the skip signal 1 to 8.)

G31 : Skip command
Xx, Yy, Zz : Command position
Ff : Feed rate when starting the cutting feed (mm/min)
fn : Feed rate after detecting the skip signal (mm/min)
fn = 0 : Movement stop
fn ≠ 0 : Changing the feed rate to fn
F1 = Feed rate after inputting the skip signal 1
:
F8 = Feed rate after inputting the skip signal 8
Operation example
G31 X100. Ff F1 = 0 F2 = f2 F3 = f3 F4 = f4 ;
Speed
Skip signal 4
f Skip signal 3
f4
Skip signal 2
f3 Skip signal 1
f2
f1
0
Time
Skip time constant Position loop time constant

(position loop gain-1)
369 IB-1501505-C
14.1.1.6 Torque Limitation Skip

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
Axis movement is performed in the torque limited status, and the axis movement command is suspended to proceed to
the next block when the current command value reaches the designated torque skip value and the torque skip turns ON.
In addition to the torque, the droop value can be add to the condition of the skip ON. (Droop skip)
This function enables measurement without a sensor.
Workpiece radius measurement tool
G0 X50. Z100. T0101;
G160 X40. Q80 F20;
:
G0 X50. Z100. T0101; Tool selection for measurement
G160 X40. Q80 F20; Torque skip command
#100=#5061; : Coordinate position (workpiece value) read
:
Command format
G160 X/U/Z/W/α Q D F ;
X/U/Z/W/α : Axis address (range of coordinate position command (mm, inch), decimal point command is
possible)
Q : Torque skip value (0 to 500 (%))
D : Droop skip value (0 to 99999.999 (mm, inch))
F : Skip speed (range of feedrate (mm/min, inch/min, mm/rev, inch/rev))
IB-1501505-C 370
14.1.2 Automatic Tool Length Measurement

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by assigning a distance between the
measurement start position to the measurement position. The machine stops when the tool reaches the sensor and
automatically calculates the difference between the coordinate position where the tool stopped and measurement
position. It registers this difference as the tool length compensation amount for that tool.
371 IB-1501505-C
(1) Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M system)

This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by commanding a distance
between the measurement start position to the measurement position, it stops the tool as soon as it contacts
the sensor and calculates the difference between the coordinate position when the tool has stopped and
commanded coordinate position. It registers this difference as the tool length compensation amount for that
tool.
If compensation has already been applied to the tool, it is moved in the direction of the measurement position
with the compensation still applied, and when the measurement and calculation results are such that a further
compensation amount is to be provided, the current compensation amount is further corrected.
If the compensation amount at this time is one type, the compensation amount is automatically corrected; if
there is a distinction between the tool length compensation amount and wear compensation amount, the wear
amount is automatically corrected.
G37 Zz1 Rr1 Dd1 Ff1 ;

: Measurement command
G37 ;
: Measurement axis address and measurement position X, Y, Z, α (α = optional axis)
Zz1
: The distance between the point at which tool movement is to start at the measurement speed
Rr1
and the measurement position
Dd1
: The range in which the tool is to stop
Ff1
: The measurement rate
When Rr1_, Dd1_ and Ff1_ have been omitted, the values set in the parameters are used.
Tool change position
Reference position (In

case of machine
coordinate system zero
point.) At this time, the tool length compensation
amount has a minus ("-") value.
Tool
Example of program
Amount of movement G28 Z0 ;
based on tool length T01 ;
measurement
M06 T02 ;
G43 G00 Z0 H01 ;
G37 Z-300. R10. D2. F10 ;
:
Tool length measurement
In this case, the distance (H01 = Za1 - z0) from
position (Za1) the tool T01 tip to the top of the measurement
sensor is calculated as the tool length
compensation amount which is then registered
in the tool compensation table.
Sensor
Start point
r1, d1, and f1 can also be

A set in parameters.
Area A : Moves with rapid traverse feed rate.
Areas B1, B2 : Moves with the measurement speed
B1 (f1 or parameter setting)
r1
If a sensor signal is input in area B1, an error will occur.
d1 If a sensor signal is not input in the area B2, an error will occur.
B2 z1 Measurement
d1 position
IB-1501505-C 372
(2) Automatic tool length measurement (L series)

This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by commanding a distance
between the measurement start position to the measurement position, it stops the tool as soon as it contacts
the sensor and calculates the difference between the coordinate position when the tool has stopped and
commanded coordinate position. It registers this difference as the tool length compensation amount for that
tool.
If compensation has already been applied to the tool, it is moved in the direction of the measurement position
with the compensation still applied, and when the measurement and calculation results are such that a further
compensation amount is to be provided, the current wear compensation amount is further corrected.
G37 αα1 Rr1 Dd1 Ff1 ;

G37 : Measurement command
αα1 : Measurement axis address and measurement position coordinate ... X,Z
: The distance between the point at which tool movement is to start at the measurement speed and the
Rr1
measurement position (Radial value fixed / incremental position)
Dd1
: The range in which the tool is to stop (Radial value fixed: incremental position)
Ff1
: The measurement rate
When Rr1_, Dd1_ and Ff1_ have been omitted, the values set in the parameters are used.
r1, d1, and f1 can also be

set in parameters.
Start position
A
Rapid traverse feed
B
r1
d1 F feed
Measurement position
Measuring Compensation
d1 amount Sensor ON
instrument
When the tool moves from the measurement start position to the measurement position specified in G37 x1
(z1), it passes through the A area at rapid traverse. Then, it moves at the measurement rate set in F command
or parameter from the position specified in r1. If the measurement position arrival signal (sensor signal) turns
ON during the tool is moving in the B area, an error occurs. If the measurement position arrival signal (sensor
signal) does not turn ON although the tool passes through the measurement position x1 (z1) and moves by d1,
an error occurs.
373 IB-1501505-C
14.1.3 Manual Tool Length Measurement 1

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Simple measurement of the tool length is done without a sensor.

(1) Manual tool length measurement I [M system]
When the tool is at the reference position, this function enables the distance from the tool tip to the
measurement position (top of workpiece) to be measured and registered as the tool length compensation
amount.
Manual movement
amount
(tool length
compensation
amount)
Workpiece
Table
IB-1501505-C 374
(2) Manual tool length measurement I [L system]

This is the function to calculate the tool length compensation amount automatically by moving the tool to the
measurement point with manual feed. There are two types of measurement methods in manual tool length
measurement I: the basic point method and the measurement value input method. The method is selected by
setting parameter. For key operation there are normal operation mode/simple operation mode.
(a) Basic point method

Obtain the tool length with the tool nose placed on the measurement point.
To carry out the basic point method, a point to place the tool nose on (measurement point) is required.
When measurement position is set to parameter or workpiece coordinate offset (modal).
<Parameter designation method>

The tool length is automatically calculated using the following formula.
Tool length = Machine coordinates - Measurement point (#2015 tlml-)
(Note) Always set the measurement point with a radius value, regardless of the diameter/radius
command.
Tool length basic

point
Measurement
point
Parameter setting value Z-axis tool

length
Z-axis machine position
<Workpiece coordinate offset designation method>

Tool length is the coordinate value on the workpiece coordinate system.
Tool length basic point
Measurement
position(Workpi
ece coordinate
origin (modal))
Workpiece coordinate position
= Z-axis tool length
375 IB-1501505-C
(b) Measurement value input method

Actually cut the workpiece. Measure its dimensions, and obtain the tool length from the measured values.
The measurement basic point is characteristic for each machine (the center of the chuck face, etc.
designated by parameter),or workpiece coordinate offset (modal).
<Parameter designation method>

The tool length is automatically calculated by the equation below.
Tool length = Machine coordinate values - Measurement basic point (#2015 tlml-) - Measured value
(Note) Always set the measurement point with a radius value, regardless of the diameter/radius
command.
X-axis machine position
X-axis tool lenght
Measurement
basic point X-axis measured value
Parameter setting value
<Workpiece coordinate offset designation method>

The tool length is automatically calculated by the equation below.
Tool length = Workpiece coordinate position . Measured value

Measurement basic point (Wk.
coordinate origin (modal))
X axis WK. coordinate position
X-axis tool length
X-axis measured value
IB-1501505-C 376
14.1.4 Manual Tool Length Measurement 2

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Manual tool length measurement II [M system]

When the tool is positioned at the reference position, this function enables the distance from the reference
position to the tool tip to be measured and registered as the tool length compensation amount. In this case, the
position of the gauge block used as a reference must be set as the basic height.
M Tool length
compensation
TLM basic length Manual movement

(setup parameter) amount
Gauge block Basic height
Table
If the height axis designation parameter is ON, the axis designated for plane selection basic axis K is the axis
targeted for measurement as the height axis.
Furthermore, if the tool length measurement check parameter is ON, an input OK/cancel confirmation
message appears after input key has been pressed.
(2) Manual tool length measurement II [L system]

A device in which a touch probe is built is used. Simply by causing the tool nose to touch the touch probe in
manual feed, the tool compensation amount can be calculated and stored in tool compensation amount
memory. If you set the tool compensation values of each tool, cut the workpiece end face manually, and then
input the workpiece measurement signal, you can set the external workpiece coordinate offset data of Z axis.
Preset the machine coordinate position of the touch probe touch face in parameter as the measurement basic
position.
X
Tool length
Z
Tool length
X
- touch face
Z Z
+ touch face - touch face
X
+ touch face
377 IB-1501505-C
14.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The external workpiece coordinate offset data for the Z axis can be set by cutting the workpiece face by means of
manual operations and inputting the workpiece measurement signal.
By pressing the menu key, data can be set in the Z axis of an arbitrary coordinate offset.
Coordinate offset setting for the Z axis (2nd axis) of the part system 1 to 4 is possible.
Note that the workpiece coordinate offsets for multiple part systems cannot be measured at the same time.
(Note) Measurement is disabled for the part system with one-axis structure.
Example of measurement of external workpiece coordinate offset data for Z axis
X
Tool post
Machine zero point
Workpiece
Z
Workpiece coordinate zero point
(1) Measurement method with workpiece measurement signal

(a) Select the tool, and cut the workpiece face.
(b) When the workpiece measurement signal is input, the external workpiece coordinate offset data for the Z
axis is calculated from the machine coordinate position, length of the tool used and tool nose wear
compensation amount, and stored in the memory.
(2) Measurement method with "MeasVal take in" menu

(a) Select a tool, and cut the workpiece face.
(b) When the "MeasVal take in" menu is pressed, workpiece coordinate offset data is calculated from the
machine coordinate position, tool length and tool nose wear compensation amount of a used tool, and
external workpiece coordinate offset. The workpiece coordinate offset data is stored in the Z-axis of the
selected coordinate system offset.
IB-1501505-C 378
14.1.6 Workpiece Position Measurement

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The workpiece position measurement function is used to measure each axis' coordinate point by installing a sensor on
the spindle and the sensor contacting the workpiece with the manual feed or handle feed.
The surface, hole center and width center coordinates are calculated from the measured coordinates, and those
calculated results are set in the workpiece coordinate offset.
The axis to be measured is designated with parameter.
The workpiece position measurement is available for all the part systems.
Here the measurement axes are explained as "X", "Y" and "Z".
(1) Surface workpiece offset measurement

The workpiece position measurement coordinates are calculated from the skip machine position of the X, Y
and Z axes.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis' skip machine position + sensor diameter/2 ± center
compensation amount (horizontal) ± skip flow amount (horizontal)
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis' skip machine position + sensor diameter/2 ± center
compensation amount (vertical) ± skip flow amount (vertical)
Measurement position coordinate Z = Z axis' skip machine position - sensor length
The sensor diameter/2 and skip flow amount change between +/- with the tool movement direction during the
measurement.
The X and Y axes use the sensor diameter, center compensation amount (horizontal/vertical) and skip flow
amount (horizontal/vertical).
The Z axis uses the sensor length.
The measurement position coordinate of the X axis, Y axis or Z axis is set in the specified workpiece
coordinate offset.
zero point To set the workpiece coordinate offset, the X axis
is measured and the X axis' offset coordinate is
X axis measure- set. Then, the Y axis' offset is measured and set.
ment constant Finally, the Z axis' offset is measured and set.
position
Y
Y axis measurement
constant position
379 IB-1501505-C
(2) Hole center workpiece offset measurement

The measurement position coordinates of two axes (X, Y) are measured at three points, and the hole center is
calculated. The calculated result is set in the specified workpiece coordinate offset.
The workpiece position measurement coordinates are calculated from the skip machine position of the X and Y
axes.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis' skip machine position + center compensation amount
(horizontal) ± skip flow amount (horizontal
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis' skip machine position + center compensation amount (vertical) ±
skip flow amount (vertical)
The +/- of the skip flow amount changes according to the tool movement amount during measurement.
Measurement C point
X
To set the workpiece coordinate offset, the
Measure- position X and Y of the measurement A point are
ment A point measured, and the measured values are set in
the measurement A point. In the same manner as
the measurement A point, the measurement B
point and then C point are measured and set.
The hole center coordinate is calculated by
Workpiece coordinate Measure- setting the workpiece coordinate system after
zero point ment B point setting three points, and the calculated result is
set in the workpiece coordinate offset.
Y
(3) Width center workpiece offset measurement

The two points among the measurement position coordinate of the X axis, Y axis or Z axis are measured, and
each axis' groove center is calculated. The calculated result is set in the specified workpiece coordinate offset.
The workpiece position measurement coordinates are calculated from the skip machine position of the X, Y
and Z axes.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis' skip machine position + center compensation amount
(horizontal) ± skip flow amount (horizontal)
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis' skip machine position + center compensation amount (vertical) ±
skip flow amount (vertical)
Measurement position coordinate Z = Z axis' skip machine position - Sensor length
The +/- of the skip flow amount changes according to the tool movement amount during measurement
Measurement B point
X To set the workpiece coordinate offset, the position
X (position Y, position Z) of the measurement A
Measure- point is measured, and the measured value is set in
ment A the measurement A point. In the same manner as
point
the measurement A point, the measurement B point
is measured and set.
The groove width center coordinate of the X axis (Y
axis, Z axis) is calculated by setting the workpiece
coordinate system after setting two points, and the
Y
calculated result is set in the workpiece coordinate
offset
IB-1501505-C 380
14.1.7 Rotation Measurement

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The offset (rotation center and rotation angle) of the rotary coordinate system is measured, and the results are set to the
workpiece coordinate system offset (rotation center) and the parameters.
<Measurement using touch probe>

Measurement counter X = X axis skip position (Machine position)
Measurement counter Y = Y axis skip position (Machine position)
<Simple measurement (measurement without using touch probe)>

Measurement counter X = X axis machine position + center compensation (H) + skip past amount (Horizontal axis)
(Note)
Measurement counter Y = Y axis machine position + center compensation (V) + skip past amount (Vertical axis) (Note)
(Note) The skip past amount is added for only the axis that moved last.
The sign ( + or - ) of the skip past amount depends on the movement direction of the axis.
381 IB-1501505-C
14.1.8 Rotation Center Error Measurement

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function executes automatic measurement with the touch probe on the reference sphere to calculate the rotation
center error compensation amount.
As the movement of the touch probe, the rotation of the axis, the reading of the coordinate and the calculation of the
error are performed automatically, the rotation center error compensation amount can be easily calculated. The
calculated error compensation amount can be confirmed on the rotation center error measurement screen and set to the
parameter.
In order to perform the rotation center error measurement, you need to execute the rotation center error macro
initialization in advance and input the rotation center error measurement macro program to the memory.
This function supports the following machine configurations only:

- AC table tilt
- BC table tilt
If the rotation center error measurement is attempted with the configuration which is not subject, the alarm occurs when
the automatic start button is pressed.
IB-1501505-C 382
14.1.9 Workpiece Installation Error Measurement

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ ― △ ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function executes automatic measurement with the touch probe to calculate the workpiece installation error
As the movement of the touch probe, the reading of the coordinate and the calculation of the error are performed
automatically, the workpiece installation error compensation amount can be easily calculated. The calculated error
compensation amount can be confirmed on the workpiece installation error measurement screen and set to the error
In order to perform the workpiece installation error measurement, you need to execute the workpiece installation error
macro initialization in advance and input the workpiece installation error measurement macro program to the memory.
Touch probe
Workpiece
Z(+)
Y(+)
X(+)
383 IB-1501505-C
14.2 Tool Life Management
14.2.1 Tool Life Management
In this type, how long and how many times the program commanded tool is used are accumulated to monitor the usage
state.
14.2.1.1 Tool Life Management I

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The following two method can be selected.

- Management by the time of use
The cutting time after specification of a tool selection (T) command (G01, G02, and G33) is added to the
tool use time for the specified tool.
- Management by the frequency of use
The tool use counter corresponding to the specified tool No. is incremented each time a tool selection (T)
command is specified for the tool.
(1) M system
When the number of uses has reached the limit, the "Tool life over" signal will turn ON.
(2) L system
When a T command is issued after it has reached the limit, the "Tool life over" signal will turn ON.
14.2.1.2 Tool Life Management II

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) M system
A spare tool change function is added to tool life management I. This function selects a usable tool out of the
spare tools of the group determined by the value specified by the user PLC, then outputs data of such usable
spare tool. The spare tool can be selected in two ways: the tools are selected in order they were registered in
the group or the tool whose remaining life is the longest of all in the group is selected.
(2) L system
The life of each tool (time and frequency) is controlled, and when the life is reached, a spare tool that is the
same type is selected from the group where the tool belongs and used.
14.2.1.3 Tool Life Management III

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
For the user PLC designated tool, that tool's usage time (0 to 4000 minutes) or frequency of use (0 to 65000 times)
is accumulated, and the tool usage state is monitored. The life for up to 1000 tools can be managed.
This function is not controlled by the group No.
IB-1501505-C 384
14.2.2 Number of Tool Life Management Sets
[M system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

Number of tool life management tools M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
Number of tool life management tools
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(99 sets)
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(128 sets)
(200 sets) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(256 sets)
△ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― △
(400 sets)
△ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
(999 sets)
[L system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

Number of tool life management tools M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ○ ○ ―
(99 sets)
○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ― ― ○
(128 sets)
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(200 sets)
― ― ― ― ○ ○ ― ― ― △
(256 sets)
△ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
(400 sets)
△ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
(999 sets)
385 IB-1501505-C
The number of tools that can be managed for their lives in the case of fixed allocation are shown below. Refer to "14.2.3
Tool Life Management Set Allocation to Part Systems" for details on the arbitrary allocation.
[M system]
Common for part systems or Independent for systems and

Function name
1-part system multi-part system
Number of tool life management tools Divide the number of tools in the system
200 tools
(200 sets) by the number of part systems to
Number of tool life management tools calculate the number of tools in each
400 tools
(400 sets) part system(If there is the remainder,
Number of tool life management tools the remainder is allocated to the first
999 tools part system.)
(999 sets)
[L system]
Common for part systems or Independent for systems and

Function name
1-part system multi-part system
99 tools
(99 sets)
Number of tool life management tools Divide the number of tools in the system
128 tools
(128 sets) by the number of part systems to
Number of tool life management tools calculate the number of tools in each
256 tools
(256 sets) part system(If there is the remainder,
Number of tool life management tools the remainder is allocated to the first
400 tools part system.)
(400 sets)
999 tools
(999 sets)
IB-1501505-C 386
14.2.3 Tool Life Management Set Allocation to Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○
* Variable number of management tools
The number of tool life management tools can be set per part system.
There are two types of the allocation: "Arbitrary allocation" which allocates the number of tool life management tools to
each part system arbitrarily and "Fixed allocation" which automatically allocates the number of tool life management
tools to each part system equally, and the type can be selected using the parameter.
The arbitrary allocation enables the efficient allocation because when a certain part system needs only a small number of
tool life management tools, the rest can be allocated to another part system. If an auxiliary-axis part system does not
need the tool life management at all, the number of tool life management tools can be set 0 in the auxiliary-axis part
system.
"Number of tool life management tools in system" is the total number of tool life management tools of all part systems.
(1) Arbitrary allocation
(a) When the number of tool life management tools is increased in the 1st part system of 4-part system
Number of tool life management tools in Number of tool life management tools in
system [1000 tools] system [1000 tools]

250
400
2nd part system
250
2nd part system
3rd part system 200
250 3rd part system
200
4th part system
250 4th part system
200
(b) When the number of tool life management tools is set "0" to the 3rd part system of 3-part system for use of the
3rd part system as auxiliary-axis part system
Number of tool life management tools in Number of tool life management tools in
system [1000 tools] system [1000 tools]

334
500
2nd part system
333
2nd part system
3rd part system 500
333
3rd part system 0
387 IB-1501505-C
(2) Fixed allocation
Number of tool life management tools in system [1000 tools]

1-part system 2-part system 3-part system 4-part system
1st part 1st part 1st part 1st part

system system system 334 system 250
500 (Note 2)
2nd part
2nd part system 250
999
(Note 1) 2nd part system 333 3rd part
system system 250
500 3rd part
system 4th part
333 system 250
(Note 1) The maximum number of tool life management tools per part system is 999.
(Note 2) If there is any remainder, the remainder is allocated to the 1st part system.
IB-1501505-C 388
14.3 Others
14.3.1 Programmable Current Limitation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function allows the current limit value of the NC axis to be changed to a desired value in the program, and is used
for the workpiece stopper, etc.
The commanded current limit value is designated with a ratio of the limit current to the rated current. The current limit
value can also be set from the setting and display unit.
The validity of the current limit can be selected with the external signal input.
However, the current limit value of the PLC axis cannot be rewritten.
G10 L14 X dn ;
G10 : Current limit input command
L14 : Current limit value setting (+ side/- side)
X : Axis address
dn : Current limit value 1% to 999%
(1) If the current limit is reached when the current limit is valid, the current limit reached signal is output.
(2) The following two modes can be used with external signals as the operation after the current limit is reached.
- Normal mode
The movement command is executed in the current state.
During automatic operation, the movement command is executed to the end, and then the next block is
moved to with the droops still accumulated.
- Interlock mode
The movement command is blocked (internal interlock).
During automatic operation, the operation stops at the corresponding block, and the next block is not
moved to.
During manual operation, the following same direction commands are ignored.
(3) During the current limit, the droop generated by the current limit can be canceled with external signals.
(Note that the axis must not be moving.)
(4) The setting range of the current limit value is 1% to 999%. Commands that exceed this range will cause a
program error.
(5) If a decimal point is designated with the G10 command, only the integer will be valid.
(Example) G10 L14 X10.123 ; The current limit value will be set to 10%.
(6) For the axis name "C", the current limit value cannot be set from the program (G10 command). To set from the
program, set the axis address with an incremental axis name, or set the axis name to one other than "C".
14.3.2 Auto Power OFF

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This can notify that the control unit's power can be turned OFF after shutting the display unit down (Do not turn the
power OFF.) by entering "automatic power OFF request" signal from user PLC to NC.
(Note) The Mitsubishi Electric-supplied display unit is required.
389 IB-1501505-C
14.3.4 Load Monitoring I

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function aims at detecting tool wear or degradation by detecting and monitoring the actual load (current value) on
spindle and NC axes on a real time basis.
The cutting torques on spindle and NC axes are estimated, and the estimated values are output to the predetermined R
registers in real time. This function can also implement sampling of the estimated cutting torque values.
14.3.5 Power ON/OFF Sequence

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ /― ○ /― ― ― ○ /― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ /― ○ /― ― ― ○ /― ― ― ― ― ―
This function turns the power supply ON/OFF, synchronizing the NC control unit and the HMI screen. This enables the
following:
- The relay which synchronizes the control unit and the personal computer unit when the power supply is turned ON
becomes unnecessary.
- The control unit and the personal computer unit are configured with the same power supply and can be started up at
optimum timing even when they are turned ON at the same time.
- By using the power ON/OFF button of the operation panel side, both the control unit and the personal computer unit
can be started up and their power supply can be turned ON again.
- When the automatic power OFF is performed, NC starts the end processing right after the end processing of the
personal computer unit is completed to reduce the wasteful standby time.
14.3.6 PLC Axis Current Limit

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
This function can set a current limit to the PLC axis as with NC axis. This can be used for the stopper control, etc.
IB-1501505-C 390
15
Safety and Maintenance
391 IB-1501505-C
15 Safety and Maintenance
15.1 Safety Switches
15.1.1 Emergency Stop

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
All operations are stopped by the emergency stop signal input and, at the same time, the drive section is stopped and the
movement of the machine is stopped.
At this time, the READY lamp on the setting and display unit goes OFF and the servo ready signal is turned OFF.
When the emergency stop is cancelled, the reset will be performed. The reset type can be selected in the parameter.
15.1.2 Data Protection Key

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The editing functions such as setting and deleting of data can be prohibited by the data protection key. There are 5 types
of data protection keys, and each data protection key and the data to be protected are as follows:
Data protection key type Description

For protecting the overall tool data and the coordinate system presettings as based on
Data protection key 1
origin setting.
Data protection key 2 For protecting the user parameters and common variables.
Data protection key 3 For protecting the machining programs of NC memory.
Data protection key (memory card) For protecting the data on the front-side SD (memory card).
Data protection key (DS) For protecting the data on the back-side SD (DS).
The data protection keys prohibit the editing functions such as setting and deleting when the keys are OFF (0).
IB-1501505-C 392
15.2 Display for Ensuring Safety
15.2.1 NC Warning
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The warnings which are output by the NC system are listed below. When one of these warnings has occurred, a warning
number is output to the PLC and a description of the warning appears on the screen. Operation can be continued without
taking further action.
Type of warning Description

Servo warning The servo warning is displayed.
Spindle warning The spindle warning is displayed.
System warning The system warning is displayed. (State such as temperature rise, battery voltage low, etc.)
Absolute position
A warning in the absolute position detection system is displayed.
warning
Auxiliary axis warning The auxiliary axis warning is displayed.
15.2.2 NC Alarm
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The alarms which are output by the NC system are listed below. When one of these alarms has occurred, an alarm
number is output to the PLC, and a description of the alarm appears on the screen. Operation cannot be continued
without taking remedial action.
Type of alarm Description

This alarm occurring due to incorrect operation by the operator during NC operation and that by
Operation alarm
machine trouble are displayed.
Servo alarm This alarm describes errors in the servo system such as the servo drive unit motor and encoder.
This alarm describes errors in the spindle system such as the spindle drive unit motor and
Spindle alarm
encoder.
MCP alarm An error has occurred in the drive unit and other interfaces.
This alarm is displayed on the screen with the register at the time when the error occurred if the
System alarm
system stops due to a system error.
Absolute position detection system
An alarm in the absolute position detection system is displayed.
alarm
Auxiliary axis alarm The auxiliary axis alarm is displayed.
Computer link error The computer link alarm is displayed.
User PLC alarm The user PLC alarm is displayed.
This alarm occur during automatic operation, and the cause of this alarm is mainly program errors
Program error which occur, for instance, when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining
programs or when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared.
Network service error The network service alarm is displayed.
393 IB-1501505-C
15.2.3 Operation Stop Cause

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The stop cause of automatic operation is displayed on the setting and display unit.
15.2.4 Emergency Stop Cause

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When "EMG" (emergency stop) message is displayed in the operation status display area of the setting and display unit,
the emergency stop cause can be confirmed.
15.2.5 Thermal Detection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When overheating is detected in the control unit, an overheat signal is output at the same time as the alarm is displayed.
If the system is in automatic run at the time, run is continued, but it cannot be started after reset or completion by M02/
M30. (It can be started after block stop or feed hold.)
When the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the alarm is released and the overheat signal is turned
OFF.
The overheat alarm occurs at 80 C or more in the control unit.
Control unit
Overheat detection
Parameter
Temperature Message display
alarm
(Default: valid)
(a temperature of 80 C) Bit device
Cooling fan rotation

Lamp alarm
User PLC
Emergency stop
Others
(Note 1) If the parameter is used to set the temperature rise detection function to invalid, overheating may occur,
thereby disabling control and possibly resulting in the axes running out of control, which in turn may result in
machine damage and/or bodily injury or destruction of the unit. It is for this reason that the detection function is
normally left "valid" for operation.
IB-1501505-C 394
15.2.6 Battery Alarm/Warning

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When it is time for changing batteries, alarm or warning is displayed.

When a warning is displayed, immediately backup all the necessary data and change batteries.
When an alarm is displayed, there is a possibility that memory has been lost.
395 IB-1501505-C
15.3 Protection
15.3.1 Stroke End (Over Travel)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When limit switches and dogs have been attached to the machine and a limit switch has kicked a dog, the movement of
the machine is stopped by the signal input from the limit switch.
At the same time, the alarm output is sent to the machine.
The stroke end state is maintained and the alarm state is released by feeding the machine in the reverse direction in the
manual mode to disengage the dog.
15.3.2 Stored Stroke Limit

The areas where tool entry is prohibited can be set.
The stored stroke limits I, II, IIB, IB and IC are handled as follows.
Prohibited
Type Explanation
range
- Set by the machine tool builder.
I Outside
- When used with II, the narrow range designated by the two types becomes the movement valid range.
II Outside - Set by the user.
- By using the program command, the parameter can be changed and the function can be switched to ON/
IIB Inside OFF.
- Select II or IIB with the parameters.
IB Inside - Set by the machine tool builder.
IC Outside - Set by the machine tool builder.
IB-1501505-C 396
15.3.2.1 Stored Stroke Limit I/II

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Stored Stroke Limit I

This is the stroke limit function used by the machine tool builder, and the area outside the set limits is the
entrance prohibited area.
The maximum and minimum values for each axis can be set by parameters. The function itself is used
together with the stored stroke limit II function described in the following section, and the tolerable area of both
functions is the movement valid range.
The setting range is -99999.999 to +99999.999mm.
The stored stroke limit I function is made valid not immediately after the controller power is turned ON but after
reference position return.
The stored stroke limit I function will be invalidated if the maximum and minimum values are set to the same
data.
Prohibited area 1
Prohib- Prohib-
ited ited The position of points 1 and 2 are
Machine movement area set using the machine coordinate.
area
valid range
: Prohibited area
2 Prohibited area
"-" setting
Feedrate "+" setting
1: Point 1
2: Point 2
All axes will decelerate and stop if an alarm occurs even for a single axis during automatic operation. Only the
axis for which the alarm occurs will decelerate and stop during manual operation. The stop position must be
before the prohibited area.
The value of distance "L" between the stop position and prohibited area differs according to the feed rate and
other factors.
The range of the stored stroke limit Ⅰ can be changed to the value set to R register for each axis. When
"Stored stroke limit I change request" signal is turned ON, the range of stored stroke limit changes. Changing
the area for the stored stroke limit Ⅰ is also possible during automatic operation. Also, the current settings for
the stored stroke limit Ⅰ can be checked by with the R register values.
This feature allows an operator to switch the range of the stored stroke limit I during axis movement for the
purpose of tool exchange, for example.
397 IB-1501505-C
(2) Stored Stroke Limit II

This is the stroke limit function which can be set by the user, and the area outside the set limits is the
prohibited area.
The maximum and minimum values for each axis can be set by parameters. The function itself is used
together with the stored stroke limit I function described in the foregoing section, and the tolerable area of both
functions is the movement valid range.
The setting range is -99999.999 to +99999.999mm.
The stored stroke limit II function will be invalidated if the maximum and minimum parameter values are set to
the same data.
Prohibited area 1
Machine coordinate M
Area system Prohibited
Prohib- prohibited
area
ited by stored Machine movement The position of points 3 and 4 are set
area stroke limit valid range with the machine coordinate.
function II The area determined by points 1 and
2 is the prohibited area set with
stored stroke limit I.
4
: Prohibited area
2
"-" setting +
"+" setting
Feed rate
L
1: Point 1
2: Point 2
3: Point 3
4: Point 4
All axes will decelerate and stop if an alarm occurs even for a single axis during automatic operation. Only the
axis for which the alarm occurs will decelerate and stop during manual operation. The stop position must be
before the prohibited area.
The value of distance "L" between the stop position and prohibited area differs according to the feed rate and
other factors.
The stored stroke limit II function can also be invalidated with the parameter settings.
IB-1501505-C 398
15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Three areas where tool entry is prohibited can be set using the stored stroke limit I, stored stroke limit II, IIB and stored
stroke limit IB functions.

The area determined by points 1 and 2 is
3 the prohibited area set with stored stroke
limit I.
Machine movement The area determined by points 3 and 4 is
Prohibited Pro- Prohibited
valid range the prohibited area set with stored stroke
area hibited area
area 5 limit IIB.
Prohibited The area determined by points 5 and 6 is
area the prohibited area set with stored stroke
limit IB.
6
4
1: Point 1
2: Point 2
3: Point 3
4: Point 4
5: Point 5
6: Point 6
When an attempt is made to move the tool beyond the set range, an alarm is displayed, and the tool decelerates and
stops.
If the tool has entered into the prohibited area and an alarm has occurred, it is possible to move the tool only in the
opposite direction to the direction in which the tool has just moved.
(Note 1) Bear in mind that the following will occur if the same data is set for the maximum and minimum value of the
tool entry prohibited area:
(1) When zero has been set for the maximum and minimum values, tool entry will be prohibited in the whole area.
(2) If a value other than zero has been set for both the maximum and minimum values, it will be possible for the
tool to move in the whole area.
15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
A parameter is used to switch between this function and stored stroke limit II. With stored stroke limit IIB, the range inside
the boundaries which have been set serves as the tool entry prohibited area.
399 IB-1501505-C
15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
The boundary is set for each axis with the parameters. The inside of the set boundary is the additional movement range.
This cannot be used with stored stroke limit IB.
M
The position of points 3 and 4
are set with the machine
Prohibited coordinate.
Prohibited
Machine movement area The area determined by points 1
area
valid range and 2 is the prohibited area set
3 with stored stroke limit I. :
Prohibited area
2 Additional movement
range
1: Point 1
2: Point 2
3: Point 3
4: Point 4
IB-1501505-C 400
15.3.3 Stroke Check before Travel

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
This function detects an error of the program command which causes the machine to enter the prohibited area where
machine entry is prohibited.
Whereas normal stored stroke limit stops the machine just before the set prohibited area, this function causes the
program error to occur in a block where the said command is given, and stops the machine before movement. This
facilitates review of program paths as well as continuous operation.
There are two methods for stroke check before travel, which can be selected with a parameter.
(1) Stroke check before travel (G22/G23)

G22 allows you to set the entry prohibited area (X, Y and Z) and enable the stroke check before travel.
The program error occurs in a command block whose start or end point of travel, or linear or circular path enters the
prohibited area.
G23 turns OFF the check function.
This method can be used for machining center specification only.
Y
Entry prohibited area specified by G22
The program error stops

Traveling path enters
the operation before start
the prohibited area.
of the travel command
Basic machine block.
coordinate system
0 X
Command format
Stroke check before travel ON
G22 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__ ;

X,Y,Z (*1) : Coordinates of upper point (basic axis name and its coordinate position)
I,J,K : Coordinates of lower point (I,J,K address and its coordinate position)
(*1) In the command format, the basic axes are X, Y and Z. Command the basic axis set in the parameter.
Stroke check before travel cancel
G23 ;
401 IB-1501505-C
(2) Stroke check before travel in the stored stroke limit area
The block in which the end point of the movement command enters the entrance prohibited area set with the stored
stroke limit I, IB, IC II or IIB function becomes a program error.
Y
End point enters the
prohibited area.
The program error stops the

operation before start of the
travel command block.
Basic machine
coordinate system
0 X
Entry prohibited area specified by stored stroke limit I
IB-1501505-C 402
15.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Check

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
By limiting the tool nose point move range, this function prevents the tool from colliding with the chuck or tailstock
because of a programming error. When a move command exceeding the area set in a given parameter is programmed,
the tool is stopped at the barrier boundaries.
Program format
G22 ; ..... Barrier ON

G23 ; ..... Barrier OFF (cancel)
(1) When the machine is about to exceed the area, the machine is stopped and an alarm is displayed. To cancel
the alarm, execute reset.
(2) The function is also effective when the machine is locked.
(3) This function is valid when all axes for which a barrier has been set have completed reference position return.
(4) The chuck barrier/tailstock barrier can be set per each part system.
(5) Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier setting.
X X P4
P4
P1
P1 (P0) P5 (P0) P5
P2
P2 P6
P6
P3 P3
P0 P0 Z
Z
( Form 1 ) ( Form 2 )
The chuck barrier and tailstock barrier are both set with the machine coordinate by inputting one set of three-point data in
the parameter. Points P1, P2 and P3 are the chuck barrier, and points P4, P5 and P6 are the tailstock barrier. The X axis
is set with the coordinate position (radius value) from the workpiece center, and the Z axis is set with the basic machine
coordinate system coordinate.
Point P0 is the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier's basic X coordinates, and the workpiece center coordinate in the basic
machine coordinate system is set.
The barrier area is assumed to be symmetrical for the Z axis, and if the X axis coordinate of barrier point P_ is minus, the
sign is inverted to plus and the coordinate is converted for a check.
Set the absolute values of the X axis coordinates of the barrier points as shown below:
P1 >= P2 >= P3, P4 >= P5 >= P6
(However, this need not apply to the Z axis coordinates.)
403 IB-1501505-C
15.3.5 Interlock
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The machine movement will decelerate and stop as soon as the interlock signal, serving as the external input, is turned
ON.
When the interlock signal is turned OFF, the machine starts moving again.
(1) In the manual mode, only that axis for which the interlock signal is input will stop.
(2) In the automatic mode, all axes will stop when the interlock signal is input to even one axis which coincides with the
moving axis.
(3) Block start interlock
While the block start interlock signal (*BSL) is OFF (valid), the execution of the next block during automatic
operation will not be started. The block whose execution has already commenced is executed until its end.
Automatic operation is not suspended. The commands in the next block are placed on standby, and their execution
is started as soon as the signal is turned ON.
(Note 1) This signal is valid for all blocks including internal operation blocks such as fixed cycles.
(Note 2) This signal (*BSL) is set ON (invalid) when the power is turned ON. If it is not used, there is no need to make a
program with the PLC.
(4) Cutting start interlock
While the cutting start interlock signal (*CSL) is OFF (valid), the execution of all movement command blocks except
positioning during automatic operation will not be started. The block whose execution has already commenced is
executed until its end. Automatic operation is not suspended. The commands in the next block are placed on
standby, and their execution is started as soon as the signal is turned ON.
(Note 1) The signal is valid for all blocks including internal operation block such as fixed cycles.
(Note 2) This signal (*CSL) is set ON (invalid) when the power is turned ON. If it is not used, there is no need to make a
program with the PLC.
15.3.6 External Deceleration

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function reduces the feed rate to the deceleration speed set by the parameter when the external deceleration input
signal, which is the external input from the user PLC, has been set to ON. External deceleration input signals are
provided for each axis and for each movement direction ("+" and "-"), and a signal is valid when the signal in the direction
coinciding with the direction of the current movement has been input. When an axis is to be returned in the opposite
direction, its speed is returned immediately to the regular speed assigned by the command.
When non-interpolation positioning is performed during manual operation or automatic operation, only the axis for which
the signal that coincides with the direction of the current movement has been input will decelerate.
However, with interpolation during automatic operation, the feed rate of the axis will be reduced to the deceleration rate if
there is even one axis for which the signal that coincides with the direction of current movement has been input.
The external deceleration input signal can be canceled using a parameter for the cutting feed only.
IB-1501505-C 404
15.3.7 Interference Check III

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
By checking the relative relation between interference objects, the interference can be prevented from occurring.
One interference object is defined by one to sixteen tridimensional objects.
The maximum definable number is 128 for the interference objects and is 256 for the tridimensional objects.
Solids/interference objects Number

Solid interference objects 256
Number of defined interference objects 128
Number of solids which can be used for one interference object 16
Up to 16 interference objects out of 128 can be selected for the interference check. The number of solids which can be
used in the selected interference object is 42 in total.
Solids/interference objects to be checked Number

Number of interference objects which can be checked 16
The total of solids which can be used in the interference object to be checked 42
Select 16 interference objects to be checked by the R register or the system variable.
405 IB-1501505-C
For the solids, two kinds of shapes, cuboids and cylinders, can be defined.
It is also possible to define the rotated solid for one of the I J K axes of the solid.
For the interfering object, up to 2 axes can be defined as rotary axes.
You are able to define more than one interfering object with one-rotary axis, and one interfering object with two-rotary
axis within 16 interfering objects to perform the interference check.
You are not able to define the interfering object with one-rotary axis and interfering object with two-rotary axis at the
same time.
2 kinds of areas can be defined for an interference area defined as the interfering object: an area where interference
must be avoided surely (interference alarm area) and an area where interference should be mitigated (interference
warning area)
The schematic view of interfering object definition
1st interfering object

I axis 2nd interfering object I axis
2nd part system 1st part system
Solid Solid
dimension dimension
Rotation
2nd interfering center offset
model
Coordinate system Configured solid J axis
offset Configured solid
offset offset
1st interfering model
Coordinate system
2nd part system offset 1st part system
machine coordinate machine coordinate
K axis K axis 1st part system

Machine coordinate
2nd part system
system zero point
Machine coordinate
J axis 1st part system
system zero point 2nd part system
zero point offset
zero point offset
Base machine coordinate zero point
IB-1501505-C 406
15.3.8 3D Machine Interference Check

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The machine pre-reads the position to be moved during the operation to check the interference by the 3D model
(machine, tool and jig) registered in advance. When an interference is predicted, the an alarm will be shown immediately
and all the axes will be decelerated to stop.
The actual positional relation between the tool position and the interference check position
Movement direction
Current tool position

Before machine
interference Pre-read position
Pre-read position
Movement direction
At the time of machine Current tool position

interference
Interference
Decelerate and stop
Also, since the 3D model is shown on the 3D monitor screen in real time, the actual positional relation of the machine can
be figured out. When the interference occurs, the interference part in the 3D model will be shown in yellow or red. The
interference check is performed between the following:
- machine and machine
- machine and tool
- machine and jig
- tool and jig
The interference check is not performed between the machine and the workpiece. This function is dedicated to the
machining center in single part system.
(Note) The software sold separately is required to create the 3D model.
407 IB-1501505-C
15.3.9 Door Interlock
15.3.9.1 Door Interlock I

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Outline of function)
Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards (machine directive), the opening of any protection
doors while a machine is actually moving is prohibited.
When the door open signal is input from the PLC, this function first decelerates and stops all the control axes,
establishes the ready OFF status, and then shuts off the drive power inside the servo drive unit so that the motors are no
longer driven.
When the door open signal has been input during automatic operation, the suspended machining can be resumed by
first closing the door concerned and then initiating cycle start again.
(Description of operation)
When a door is open
The NC system operates as follows when the door open signal is input:
(1) It stops operations.
(a) When automatic operation was underway
The machine is set to the feed hold mode, and all the axes decelerate and stop.
The spindle also stops.
(b) When manual operation was underway
All the axes decelerate and stop immediately.
(2) The complete standby status is established.
(3) After all the NC axes and the spindle have stopped, the ready OFF status is established.
(4) The door open enable signal is output.
Release the door lock using this signals at the PLC.
When a door is closed

After the PLC has confirmed that the door has been closed and locked, the NC system operates as follows when the
door open signal is set to OFF.
(5) All the axes are set to ready ON.
(6) The door open enable signal is set to OFF.
IB-1501505-C 408
Resuming operation
(7) When automatic operation was underway
Press the cycle start button.
Operation now resumes from the block in which machining was suspended when the door open signal was
input.
(8) When manual operation was underway
Axis movement is commenced when the axis movement signals are input again.
(9) Spindle rotation
Restore the spindle rotation by inputting the forward rotation or reverse rotation signal again: this can be done
either by operations performed by the operator or by using the user PLC.
(10) Chopping operation
Input the chopping signal again after returning the chopping axis to the basic point.
If the axis is not returned to the basic point, chopping operation will be resumed from the position where the
chopping signal is input again.
(11) When the spindle/C axis exists
If the switching method of the spindle/C axis is PLC signal method and the "Door open signal" is input in the C
axis mode, the mode shifts to the spindle mode. Operations when the "Door open signal" is set to OFF differ
depending on the parameter setting value.
409 IB-1501505-C
15.3.9.2 Door Interlock II

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Outline of function)
Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards (machine directive), the opening of any protection
doors while a machine is actually moving is prohibited.
When the door open signal is input from the PLC, this function first decelerates and stops all the control axes,
establishes the ready OFF status, and then shuts off the drive power inside the servo amplifiers so that the motors are no
longer driven.
With the door interlock function established by the door open II signal, cycle start can be enabled even when the door
open signal has been input. However, the axes will be set to the interlock status.
(Description of operation)
When a door is open
The NC system operates as follows when the door open II signal is input:
(1) It stops operations.
All the axes decelerate and stop.
(2) The complete standby status is established.
(3) After all the NC axes and the spindle have stopped, the ready OFF status is established.
However, the servo ready finish signal (SA) is not set to OFF.
When a door is closed

After the PLC has confirmed that the door has been closed and locked, the NC system operates as follows when the
door open signal is set to OFF.
(4) All the axes are set to ready ON.
(5) The door open enable signal is set to OFF.
Resuming operation
(6) When automatic operation was underway
The door open signal is set to OFF, and after the ready ON status has been established for all the axes,
operation is resumed.
(7) When manual operation was underway
Axis movement is commenced when the axis movement signals are input again.
(8) Spindle rotation
Restore the spindle rotation by inputting the forward rotation or reverse rotation signal again: this can be done
either by operations performed by the operator or by using the user PLC.
(Note) Concerning the handling of an analog spindle
The signals described in this section are valid in a system with bus connections for the NC control unit and
drive units. When an analog spindle is connected, the NC system cannot verify that the spindle has come to a
complete stop. This means that the door should be opened after the PLC has verified that the spindle has
come to a complete stop. Since the spindle may resume its rotation immediately after the door has been
closed, set the forward and reverse rotation signals to OFF when opening the door so as to ensure safety.
(9) Chopping operation
The door open signal is turned OFF, and after the ready ON status has been established, operation is
resumed.
The basic point when resuming the operation is the same as where the chopping signal is turned ON.
(10) When the spindle/C axis exists
If the switching method of the Spindle/C axis is PLC signal method and the "Door open II signal" is input in the
C axis mode, the mode shifts to the spindle mode. Operations when the "Door open II signal" is set to OFF
differ depending on the parameter setting value.
IB-1501505-C 410
(Note) When emergency stop occurs with the spindle forward run start signal or spindle reverse run start signal ON,
the spindle rotation does not restart even if the emergency stop is cancelled.
Note, however, that if you turn ON the door open II signal during emergency stop (or if emergency stop occurs
with the door open II signal ON), and then you cancel the emergency stop before turning OFF the said signal,
the spindle rotation restarts. (When the door open II signal is turned OFF first, the rotation does not restart.)
Differences from door interlock I

(1) The method used to stop the machine during automatic operation is the same as with the axis interlock
function.
(2) The servo ready finish signal (SE) is not set to OFF.
(3) Cycle start is valid during door interlock. However, the interlock takes effect for the axis movements.
(4) When the door interlock function (door open signal ON) is initiated during axis movement, the axes decelerate
and stop.
(5) When the door interlock function (door open signal) is set to OFF, the axis movement resumes.
(6) When the door interlock function (door open signal) is set to ON and OFF in the chopping operation, the
chopping operation resumes.
411 IB-1501505-C
15.3.10 Parameter Lock

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function is used to prohibit changing the machine parameter.
15.3.11 Program Protection (Edit Lock B, C)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The edit lock function B or C inhibits machining program B or C (group with machining program numbers) from being
edited or erased when these programs require to be protected.
Machining program A
1 ~ 7999
Machining program B (User-prepared
standard subprogram)
8000 ~ 8999 Editing is inhibited Editing is inhibited by data

by edit lock B. protect.
Machining program C (Machine tool
Editing is inhibited
builder customized program)
by edit lock C.
9000 ~ 9999
Machining program A
10000 ~ 99999999
15.3.12 Program Display Lock

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function allows the display of only a target program (label address 9000) to be invalidated for the program display in
the monitor screen, etc.
The operation search of a target program can also be invalidated.
The validity of the display is selected with the parameters. The setting will be handled as follows according to the value.
0: Display and search are possible.

1: Display of the program details is prohibited.
2: Display and operation search of the program details are prohibited.
15.3.13 Data Protection by User's Level

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
Up to 8 levels of access permission helps to prevent you from dispatching defective works.
On the protection setting screen, the current operation level can be displayed and changed, and the password for the
operation level and the protection level for each data can be changed.
IB-1501505-C 412
15.3.15 Vertical Axis Pull-up

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When emergency stop or power interruption occurs, motor brake and vertical axis drop prevention function is supposed
to work to prevent vertical axis (such as Z axis of vertical machining center) from dropping. However, there might be a
case that the vertical axis drops by several μm because of decrepitude of motor brake.
Therefore, emergency stop or the power interruption during finish machining at low speed might cause damage to the
cutting tool in operation.
Vertical axis pull-up function prevents the tool from breakage, through pulling up the cutting tool during emergency stop
or instantaneous power interruption at low cutting speed.
15.3.16 Machine Group-based Alarm Stop

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
When an alarm occurs for an axis, this function performs an alarm stop only for the axes in a machine group to which the
axis belongs. When this function is used in a lathe system, even though an alarm occurs for the loader axis, the
operation can be continued if the servo axis and the spindle have been set in a different machine group from the loader
axis as illustrated below. Without this function, the alarm stop is performed for all the axes when an alarm occurs.
NC Servo axis Spindle Loader Alarm
Without
this Stop Stop
function
Stop
Group 1 Group 2
NC Servo axis Spindle Loader Alarm
With
this
function
Stop
Group 1 Group 2
413 IB-1501505-C
Likewise, when this function is used in a machining center system, the axes belonging to a different machine group from
the axis for which an alarm has occurred can continue the operation as illustrated below. Without this function, the alarm
stop is performed for all the axes when an alarm occurs.
NC Servo axis Spindle Servo axis Spindle
Alarm
Without Stop Stop
this
Stop
function
Stop
Group 1 Group 2
NC Servo axis Spindle Servo axis Spindle
Alarm
With Stop
this
function
Stop
Group 1 Group 2
(Note) The machining group number can be set for each servo axis and spindle in this function, and incorrect setting
may lead to accidents. Set the machine group number with enough care.
IB-1501505-C 414
15.3.17 Interference Check Between Part Systems

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
* Maximum 4 part systems
This function checks the relative position of up to six cuboids (referred to as interfering objects) all the time, and if a
command which causes the interfering objects to collide with each other is issued, the function stops the axis movement
to prevent the interference in advance.
Such interference can be prevented by covering the tool post, etc. with cuboids. Because the check is performed for axis
movement of all part systems, interference between tool posts which are positioned in difference part systems can be
prevented.
This is valid for the L-system configured with two or more part systems.
<Interference check between part systems OFF> <Interference check between part systems ON>
1st interfering object
2nd interfering object
Collision
Detects interfering movement
Stops the axis movement
415 IB-1501505-C
15.3.18 Spindle Protection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
By setting the temperature to start/cancel the spindle protection, acceleration/deceleration time constant of the spindle is
changed automatically when the spindle is overloaded and the operation is continued while suppressing overheating of
the spindle.
This is effective in protecting the spindle when the spindle is overloaded by repeated acceleration/deceleration of the
spindle.
The equivalent load ratio of spindle motor is determined by calculating the average output of spindle motor from the start
of cycle operation to the next cycle operation and showing the average output as a percentage of the continuous rated
output. The ratio is output to the ZR register and the drive monitor (item name: Duty value).
The log file can be used to analyze the operating environment of spindle motor and to detect a decrease in cooling
capacity caused by dirt or clogging of spindle motor cooling fan.
While the same machining program is operated continuously, if the equivalent load ratio of last operation exceeds the
threshold at the start of cycle operation, a warning is displayed.
IB-1501505-C 416
15.4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
15.4.1 Operation History

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This is a maintenance function which is useful for tracing down the history and NC operation information and analyzing
trouble, etc. This information is saved in the history data file, and can be displayed on the screen and output to a file.
The machine tool builder password is required to use this function.
The following of history data files are used.

The following contents can be viewed on the edit screen.
- All history:
The key history, touchscreen history, alarm/warning history, PLC signal history, tool offset change history (M800/
M80 Series), workpiece offset change history (M800/M80 Series), program No. history (C80 Series), sequence No.
history (C80 Series) and AC input power OFF history is recorded in date/time order.
- Key history:
Only the key history is recorded in date/time order.
- Touchscreen history:
Only the touchscreen history is recorded in date/time order.
- Detailed alarm history information:
Separately from the existing alarm history, the alarm information, modal information and coordinate information at
the time of the alarm occurrence are recorded in date/time order.
The data sorting order of　the all history data files can be changed by the　parameter.
- In chronologically ascending order for each log type
- In chronologically ascending order for all the log types
(Note) If the date and time are the same, the history will be displayed in the following order.Key history
Key history
Touchscreen history
Alarm history
PLC signal history
Tool offset change history (M800/M80 Series)
Workpiece offset change history (M800/M80 Series)
Program No. history (C80 Series)
Sequence No. history (C80 Series)
AC input power OFF history
417 IB-1501505-C
15.4.2 Data Sampling

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The NC internal data (speed output from NC to drive unit, feedback data from the drive unit, etc.) can be sampled and
the data can be output as text data.
The type of sampling NC internal data and sampling conditions are input on the screen as the sampling parameter. The
sampling parameter can be input/output with the sampling data as the header information of the sampling data.The
parameter can be used to set whether the sampling starts when the power is turned ON.
Item Specifications
Sampling cycle 1.776 ms × setting value
NC axis: The maximum number of axes usable for specifications
Number of sampled axes
Spindle: The maximum number of spindles usable for specifications
Number of sampled channels 1 to 16 points
Maximum 2,620,416 points
Sampling data size (Note 1) This is the entire data size. The data size per channel will decrease when the
number of sampled channels increases.
15.4.3 NC Data Backup

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The NC data back up function backs up the NC parameters, etc., on a built-in disk of display (HD) unit or SD card.
The data can also be restored.
IB-1501505-C 418
15.4.4 Servo Tuning Support
15.4.4.1 NC Analyzer2
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Note) Please contact us to purchase this tool.

Servo parameters can be automatically adjusted by measuring/analyzing the machine characteristics. The
measurement/analysis is conducted by activating the motor using machining programs for adjustment or vibration
signals. Various data can be sampled.
Control unit Drive unit
NC Analyzer2
419 IB-1501505-C
<Functions>
Adjustment wizard Description
Velocity loop gain adjustment Automatically adjusts velocity loop gain and resonance filters.
Lost motion adjustment Adjusts the lost motion automatically for the delay in responsecaused when the direction of
the machine rotates is reversed.
Measurement and adjustment Description

Frequency response measurement Measures the frequency response of speed loop for the designated axis. The result will be
output as frequency response waveform.
Reciprocation acceleration/ Measures the reciprocation acceleration/deceleration for the designated axis. The result will
deceleration measurement be output as time-series waveform. (*1)
Roundness measurement Measures the roundness for the designated axis. The result will be output as roundness
waveform. (*1)
Synch tap error measurement Measures the synchronous tap error for the designated axis. The result will be output as time-
series waveform.(*1)
Spindle acceleration/deceleration Measures the spindle acceleration/deceleration for the designated axis. The result will be
measurement output as time-series waveform. (*1)
Spindle orientation measurement Measures the spindle orientation for the designated axis. The result will be output as time-
series waveform.(*1)
Spindle C-axis measurement Executes an arbitrary machining program with specified axis, and measures spindle C-axis by
using that data. The result will be output as time-series waveform.
Spindle synchronization Executes an arbitrary machining program with specified axis, and measures spindle
measurement synchronization by using that data. The result will be output as time-series waveform.
PLC axis acceleration/deceleration Executes an arbitrary machining program with specified axis, and measures PLC axis
measurement acceleration/deceleration by using that data. The result will be output as time-series
waveform.
Arbitrary path measurement Executes an arbitrary machining program with specified axis, and measures arbitrary program
by using that data. The result will be output as arbitrary program waveform.
(*1) For the measurement, create a program by the program creation function or use an arbitrary machining program.
IB-1501505-C 420
15.4.5 Automatic Backup

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
With this function, system data, ladder program and custom software can be automatically backed up in case of system
failure. Up to the three most recent backup data can be stored.
The backup execution timing can be set with parameters.
15.4.8 Application Error Detection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ /― ○ /― ― ― ○ /― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ /― ○ /― ― ― ○ /― ― ― ― ― ―
Application error detection function observes applications such as MITSUBISHI standard screen or custom screen.
When an error such as screen lock is detected, this function saves information and data in the log to investigate the
causes easily.
Application error (3) Saving the log which is useful

detection function for the investigation of the causes
(1) Response and

I/O observation
(2) Error detection 1. The application name which
an error is detected
2. Error occurrence time
3. The communication state
between the PC and NC
4. Key and touch panel history
Custom screen
MITSUBISHI
standard Application
screen
Some
cause Custom API library
Control unit
(1) Response from the application and a change of I/O is observed on a periodical basis.
(2) When an application with no response and no change of I/O for a certain period is detected, it is determined
that there is an error.
(3) When an error is detected, the log which is useful for the investigation of the causes will be saved.
421 IB-1501505-C
15.4.9 Email Notification to Operator

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function enables NC to transmit emails to network-connected email servers (SMTP servers). The transmitted emails
can be received by means of email software in PC or mobile phone via email servers. With this function, the NC can
send emails to PCs and mobile terminals away from machines. You are able to know machining conditions (such as
machining completion, stop and failure) even if you are in remote places.
Terminals that receive

NC E-mail server E-mail server
emails
IB-1501505-C 422
15.4.10 NC Configurator2
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
NC Configurator2 achieves the following functions for the multiple NCs connected to the network, or a file in the SD card
or the local disk. Data from up to 8 machines can be handled at a time.
(1) NC Data: Transmit, display, edit and control the data related to the NC machine and parameters for NC control
module side, and transmit, display the machining programs, tools and work.
(2) Function parameter: Support Parameter settings for individual NC function for the users.
(3) RS232C communication function: Offer various functions using the tape mode and serial communication.
Please contact us to purchase a full function version. A limited function version is also available free of charge.
15.4.11 Diagnosis Data Output

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
With this function, the information indicating the replacement cycle of the service parts used in NC, drive or motor can be
output to the ZR registers. This information can be used for the preventive maintenance including life prediction.
C80 outputs the insulation resistance value of each axis motor only.
15.4.12 Backup/Restore
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
This function stores the setting information (sequence programs, parameters and the setting values, etc.) of a connected
device to the installed data storage in GOT, and restores those data to the device as needed.
423 IB-1501505-C
15.5 Functional Safety
15.5.1 Safety Observation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function can be available in the system consisting of the NC control unit and drive unit, and various communication
cables, sensors and contactors.
The followings are available.
- Opens the door without shutting off the drive power of motor.
- Operates at safety speed or lower while the door is opened.
Function Description
The NC control unit and the drive unit separately observe the input of emergency stop. In case of an
Dual emergency stop emergency stop, both the NC control unit and the drive unit (power supply unit) will independently control the
contactors to shut the drive power OFF.
The NC control unit and the drive unit (servo/spindle drive unit) separately observe the following. When an
error is detected during observation, the main power for the drive will be shut OFF.
Speed monitor (1) That the command speed should not exceed the speed set by the parameter (the "safety speed").
(2) That the motor rotation speed should not exceed the rotation speed set by the parameter (the "safety
rotation speed").
Door state signal monitor This observes the door state signal (open or closed) detected with different circuit.
Door open/close check sensor
NC-side door state signal Drive-side door state signal

External emergency
stop A External emergency
NC NC-side door Drive stop B
state signal
Door state Door state
signal signal
Drive-side door
monitor monitor
state signal
Commanded
Speed position Speed
monitor monitor
Contactor control
Feedbacked
position
Feedbacked
rotation speed
MC
Contactor control Contactor
Main power
IB-1501505-C 424
15.5.2 Smart Safety Observation
The smart safety observation function achieves smart and high safety with the following features.
(1) The redundant observation is enabled not only for the door signal but for various signals that require the safety.
(2) Eight new functions including the position observation are added.
(3) Signal wiring is simplified by having redundant PLC signal. (With the conventional safety observation, the signal
wiring is needed for NC and drive units.)
(4) Redundant safety ladder eliminates the need for MTB to prepare the safety unit.
(5) It is possible to make only one ladder of the redundant safety ladder when they serve as the equivalent role. (It is
also possible to make two ladders to have different roles.)
(6) The I/O board equipped with safety signal input terminal is available, which is mounted on the back of the operation
panel. This eliminates the need to mount the safety I/O unit additionally in the operation panel. (M800/M80 Series)
(Note 1) Safety I/O devices (safety RIO unit, operation panel with safety I/O) are required for inputting/outputting safety
signals. Of the I/O device connection channels on NC unit, the channels which input/output safety signals
need to be composed only of safety I/O devices and RIO2.0 units. (RIO1.0 units cannot be connected to I/O
channels which input/output safety signals.) (M800/M80 Series)
(Note 2) In order to input/output the safety signals, the safety signal unit needs to be used. The NC unit and the safety
signal unit need to be connected with the RIO cable. (C80 Series)
(Note 3) For user safety sequence, machine tool builders need to create safety signal process logic and write it to NC
unit.
(Note 4) Of connection channels for each drive unit in NC unit, channels with axes which use "Safety function S" need
to be composed only of drive units of MSD-E Series.
15.5.2.1 Safety-related I/O Observation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
* Safety card is required for M80
Using the dual circuits for processing signals input/output to/from the machine (safety signal compare sequence) and
dual execution of safety signal process logic made by users (safety PLC), if one circuit has broken down, the other circuit
can detect errors, which improves the safety of signal process.
15.5.2.2 Emergency Stop Observation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
Emergency stop signal is doubled and observed to see whether there is any error. When one emergency stop signal is in
open state, the whole system can be set in emergency stop condition.
425 IB-1501505-C
15.5.2.3 Drive Safety Function
15.5.2.3.1 SLS (Safely-Limited Speed)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
Axis speed (command speed, FB speed) is observed doubly to see whether the speed exceeds the safe speed. Four
steps of safe speed and 16 steps of override can be selected. (64 ways of safe speed can be created in total.)
15.5.2.3.2 SLP (Safely-Limited Position)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
Axis absolute position (command position, FB position) is observed doubly to see whether the position exceeds the safe
position range. Safe position range can be selected from 4 levels.
15.5.2.3.3 SOS (Safe Operating Stop)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
SOS is made by performing the following operations simultaneously.

(1) Axis stop speed (command speed, FB speed) is observed doubly whether the speed exceeds the safe stop speed.
(2) Axis stop position (command position, FB position) is observed doubly whether the position exceeds the safe stop
position range.
(3) Axis stop position deviation (difference between command position and FB position) is observed doubly to make
sure that the deviation does not exceed the safe stop position deviation.
15.5.2.3.4 SSM (Safe Speed Monitor)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
This function uses the safety signals to inform that the axis speed (command speed, FB speed) is equal to or below the
safe speed. Up to 4 safe speeds can be set.
IB-1501505-C 426
15.5.2.3.5 SBC/SBT (Safe Brake Control/Safe Brake Test)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
The brakes connected to motors are activated by this function. Because there are two circuits for activating the brakes,
one circuit can activate the brakes even when the other circuit is broken down. Furthermore, Safe Brake Test (SBT) can
diagnose the circuits for activating the breaks and the effectiveness of the brakes (deterioration due to abrasion, etc.).
15.5.2.3.6 SCA (Safe Cam)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
This function uses the safety signals to inform that the axis absolute position (command position, FB position) is within
the range of safe position. Up to 16 sets (16 each for pulse side and minus side) can be set for the safe position range.
15.5.2.3.7 SS1/SS2 (Safe Stop)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
(1) Safe stop 1 (SS1)

STO function is activated after an axis is decelerated and the speed (command speed, FB speed) becomes equal
to or below the safe stop speed. STO function is also activated when the speed does not reach the safe stop speed
within a specified time from the start of deceleration.
(2) Safe stop 2 (SS2)
SOS function is activated after an axis is decelerated and the speed (command speed, FB speed) becomes equal
to or below the safe stop speed. SOS function is also activated when the speed does not reach the safe stop speed
within a specified time from the start of deceleration.
15.5.2.3.8 STO (Safe Torque Off)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ □ □ ― ― △
This function shuts OFF power supply to axes. Because there are two power shutoff circuits, one circuit can shut OFF
the power supply even when the other circuit is broken down. STO also performs fault diagnosis of the shutoff circuits.
427 IB-1501505-C
IB-1501505-C 428
16
Drive System
429 IB-1501505-C
16 Drive System
16.1 Servo/Spindle
Refer to "MITSUBISHI CNC M800W/M800S/M80W Series Specifications List" "MITSUBISHI CNC M80/E80/C80 Series
Specifications List".
Refer to the following manuals for details on the servo and spindle system.
DRIVE SYSTEM DATA BOOK (IB-1501252(ENG))
MDS-E/EH Series Specifications Manual (IB-1501226(ENG))
MDS-EJ/EJH Series Specifications Manual (IB-1501232(ENG))
MDS-EM/EMH Series Specifications Manual (IB-1501238(ENG))
IB-1501505-C 430
17
Machine Support Functions
431 IB-1501505-C
17 Machine Support Functions
17.1 PLC
17.1.1 Built-in PLC Processing Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
An exclusive sequence program that controls the various signals between the controller and machine to realize operation
applicable to each machine can be created and built in.
The sequence execution modes include high-speed processing and main processing.
(1) High-speed processing

This mode provides repeated execution at constant cycles. It is used to process signals requiring high speeds.
The max. number of program steps for high-speed processing (1 period) is 1000 steps when using basic
instructions.
(2) Main processing
This mode provides normal sequence processing. The processing cycle depends on the number of sequence
steps.
17.1.2 PLC Functions
17.1.2.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
[M800/M80 series]
(1) Ladder instructions
Basic instructions (bit processing instructions)
43 instructions including LD, LDI, OR, ORI, AND, ANI, OUT, PLS, etc.
Function instructions
188 instructions including data transfer, 4 basic arithmetic operations, logic arithmetic operations, large/
small identification, binary/BCD conversion, branching, conditional branching, decoding, encoding, etc.
IB-1501505-C 432
(2) Devices
The device range in the following table is the default number of device points set in the project 1 when the
multi-project setting or the setting of the number of device points is not performed.
Device Device No. Unit Details

X* X0 ～ X1FFF (8192 points) 1 bit Input signal to PLC: Machine input, etc.
Y* Y0 ～ Y1FFF (8192 points) 1 bit Output signal from PLC: Machine output, etc.
M M0 ～ M61439 (61440 points) 1 bit Temporary memory
Temporary memory.
F F0 ～ F2047 (2048 points) 1 bit
Alarm message interface
L L0 ～ L1023 (1024 points) 1 bit Latch relay (back up memory)
SM SM0 ～ SM2047 (2048 points) 1 bit Special relay
V V0 ～ V511 (512 points) 1 bit Edge relay
SB SB0 ～ SB3FF (1024 points) 1 bit Special relay
B B0 ～ BDFFF (57344 points) 1 bit Link relay
SW SW0 ～ SW3FF (1024 points) 1 bit Special register
SD SD0 ～ SD204 (2048 points) 16 bit Special register
Timer
1 bit/
T T0 ～ T2047 (2048 points) (The variable/fixed boundary is set with a parameter.)
16 bit
(Note 2)
1 bit/
ST ST0 ～ ST127 (128 points) Integrated timer (100ms unit)
16 bit
1 bit/ Counter (The variable/fixed boundary is set with a
C C0 ～ C511 (512 points)
16 bit parameter.)
16 bit/
D D0 ～ D4095 (4096 points) Data register. Register for calculation
32 bit
16 bit/
R* R0 ～ R32767 (32768 points) File register. CNC word interface
32 bit
16 bit/
ZR ZR0 ～ ZR13311 (13312 points) File register. User release
32 bit
16 bit/
W W0 ～ W2FFF (12288 points) Link register
32 bit
Z Z0 ～ Z13 (14 points) 16 bit Address index
N N0 ～ N14 (15 points) Master controller nesting level
P* P0 ～ P4095 (4096 points) Label for conditional jump, subroutine call command
K-32768 ～ K32767 Decimal constant for 16-bit command
K K-2147483648
Decimal constant for 32-bit command
～ K2147483647
H0 ～ HFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 16-bit command
H
H0 ～ HFFFFFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 32-bit command
(Note 1) Devices marked with * in the device column have designated applications. Do not use devices other than
those corresponding to the input/output signals with the machine side (input/output signals of the remote I/O
unit), even if it is an undefined vacant device.
(Note 2) Distinction of 10ms timer and 100ms timer is performed by command. (10ms timer is performed by OUTH
command, 100ms timer is performed by OUT command.)
433 IB-1501505-C
(3) Timer / counter setting display

(a) PLC timer
The setting value of the timer used by the built-in PLC can be set from the screen on the setting and
display unit.
The timer types include the 10ms, 100ms and 100ms integral types.
Whether to validate the timer in the PLC program or to validate the setting value from the screen can be
selected with the parameters.
Whether to hold the integral timer when the power is turned OFF can also be selected.
(b) PLC counter
The setting value of the counter used by the built-in PLC can be set from this screen.
Whether to validate the constants in the PLC program or to validate the setting value from the screen can
be selected with the parameters.
Whether to hold the counter value when the power is turned OFF can also be selected.
(4) External key input

By inputting the key data from the built-in PLC, the same operation as when the operator operates the
operation board can be done.
(5) Real spindle speed output

The real spindle speed is converted by the signals of the encoder installed on the spindle and is output to the
PLC. The output increment is 0.001r/min.
(6) High speed input/output signal

There are signals that can be input and output at a 3.5ms cycle for high-speed processing.
(a) Input signal ON time
tson
tson ≧ 3.5ms
(b) After the signal output is set in the interface, it can be output to the machine side with a max. 3.5ms delay.
The input also appears on the interface with a 3.5ms delay.
(c) The signals used for high-speed processing are assigned with the parameters. Assignment is possible in
a continuous 16-point unit.
IB-1501505-C 434
(7) PLC analog voltage control

(a) Analog output
When the specified data is put in the file register, the corresponding analog voltage is output from the
analog output external connector.
<Relationship between file register contents and analog output voltage>
10V
- 4095
0
Contents of file register
4095
-10V
Output voltage 0 to ±10V(±5%)

Resolution Full scale (10V)/4095
10kΩ resistance load
Load condition
(standard)
Output impedance 220Ω
(Note) For analog output, the hardware corresponding to analog output is required.
Refer to the PLC Programming Manual for details.
[C80 series]
For the details of C80 series, refer to the manual of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller "MELSEC iQ-R Series".
17.1.2.1.1 Index Modification

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
17.1.2.1.2 Multi-program [Number of Programs]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ 120 ○ 120 ○ 120 ○ 120 ○ 60 ○ 60 ○ 60 ○ 60 ○ 60 △ (*1)
L ○ 120 ○ 120 ○ 120 ○ 120 ○ 60 ○ 60 ○ 60 ○ 60 ○ 60 △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
435 IB-1501505-C
17.1.2.1.3 Multi-project [Number of Projects Stored]
[M system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

PLC project M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
Number of PLC projects: 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○ ○ ○ ―
Number of PLC projects: 3 △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
Number of PLC projects: 6 △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
[L system]
M80 M80 E80 E80

PLC project M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
Number of PLC projects: 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ○ ○ ○ ―
Number of PLC projects: 3 △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
Number of PLC projects: 6 △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
17.1.2.1.4 Function Block (FB)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
17.1.2.1.5 Label Programming

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
IB-1501505-C 436
17.1.2.2 PLC Exclusive Instruction

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
PLC exclusive instruction is provided for certain limited applications, enabling a complex machining process, which is
difficult to carry out only by the basic instructions and function instructions.
[M800/M80 series]
PLC exclusive instructions include:
(1) ATC exclusive instruction (ATC)
This is an instruction to function ATC, or magazine index control, tool exchange with arm, etc.
ATC exclusive instructions are as follows.
- Tool No. search
- Tool change
- Tool table forward/reverse run
- Pointer (which indicates magazine index position) forward/reverse run
- Tool data read/write
(2) Rotary body control instruction (ROT)

This is an instruction to determine the rotary body's target position or rotation direction, or to function as a ring
counter.
This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine or turret based on the
output data figured from ATC exclusive instruction tool No. search processing, or when controlling the rotary body
position.
Using the ATC and ROT instructions

The order for using the ATC and ROT instructions when T is commanded or tool exchange is commanded is
shown below.
T command Tool No. search Matching place No.

ATC K1 Number of Error process
matches
Pointer or ring Tool No. logical search
counter value
ATC K2
Fixed pointer method

Rotary body Turning Ring counter control
index direction Magazine turn
ROT K1 Number of Variable pointer
ROT K3
steps, etc. method Pointer forward run/reverse
run
ATC K5, K6
Tool table forward run/reverse run
ATC K7, K8
Magazine stop Tool change
Tool change ATC K3

command Arbitrary position tool change
ATC K4
437 IB-1501505-C
[C80 series]
PLC exclusive instructions include:
(1) Other device write instruction (DDWR)
This is an instruction to write the data to the device in other machine from the PLC CPU.
(2) Other device read instruction (DDRD)
This is an instruction to read the device data in other machine to the PLC CPU.
PLC exclusive instructions enable to access the device data of NC CPU from the PLC CPU.
PLC exclusive instructions are transferred via the exclusive instruction transmission between CPUs area provided in the
system area on the CPU multi-buffer memory (fixed period communication area).
Also, "D (P)." or "M (P)." can be added before each instruction.
The setting needs to be changed to use the periodic connection function on GX Works3, but since
Periodic instruction, D (P). the periodic instruction is compatible with the old models, it can use the program of the old
models.
This can be used regardless of the setting of the periodic connection function, but since non-
Non-periodic instruction, M (P). periodic instruction is not compatible, the correction needs to be done in order to use the program
of the old model.
The non-periodic instruction "M (P)." is recommended as it can be used regardless of the setting.
17.1.3 PLC Support Functions
17.1.3.1 Alarm Message Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
The contents of the alarms which have occurred during sequence (user PLC) processing can be displayed on the setting
and display unit.
Up to four alarm message displays can be displayed simultaneously on the alarm diagnosis screen. The maximum
length of one message is 46 characters.
17.1.3.2 Operator Message Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (*1)
(*1) Only macro alarm messages are displayed.
When a condition has arisen in which a message is to be relayed to the operator, an operator message can be displayed
separately from the alarm message.
The maximum length of an operator message on PLC message screen is 60 characters. The maximum number of
characters per line is 55, and the message more than 56 characters is displayed on two lines. The number of messages
displayed at the same time are up to four.
IB-1501505-C 438
17.1.3.3 Memory Switch (PLC Switch)
The function equivalent to the machine operation switches can be implemented by using the setting display unit of
controller. Switches can be turned ON/OFF from PLC switch screen and user PLC. Each switch can be named
arbitrarily.
The PLC switch has 32 points as a standard. The switch can be expanded to 64 or 96 points by the additional
specification.
By the PLC switch for reverse, the valid switches by the additional specifications will be reversed.
Even when turning on the PLC switch for reverse, the invalid switches without the additional specification will not be
reversed.
The PLC switch names can be created up to 96 points regardless of the additional specification state.
17.1.3.3.1 Memory Switch (PLC Switch) 32 Points

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
32 points of PLC switches can be set on the setting and display unit screen, and the ON/OFF control executed.
17.1.3.3.2 Memory Switch (PLC Switch) 64 Points

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
17.1.3.3.3 Memory Switch (PLC Switch) 96 points

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
439 IB-1501505-C
17.1.3.4 Load Meter Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A load meter can be displayed on the setting and display unit.

Up to two axes designated with the built-in PLC such as the spindle load and Z axis load can be displayed as bar graphs
on the screen.
17.1.3.5 User PLC Version Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The user PLC version can be displayed in the software list on the Software Configuration screen.
17.1.3.6 Ladder Program Writing during RUN

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
Ladder program can be edited while PLC is running. This function is available, either by GX Developer or PLC onboard
edit. (Only M8)
17.1.3.7 PLC Program Protection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) △ (*2)
L ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) △ (*2)
(*1) Each file

(*2) MELSEC
[M800/M80 series]
For PLC data protection, the file password can be set to each file of PLC data.
The file password of the PLC data stored in NC can be released temporarily with PLC on-board.
(Note 1) The file password registration/change or cancellation can not be made with PLC on-board. Use GX Developer
for these operation.
The file password has the writing attribute (write protection/permission) and the reading attribute (read protection/
permission), and the following operation is prohibited for these attributes.
Write protection: PLC data overwrite and deletion, conversion after editing the ladder
Read/write protection: PLC data overwrite, deletion, read and verification, conversion after editing the ladder
For details, refer to the PLC Development Manual.
[C80 series]
IB-1501505-C 440
17.1.4 Built-in PLC Capacity
17.1.4.1 Standard PLC Capacity [Number of Steps]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ 128000 ○ 128000 ○ 128000 ○ 128000 ○ 64000 ○ 64000 ○ 32000 ○ 20000 ○ 20000 △ (*1)
L ○ 128000 ○ 128000 ○ 128000 ○ 128000 ○ 64000 ○ 64000 ○ 32000 ○ 20000 ○ 20000 △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
17.1.4.2 Large PLC Capacity: 256000 Steps

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
17.1.4.3 Large PLC Capacity: 512000 Steps

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
17.1.5 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
[M800/M80 series]
CAUTION
Follow the remote type machine contact input/output interface described in this manual. (Connect a diode in
parallel with the inductive load or connect a protective resistor in serial with the capacitive load, etc.)
Refer to the "Specifications Manual (Hardware)" for details.
[C80 series]
Selecting from within the input/output unit of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller "MELSEC iQ-R Series". Refer to the
manual of input/output unit for details.
441 IB-1501505-C
17.1.6 Ladder Monitor

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
[M800/M80 series]
This function enables the operating status of the sequence circuit to be checked on the controller's setting and display
unit.
The ladder monitor functions include the following.
(1) Circuit monitoring
(2) Screen stop by monitor stop trigger point
(3) Entry monitoring
(4) Decimal-hexadecimal conversion present value monitoring
[C80 series]
The operation state of sequence circuit can be confirmed on the screen of Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT).
The ladder monitor functions include the following.
(1) Sequence program monitoring (circuit)
(2) Sequence program monitoring (R circuit)
(3) Sequence program monitoring (SFC)
Refer to the manual of Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT) for details.
IB-1501505-C 442
17.1.7 PLC Development
17.1.7.1 On-board Development

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (GOT)
[M800/M80 series]
On-board refers generically to the PLC related operations carried out with the CNC unit.
This is the easy-to-use on-board with the enhanced ladder monitoring functions and improved ladder edit operability by
enhancing the linkage with the MELSEC series sequencer development tool (GX Developer).
[C80 series]
The sequence program can be monitored and edited by the sequence program monitoring of Mitsubishi Graphic
Operation Terminal (GOT).
Refer to the manual of Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT) for details.
17.1.7.2 MELSEC Development Tool (GX Developer)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function enables the data of the PLC contained inside the NC system to be developed and debugged using the GX
Developer installed in a personal computer (OS:Windows).
Many and varied functions of the GX Developer make it possible to reduce the PLC data development and debugging
time.
17.1.7.3 MELSEC Development Tool (GX Works3)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
Using GX Works3, the sequence programs of the MELSEC CPU can be developed and debugged.
(Note) The software sold separately is necessary.
443 IB-1501505-C
17.1.8 PLC Parameter

The PLC constants set with the data type and the bit selection parameters set with bit types can be set from the screen
as parameters used by the built-in PLC.
17.1.8.1 PLC Constant (150 Points)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17.1.8.2 PLC Constant Extension (Up to 755 Points)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ― ― ― ―
There are PLC constants that can be set with data types as parameters used by the built-in PLC. The set data is set in
the R register of the PLC and backed up. If data is set in the R register corresponding to the PLC constant with sequence
program MOV commands, etc., the data will be backed up in the PLC constant parameter. However, the display will not
change, so enter another screen, and then select this screen again.
The number of PLC constants is 150 points in the basic area and 755 points at the maximum in the extended area.
IB-1501505-C 444
17.1.9 GOT Connection
This function connects and communicates between Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT) and MITSUBISHI
CNC.
Only GOT2000 series can be connected. Soft GOT 2000 can be connected, too.
There are two connection methods for GOT connection, Ethernet connection and CC-Link connection.
For details, refer to each manual of GOT.
[M800/M80 series]
Operation and monitoring from GOT to PLC device of the NC can be performed, and GOT can be used as a sub monitor
of peripheral operation panel or NC operation panel.
M800/M80 series GOT2000 series
Operation of PLC device
Monitoring PLC device
[C80 series]
To display the dedicated screen for CNC (CNC monitor2 function), connect the DISPLAY interface of NC CPU.
In addition, the size of GTO supports SVGA and VGA.
17.1.9.1 Ethernet Connection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17.1.9.2 CC-Link Connection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
17.1.9.3 CC-Link IE Field Connection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― △ (*1)
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
445 IB-1501505-C
17.1.10 Pallet Program Registration

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Pallet program function allows machining program to be registered for each pallet of the auto pallet changer (hereinafter
referred to as APC) and assists in the machining setups.
Operation search for the registered program will be executed by PLC using the external search function.
Machining program for each pallet is registered at "Pallet program registration" screen in the setup screen group.
Registered program is output to PLC device.
If necessary, execute an external search on PLC ladder by referring to the program No. registered for each pallet.
PLC device
Pallet program
registration interface
HMI system
Pallet 1
Pallet program
registration Machining
program No.
screen
Pallet 2
Operation
program No. PLC
External search
interface
Device 1
Program No.
..
.
NC
main system
IB-1501505-C 446
17.2 Machine Construction
17.2.1 Servo OFF

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the servo OFF signal (per axis) is input, the corresponding axis is set in the servo OFF state.
When the moving axis is mechanically clamped, this function is designed to prevent the servomotor from being
overloaded by the clamping force.
Even if the motor shaft should move because of some reason in the servo OFF state, the movement amount will be
compensated in the next servo ON state by one of the following two methods. (You can select the compensation method
using a parameter.)
(1) The counter is corrected according to the movement amount (follow up function).
(2) The motor is moved according to the counter and compensated.
When follow up function is designated, the movement amount will be compensated even in the emergency stop state.
The axis is simultaneously set to servo OFF state and the interlock state.
Mechanical handle
Even if the servo OFF axis is moved with the mechanical handle with the application of the servo OFF function and follow
up function, the position data can be constantly read in and the machine position updated. Thus, even if the axis is
moved with the mechanical handle, the coordinate position display will not deviate.
447 IB-1501505-C
17.2.2 Axis Detachment

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables the control axis to be freed from control. Conversely, an axis which has been freed from control
can be returned to the control status.
This function enables the rotary table or attachments to be removed and replaced. Automatic operation is disabled until
the axis for which the axis detach command has been released completes its dog-type reference position return.
C-axis/turning table
This shows the configuration of

a machine for which switching
Rotary magnetic between the C axis and turning
(Position feedback) table is performed. When the
scale
spindle motor is connected, the
(OFF with C-axis C axis is placed in the detached
control ) status.
As a result, the position
C-axis feedback of the detector is
Spindle motor ignored.
motor
(Coupled with C-axis control)
Spindle C-axis
drive drive
unit unit
POSITION The detached status > < is indicated on the right of the POSITION display on the
X 123.456 POSITION screen and at the same time the servo ready for the controller output
Z 0.000#1 signal is set to OFF. The POSITION counter retains the value applying when detach
C 345.678>< was assigned.
(Note) Axis detach can be executed even for the absolute position detection specifications axis, but when the axis is
reinstalled, the zero point must be set.
IB-1501505-C 448
17.2.3 Synchronous Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
The synchronous control is a control method that both master and slave axes are controlled with the same movement
command by designated the movement command for the master axis also to the slave axis. This function is assumed to
be used in the large machine tool, etc. which drives one axis with two servo motors.
The axis for the base of the synchronization is called the master axis, and the axis according to the master axis is called
the slave axis.
(Note 1) The axis detach function cannot be added to the axes used in the synchronous control.
(Note 2) The control axis synchronization between part systems and the synchronous control cannot be used
simultaneously. (L system)
- The slave axis is controlled with the movement command for the master axis.
- One slave axis can be set to one master axis.
- Up to 3 sets of master axis /slave axis can be set in total for all the part systems.
Y V
Master axis Slave axis
449 IB-1501505-C
There are 3 types of synchronous control as follows:
(1) Position command synchronous control

This is used when the machine's rigidity is low.
This conforms the position command of the master axis to that of the slave axis using the synchronous control
function of NC and drive those axes in parallel.
This can be used only by changing the NC setting, without changing the settings in the servo drive unit.
Position command synchronous control diagram
CNC Master axis

Compensation
Drive unit M
Position
command Detector
Compensation
Slave axis
M
Drive unit
Detector
The position command synchronous control has the following configuration:
Position command synchronous Synchronous Synchronous operation

control control mode
Independent operation
Correction mode
IB-1501505-C 450
(2) Speed command synchronous control

This is used when reducing the scale of the full-closed system or when the machine's rigidity, etc. cause the
mutual interference to the axes positions.
This drives the master axis and the slave axis in parallel using the common position feedback. Since the
feedrate of each axis is controlled by the speed feedback of each axis, the stable control is available.
This can be used when the settings of the NC and the servo drive unit are changed.
Speed command synchronous control diagram
CNC
Compensation Master axis
Drive unit M
Position
command
Detector
Position
Compensation
detector
Slave axis
Drive unit M
Detector
(3) Current command synchronous control

This drives the master and slave axes in parallel by reference to the speed feedback from the encoder onto the
master axis side on the slave axis. Since that speed feedback is not the slave axis's itself, the slave axis easily
vibrates.
Also, as the slave axis is easily influenced by the disturbance, this is not appropriate for the machine tools
which need the positioning accuracy or the interpolation accuracy.
This can be used when the setting of the NC and the servo drive unit are changed.
Current command synchronous control diagram
CNC Compensation Master axis
M
Position Drive unit
command
Detector
Compensation
Slave axis
M
Drive unit
Detector
The "compensation" in the (1), (2) and (3) diagrams indicates the pitch error compensation, the thermal expansion
compensation, the backlash compensation and the external machine coordinate compensation.
The axes which can set the compensation during the synchronous control differ according to the synchronous control
type.
451 IB-1501505-C
There are 2 types of modes as follows:

(1) Synchronous control mode
The following two operation methods are available in the synchronous control mode.
(a) Synchronous operation
This is a method that both master and slave axes are moved simultaneously with the movement
command for the master axis.
(b) Independent operation
This is a method that either the master or slave axis is moved with the movement command for the
master axis.
(2) Correction mode

The synchronization is temporary canceled to adjust the balance of the master and slave axes during the
synchronous control mode in the machine adjustment. Each axis can be moved separately with the manual
handle feed or the arbitrary feed in manual mode. If the operation mode other than the manual handle feed
and arbitrary feed in manual mode is applied during the correction mode, the operation error will occur.
IB-1501505-C 452
17.2.4 Inclined Axis Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
Even when the control axes configuring that machine are mounted at an angle other than 90 degrees, this function
enables it to be controlled by the same program as that for an orthogonal axis.
The inclination angle is set using a parameter, and axes are controlled using the movement amounts of the axes which
are obtained through conversion and compensation using this angle.
<Example of use> When the X axis serves as the basic axis and the Y axis serves as the inclined axis
X
Yp*tanθ Xa
θ Yp
y
θ
Yp/cosθ
Ya
Y
X: Actual X axis
Y: Actual Y axis
y: Programmed Y axis
θ: Inclination angle
Yp, the Y-axis position on the programmed coordinates (on the orthogonal coordinates), is the position of Xa and Ya
which are produced by synthesis of X axis and Y axis.
Therefore, the Y-axis (inclined axis) movement amount is expressed by the following formula:
Ya=Yp/cosθ …… (1)
The X-axis (basic axis) movement amount is compensated by the inclined movement of the Y axis, and it is expressed
as follows:
Xa=Xp-Yp*tanθ … (2)
The Y-axis (inclined axis) speed is as follows:
Fa=Fp/cosθ
Xa, Ya and Fa are the actual movement amounts and speed.

Xp, Yp and Fp are the movement amounts and speed on the program
coordinates.
453 IB-1501505-C
17.2.5 Position Switch

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ (*1)
L ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ 24 ○ (*1)
(*1) 24 points for each part system and 32 points for the whole PLC axes.
The position switch (PSW) function provides hypothetical dog switches in place of the dog switches provided on the
machine axes by setting the axis names and coordinate positions indicating the hypothetical dog positions (dog1, dog2)
as parameters beforehand so that signals are output to the PLC interface when the machine has reached these
hypothetical dog range. The hypothetical dog switches are known as position switches (PSW).
24 points of the position switches can be set to the NC axis for each part system.
Position switch area checking can be performed at high-speed by parameter setting.

In high-speed checking, the parameter determines which is used between the command type machine position or
detector feedback position for area checking by each position switch.
Example of dog1, dog2 settings and execution
dog1, dog2 settings dog1, dog2 positions Description
dog1 < dog2 dog1 dog2 Signal is output between dog1 and dog2
dog1 > dog2 dog2 dog1 Signal is output between dog2 and dog1
dog1 = dog2 dog1 = dog2 Signal is output at the dog1 (dog2) position
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Hypothetical
dog Position switch area
dog1
(PSW width)
dog2
[Only for C80 series]

32 points of the position switches (PSW) in total can be set to the PLC axis.
Also, the position switch interlock function is in the axis interlock state outside of the position switch (PSW) by PLC
signal, and prohibits the movement of the PSW target axis.
This function can be set only to the NC axis, cannot be set to the PLC axis.
The PLC axis position switch cannot be set to the axis which is used for either NC axis or PLC axis indexing.
IB-1501505-C 454
17.2.7 Index Table Indexing

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The indexing of the index table can be performed by setting the index axes.
Programming is facilitated because, in terms of the index commands, only the indexing angle need to be designated
using the address of the programmed axis serving as the index setting axis, and there is no need to designate special M
codes for clamping and unclamping the table.
Clamp operation is performed by setting the unclamp command signal to OFF (type A) or is performed with the clamp
signal (type B).
(1) Type A
(a) Designate the movement commands (absolute or incremental) for the selected axis using a program.
(b) The unclamp command signal is now output prior to the axis movement.
(c) When the axes are unclamped, set the unclamp finish signal to ON with the PLC. (Set the signal to ON after
performing required process such as servo ON or the unclamp process.)
(d) After checking the unclamp finish signal, the designated axis starts moving.
(e) Upon completion of the movement, the unclamp command signal is set to OFF.
(f) Clamp the axes and set the unclamp finish signal to OFF with the PLC. (Set the signal to OFF after performing
required process such as in-position check, servo OFF or the clamp process.)
(g) After checking that the unclamp finish signal is OFF, processing of the next block is initiated.
[Operation timing chart for type A]
Programmed
command G00 B90.;
Unclamp command
(CNC→PLC)
Unclamp finish
(PLC→CNC)
Axis movement
Standing by for completion Standing by for completion
455 IB-1501505-C
(2) Type B
(a) Designate the movement commands (absolute or incremental) for the selected axis using a program.
(b) The unclamp command signal is now output prior to the axis movement.
(c) When the axes are unclamped, set the unclamp finish signal to ON with the PLC.
(Set the signal to ON after performing required process such as servo ON or the unclamp process.)
(d) After checking the unclamp finish signal, set the unclamp command signal to OFF and the designated axis
starts moving.
(e) Set the unclamp finish signal to OFF with the PLC.
(f) Upon completion of the movement, the clamp command signal is set to ON.
(g) Clamp the axes and set the clamp finish signal to ON with the PLC.
(Set the signal to ON after performing required process such as in-position check, servo OFF or the clamp
process.)
(h) After checking that the clamp finish signal is ON, set the clamp command signal to OFF and processing of the
next block is initiated.
(i) Set the clamp finish signal to OFF with the PLC.
[Operation timing chart for type B]
Programmed
command G00 B90.;
Unclamp command
(CNC to PLC)
Unclamp finish
(PLC to CNC)
Clamp command
(CNC to PLC)
Clamp finish
(PLC to CNC)
Axis movement
Standing by for completion Standing by for completion
IB-1501505-C 456
17.2.8 Tool Length Compensation along the Tool Axis

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ (*1) △ (*1) △ (*1) △ (*1) ― ― ― ― ― ―
(1) Changing the tool length compensation in tool axis direction and compensation amount
Even if the tool axis direction is not the Z axis direction because the rotary axis is rotated, the tool can be
compensated in the tool axis direction. By setting the deviation of the tool length value set when the program
was created and the actual tool length as a compensation amount, the program can be made more flexible.
This is especially effective for programs with many rotary axis movement commands.
The tool length compensation amount in the tool axis direction can be changed by rotating the manual pulse
generator when the tool length compensation along tool axis mode and tool length compensation amount
along the tool axis change mode are valid.
(2) Machine configuration

The tool length compensation in tool axis direction is carried out in respect to the direction of the tool nose axis
(rotary axis).
The axis which determines the compensation direction is designated with the parameters as a combination of
the Z-axis rotation C axis (spindle) and X-axis rotation A axis or Y-axis rotation B axis.
Rotation center C A
Z Rotation center
Tool Tool
A/B B
Axis direction C Axis direction
(compensation direction) (compensation direction)
X
A
Workpiece Workpiece
B
Y
A/C B/C A/B
457 IB-1501505-C
17.2.9 Tool Handle Feed & Interruption

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The tool handle feed & interrupt function makes it possible to move the axis with the manual pulse generator in the tool
axis direction, tool diameter direction X and tool diameter direction Y within the hypothetical coordinate system over the
tool axis.
Normal handle feed and interrupt is applied when this function is not provided.
<A-C> <B-C> <A-B>

X(-) X(-) X(-)
B(+)
C(+) C(+)
Z(-)
Y(-) Z(-) Y(-) Y(-) Z(-)
A(+) B(+) A(+)
This is also effective for a machine configuration having the tool tilt 1 axis and table tilt 1 axis.
17.2.10 Tool Center Coordinate Display

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
The tool center coordinates, handle interrupt amount (tool axis movement) , table/workpiece installation, machine
position coordinates in the inclined surface coordinate system, mechanical axis angle and tool center point speed are
displayed during the tool center point control function, tool length compensation along tool axis function, and tool handle
feed & interrupt function (tool axis direction handle feed, tool handle interrupt, tool diameter direction handle feed, nose
center rotation handle feed).
The path using the tool center coordinate position is drawn on the Graphic Trace screen.
One of the functions below is required to validate this function.
- Tool length compensation along tool axis
- Tool handle feed & interrupt
- Tool center point control
- Workpiece installation error compensation
- Inclined surface machining command
- Simple inclined surface machining command
- 3-dimensional tool radius compensation (tool's vertical-direction compensation)
- 3-dimentional manual feed
- R-Navi
IB-1501505-C 458
17.2.11 Tool Center Point Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ (*1) △ △ (*1) ○ (*1) ○ (*1) ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(*1) Restrained to 4-axis simultaneous contouring
The tool center point control function controls so that the position command in the machining program is at the tool
center point on the coordinate system (table coordinate system) which rotates together with the workpiece. This function
can be applied with the machine including the tool tilt type with two rotary axes on the head (1), the table title type with
two rotary axes on the table (2), and the compound type with rotary axes on the tool and table (3).
(1) Tool tilt type
When tool center point control is OFF and tool length

When tool center point control is ON
compensation along tool axis is ON
Rotation center Rotation center
Program Program
path path
Tool center point path

Tool center point path
Controls so that the holder center point moves straight. Controls so that the tool center point moves straight.
459 IB-1501505-C
(2) Table tilt type

Tool center
point path
Tool center
point path Z(+)
Z(+)
X(+)
X(+)
Rotation
Rotation center center
B(-) X'(+)
B(-)
Z''(+)
X''(+)
Controls so that the holder center point is at the workpiece Controls so that the tool center point is at the table
coordinate system's position coordinate system's position.
(3) Compound type

Tool center
point path
Tool center Z(+)

point path
Z(+)
Z'(+) X(+)
Rotation
X(+) center
X'(+)
Rotation center
Z''(+) B(-)
B(-)
X''(+)
Controls so that the holder center point is at the workpiece Controls so that the tool center point is at the table
coordinate system's position. coordinate system's position.
IB-1501505-C 460
17.2.12 Inclined Surface Machining Command

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
This function is to define the new coordinate system (called the "feature coordinate system") which was created by
rotation and reference position translation of the X, Y, Z axes of the original one (before the inclined surface machining
command was applied). By using this function, an arbitrary spatial plane can be defined, and machining on that plane
can be carried out with normal program commands.
Also, the tool axis can automatically be controlled to the + Z direction of the newly defined feature coordinate system.
Since the feature coordinate system will be re-created in accordance with the tool axis direction, machining programs
can be developed without the need to consider the direction of the feature coordinate system and rotation of the tool
axis.
Z Y Z
Y
X Original coordinate system
Feature coordinate system

X
The feature coordinate system is defined in the following method.
- Designation with Euler angle.

- Designation with the roll angle, pitch and yaw angle.
- Designation with the three points on the plane.
- Designation with two vectors.
- Designation with a projection angle.
- Designation with the registered machining surface selection
- Designation with the tool axis direction.
461 IB-1501505-C
This function is compatible with the following types of machine.
Type Tool tilt type Table tilt type Compound type

One rotary axis on each of the tool
Description Two rotary axes on the tool side Two rotary axes on the table side
side and table side
Example of 2
machine 1
Primary rotary The 2nd rotary axis on the tool

The 1st rotary axis on the table side Rotary axis on the tool side
axis side
IB-1501505-C 462
17.2.13 Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ―
In a lathe with three orthogonal axes and one rotary axis on the tool side, this function enables simultaneous 4-axis
control milling on an inclined surface along workpiece end face.
To facilitate machining on an inclined surface, this function uses three commands: simple inclined surface control
(G176), simple tool center point control (G174), and tool axis direction control (G53.1) as follows. The tool axis direction
can be turned at right angles to the inclined surface by issuing the tool axis direction control command (G53.1) after the
simple inclined surface control command (G176). When G174 is given after G176, the direction of tool length is
compensated in accordance with the tool angle.
For a machine configured with a turret, this function allows you to use any tool on the turret to carry out simple inclined
surface machining.
(1) Simple inclined surface control (G176)

G176 enables a new coordinate system (called "feature coordinate system") to be defined. Feature coordinate
system is obtained by rotating and parallel translating a plane using the X, Y and Z axes configuring the workpiece
coordinate system as a rotary axis. Consequently, there is no need to calculate the coordinate position in
accordance with the inclined surface angle. This simplifies creation of a machining program.
(2) Simple tool center point control (G174)

G174 allows a tool length offset in the tool axis direction even when the tool axis direction is not parallel to the
orthogonal coordinate system after rotation of the rotary axis. Consequently, the nose of the tool mounted on the
rotary axis can be kept in the programmed position at all times. This simplifies creation of a complicated-shape
machining program.
(3) Tool axis direction control (G53.1)

G53.1 aligns the tool with the + Z direction of the feature coordinate system. This eliminates the need for you to
mind the feature coordinate system's direction or tool axis' rotation direction, resulting in greater ease of
programming.
Feature coordinate system
X”
Z”
Workpiece
coordinate system Rotation angle 45°
(X’, Y’, Z’)
Z’
Feature coordinate
Y”
system
(X”, Y”, Z”)
Y’
Rotation center coordinate = Feature coordinate zero point

(X’,Y’,Z’) = (0.0, 0.0, 100.0)
463 IB-1501505-C
Command format
Simple inclined surface control start
G176 X__Z__D__ ; When rotating K-I plane about the axis parallel to the J axis
G176 X__Y__D__ ; When rotating I-J plane about the axis parallel to the K axis
G176 Y__Z__D__ ; When rotating J-K plane about the axis parallel to the I axis
X,Y,Z : Feature coordinate system zero point (Rotation center position)
( -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)) (-9999.9999 to 9999.9999 (inch))
D : Rotation angle ( -359.999 to 359.999 (° ))
Simple inclined surface control cancel
G69.1;
Tool axis direction control
G53.1 R__ ;
R : Tool axis rotation angle compensation amount (-359.999 to 359.999 (° ))
Simple tool center point control start
G174 R__ ;
R : Tool axis rotation angle compensation amount (-359.999 to 359.999 (° ))
G174 (X__Y__Z__B__) ; The axis movement command in ( ) can be omitted.
Simple tool center point control cancel command
G175;
IB-1501505-C 464
17.2.14 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation (Tool's Vertical-direction Compensation)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ (*1) △ (*1) △ (*1) △ (*1) ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function is to compensate the tool radius of the machine with two rotary axes, in accordance with the change of the
workpiece direction and inclination of the tool due to the movement of the rotary axis. The 3-dimensional tool radius
compensation was realized by searching the tool path on the workpiece by the program command and calculating the
compensation vector on the plane (compensation plane) which is vertical to the path in the tool direction.
Compensation
Tool plane
direction
r
Z
r
X
r : Compensation amount
: Tool center path
: Program path
When the 3-dimensional tool radius compensation (tool's vertical-direction compensation) is commanded while the
specification is not added, an alarm will occur.
465 IB-1501505-C
17.2.15 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ ― △ ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ (*1) ― △ (*1) ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function is for the 5-axis machine. This compensates the error when a workpiece is placed off the workpiece
coordinate system to enable machining according to the program. In this function, a new coordinate system with the
workpiece as its reference position will be defined (called "workpiece installation coordinate system) and the program will
be executed in this new coordinate system.
Error at the workpiece

installation
This function is compatible with the same types of machine as listed in the inclined surface machining command.
IB-1501505-C 466
17.2.16 3-dimensional Manual Feed

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
By selecting the hypothetical coordinate system to be machined, axis can be moved with manual feed (JOG, HANDLE or
INCREMENTAL) in the coordinate system with this function.
If a movement command on the hypothetical coordinate is issued, it can be easy to setup because multiple axes is
moved by NC according to the tool angle or the inclination of the table.
This function consists of the hypothetical coordinate feed and tool center point rotation.
Movement command for the linear axis operates as the hypothetical coordinate feed and manual feed will be carried out
on the hypothetical coordinate.
Movement command for the rotary axis operates as the tool center point rotation and manual feed will be carried out with
the rotary axis and 3 linear axes which are issued a movement command to keep position relations of the workpiece and
tool tip.
Standard manual feed is applied when this function is not provided.
<Tool tilt B-C axis> <Table tilt A-C axis>
Z(+)
Z(+) X(+)
Y(+) Y(+)
X(+) Y(+)
Linear axis:
hypothetical Z(+)
coordinate
Z(+) X(+)
feed
Y(+)
X(+)
Z(+)
Z(+) X(+)
Y(+) Y(+)
X(+)
C(+)
Rotary axis:
tool center *1
point
rotation
Z(+)
Y(+)
X(+)
*1 Keep the position of the workpiece and tool tip along C axis
rotation.
Original coordinate system
Hypothetical coordinate system
467 IB-1501505-C
17.2.17 R-Navi
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
This function allows you to perform index machining (including inclined surface and multiple-surface machining) simply
and smoothly using a rotary axis.
To enable index machining, register a feature coordinate system (coordinate origin and coordinate axial direction) along
the machining surface in advance, and select the registered surface from the operation screen. Then the tool is able to
move along the coordinate system to perform index machining.
As shown below, the machining surface selected from the screen is not affected by whether the surface indexing is
complete or not.
The function is effective for the machine configuration with the right-hand orthogonal coordinate system defined in ISO
standard.
The R-Navi function enables you to use "Inclined machining surface" and "3-dimensional manual feed".
Features of this function are as follows;

(1) Various and simple machining surface registration (Feature coordinate system registration)
- Possible to register multiple surfaces (Up to 16 surfaces per workpiece, and up to 10 workpieces)
- Guide drawing which helps to set the coordinate system along the machining surface
- Feature coordinate system setting without dependence on the workpiece installation position.
- 3D workpiece graphics which enables a visual check of the registered surface.
(2) Easy-to-understand machining surface selection
- An operator is able to select a surface while observing the 3D workpiece graphics.
(3) Automatic indexing and manual indexing of the selected machining surface
- R-Navi automatically executes surface indexing to set the tool to be perpendicular to the selected surface.
- Manual indexing is also available.
- The coordinate system is linked with rotation of the rotary axis (no need to calculate the coordinate origin after the
rotation).
(4) A program for 3-axis machining can be used without modification (G68.2 command-less inclined surface machining).
- Able to work on the coordinate system defined along the selected surface (by automatic or manual operation)
- The coordinate system is held even when NC reset is input (no need to re-define the coordinate system).
Manual 3 axis
machining
program
Inclined
coordinate system
Select
Register
Automatic
Register surface Select a surface Index the surface 3-axis machining
IB-1501505-C 468
Command format
The R-Navi setup parameters can be configured from a machining program.
(1) Workpiece registration and setting
G68.2 P10 Q0 D0 Cancel the selected machining surface

G10 L110 ; Start setting workpiece data
Q__ <__> F__ C__ R__ X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__ ; Data setting
G11 ; End data setting
Q : Workpiece registration No. (1 to 10)

<> : Workpiece name　(max. 20 characters)
F : Workpiece shape
C : Basic coordinate system
R : Basic No. (0 to 8)
X/Y/Z : Workpiece size (0.000 to 99999.999)
I/J/K : Workpiece shift (-99999.999 to 99999.999)
(2) Machining surface registration and setting
G68.2 P10 Q0 D0 Cancel the selected machining surface

G10 L111 ; Start setting machining surface data
P0 Q__ D__ <__> X__ Y__ Z__ A__ ; Machining surface setting
P1 M__ B__ C__ E__ F__ H__ I__ ; Designate coordinate axial direction for 1st axis
P2 M__ B__ C__ E__ F__ H__ I__ ; Designate coordinate axial direction for 2nd axis
G11 ; End data setting
G68.2 P10 Q__ D__; Select the registered machining surface
Command address of machining surface registration
P : Machining surface registration

Q : Workpiece registration No. (1 to 10)
D : Machining surface registration No. (2 to 17)
<> : Machining surface name (max. 15 characters)
X/Y/Z : Feature coordinate origin (-99999.999 to 99999.999)
A : Coordinate axis selection
Command address of coordinate axial direction designation
P : Coordinate axial direction axis designation

M : Coordinate axial direction designation method
B/C/E/F/H/I : Coordinate axial direction setting (-99999.999 to 99999.999)
469 IB-1501505-C
17.2.20 Real-time Tuning
17.2.20.1 Real-time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
This function estimates the inertia (or workpiece weight) of mechanical system and changes the speed control gain
automatically according to the estimation results to suppress mechanical vibration.
For example, this suppresses vibration caused when a large workpiece becomes smaller in turning machining as
illustrated in Example 1 below. This function also suppresses vibration caused when a workpiece that is relatively small
for the table is replaced by a larger one as illustrated in Example 2 below.
Using this function, users can expect suppression of vibration caused by inertia fluctuation, as well as reduction of
machining time through adaptation of appropriate speed control gain.
This function also commands a stop of speed control gain change and displays the estimated inertia ratio and
magnification of speed control gain (ratio of the changed speed control gain to the initially set gain).
Existing Real-time tuning 1
Example1: Turning machining Example1: Turning machining
Machining Machining
Example2: Workpiece replacement Example2: Workpiece replacement
Replacement Replacement
Speed waveform Speed waveform

Speed Speed Speed Speed
Time Time Time Time
IB-1501505-C 470
17.2.20.2 Real-time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
This function estimates the inertia of workpiece and optimizes the operation acceleration/deceleration time constant
automatically according to the estimation results.
This allows the cycle time to be reduced when the inertia of workpiece fluctuates considerably.
This function is useful when the inertia of workpiece fluctuates considerably during machining as illustrated in Example 1:
Indexing machining and Example 2: Workpiece replacement on the rotary table below.
In Example 1, the inertia of workpiece is reduced gradually as machining progresses. In Example 2, the inertia of
workpiece on the rotary table is reduced by workpiece replacement. When the inertia of workpiece is large in Example 1
or Example 2, the machine tool is required to be operated at a low acceleration to suppress the vibration for the
workpiece and overload for the motor. On the other hand, when the inertia of workpiece is smaller, the operation at a
higher acceleration is available. In other words, acceleration/deceleration time constant can be reduced when the inertia
of workpiece is smaller.
In the existing specifications, the operation acceleration/deceleration time constant is fixed regardless of the inertia of
workpiece, which wastes time because a large time constant is applied even if the inertia of workpiece is small.
On the other hand, this function enables the operation with optimum acceleration/deceleration time constant according to
the inertia of the workpiece. Therefore, machining is performed while reducing the acceleration/deceleration time
constant in Example 1 or Example 2, which leads to a shorter tact time.
Furthermore, the large inertia workpiece is not machined with small acceleration/deceleration time constant since the
optimum time constant is adjusted automatically. This enables suppression of vibration and overload.
Existing Real-time tuning 2
Time is wasted because Cycle time can be reduced because

acceleration/deceleration time constant is fixed acceleration/deceleration time constant is
Example1: Indexing machining Example1: Indexing machining
Machining Machining
Example2: Workpiece replacement Example2: Workpiece replacement
Replacement Replacement
Speed waveform Speed waveform

Speed Speed
Time Time
Time can be reduced

Current waveform Current waveform
Current Current
Varying load Constant load
Time Time
471 IB-1501505-C
17.2.21 Constant Torque Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ― ― ― ―
(1) Constant torque control

By setting "Constant torque control request axis" signal to ON from PLC, the servo motor of the designated axis
outputs torque set by the parameter in a constant direction. By using this function for a servo motor which drives a
bar feeder, the bar feeder can press the workpiece with constant torque regardless of whether it is during
movement, stop, or acceleration/deceleration.
By setting "Proportional torque stopper control request axis" signal to ON from PLC, proportional torque stopper
control enables a servo motor of the designated axis to generate torque set by the parameter in the stopper
direction. When position droop is generated, the motor generates torque in proportion to the position droop in the
stopper direction to keep the stopper position.
(Note) Do not cancel the constant torque control or the proportional torque stopper control for an axis moving
under manual or automatic operation. Otherwise the fixed workpiece, fixed turret, etc., may get loose,
and it is dangerous.
Example of constant torque control
Chuck Spindle
Cutting-off tool (closed)
Bar feeder pressing arrow
Workpiece
Constant torque control axis

Z axis
Chuck (opened)
Constant torque stopper
Chuck (closed)
Retraction Constant torque stopper
Movement command tracking

constant torque stopper
(2) Droop cancel under constant torque control

Droop cancel under constant torque control cancels the position droop generated during constant torque control
without moving an axis.
Note that the droop cancel under constant torque control must be commanded while the axis is pressed against the
workpiece, etc.
(3) Proportional constant torque control

Proportional torque stopper control generates constant torque in the stopper direction according to the value
designated to the parameter. When position droop is generated, the motor generates torque in proportion to the
position droop in the stopper direction and to keep the stopper position.
IB-1501505-C 472
17.2.22 External Encoder Position Output I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
* Encoder expansion card is required for M800W/M80W
This function outputs the position (angle) of external encoder to PLC device based on the input pulses from the encoder.
This function can be used to monitor the position of angular head which the external encoder is connected to.
The position to output to PLC device can be cleared to 0 with PLC signal.
M800W/M80W connection diagram
External encoder
EXT1
ENC1
Encoder
expansion unit
CNC unit
(Note) Encoder expansion unit can be used for ENC1 only.
M800S/M80/E80 connection diagram
CNC unit
External encoder
ENC
473 IB-1501505-C
17.2.23 Multiple-axis Synchronization Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○ ― ―
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Multiple-axis synchronization control is the function that enables multiple slave axes to be synchronized with commands
to the master axis.
The axis that serves as the reference of synchronization is called "master axis", whereas the axis that follows the master
axis is called "slave axis".
- The synchronized axes are controlled with travel commands to the master axis.
- For one master axis, two or more slave axes can be set.
- Up to three combinations of master axis and slave axes can be set for all the part systems.
Configuration example of multiple-axis synchronization control
Compensation
Master axis
CNC
Drive unit M
Position
command
Encoder
Compensation
Slave axis 1
・
・ Drive unit M
・
Encoder
・
Compensation
・
・
Slave axis n
Drive unit M
Encoder
The "compensation" in the figure indicates the pitch error compensation, the thermal expansion compensation, the
backlash compensation and the external machine coordinate compensation. Even under the multiple-axis
synchronization control, the compensation is performed independently for each axis.
IB-1501505-C 474
17.3 PLC Operation
17.3.1 Arbitrary Feed in Manual Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables the feed directions and feed rates of the control axes to be controlled using commands from the
user PLC.
The arbitrary feed function controls the movement of the axes at the specified rates while the start signal is output from
the PLC to the NC system.
PLC operations can be performed even during manual operation or automatic operation, but they cannot be performed
when an axis for which arbitrary feed has been assigned is executing a command from the NC system (that is, while the
axis is moving).
475 IB-1501505-C
17.3.2 Circular Feed in Manual Mode

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
L △ △ △ △ ― ― ― ― ― ―
By specifying a hypothetical coordinate on the machine coordinate from the user PLC, oblique linear interpolation or
circular interpolation is executed with jog/handle feed, manual rapid traverse or incremental feed of either X-axis or Y-
axis.
This function is valid only in the jog mode, handle mode, manual rapid traverse mode or incremental mode. This function
cannot be used in the other manual modes and automatic operation modes.
This function works for the X axis and Y axis. This function cannot be used for the other NC axes and PLC axis. When
this function is valid, all the axes other than X axis and Y axis move as usual.
(1) Oblique linear interpolation
+ x' + y'
Y' X'
B
- x' C - y'
A
Basic point
a
X
When the circular feed in manual mode (oblique linear interpolation) is valid:
- Jog/handle feed of X-axis moves in parallel with X'-axis (see above).
- Jog/handle feed of Y-axis moves in parallel with Y'-axis (see above).
These are set in the R registers.

a : Gradient angle
x,y : Basic point coordinate
±x' : X' travel range
±y' : Y' travel range
IB-1501505-C 476
(2) Circular interpolation

By specifying a hypothetical coordinate on the machine coordinate as shown in the figure below, jog/handle
feed can be executed on the hypothetical coordinate.
- Y' Basic point
A B
- y'
- y'
y1 + X' + y' + X'
- X'
Arc center
y2
+ Y'
x1 x2
When the circular feed in manual mode (circular interpolation) is valid:

- Jog/handle feed of X-axis moves on the arc having the distance from the arc center to the current position as
its radius.
- Jog/handle feed of Y-axis moves on the line connecting the current position and the arc center.
These are set in the R registers.

x1, y1 : Basic point coordinate
x2, y2 : Arc center coordinate
±x' : X' travel range
±y' : Y' travel range
477 IB-1501505-C
17.3.3 PLC Axis Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Over and above the NC control axes, this function enables axes to be controlled independently by commands based on
the PLC.
Specifications
Item Description
Number of control axes Refer to "Max. Number of PLC Axes"
PLC control axis is controlled independently from NC control axes.
Simultaneously controlled axes
A multiple number of PLC axes can be started simultaneously.
Least command increment
0.001 mm (0.0001 inch)
0.0001 mm (0.00001 inch)
Command increment
0.00001 mm (0.000001 inch)
0.000001 mm (0.0000001 inch)
(The command increment depends on the parameter setting.)
0 to 1000000mm/min (0 to 100000 inch/min)
Feed rate
(Speed is fixed regardless of the unit system.)
Incremental commands from current position
Absolute commands for machine coordinate system
Movement commands
0 to ±99999999
(The command increment depends on the parameter setting.)
Rapid traverse, cutting feed, jog feed (+) (-), reference position return feed (+) (-), handle feed,
Operation modes
Automatic initial setting (C80 series)
Backlash compensation Available
Stroke end Device arbitrary allocation is available
Soft limit Available
Available
For absolute commands……amount within 1 rotation
Rotary axis command
(rotation by amount remaining after division into the division number of rotary axis)
For incremental commands……rotation by assigned amount
None
Inch/mm changeover
Set to the command that corresponds to the feedback unit.
Position detector Encoder (Absolute position can also be detected.)
IB-1501505-C 478
17.3.5 PLC Axis Indexing

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PLC axis indexing allows a PLC axis to function as an auxiliary axis with no need for changing the user ladder used
conventionally for an auxiliary axis. (The position of R register will be changed.)
(1) Command methods

Station method (for rotary axis) : One rotation (360°) of the rotary axis is equally divided to determine the stations
(positioning destinations). The maximum number of divisions is 360.
Station
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
Setting 8 stations (8 divisions)
Station method (for linear axis) : A valid stroke is equally divided to determine the stations (positioning destinations). The
maximum number of stations is 360.
Zero
point Valid stroke length
Station
1 2 3 4 5
Station No.
Setting 5 stations
The zero point is station 1, and the final end of the valid stroke is station 5.
When using a linear axis, the No. of equal divisions is "number of stations - 1".
Unequal station method : When the positioning stations are not at equal intervals, this method allows you to set up
to 20 coordinate points arbitrarily to determine the station coordinates. This method is
available for a rotary or linear axis.
Arbitrary coordinate designation : This method allows you to transfer arbitrary coordinates (the absolute coordinates based
method on the zero point) from PLC to perform positioning.
(2) Feed functions

Feed rate selection : Four different feeds per minute are set in the unit of " °/min" (rotary axis) or "mm/min"
(linear axis). Which of the four is used is switched by the PLC I/F.
Acceleration/deceleration method : The constant inclination acceleration/deceleration is automatically controlled. The linear
or soft acceleration/deceleration is selectable.
Acceleration/deceleration pattern : Four different acceleration/deceleration patterns are set to be selected by switching with
designation method PLC I/F.
Short-cut control : A least movement distance is automatically judged when a rotary axis is rotated. Also the
rotation direction can be designated by the command.
479 IB-1501505-C
(3) Operation functions

The following operation modes are available. Send a command from PLC to change the operation mode.
Automatic mode : The axis is positioned at the station No. designated by the start signal. When the start
signal has turned OFF before the positioning is completed, the axis is positioned at the
nearest station position.
The arbitrary position command operation is also available: the positioning can be carried
out to any position other than a station by directly commanding the positioning coordinates
from the PLC.
Manual mode : While the start signal is ON, the axis is rotated at a constant speed in the designated
direction. When the start signal has turned OFF, the axis is positioned at the nearest
station position.
JOG mode : While the start signal is ON, the axis is rotated at a constant speed in the designated
direction.
Incremental feed mode : This mode is to feed the axis by the designated distance at each activation.
Manual handle mode : The axis is moved by using a pulse generator.
Reference position return mode : This mode is to position at the reference position. The reference position return by the dog
switch is not available.
(4) Operation support function

Position switch : A signal is output to the PLC interface when the machine has reached within the specified
range.
IB-1501505-C 480
17.3.6 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ― ― △
This function is to use one drive unit by switching the control from the NC or the PLC dynamically.
The function of the NC axis can be used during the NC axis control and the function of the PLC axis can be used during
the PLC axis control respectively.
A part of function or signal of the NC axis can also be used during the PLC axis control.
Switch NC axis with PLC

axis with PLC signal (NC
axis/PLC axis switchover
request)
NC axis command
PLC axis command
X Y Z A 1
NC axis NC axis PLC axis

(Switching axis)
481 IB-1501505-C
17.4 PLC Interface
17.4.1 CNC Control Signal

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Control commands to the CNC system are assigned from the PLC. Input signals with an A/D conversion function and
skip inputs that respond at high speed can also be used.
(1) Control signals

- Control signals for operations in automatic operation mode
- Control signals for operations in manual operation mode
- Control signals for program execution
- Control signals for interrupt operations
- Control signals for servo
- Control signals for spindle
- Control signals for mode selection
- Control signals for axis selection
- Control signals for feed rates
(2) Analog voltage control [M system]

When an analog voltage is input to an external connector used to connect CNC analog inputs, the data
corresponding to the input voltage can be read out in the prescribed file register. This data can be used for
load meter displays, thermal deformation compensation, etc. (Maximum 4 points)
(3) Skip signals

When signals are input to the skip input interface, they are processed by interrupt processing. This enables
functions requiring a high response speed to be implemented. (Maximum 8 points)
For further details, refer to the PLC Interface Manual.
IB-1501505-C 482
17.4.2 CNC Status Signal

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The status signals are output from the CNC system. They can be utilized by referencing them from the PLC.
These signals can also be output as analog data by setting the data from the PLC in the R register.
Status output functions
(1) Controller operation ready

When the controller power is turned ON and the controller enters the operation ready status, the "Ready"
signal is output to the machine.
Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details of the sequences from when the controller power is supplied to
when the controller ready status is entered.
(2) Servo operation ready

When the controller power is turned ON and the servo system enters the operation ready status, the "Servo
ready" signal is output to the machine.
Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details of the sequences from when the power is supplied to when the
"Servo ready" signal is turned ON.
(3) In automatic operation

Generally, if the "cycle start" switch is turned ON in the automatic operation mode (memory, MDI), this signal is
output until the reset state or emergency stop state is entered by the M02, M30 execution or the reset & rewind
input to the controller using the reset button.
(4) In cycle start

The signal that denotes that the controller is operating in the automatic mode is output from the time when the
cycle start button is pressed in the memory or MDI mode and the cycle start status has been entered until the
time when the automatic operation is terminated in the automatic operation pause status entered by the "feed
hold" function, block completion stop entered by the block stop function or resetting.
(5) In automatic pause

An automatic operation pause occurs and this signal is output during automatic operation from when the
automatic pause switch is pressed ON until the cycle start switch is pressed ON, or during automatic operation
when the mode select switch is changed from the automatic mode to the manual mode.
(6) In rapid traverse

The "In rapid traverse" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by rapid
traverse during automatic operation.
(7) In cutting feed

The "In cutting feed" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by cutting feed
during automatic operation.
(8) In tapping
The "In tapping" signal is output when the command now being executed is in a tapping modal which means
that one of the statuses below is entered during automatic operation.
(a) G84, G88 (fixed cycle: tapping cycle)
(b) G84.1, G88.1 (fixed cycle: reverse tapping cycle)
(c) G63 (tapping mode)
483 IB-1501505-C
(9) In thread cutting

The "In thread cutting" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by thread
cutting feed during automatic operation.
(10) In rewinding
The "In rewinding" signal is output when the reset & rewind signal is input by M02/M30, etc., during memory
operation and the program currently being executed is being indexed.
The rewinding time is short, so there may be cases when it cannot be confirmed with the sequence program
(ladder).
(11) Axis selection output

The "Axis selection output" signal for each axis is output to the machine during machine axis movement.
(a) Automatic mode
The signal is output in the movement command of each axis. It is output until the machine stops during
stop based on feed hold or block stop.
(b) Manual mode (including incremental feed)
The signal is output while the axis is moving from the time when the jog feed signal is turned ON until the
time when it is turned OFF and the machine feed stops.
(c) Handle feed mode
The signal is output at all times when the axis selection input is on.
(12) Axis movement direction

This output signal denotes the direction of the axis now moving, and for each axis a "+" (plus) signal and a "-"
(minus) signal are output respectively.
(13) Alarm
This signal indicates the various alarm statuses that arise during controller operation. It is divided into the
following types and output.
(a) System errors
(b) Servo alarms
(c) Program errors
(d) Operation errors
(14) In resetting
The "Reset" signal is output during the reset process when the reset & rewind command is input to the
controller with the "reset" button on the setting and display unit is pressed or when the "Reset" signal is input
from the machine operation panel, etc.
This signal will also be output when the controller READY status is OFF, when the Emergency stop signal is
input or when a servo alarm is occurring, etc.
(15) Movement command finish

In the memory or MDI automatic operation, the "Movement command finish" signal is output when the
command block in the machining program features a movement command and when that block command has
been completed.
When the movement command and M, S, T or B command have been assigned in the same block, then the
movement command signal can be used as a sync signal for either executing the processing of the M, S, T or
B command at the same time as the command or executing it upon completion of the movement command.
IB-1501505-C 484
17.4.3 PLC Window

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[M800/M80 series]
Using the "read window" or "write window" that are arbitrarily allocated to the R register's user area, it is possible to read
and write the CNC operation status, axis information, parameters and tool data etc.
The area used for the "read window" and "write window" has 1500 points for the backup area and 100 points for the non-
backup area.
Up to three window areas can be specified simultaneously for both "read window" area and "write window" area. 16 R
registers are used for one read window or write window.
The read window is further divided into the "read control window" and "read data window". The write window is also
divided into the "write control window" and "write data window".
Up to four data items can be successively read or written from the data designated in one read window or write window.
[C80 series]
The operation status of NC CPU, the axis information, the parameters, and the tool data, etc. can be read and written by
using "Read control window" or the "write control window".
The "read control window" and "write control window" are available by 50 sets each.
<Reading> R register (user area) (M800/M80)

D register (C80)
Operation Read window

status (2)
Axis (2) Read control (1)
NC (3) window
information PLC
Parameters
(3) Read data
Tool data window
Designate arbitrary position with parameter

R register (user area) (M800/M80) (R register) (M800/M80)
<Writing> D register (C80)
Operation Write window

status (5)
Write control
Axis (5) NC (6) (4)
information window
PLC
Parameters
(5) Write data
Tool data
window
(1) PLC turns control signal ON.

(2) NC receives control signal, and reads designated data in control window.
(3) Results of NC read are set in read control window and read data window.
(4) PLC turns control signal ON.
(5) NC receives control signal, and writes contents of write data window corresponding to designated data in control
window.
(6) Results of NC write are set in write control window.
485 IB-1501505-C
17.4.4 External Search

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Machining program can be searched from user PLC by specifying the storage device of machining program, program
No., sequence No. or block No.
17.4.5 Direct Screen Selection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function enables automatic transition to an arbitrary screen by setting the screen selection information to the file
registers from user PLC.
The screens that can be selected as the transition destination are Monitr, Setup, Edit, Diagn, Mainte and custom release
screens.
This function is used to move to the custom screen being set by the MTB.
NC
User PLC File register

(R356 to R359)
Screen selection
information
Automatic
transition
Screen
processing
Automatic
transition
IB-1501505-C 486
17.4.6 Buzzer Sound Control

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function gives a buzzer mounted on the NC keyboard by operating the PLC device.
The buzzer will be activated when the PLC device is turned ON, and be deactivated when the PLC device is turned OFF.
This is effective in applications of sounding a buzzer such as during the alarm occurrence, or for the program operation
end notification.
This function also gives a buzzer when the operation sound disable has set.
This can be used when the NC keyboard is mounted.
The buzzer sound image by the buzzer ON operation:
Buzzer ON state Sound OFF Sound ON Sound OFF
Buzzer ON signal
487 IB-1501505-C
17.5 Machine Contact I/O
17.5.1 Operation Panel I/O
17.5.1.1 DI:64/DO:64
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ /― □ /― ― ― □ /― ― ― □ □ ―
L □ /― □ /― ― ― □ /― ― ― □ □ ―
17.5.1.2 DI:64/DO:64 + SDI:8

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ /― □ /― ― ― □ /― ― ― □ □ ―
L □ /― □ /― ― ― □ /― ― ― □ □ ―
17.5.1.3 DI:96/DO:64
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ―/ □ ―/ □ □ □ ―/ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L ―/ □ ―/ □ □ □ ―/ □ □ □ □ □ ―
17.5.1.5 DI:64/DO:48/AO:1
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ―/ □ ―/ □ □ □ ―/ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L ―/ □ ―/ □ □ □ ―/ □ □ □ □ □ ―
IB-1501505-C 488
17.5.2 Remote I/O
17.5.2.1 DI:32/DO:32
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
17.5.2.2 DI:64/DO:48
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
17.5.2.3 DI:64/DO:48 + AO:1

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
17.5.2.5 DI:16/DO:8
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
17.5.2.6 DI:32/DO:32 + SDI:8/SDO:4

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
17.5.2.7 SDI:8/SDO:4
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
489 IB-1501505-C
17.6 External PLC Link
17.6.1 CC-Link (Master/Local)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ △ (*1)
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
[M800/M80 series]
NC unit can be directly connected to the network to serve as the master/local station of the MELSEC CC-Link.
CC-Link unit is required for this connection.
(1) Outline of CC-Link
- Distributing and installing each unit to the equipments such as conveyor line and mechanical device can
simplify the wiring of the whole system.
- The ON/OFF data and numerical data such as input/output treated by each unit can be communicated
easily and at high speed.
- The simple distribution system can be established by connecting several PLC CPUs or NCs.
- Connecting the device equipments made by the partner manufacturer can flexibly support various
systems.
(2) Outline drawing (M800W Series)
Master station
Master station (NC unit) or
PLC
CPU
Remote I/O
CC - Link Expansion card

FCU8-EX561
Remote device
Partner manufacturer
product
CC - Link
Remote I/O
Local station Local station
(NC unit) or
PLC
CPU
This station controls the remote station and local station.

Master station
One master station is required for one system.
This station contains the CPU and can communicate with the master and
Local station
the other local stations.
Remote I/O station Remote station that handles only bit information.
Remote device station Remote station that handles bit information and word information.
Intelligent device station This station allows the transient transmission. (Including local station)
IB-1501505-C 490
(3) Performance specifications

MITSUBISHI CNC M8 Series is compliant with CC-Link Ver.2.00.
<CC-Link Ver.2.00 specification>
Item CC-Link master/local unit

Remote input/output (RX,RY) 8192 points each
Remote register (RWw)
Max. number of link points per 2048 points
(Master St. → Remote/Local St.)
one system (Note 1)
Remote register (RWr)
2048 points
(Remote/Local St. → Master St.)
Extended cyclic setting 1 time setting 2 times setting 4 times setting 8 times setting
128 points
Remote input/output (RX,RY) 32 points each 32 points each 64 points each
each
1 station Remote register (RWw)
4 words 8 words 16 words 32 words
occupied (Master St. → Remote/Local St.)
192 points 384 points
Remote input/output (RX,RY) 64 points each 96 points each
each each
2 stations Remote register (RWw)
Number of link Remote register (RWr)
points per one (Remote/Local St. → Master St.)
remote/local 160 points 320 points 640 points
station Remote input/output (RX,RY) 96 points each
each each each
128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points
Remote input/output (RX,RY)
each each each each
Number of occupied stations
Station 1 to station 4 (The station No. can be switched with parameters.)
(Number of local stations)
156kbps / 625kbps / 2.5Mbps / 5Mbps / 10Mbps can be selected.
Baud rates
(Baud rate can be selected with parameters.)
Communication method Polling method
Synchronization method Flame synchronization method
Encode method NRZI method
Transmission path method Bus (EIA RS485 compliant)
Transmission format HDLC compliant
Illegal control method CRC(X16 ＋ X12 ＋ X5 ＋ 1)
491 IB-1501505-C
Item CC-Link master/local unit

64 units
Note that the following two conditions must be satisfied.
Condition 1:
- (a+a2+a4+a8)+(b+b2+b4+b8)×2+(c+c2+c4+c8)×3+(d+d2+d4+d8)×4 ≦ 64
-
(a×32+a2×32+a4×64+a8×128)+(b×64+b2×96+b4×192+b8×384)+(c×96+c2×160+c4×320+c8×640)+(
d×128+d2×224+d4×448+d8×896) ≦ 8192
-
(a×4+a2×8+a4×16+a8×32)+(b×8+b2×16+b4×32+b8×64)+(c×12+c2×24+c4×48+c8×96)+(d×16+d2×3
2+d4×64+d8×128) ≦ 2048
a : Number of units when 1 station is occupied in 1 time extended cyclic setting
b : Number of units when 2 stations are occupied in 1 time extended cyclic setting
c : Number of units when 3 stations are occupied in 1 time extended cyclic setting
d : Number of units when 4 stations are occupied in 1 time extended cyclic setting
a2: Number of units when 1 station is occupied in 2 times extended cyclic setting
Max. number of connection
b2: Number of units when 2 stations are occupied in 2 times extended cyclic setting
units
c2: Number of units when 3 stations are occupied in 2 times extended cyclic setting
d2: Number of units when 4 stations are occupied in 2 times extended cyclic setting
Condition 2:
- {(16×A)+(54×B)+(88×C)} ≦ 2304
- A:Number of remote I/O stations ≦ 64 units
- B:Number of remote device stations ≦ 42 units
- C:Number of local stations, standby master stations and intelligent device stations ≦ 26 units
Remote station No. 1 to 64
CC-Link Ver.1.10 compliant cable (When a 110Ω of terminating resistance is used.) (Note 2)
Baud rates Cable length between stations Max. total cable length
156kbps 1200m
Max. total cable length and each
625kbps 900m
cable length between stations
2.5Mbps 20cm or more 400m
5Mbps 160m
10Mbps 100m
Connection cable CC-Link Ver.1.10 compliant cable (3-core twisted pair cable with shield) (Note 3)
- Automatic link refresh function
RAS function (Note 4) - Sub-station isolation function
- Link special relay/error detection by register
(Note 1) If the points which can be reserved as the device for the CC-Link in the NC side does not reach 8192 points,
the number of points which can be reserved in the NC side is the max. number of link points per one system.
This applies for the remote register (RWw, RWr), as well.
(Note 2) When CC-Link Ver.1.00 compliant cables are mixed, the cable length between stations and the maximum total
length of the cable should follow the specifications for CC-Link Ver.1.00.
(Note 3) This can be used with the cables made by different manufacturers as long as they are Ver.1.10 compliant
cables.
(Note 4) "RAS" is short for "Reliability", "Availability" and "Serviceability".
IB-1501505-C 492
(4) Usable functions

Of all the CC-Link functions, the following functions can be used with the NC.
( ○ : Available ×: Not available － : Not relevant)
MELSEC NC unit
Function item
Master station Local station Master station Local station
Ver.1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○
Method
Ver.2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○
Communication between master station and remote I/O
station ○ － ○ －
Communication between master station and remote

device station ○ － ○ －
Communication between master station and local station ○ ○ ○ ○

Mixed system communication ○ ○ ○ ○
Reserved station function ○ － ○ －
Error cancel station function ○ － ○ －
Setting of data link status when trouble occurs in CPU of
master station ○ ○ ○ ○
Master
function Registration of parameters in E2PROM ○ － ○ (Note 2) －
Setting of input data status from data link trouble station ○ ○ ○ ○
Unit resetting by sequence program ○ ○ ○ ○
Data link stop/restart ○ ○ ○ ○
Parameter registration function ○ ○ ○ (Note 2) ○ (Note 2)
Automatic refresh function ○ ○ ○ ○
Synchronous
mode ○ － ○ －
Scan synchronization function
Asynchronous
mode ○ ○ ○ ○
16-point display
LED diagnosis status 16-point display
(A1SJ61QBT11)
Setting & Station number setting
display
Baud rate setting Parameters (Note 2)
function Unit front panel switches
Mode setting switch
Condition setting H/W switches
Automatic link refresh function ○ ○ ○ ○
Sub-station isolation function ○ － ○ －
Data link status check (SB/SW) ○ ○ ○ ○
RAS Off-line test ○ ○ ○ ○
function On-line test ○ ○ ○ ○
Monitor diagnosis ○ ○ × ×
Standby master function (Note 3) ○ － ○ －
Temporary error cancel station designation function ○ － ○ －
exclusive READ instruction / SREAD instruction (Note 1) ○ ○ ○ ○
instructio WRITE instruction / SWRITE instruction (Note 1) ○ ○ ○ ○
n RIRD instruction / RIWT instruction (Note 1) × ×
○ ○
(Note 1) The transient instruction cannot be used.

(Note 2) The parameter for the CC-Link is set with the GX Developer.
(Note 3) With this function, when an error occurs in the master station, switch to the standby master station so that data
link can be continued. (The NC unit cannot be used as the standby master station.)
493 IB-1501505-C
(5) Communication data flow
The flow of data communicated by the CC-Link's link scan is as follows.
IB-1501505-C
(The master station and local station of MELSEC CPU can be also mixed.)
NC
Built-in PLC (Master station) NC (Local station) Built-in PLC
Remote Remote I/O

Devices Local station Devices
device station station
X device, etc. RX (1) RY (1) (1) (1) RY Y device, etc.
RX RX
…
…
…
…
…
Y device, etc. RY (2) RX (2) RY (2) RY (2) RX X device, etc.

494
…
…
…
…
…
RWw
R register, etc. RWr (3) (3) RWr (3) (3) RWw R register, etc.
…
…
…
…
…
RWr RWw (4) (4) R register, etc.
R register, etc. RWw (4) (4) RWr
…
…
…
…
…
<Flow of data>
Transmission Risk scan
data
Automatic refresh
(When master station/local station is NC.)
(1) By executing a link scan, data in the remote I/O station and remote device station's remote input (RX) and in
the local station's remote output (RY) is transmitted to the master station's remote input (RX) and the local
station's remote output (RY).
(2) By executing a link scan, data in the master station's remote output (RY) is transmitted to the remote I/O
station and remote device station's remote output (RY) and the local station's remote input (RX).
(3) By executing a link scan, data in the remote device station's remote register (RWr) and the local station's
remote register (RWw) is transmitted to the master station's remote register (RWr) and the local station's
remote register (RWw).
(4) By executing a link scan, data in the master station's remote register (RWw) is transmitted to the remote
device station's remote register (RWw) and the local station's remote register (RWr).
[C80 series]
For the details of C80 series, refer to the manual of each unit of MITSUBISHI PLC "MELSEC iQ-R series".
495 IB-1501505-C
17.6.2 PROFIBUS-DP (Master)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
On MITSUBISHI CNC M8 Series, by mounting the PROFIBUS-DP communication expansion unit on the expansion slot
or option relay unit and by connecting the unit with the slave stations compatible with PROFIBUS-DP communication,
NC can input/output the devices to/from the slave stations as the master station for PROFIBUS-DP communication. CNC
can be connected to up to 125 slave stations.
For the I/O data communication function (Cyclic communication), the maximum number of device I/O points is 8192
each. The CNC handles all the devices input/output to/from the PLC as bit device data. At this time, the maximum
number of device I/O points of CNC's remote I/O is 768 each.
Using the aperiodic data communication function (Acyclic communication) with the slave station, data exchange can be
performed to the slave station via PLC word device. Aperiodic data communication function can be performed with the I/
O data communication function simultaneously.
Also, an error that occurred in the slave station can be acquired or responded via PLC word device as diagnosis data or
alarm information.
There are two types of PLC I/O device assignment method for PROFIBUS-DP, fixed or arbitrary assignment, which you
can select with the parameter. According to the assignment method, the number of available device points differs as
follows:
Fixed device assignment Arbitrary device assignment

Maximum number of input device points 512 bits 8192 bits
Maximum number of output device points 512 bits 8192 bits
Hilscher's Fieldbus communication control circuit (COMX module) is mounted on PROFIBUS-DP communication
expansion unit and the parameter setting is carried out using Hilscher's configurator "SYCON.net".
However, two PROFIBUS-DP communication expansion units cannot be mounted at a time. If these are mounted at the
same time, both units stop their operations and the error occurs.
PROFIBUS-DP communication expansion card FCU8-EX563
MITSUBISHI CNC M800W series

CNC CPU control unit Slot for expansion card
EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 EXT4
RIO communication
USB cable
PROFIBUS cable Windows-based PC for parameter setting

＋
Terminator Hilscher’s configurator
Tapping
PROFIBUS-DP communication
Terminator
Slave station: up to 125 stations
IB-1501505-C 496
17.6.3 CC-Link IE Field (Master/Local)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ △ (*1)
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ △ (*1)
(*1) MELSEC
[M800/M80 series]
CC-Link IE Field is high-speed and large capacity open field network using Ethernet (1000BASE-T).
By mounting CC-Link IE Field expansion unit on the expansion slot of NC control unit, NC can be operated as master or
local station of CC-Link IE Field. By connecting CC-Link IE Field expansion unit with CC-Link IE Field unit, data
communication with the connected unit can be performed.
NC can be set as master or local station, but cannot be set as sub master station.
When CC-Link IE Field expansion unit is not mounted on the expansion slot, CC-Link IE Field cannot be used. CC-Link
IE Field related parameter screen is not displayed on NC screen, either.
(1) Data communication

High-speed and large-capacity data communication is available between a master station and slave stations on
CC-Link IE Field Network.
The network supports cyclic transmission (periodic communication) and transient transmission (non-periodic
communication).
(a) Cyclic transmission (periodic communication)

Data are periodically transmitted between stations on the same network.
Master station Intelligent device Remote device Local device station

station station
NC Master Intelligent Remote Local station PLC CPU

station device station device station
X RX RX RX RX X
Y RY RY RY RY Y
RWw RWw RWw RWw

W W
RWr RWr RWr RWr
497 IB-1501505-C
(b) Transient transmission (non-periodic communication)

Data are transmitted upon request.
NC Master station Local station PLC CPU

Command
Instruction
Intelligent device
station
PLC device Write request Device
1234H 1234H
(2) 1Gbps communication speed

1Gbps communication speed allows high-speed communication.
(3) Use of Ethernet cable

A 1000BASE-T-compliant Ethernet is used for the connection interface.
The wiring cost can be reduced because 1000BASE-T-compliant Ethernet cables are commercially available.
(4) Flexible wiring for system arrangements

The network can be wired into star topology, line topology and ring topology.
For star topology, a 1000BASE-T-compliant switching hub can be used.
Wiring is highly flexible because a network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies.
For example, the machine tools can be connected through a line topology whereas star and line topologies can be
used within each machine.
[C80 series]
For the details of C80 series, refer to the manual of each unit of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller "MELSEC iQ-R
Series".
IB-1501505-C 498
17.6.5 EtherNet/IP
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
L □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ―
EtherNet/IP is the Ethernet for industry which ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association) suggests.
It communicates using TCP/IP which is the standard Ethernet technology and the communication protocol which is
called CIP (Common Industrial Protocol). EtherNet/IP can be used as not only field network but also the network
between controllers. Also, as the standard Ethernet technology is used as lower protocol at the same time, it can be used
mixing various general purpose Ethernet devices.
By mounting EtherNet/IP communication expansion unit on the expansion slot or option relay unit of NC control unit to
connect EtherNet/IP-compatible equipment, PLC devices can be input/output using NC control unit as a scanner or an
adapter for EtherNet/IP communication.
When EtherNet/IP communication expansion unit is not mounted on the expansion slot or option relay unit, EtherNet/IP
cannot be used. Ethernet/IP related parameter screen is not displayed, either.
Two EtherNet/IP communication expansion units cannot be mounted on the expansion slot or option relay unit. When
two of them are mounted at the same time, both units stop operating and an alarm is output.
EtherNet/IP has two communication functions: Implicit message communication which communicates at regular intervals
and Explicit message communication which communicates at arbitrary timing.
Message type Outline

Communication based on TCP/IP. Communication method which sends and receives data at 1:1 at
Explicit Message arbitrary timing.
(Example) Parameter communication, reading diagnostic data, etc.
Communication based on UDP/IP. Communication method which sends and receives data at regular
Implicit Message intervals (Cyclic).
(Example) Transferring periodic data
Connection Diagram
NC control unit
LAN hub Scanner device
NC control unit→scanner device

ExplicitMessage
Ethernet cable NC control unit→adapters

ImplicitMessage LAN hub
EtherNet/IP communication
expansion unit
EtherNet/IP configuration tool
Windows computer Adapters

(For checking diagnostic information) (Up to 64)
499 IB-1501505-C
17.7 Installing S/W for Machine Tools
17.7.1 Customization (NC Designer2)

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
Custom release allows the user-original window to display as an HMI screen or another application.
Custom release includes, mainly, two types of F0 release and menu release. Each custom release can be created and
registered by "NC Designer2 interpreter method", "NC Designer2 compilation method", and "Executable file registration
method".
F0 release :
Custom release screen (Note 1) can be assigned to function keys (F0, SEP, window display, window selection).
When a function key is pressed, the assigned custom release screen will be displayed.
Menu release :
Custom release window (Note 2) can be registered in the main menu of the monitor screen, setup screen and edit
screen.
Main menu contents of the monitor, setup and edit screen can be rearranged.
When the main menu in which custom release window is registered is pressed, the custom release window will be
displayed.
Depending on the conditions, display/non-display of the custom menu can be changed.
Screen part release :

Custom release window created by "NC Designer2 interpreter method" or "NC Designer2 compilation method" can
be displayed as the part of standard screen.
(Note 1) An HMI screen originally created with NC Designer2 by the user or an executable file prepared by the user.
(Note that an executable file prepared by the user cannot be used with M800S/M80/E80.)
(Note 2) An HMI window originally created with NC Designer2 by the user or an executable file prepared by the user.
(Note that an executable file prepared by the user cannot be used with M800S/M80/E80.)
(Note 3) "Executable file registration method" cannot be used with M800S/M80/E80.
IB-1501505-C 500
NC Designer2 Inte rpreter method

NC Designer2 Automatic
generation of
interpretation Macro
data Project file Data
(*GRP)
NC Designer2 compilation method

Automatic generation of
source code
Compilation
link
Original
Source code (C++) source code
(C++)
Executable file registration method
Commercially available
application development to ol Compilation
(VB, VC, etc .) link
Original
Source code source code
Commercially available
application
501 IB-1501505-C
17.7.1.1 Customization Data Storage Capacity [MB]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M □ (*1) □ (*1) 6 6 □ (*1) 6 6 1 1 ―
L □ (*1) □ (*1) 6 6 □ (*1) 6 6 1 1 ―
(*1)Depending on display unit-side memory space.
17.7.1.2 Customization Working Memory Size [MB]

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M 6 6 6 6 3 3 3 1 1 ―
L 6 6 6 6 3 3 3 1 1 ―
17.7.2 User-defined Key

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function allows an arbitrary character string to be assigned to one key and makes it easy to input the fixed phrases.
Register correspondences between SHIFT keys and character strings in a configuration file (keydef.txt).
The maximum number of registerable key types is 8 for ABC layout and 10 for QWERTY layout.
The maximum number of characters used per definition is 256. The definition is disregarded when it is set exceeding the
number.
In the configuration file (Keydef.txt), a character string should be defined as follows:

n [character string] ;
n(Registration No.): 0 to 7 (SHIFT+A to SHIFT+H (ABC layout))
: 0 to 9 (SHIFT+Q to SHIFT+G (QWERTY layout))
Example:
0[G28X0Y0]; ← When SHIFT+A and a key is input, a character string "G28X0Y0" is input.
1[G28Z0]; ← When SHIFT+B and a key is input, a character string "G28Z0" is input.
17.7.3 EZSocket I/F

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △

This middleware makes it easy to develop applications having a Windows interface.
The various functions of the NC unit can be used from a Windows application using VC++ language, VB language and
VBA macro language.
IB-1501505-C 502
17.7.4 APLC Release

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △

APLC (Advanced Programmable Logic Controller) release is a function that allows the user-generated C language
module to be called from NC.
Control operations that are difficult to express in ladder language can be created with C language.
PLC ladder can easily be customized by converting a part of PLC ladder that has grown complex and bulky into C
language module.
There are three methods where APLC is executed. It is possible to use the three in combination.
- Type 1 : By registering the start address of the module to be processed asynchronously with PLC, C language module
will be executed in a constant frequency.
- Type 2 : By registering the start address of the module to be processed synchronously with PLC, C language module
will be started synchronizing with PLC. Note that C language will not be called if PLC is incorrect, even if the process has
been registered.
- Type 3 (M800/M80 series) : By registering the start address of the module to be called from the sequence program and
processed, C language module will be started from the sequence program upon S.CALL instruction.
(Note) C language module needs to be generated by NC compiler2.
[Hardware configuration]
This function will be activated by installing C language module into a SD memory card or control unit built-in
memory.
If C language module is stored in SD memory card (only for M800/M80 series), this function will be activated
by installing the module into SD memory interface of the control unit for M800W/M80W series, or front SD
memory interface of the display unit for M800S/M80/E80 series.
Up to 120KB data can be stored in built-in memory.
When C language module is installed in SD memory card, C language inside the SD memory card is executed.
(The module inside the built-in memory is not executed.)
SD memory
interface
Cover
opened
SD memory
interface
M800S/M80/E80
M800W/M80W
[Software configuration]
The names of directory, file and initialize function, where C language modules are stored, are fixed.
(Note) Incorrect hardware or software configuration disables operations.
503 IB-1501505-C
17.7.5 Custom API Library

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
This function is designed to interface an NC with an application developed by a user.

You can set and refer the data for NC using this function.
Please contact us for details.
17.7.6 MES Interface Library

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
[M800/M80 series]
This function enables to link the CNC internal data and the database of information system (manufacturing execution
system). Production control and traceability can be ensured with the registered information by registering at machining
completion, alarm occurrence, or user's arbitrary timing as needed. The data registered in the database can also be
operated with CNC.
Conventionally, data was obtained by constantly monitoring CNC from an external computer (information system).
However, by using MES interface library function, it is possible to connect without a communication gateway and it
allows the communication between CNC and the database at a necessary timing.
This function is supported on CNC and the function range is from obtaining the information at the time of machining
completion, alarm occurrence, and user's arbitrary timing to transmitting to the database. Screen application of database
and external computer must be prepared by user side.
[C80 series]
IB-1501505-C 504
17.7.7 SLMP Server

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
SLMP server is a function that transfers data using the SLMP between an NC and an external device.
SLMP (Seamless Message Protocol) is a general-purpose protocol to transfer information between the NC and an
SLMP-compatible external device through the Ethernet cable and the SLMP is applied to many external devices
because it can be easily utilized only by applying S/W.
This function enables easy connection with external devices and read/write NC data through the Ethernet cable,
improving productivity by utilizing external devices and meeting broad automation needs.
NC
Utilization for production control and traceability by linking
workpiece ID with machining information and alarm information
DB as database management
Reference workpiece
Utilization for a compensation function by measuring deviation

and inclination to the reference workpiece
SLMP
Actual workpiece
Utilization for development of application linked with NC

data
Ethernet cable
Switching hub
Workpiece ID Workpiece shape Data
information input/output
SLMP SLMP SLMP
X-XXXXXX-XX-X
XXXXX
XXXXX XXXXX
Bar code reader Vision sensor PC (SLMP-compatible application)
505 IB-1501505-C
17.7.8 Mitsubishi CNC Communication Software FCSB1224W000

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
(Note) The software sold separately is required.
The Mitsubishi CNC communication software FCSB1224W000 is designed to help development of an application with
Windows interface for Mitsubishi computerized numerical controller.
The product can accelerate development by using OLE interface common to computerized numerical controller without
knowing internal processing of the machine.
17.7.10 GOT2000 Screen Design Tool GT Works3

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
This software provides comprehensive support for the screen design of a display unit.
(Note) The software sold separately is necessary.
IB-1501505-C 506
17.8 Others
17.8.1 System Lock

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L △ △ △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
System lock is a function that allows machine tool builders to set the expiration date for use of their machines.
If the cancel code is not entered by the specified deadline, the system forcibly turns OFF the Servo ready completion
signal to place the machine in an inoperable status.
(Note) We do not compensate for any detriment that may be caused when the lock is cancelled illegally.
17.8.2 CNC Remote Operation Tool
17.8.2.1 NC Monitor2
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

NC Monitor2 is the software tool that monitors the condition of NC remotely with a personal computer using a intranet of
a plant. Multiple NCs can be connected and their conditions can be monitored simultaneously.
17.8.2.2 NC Explorer
M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Note) This tool is free of charge. Please contact us.

NC Explorer is a software tool to operate the machining data files of each NC unit connected with a host personal
computer by Ethernet connection from the Explorer on the host personal computer.
17.8.3 Automatic Operation Lock

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Automatic operation lock function prevents the falsification of APLC(C language module: herein after called APLC) by a
third party.
Automatic operation will be prohibited when illegal APLC is installed by authenticating APLC with the password for APLC
authentication which is registered to NC unit beforehand using this function.
Refer to "17.7.4 APLC Release" for details on the APLC.
507 IB-1501505-C
17.8.4 Power Consumption Computation

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Present power consumption and accumulated power consumption can be acquired with this function.
The power consumption is the total amount of power which is consumed by the rotation and movement of the spindles
and servo axes in the drive section and power which is consumed by the electrical equipment of the machine tool other
than the drive section.
The present power consumption notifies the instantaneous power consumption and the accumulated power
consumption notifies the integrated value of the present power consumption.
17.8.5 EcoMonitorLight Connection

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
(Note) EcoMonitorLight sold separately is required.
NC system can collect and manage the electric power of the machine tool which is measured by the energy measuring
unit "EcoMonitorLight".
The electric power (mainly consumed and regenerated power) of entire machine tool and peripheral devices can be
measured by connecting EcoMonitorLight to the main breaker of the machine tool or the breaker of the peripheral
devices (motor, coolant, etc.) which configure the machine tool.
By establishing serial communication (Modbus) between the NC unit and EcoMonitorLight using a serial cable, the NC
system can collect the power values of the entire machine tool and peripheral devices measured by EcoMonitorLight.
Consequently, the electric power in the machine tool can be finely managed, which enables energy-saving operation.
IB-1501505-C 508
17.8.6 GOT Window

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
This is the interface to display the variety of NC data on GOT connected to the CNC CPU.
This reads out the running machining program No., the running machining program and the coordinate values, etc. by
the device read command.
Setting the command from the GOT or sequence program for the CNC CPU, then the CNC CPU generates the data
corresponding to the command.
Because there are up to ten command areas, you can designate up to 10 kinds of commands at the same time.
Additionally, there is also an interface which can refer the often used commands without the sequence programs by
automatically setting them up at the time of power ON.
Examples of a screen display and used commands
GOT
Main program Subprogram
O 1 N 10 O 2 N 110
Running program
N100G91G28X0.Y0.Z0.;
N110G00X-150.Y-200.;
N120G00Z-500.;
N130G01Z-50.F500.;
N140G00Z50.
N150G00X50.Y50.;
Machine Remaining
position distance
X - 123.456 X - 26.544
Y - 123.456 Y - 76. 544
Z 0. 000 Z 0. 000
F 500.00 S 6000 T 5
509 IB-1501505-C
17.8.7 Log Viewer

M80 M80 E80 E80
M850W M830W M850S M830S M80W C80
M ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
L ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ○
This function enables the recorded data by the data sampling function of the NC to display with a graph on the GOT, and
to store the data as a file.
The data acquired by the GOT can be stored in an external memory, and also can be read to display with the peripheral
tool "GX LogViewer".
This function uses the "Data Sampling function" of NC, and the "Log viewer function" of GOT for displaying and
controlling the logging data.
The connectable log viewer to one NC is one GOT only . The second or subsequent units cannot connect the log viewer.
The NC and the GOT are connected through the Ethernet, and the logging data sampled with the NC is displayed on the
GOT.
Ethernet
NC GOT2000
Logging data
External memory
Logging data
Displays logging data with

GX LogViewer on PC
IB-1501505-C 510
Revision History
Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
Aug. 2017 IB(NA)1501505-A The first edition was created excerpting from functional specifications pages in "M800/
M80/C80 Series Specifications Manual" (IB-1501267(ENG)-G).
The descriptions of C80 Series were revised in response to S/W version A2.
The following chapter numbers and chapter titles were changed.

- 15.4.12 Backup/Restore
- 17.3.6 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover
The following chapter numbers were changed.

- 4.5.3.4 Multiple Spindle Synchronous Tapping
- 6.1.11 GOT (GOT2000 Series GT27/GT25 12.1/10.4/8.4/5.7)
- 7.2.6 USB I/F (GOT Front-side USB I/F)
- 7.2.7 SD I/F (GOT Back-side SD Card I/F)
- 14.3.6 PLC Axis Current Limit
- 17.7.10 GOT2000 Screen Design Tool GT Works3
- 17.8.6 GOT Window
- 17.8.7 Log Viewer
The following chapter titles were changed.

- 17.1.9.1 Ethernet Connection
- 17.1.9.2 CC-Link Connection
Other contents were added/revised/deleted according to specification.

Dec. 2017 IB(NA)1501505-B The descriptions of M800 Series/M80 Series were revised in response to S/W version
C7.
The following chapters were added.

- 2.4.4 Diameter/Radius Designation Switch
- 6.2.21 VNC Server
- 12.3.2.7 Axis-based Acceleration Tolerance Control
- 12.4.7 DXF Data Input
- 14.1.8 Rotation Center Error Measurement
- 14.1.9 Workpiece Installation Error Measurement
Other contents were added/revised/deleted according to the specifications.

Mar. 2018 IB(NA)1501505-C The descriptions were revised corresponding to Mitsubishi CNC E80 series.
The following chapters were added.

- 4.5.3.5 Synchronous Tapping with Analog I/F Spindle
- 17.2.23 Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
- 17.5.1.5 DI:64/DO:48/AO:1
- 17.6.5 EtherNet/IP
Other contents were added/revised/deleted according to the specifications.

Global Service Network
AMERICA EUROPE
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. (AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Central Region Service Center (Chicago) European Service Headquarter (Dusseldorf, GERMANY)
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U.S.A. Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1 40882 RATINGEN, GERMANY
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 TEL: +49-2102-486-1850 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
Minneapolis, MN Service Satellite
Detroit, MI Service Satellite South Germany Service Center (Stuttgart)
Grand Rapids, MI Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY
Lima, OH Service Satellite TEL: + 49-711-770598-123 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141
Cleveland, OH Service Satellite
Indianapolis, IN Service Satellite France Service Center (Paris)
St. Louis, MO Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
South/East Region Service Center (Georgia)
1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. France Service Satellite (Lyon)
TEL +1-678-258-4529 / FAX +1-678-258-4519 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE
Charleston, SC Service Satellite TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
Charlotte, NC Service Satellite
Raleigh, NC Service Satellite Italy Service Center (Milan)
Dallas, TX Service Satellite VIALE COLLEONI, 7 - CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI PALAZZO SIRIO INGRESSO 1,
Houston, TX Service Satellite 20864 AGRATE BRIANZA (MB), ITALY
Hartford, CT Service Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
Knoxville, TN Service Satellite
Nashville, TN Service Satellite Italy Service Satellite (Padova)
Baltimore, MD Service Satellite VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 - 35129 PADOVA, ITALY
Pittsburg, PA Service Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
Allentown, PA Service Satellite
Syracuse, NY Service Satellite U.K. Service Center
Tampa, FL Service Satellite TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K.
Lafayette, LA Service Satellite TEL: +49-2102-486-1850 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
Western Region Service Center (California) Spain Service Center

5900-B KATELLA AVE. - 5900-A KATELLA AVE. CYPRESS, CALIFORNIA 90630, U.S.A. CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420, 08173 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579
San Francisco, CA Service Satellite
Seattle, WA Service Satellite Poland Service Center
UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND
Canada Region Service Center (Tronto) TEL: +48-12-347-6500 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R OJ2, CANADA
TEL: +1-905-754-3805 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Hungary Service Center
Edmonton, AB Service Satellite MADARASZ VIKTOR 47-49 , BUDAPEST XIII; HUNGARY
Montreal, QC Service Satellite TEL: +48-12-347-6500 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701
Mexico Region Service Center (Queretaro) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TURKEY A.Ş

　Parque Tecnológico Innovación Querétaro, Lateral Carretera Estatal 431, Km 2+200, Lote 91 Modulos 1 y 2 Turkey Service Center
　Hacienda la Machorra, CP 76246, El Marqués, Querétaro, México SERIFALI MAHALLESI NUTUK SOKAK. NO.5 34775
TEL: +52-442-153 4250 UMRANIYE, ISTANBUL, TURKEY
Monterrey, NL Service Satellite TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995
Mexico City, DF Service Satellite
Czech Republic Service Center
AutoCont Control Systems s.r.o (Service Partner)
KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC
BRAZIL TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199
Mitsubishi Electric do Brasil Comércio e Serviços Ltda. Russia Service Center

Votorantim Office NC-TECH (Service Partner)
AV. GISELE CONSTANTINO,1578， PARQUE BELA VISTA, VOTORANTIM-SP, BRAZIL CEP:18.110-650 213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA
TEL: +55-15-3023-9000 TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192
JOVIMAQ – Joinville, SC Service Satellite
MAQSERVICE – Canoas, RS Service Satellite Sweden Service Center
HAMMARBACKEN 14, P.O.BOX 750 SE-19127, SOLLENTUNA, SWEDEN
TEL: +46-8-6251000 / FAX: +46-8-966877
Bulgaria Service Center

AKHNATON Ltd. (Service Partner)
4 ANDREJ LJAPCHEV BLVD. POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA
TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061
Ukraine Service Center (Kharkov)

CSC Automation Ltd. (Service Partner)
APTEKARSKIY PEREULOK 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE
TEL: +380-57-732-7774 / FAX: +380-57-731-8721
Belarus Service Center

TECHNIKON Ltd. (Service Partner)
NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS
TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081
South Africa Service Center

MOTIONTRONIX (Service Partner)
P.O. BOX 9234, EDLEEN, KEMPTON PARK GAUTENG, 1625, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513
ASEAN CHINA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER)
Singapore Service Center China Shanghai Service Center
307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU,
TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA
TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2322-3000*8422
Philippines Service Center China Ningbo Service Partner
Flexible (Service Partner) China Wuxi Service Partner
UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD China Jinan Service Partner
SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 China Hangzhou Service Partner
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417
China Beijing Service Center
9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE,
VIETNAM DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING 100005, CHINA
TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO.,LTD China Beijing Service Partner
Vietnam Ho Chi Minh Service Center
UNIT 01-04, 10TH FLOOR, VINCOM CENTER 72 LE THANH TON STREET, DISTRICT 1, China Tianjin Service Center
HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM UNIT 2003, TIANJIN CITY TOWER, NO 35 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT,
TEL: +84-8-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-8-3910 5946 TIANJIN 300061, CHINA
TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017
Vietnam Hanoi Service Center
6TH FLOOR, DETECH TOWER, 8 TON THAT THUYET STREET, MY DINH 2 WARD, China Chengdu Service Center
NAM TU LIEM DISTRICT, HA NOI CITY, VIETNAM 1501-1503,15F,GUANG-HUA CENTRE BUILDING-C,NO.98 NORTH GUANG HUA 3th RD,
TEL: +84-4-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-4-3937-8076 CHENGDU,610000,CHINA
TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630
INDONESIA China Shenzhen Service Center

ROOM 2512-2516, 25/F., GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S.,
PT. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518034, CHINA
Indonesia Service Center　(Cikarang) TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8229-3686
JL. KENARI RAYA BLOK G2-07A, DELTA SILICON 5, LIPPO CIKARANG - BEKASI 17550, INDONESIA China Xiamen Service Partner
TEL: +62-21-2961-7797 / FAX: +62-21-2961-7794 China DongGuang Service Partner
China Dalian Service Center

MALAYSIA DONGBEI 3-5, DALIAN ECONOMIC & TECHNICAL DEVELOPMENTZONE, LIAONING PROVINCE,
116600, CHINA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SALES MALAYSIA SDN. BHD. TEL: +86-411-8765-5951 / FAX: +86-411-8765-5952
Malaysia Service Center (Kuala Lumpur Service Center)
LOT 11, JALAN 219, P.O BOX 1036, 46860 PETALING JAYA, SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN. MALAYSIA
TEL: +60-3-7960-2628 / FAX: +60-3-7960-2629 KOREA
Johor Bahru Service satellite
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER)
Korea Service Center
THAILAND 8F GANGSEO HANGANG XI-TOWER A, 401 YANGCHEON-RO, GANGSEO-GU,
SEOUL 07528 KOREA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO.,LTD TEL: +82-2-3660-9609 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
Thailand Service Center Korea Daegu Service Satellite
12TH FLOOR, SV.CITY BUILDING, OFFICE TOWER 1, NO. 896/19 AND 20 RAMA 3 ROAD,
KWAENG BANGPONGPANG, KHET YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120,THAILAND
TEL: +66-2-682-6522 / FAX: +66-2-682-6020 TAIWAN
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER)

INDIA Taiwan Taichung Service Center
NO.8-1, INDUSTRIAL 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST.,
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT., LTD. TAICHUNG CITY 40768, TAIWAN
CNC Technical Center (Bangalore) TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
PLOT NO. 56, 4TH MAIN ROAD, PEENYA PHASE 3,
PEENYA INDUSTRIAL AREA, BANGALORE 560058, KARNATAKA, INDIA Taiwan Taipei Service Center
TEL : +91-80-4655-2121 FAX : +91-80-4655-2147 10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN
Chennai Service Satellite TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433
Coimbatore Service Satellite
Hyderabad Service Satellite Taiwan Tainan Service Center
11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 71067, TAIWAN
North India Service Center (Gurgaon) TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031
2ND FLOOR, TOWER A&B, DLF CYBER GREENS, DLF CYBER CITY,
DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON- 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA
TEL : +91-124-4630 300 FAX : +91-124-4630 399 OCEANIA
Ludhiana Satellite
Panth Nagar Service Satellite MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
Delhi Service Satellite Oceania Service Center
Jamshedpur Service Satellite 348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA
TEL: +61-2-9684-7269/ FAX: +61-2-9684-7245
West India Service Center (Pune)
EMERALD HOUSE, EL-3, J BLOCK, M.I.D.C., BHOSARI, PUNE - 411026, MAHARASHTRA, INDIA
TEL : +91-20-2710 2000 FAX : +91-20-2710 2100
Kolhapur Service Satellite
Aurangabad Service Satellite
Mumbai Service Satellite
West India Service Center (Ahmedabad)

UNIT NO: B/4, 3RD FLOOR, SAFAL PROFITAIRE, PRAHALADNAGAR CORPORATE ROAD,
PRAHALADNAGAR SATELLITE, AHMEDABAD – 380015, GUJRAT, INDIA
TEL : +91-265-2314699
Rajkot Service Satellite
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in
this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not
possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this
product.
Duplication Prohibited
This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
COPYRIGHT 2017-2018 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

M800 - M80 - E80 - C80 Series Specifications Manual (Function) Ib1501505engc PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

M800 - M80 - E80 - C80 Series Specifications Manual (Function) Ib1501505engc PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Introduction

This manual describes the specifications of MITSUBISHI CNC.

Supported models Abbreviations in this manual

In this manual, the following abbreviations might be used.

Also refer to the manuals on "Manual List" as necessary.

Manuals related to M800/M80/E80/C80 Series are listed as follows.

Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  G code programming for lathe system

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  G code programming for machining center system

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  G code programming for machining center system

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series  Alarms

Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents

Manuals for MTBs (drive section)

Manual IB No. Contents

Manual No. Purpose and Contents

■ For M800/M80/E80 Series

Manual No. Purpose and Contents

■ For C80 Series

Manual No. Purpose and Contents

Manual No. Purpose and Contents

The following signs indicate prohibition and compulsory.

This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).

For example, indicates "Keep fire away".

This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).

For example, indicates "it must be grounded".

The meaning of each pictorial sign is as follows.

CAUTION rotated Danger Electric shock

Do not connect NC system to the Internet-connected network.

2. Items related to start up and maintenance

(1) Requirements for "Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources"

(2) Requirements for "Law for Treatment of Waste and Cleaning"

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Handling of our product

본 제품의 취급에 대해서

1. Warranty Period and Coverage

2. Service in Overseas Countries

3. Exclusion of Loss in Opportunity and Secondary Loss from Warranty Liability

4. Changes in Product Specifications

2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13

4.2.1 Feed per Minute (Asynchronous Feed) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 47

5.1 Memory Capacity 88

6.2.14 Screenshot Capture ― / ○ ― / ○ ○ ○ ― / ○ 101

7.2 Input/Output I/F 115

11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 203

700 sets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 236

12.3.2.3 SSS Control △ △ △ △ ○ 332

14.1.1 Skip 366

15.3.1 Stroke End (Over Travel) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 396

17.1.2.1.1 Index Modification ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 435

17.1.2.1.5 Label Programming ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 436

17.1.2.2 PLC Exclusive Instruction ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 437

17.1.3.7 PLC Program Protection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 440

17.1.9.3 CC-Link IE Field Connection ― ― ― ― ― 445

(*2)G/B: Guide Bush

1.2.2.1 Max. Number of Main Part Systems ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 4

1.2.2.2 Max. Number of Sub Part Systems ○2 ○2 ○2 ○2 ― 4

2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13

4.2.1 Feed per Minute (Asynchronous Feed) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 47

5.1 Memory Capacity 88

6.2.14 Screenshot Capture ― / ○ ― / ○ ○ ○ ― / ○ 101

7.2 Input/Output I/F 115

11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 203